美华管理传播网,中国经济管理大学,工商管理MBA专业资源库(29年)

 找回密码
 注册

QQ登录

只需一步,快速开始

查看: 18585|回复: 13

迈克尔·A·波特战略管理:概念与案例(第8版)(工商管理经典译丛)

[复制链接]

该用户从未签到

发表于 2012-12-4 00:59:16 | 显示全部楼层 |阅读模式
迈克尔·A·波特
战略管理:概念与案例(第8版)
(工商管理经典译丛)

迈克尔·A·波特战略管理:概念与案例(第8版)(工商管理经典译丛).zip (6.13 MB, 下载次数: 132)

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:55:15 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 1
Strategic Management and Strategic Competitiveness

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define strategic competitiveness, strategy, competitive advantage, above-average returns, and the strategic management process.
2.        Describe the competitive landscape and explain how globalization and technological changes shape it.
3.        Use the industrial organization (I/O) model to explain how firms can earn above-average returns.
4.        Use the resource-based model to explain how firms can earn above average-returns.
5.        Describe vision and mission and discuss their value.
6.        Define stakeholders and describe their ability to influence organizations.
7.        Describe the work of strategic leaders.
8.        Explain the strategic management process.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case  Boeing and Airbus: A Global Competitive Battle Over Supremacy in Producing Commercial Aircraft
THE COMPETITIVE LANDSCAPE
        The Global Economy
        The March of Globalization
        Technology and Technological Changes
Strategic Focus   Apple: Using Innovation to Create Technology Trends and Maintain Competitive Advantage
THE I/O MODEL OF ABOVE-AVERAGE RETURNS
Strategic Focus  Netflix Confronts a Turbulent Competitive Environment
THE RESOURCE-BASED MODEL OF ABOVE-AVERAGE RETURNS
VISION AND MISSION
        Vision
        Mission
STAKEHOLDERS
        Classifications of Stakeholders
STRATEGIC LEADERS
        The Work of Effective Strategic Leaders
        Predicting Outcomes of Strategic Decisions: Profit Pools
THE STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT PROCESS
SUMMARY
REVIEW QUESTIONS
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES
NOTES

LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: You may want to begin this lecture with a general comment that Chapter 1 provides an overview of the strategic management process.  In this chapter, the authors introduce a number of terms and models that students will study in more detail in Chapters 2 through 13.  Stress the importance of students paying careful attention to the concepts introduced in this chapter so that they are well-grounded in strategic management concepts before proceeding further.

OPENING CASE
Boeing and Airbus: A Global Competitive Battle over Supremacy in Producing Commercial Aircraft

Some experts refer to the Boeing versus Airbus rivalry as the greatest international competition in business.  For decades, Boeing had been the predominant player in the production of commercial airplanes.  It had experienced competition throughout its history but nothing like that it has experienced from European consortium Airbus.  Airbus has “dogged” Boeing since 2001 with a product line that offered airline customers greater efficiency and the flying public more amenities (e.g., wider passenger cabins allowing for wider seats than Boeing made available).  Boeing followed a strategy of modifying existing aircraft models while Airbus designed new airplanes to meet specific customer needs.  Airbus’ strategy resulted in overtaking Boeing in new orders in 2001.  

While both firms will continue manufacturing current aircraft models, the immediate future product offerings are diverging.  Business-level strategies employed by Airbus resulted in the company producing a super-jumbo passenger aircraft (Airbus A-380) capable of carrying 560 plus passengers on long-range flights.  But this strategy is fraught with obstacles.  Not only are delivery dates slipping over two years due to development and production hiccups, many airports banned the A-380 from using their runways and terminals due to the infrastructure stress that is expected by servicing that many passengers concentrated in one airplane.  Boeing, on the other hand, designed a smaller (250 passenger, long-range) aircraft (Boeing 787) employing new technology (high-stress, low-weight carbon fiber assemblies) and fuel efficient engines to fly to virtually any airport worldwide currently served by wide-body aircraft.  Airbus is confident that passengers have accepted the hub-and-spoke system as an acceptable means of travel, while Boeing is offering an airplane that is capable of flying passengers from Point A directly to Point C, bypassing Point B.  Each company uses differing strategies in developing their respective immediate futures by interpreting the “values” of the customer base differently.  Airbus is also in the lengthy process of developing an airplane to compete with Boeing’s 787.  The A-350 is intended to challenge the 787 in performance and capacities, but how much of this market will have already committed to Boeing before the A-350 is ready for passenger service in 2013?

The above-referenced rivalry has been building since 1970 when Airbus introduced its A-300, a twin-aisle, twin-engine airplane which captured a few American buyers (Eastern Airlines and Pan Am World Airways).  It has been a strategic smorgasbord to observe the growing competition between these two behemoths.  The primary reason for Airbus’ success in the early 2000s was sensitivity to customer needs.  Airbus has a stable full of airplanes that were efficient and very passenger-friendly.  Boeing was “boot-strapping.”  Boeing utilized a derivative strategy that simply meant “tweaking” existing Boeing models in an attempt to meet customer expectations.  Both firms have the same customers but didn’t hear the same thing.  Their respective interpretations of what was needed by customers were different.  And this sojourn continues.  Most recently, business-level strategies differ with Boeing developing and introducing a smaller, more efficient airplane capable of profitable operation in a point-to-point operation while Airbus focuses on satisfying a market intent on hauling large passenger loads from hub-to-hub.  Boeing has been in the “jumbo” market for over 35 years.  Could it be that both companies are correct?  Both are sensitive to the environment and to the global energy crisis.  And how much competitive advantage will play out in the courtroom?  Each company is seeking redress from the other for unfair government subsidies in the development of new airplanes.




1        Define strategic competitiveness, strategy, competitive advantage,
above-average returns, and the strategic management process.       

Strategic competitiveness is achieved when a firm successfully formulates and implements a value-creating strategy. By implementing a value-creating strategy that current and potential competitors are not simultaneously implementing and that competitors are unable to duplicate, or find too costly to imitate, a firm achieves a competitive advantage.

Strategy can be defined as an integrated and coordinated set of commitments and actions designed to exploit core competencies and gain a competitive advantage.

So long as a firm can sustain (or maintain) a competitive advantage, investors will earn above-average returns.  Above-average returns represent returns that exceed returns that investors expect to earn from other investments with similar levels of risk (investor uncertainty about the economic gains or losses that will result from a particular investment).  In other words, above average-returns exceed investors' expected levels of return for given risk levels.

Teaching Note:  Point out that, in the long run, firms must earn at least average returns and provide investors with average returns if they are to survive.  If a firm earns below-average returns and provides investors with below-average returns, investors will withdraw their funds and place them in investments that earn at least average returns. At this point it may be useful to highlight the role institutional investors play in regulating above average performances.


In smaller new venture firms, performance is sometimes measured in terms of the amount and speed of growth rather than more traditional profitability measures – new ventures require time to earn acceptable returns.

A framework that can assist firms in their quest for strategic competitiveness is the strategic management process, the full set of commitments, decisions and actions required for a firm to systematically achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.  This process is illustrated in Figure 1.1.



FIGURE 1.1
The Strategic Management Process

Figure 1.1 illustrates the dynamic, interrelated nature of the elements of the strategic management process and provides an outline of where the different elements of the process are covered in this text.

Feedback linkages among the three primary elements indicate the dynamic nature of the strategic management process: strategic inputs, strategic actions and strategic outcomes.

•        Strategic inputs, in the form of information gained by scrutinizing the internal environment and scanning the external environment, are used to develop the firm's vision and mission.

•        Strategic actions are guided by the firm's vision and mission, and are represented by strategies that are formulated or developed and subsequently implemented or put into action.

•        Desired strategic outcomes—strategic competitiveness and above-average returns—result when a firm is able to successfully formulate and implement value-creating strategies that others are unable to duplicate.

•        Feedback links the elements of the strategic management process together and helps firms continuously adjust or revise strategic inputs and strategic actions in order to achieve desired strategic outcomes.



In addition to describing the impact of globalization and technological change on the current business environment, this chapter also will discuss two approaches to the strategic management process.  The first, the industrial organization model, suggests that the external environment should be considered as the primary determinant of a firm’s strategic actions.  The second is the resource-based model, which perceives the firm’s resources and capabilities (the internal environment) as critical links to strategic competitiveness.  Following the discussion in this chapter, as well as in Chapters 2 and 3, students should see that these models must be integrated to achieve strategic competitiveness.


Teaching Note: The transient nature of strategic competitiveness is pointed out even more clearly when one realizes that only 16 of the 100 largest U.S. industrial corporations in 1900 remained competitive in the 1990s and that four members of 1998's top ten were not among the top ten in 1992. This does not even take into account the great number of U.S. businesses that fail every year (16,150 in 2004).


2        Describe the twenty-first century competitive landscape and explain how globalization and technological changes shape it.       

THE COMPETITIVE LANDSCAPE

This twenty-first century competitive landscape can be described as one in which the fundamental nature of competition is changing in a number of the world’s industries.  Further, the boundaries of industries are becoming blurred and more difficult to define.

Consider recent changes that have taken place in the telecommunications and TV industries—e.g., not only cable companies and satellite networks compete for entertainment revenue from television, but telecommunication companies also are stepping into the entertainment business through significant improvements in fiber-optic lines.  Partnerships further blur industry boundaries (e.g.; MSNBC is co-owned by NBC, itself owned by General Electric, and Microsoft.)  Many firms are looking into the delivery of video on demand (VOD).  Apple iPod has the current lead in offering VOD content, but Netflix is vying hard to compete in this arena since VOD could be the kiss of death to its current online DVD rental service.  Blockbuster and Amazon are also seeking a piece of this competitive pie.

The twenty-first century competitive landscape thus implies that traditional sources of competitive advantage—economies of scale and large advertising budgets—may not as important in the future as they were in the past.  The rapid and unpredictable technological change that characterizes this new competitive landscape implies that managers must adopt new ways of thinking.  The new competitive mind set must value flexibility, speed, innovation, integration, and the challenges that evolve from constantly changing conditions.

A term often used to describe the new realities of competition is hypercompetition, a condition that results from the dynamics of strategic moves and countermoves among innovative, global firms:  a condition of rapidly escalating competition that is based on price-quality positioning, efforts to create new know-how and achieve first-mover advantage, and battles to protect or to invade established product or geographic markets (that will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 5).


The Global Economy

A global economy is one in which goods, services, people, skills and ideas move freely across geographic borders.

The emergence of this global economy results in a number of challenges and opportunities.  For instance, Europe is now the world’s largest single market (despite the difficulties of adapting to multiple national cultures and the lack of a single currency.  The European Union has a gross domestic product (GDP) that is over 35% greater than that of  the U.S., with 700 million potential customers.  

Today, China is seen as an extremely competitive market in which local market-seeking MNCs (multinational corporations) fiercely compete against other MNCs and local low-cost producers.  China has long been viewed as a low-cost producer of goods, but here’s an interesting twist.  China is now an exporter of local management talent.  Proctor and Gamble actually exports Chinese management talent; it has been dispatching more Chinese abroad than it has been importing expatriates to China.  GE estimates that by 2024, China will be the world’s greatest consumer of electricity and will also be the world’s largest consumer and consumer-finance market.  GE is making strategic decisions today, such as significant investing in China and India, that will enhance its competitive posture in both countries in the future.


Teaching Note: The relative competitiveness of nations can be found in the World Economic Forum’s Global Competitiveness Report, which can be accessed for free on the internet.  It is useful to assemble these data into an overhead or PowerPoint slide and show it in class. Students find it interesting to see where their country stands relative to the others listed. Allow enough time for them to see these numbers and sort out what it all means.


The expectations of U.S. firms for global business are changing rapidly.
•        GE expects as much as 60 percent of its revenue growth between 2005 and 2015 to be generated by competing in rapidly developing economies (e.g., China and India).

The March of Globalization

Globalization is the increasing economic interdependence among countries as reflected in the flow of goods and services, financial capital, and knowledge across country borders.  This is illustrated by the following:
•        Financial capital might be obtained in one national market and used to buy raw materials in another one.
•        Manufacturing equipment bought from another market produces products sold in yet another market.
•        Globalization enhances the available range of opportunities for firms.

Wal-Mart is trying to achieve boundary-less retailing with global pricing, sourcing, and logistics. Today, Wal-Mart  is the world’s largest retailer (with over 6,200 total units).

Because Toyota initially emphasized product reliability and superior customer service, the company’s products are in high demand across the globe. Due to the demand for its products, Toyota’s competitive actions have forced its global competitors to make reliability and service improvements in their operations.

Global competition has increased performance standards in many dimensions, including quality, cost, productivity, product introduction time, and operational efficiency.  Moreover, these standards are not static; they are exacting, requiring continuous improvement from a firm and its employees. Thus, companies must improve their capabilities and individual workers need to sharpen their skills.  In the twenty-first century competitive landscape, only firms that meet, and perhaps exceed, global standards are likely to earn strategic competitiveness.


Teaching Note: As a result of the new competitive landscape, firms of all sizes must re-think how they can achieve strategic competitiveness by positioning themselves to ask questions from a more global perspective to enable them to (at least) meet or exceed global standards:
•        Where should value-adding activities be performed?
•        Where are the most cost-effective markets for new capital?
•        Can products designed in one market be successfully adapted for sale in others?
•        How can we develop cooperative relationships or joint ventures with other firms that will enable us to capitalize on international growth opportunities?


While globalization seems an attractive strategy for competing in the twenty-first century competitive landscape, there are risks as well.  These include such factors as:
•        the “liability of foreignness” (i.e., the risk of competing internationally)
•        overdiversification beyond the firm’s ability to successfully manage operations in multiple foreign markets

A point to emphasize:  entry into international markets requires proper use of the strategic management process.

While global markets are attractive strategic options for some companies, they are not the only source of strategic competitiveness. In fact, for most companies, even for those capable of competing successfully in global markets, it is critical to remain committed to and strategically competitive in the domestic market.  And, domestic markets can be testing grounds for possibly entering an international market at some point in the future.


Teaching Note: Indicate that the risks that often accompany internationalization and strategies for minimizing their impact on firms will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 8.

Teaching Note:  As a result of globalization and the spread of technology, competition will become more intense.  Some principles to consider include the following:
•        Customers will continue to expect high levels of product quality at competitive prices.
•        Global competition will continue to pressure companies to shorten product development-introduction time frames.
•        Strategically competitive companies successfully leverage insights learned both in domestic and global markets, modifying them as necessary.
•        Before a company can hope to achieve any measure of success in global markets, it must be strategically competitive in its domestic market.

Technology and Technological Changes

Three technological trends and conditions are significantly altering the nature of competition:
•        increasing rate of technological change and diffusion
•        the information age
•        increasing knowledge intensity


Technologic Diffusion and Disruptive Technologies

Both the rate of change and the introduction of new technologies have increased greatly over the last 15 to 20 years.

A term that is used to describe rapid and consistent replacement of current technologies by new, information-intensive technologies is perpetual innovation.  This implies that innovation—to be discussed in more detail in Chapter 13—must be continuous and carry a high priority for all organizations.   

The shorter product life cycles that result from rapid diffusion of innovation often means that products may be replicated within very short time periods, placing a competitive premium on a firm’s ability to rapidly introduce new products into the marketplace.  In fact, speed-to-market may become the sole source of competitive advantage.  In the computer industry during the early 1980s, hard disk drives would typically remain current for four to six years, after which a new and better product became available. By the late 1980s, the expected life had fallen to two to three years. By the 1990s, it was just six to nine months.

The rapid diffusion of innovation may have made patents a source of competitive advantage only in the pharmaceutical and chemical industries as many firms do not file patent applications to safeguard (for at least a time) the technical knowledge that would be disclosed explicitly in a patent application.

Disruptive technologies (in line with the Schumpeterian notion of “creative destruction”) can destroy the value of existing technologies by replacing them with new ones.  Current examples include the success of iPods, PDAs and WiFi.

The Information Age

Changes in information technology have made rapid access to information available to firms all over the world, regardless of size.  Consider the rapid growth in the following technologies: personal computers (PCs), cellular phones, computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), artificial intelligence, virtual reality, and massive data bases. These examples show how information is used differently as a result of new technologies.  The ability to access and use information has become an important source of competitive advantage in almost every industry.
•        Companies are being wired to link to customers, employees, vendors and suppliers around the globe (e-business).
•        The number of PCs is expected to grow to 278 million by 2010.
•        The Internet provides an information-carrying infrastructure available to individuals and firms worldwide.

The ability to access a high level of relatively inexpensive information has created strategic opportunities for many information-intensive businesses.  For example, retailers now can use the Internet to provide shopping to customers virtually anywhere.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Apple: Using Innovation to Create Technology Trends and Maintain Competitive Advantage

BusinessWeek and the Boston Consulting Group conduct an annual survey of the top executives of the “1500 largest global corporations.”  In May 2007, as a result of this survey, Apple was named by BusinessWeek as the most innovative company for the third consecutive year.  Apple was able to rejuvenate itself in 2001 with introduction of its iPod, a portable digital music device, which was followed by its complementary iTunes online music store which offered free downloads of digital music, songs and video clips to iPod users.  It not only markets simply designed products, Apple is able to leverage off its aesthetic designs.  While Apple focused on differentiation, its competitors were determined to achieve a cost advantage.  Dell was very successful as the first computer manufacturer to utilize the internet as a means for customers to buy directly from the manufacturer bypassing the middle-man.  In addition to direct selling, Dell did an exemplary job of supply-chain management with firms such as Microsoft and Intel.  Apple’s success through its stores has outpaced Sony and others and has forced Dell to enter into an alliance with Wal-Mart to bolster sales.  The companies that Apple is now outperforming have historically been stronger than Apple.  So what is different?  Apple seeks to “change the way people behave” versus just competing in the marketplace for traditional products. In doing so, it has been able to establish first mover advantages through radical concepts using elegant design, and relatively perfect market timing recently to establish its advantage. Others seem to compete in commodity businesses with incremental innovations, while Apple creates a new concept in the consumer’s mind. For this reason, it is likely that other executives see Apple as a strong innovator in consumer electronics.

This Strategic Focus illustrates a myriad of principles to which your students will become familiar.  In all likelihood, they know more about Apple and iPod than you.  First-comer advantage, sensitivity to “people’s respect for innovation,” timing (perhaps “Punctuality” should be the fifth “P” of the traditional marketing variables), the impact of the Internet, etc. should make for active classroom dialogue.


Increasing Knowledge Intensity

It is becoming increasingly apparent that knowledge—information, intelligence and expertise—is a critical organizational resource, and increasingly, a source of competitive advantage.  As a result,
•        many companies are working to convert the accumulated knowledge of employees into a corporate asset
•        shareholder value is increasingly influenced by the value of a firm’s intangible assets, such as knowledge

Note: Intangible assets will be discussed more fully in Chapter 3.


Teaching Note: This means that, to achieve competitive advantage in the new, information-intensive competitive landscape, firms must move beyond accessing information to exploiting information by:
•        capturing intelligence
•        transforming intelligence into usable knowledge
•        embedding it as organizational learning
•        diffusing it rapidly throughout the organization


The implication of this discussion is that, to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns, firms must develop the ability to adapt rapidly to change or achieve strategic flexibility.

Strategic flexibility represents the set of capabilities—in all areas of their operations—that firms use to respond to respond to the various demands and opportunities that are found in dynamic, uncertain environments.  This implies that firms must develop certain capabilities, including the capacity to learn continuously, which will provide the firm with new skill sets.  However, those working within firms to develop strategic flexibility should understand that the task is not an easy one, largely because of inertia that can build up over time. A firm’s focus and past core competencies may actually slow change and strategic flexibility.



Firms capable of rapidly and broadly applying what they learn achieve strategic flexibility and the resulting capacity to change in ways that will increase the probability of succeeding in uncertain, hypercompetitive environments.  Some firms must change dramatically to remain competitive or return to competitiveness.  How often are firms able to make this shift?  Overall, does it take more effort to make small, periodic changes, or to wait and make more dramatic changes when these become necessary?



Two models describing key strategic inputs to a firm's strategic actions are discussed next: the Industrial Organization (or externally-focused) model and the Resource-Based (or internally-focused) model.


3        Use the industrial organization (I/O) model to explain how firms
can earn above-average returns.       

THE I/O MODEL OF ABOVE AVERAGE RETURNS

Teaching Note:  The recommended teaching strategy for this section is to first discuss the assumptions underlying the I/O model.  Then, use Figure 1.2 to introduce linkages in the I/O model and provide the background for an expanded discussion of the model in Chapter 2.


The I/O or Industrial Organization model adopts an external perspective to explain that forces outside of the organization represent the dominant influences on a firm's strategic actions.  In other words, this model presumes that the characteristics of and conditions present in the external environment determine the appropriateness of strategies that are formulated and implemented in order for a firm to earn above-average returns.   In short, the I/O model specifies that the choice of industries in which to compete has more influence on firm performance than the decisions made by managers inside their firm.

The I/O model is based on the following four assumptions:
1.        The external environment—the general, industry and competitive environments impose pressures and constraints on firms and determines strategies that will result in superior returns.  In other words, the external environment pressures the firm to adopt strategies to meet that pressure while simultaneously constraining or limiting the scope of strategies that might be appropriate and eventually successful.
2.        Most firms competing in an industry or in an industry segment control similar sets of strategically relevant resources and thus pursue similar strategies.  This assumption presumes that, given a similar availability of resources, most firms competing in a specific industry (or industry segment) have similar capabilities and thus follow strategies that are similar. In other words, there are few significant differences among firms in an industry.
3.        Resources used to implement strategies are highly mobile across firms.  Significant differences in strategically relevant resources among firms in an industry tend to disappear because of resource mobility.  Thus, any resource differences soon disappear as they are observed and acquired or learned by other firms in the industry.
4.        Organizational decision-makers are assumed to be rational and committed to acting only in the best interests of the firm.  The implication of this assumption is that organizational decision-makers will consistently exhibit profit-maximizing behaviors.

According to the I/O model—which was a dominant paradigm from the 1960s through the 1980s—firms must pay careful attention to the structured characteristics of the industry in which they choose to compete, searching for one that is the most attractive to the firm, given the firm's strategically relevant resources.  Then, the firm must be able to successfully implement strategies required by the industry's characteristics to be able to increase their level of competitiveness. The five forces model is an analytical tool used to address and describe these industry characteristics.


STRATEGIC FOCUS
Netflix Confronts a Turbulent Competitive Environment

This case points out that competitive advantage is not relegated to products, services, or costs.  A business model can be an avenue to competitive success as well.  While successful business models might eventually be cloned, Reed Hastings, founder of Netflix, regrets the timing of Netflix’s initial public offering.  He feels that a very unique and profitable business model was made public and lured competition.  Blockbuster became aware of the threat of online movie rental as opposed to its brick-and-mortar operation.  In 2004, Blockbuster entered the online rental arena with Blockbuster Online.  Because of a physical presence in many larger communities, Blockbuster was able to create an advantage by allowing rental customers to return rented movies to its stores and expedite getting credit for the return (referred to as Blockbuster Access).  In 2007, Blockbuster then began a mail-only option (Blockbuster by Mail) which actually undercut Netflix’s prices.  Blockbuster introduced this plan even though it was losing money on its Total Access plan. And now there are other formidable competitors in the online rental business such as Amazon.com and other brick-and-mortar players.  

But current competition in the DVD rental and shipping business is not the only threat facing Netflix. Recall from the Competitive Landscape section of this chapter that “Netflix is vying hard to compete in this arena since VOD (Video on Demand) could be the kiss of death to its current online DVD rental service.”  In the VOD market, formidable competitors are racing to be the dominate player to supply videos directly to computers and ultimately to television.  Blockbuster has acquired a company that specializes in providing video streaming over the internet and has access to large movie producers’ content.  Of course, this service has been available from cable and satellite companies but not over the Internet. Among others, Apple, Amazon.com, CinemaNow, Wal-Mart, and Hewlett-Packard are seeking to establish a download business in this market.  And the movie industry players, such as Warner Brothers and Disney, experienced a loss of a significant amount of revenues and other difficult circumstances in regard to online audio piracy, as they work to digitize the content in their vast movies and television inventories, they want to make sure that they can take advantage of this potential with as little piracy as possible. Accordingly, they are cautious with whom they will contract for selling their digitized content. Coming up with the right solution to use these digitized videos will be a key issue in getting contracts with the movie industry.  Reed Hastings recognizes that VOD will ultimately create a total substitute for Netflix video rental service. Although Netflix has a significant amount of turbulence in its environment, it also has some strong, well-developed competencies that allowed it to be successful thus far.


This Strategic Focus illustrates the value of a unique business model.  Whether or not Reed Hastings took Netflix public prematurely is a mute point. This case points out that even an enviable innovative business model has a useful life. Reed Hastings acknowledges that the Netflix model is approaching its terminus.  How will he know when it’s spent?  Students can be engaged in a discussion about how and when to recognize that a business model is no longer viable.   


FIGURE 1.2
The I/O Model of Above-Average Returns

Based on its four underlying assumptions, the I/O model prescribes a five-step process for firms to achieve above-average returns:

1.        Study the external environment—general, industry and competitive—to determine the characteristics of the external environment that will both determine and constrain the firm's strategic alternatives.

2.        Select an industry (or industries) with a high potential for returns based on the structural characteristics of the industry.  A model for assessing these characteristics, the Five Forces Model of Competition, will be discussed in Chapter 2.

3.        Based on the characteristics of the industry in which the firm chooses to compete, strategies that are linked with above-average returns should be selected.  A model or framework that can be used to assess the requirements and risks of these strategies (the Generic Strategies called cost leadership & differentiation) will be discussed in detail in Chapter 4.

4.        Acquire or develop the critical resources—skills and assets—needed to successfully implement the strategy that has been selected.  A process for scrutinizing the internal environment to identify the presence or absence of critical skills will be discussed in Chapter 3.  Skill-enhancement strategies, including training and development, will be discussed in Chapter 11.

5.        The I/O model indicates that above-average returns will accrue to firms that successfully implement relevant strategic actions that enable the firm to leverage its strengths (skills and resources) to meet the demands or pressures and constraints of the industry in which they have elected to compete.  The implementation process will be described in Chapters 10 through 13.

The I/O model has been supported by research indicating:
•        20% of firm profitability can be explained by industry characteristics
•        36% of firm profitability can be attributed to firm characteristics and the actions taken by the firm
•        Overall, this indicates a reciprocal relationship—or even an interrelationship—between industry characteristics (attractiveness) and firm strategies that result in firm performance



4        Use the resource-based model to explain how firms can earn
above average-returns.       


THE RESOURCE-BASED MODEL OF ABOVE-AVERAGE RETURNS

Teaching Note: The recommended teaching strategy for this section is similar to that suggested for the I/O model.  First, explain the assumptions of the resource-based model.  Then, use Figure 1.3 to introduce linkages in the resource-based model and provide the background for an expanded discussion of the model in Chapter 3.


The resource-based model adopts an internal perspective to explain how a firm's unique bundle or collection of internal resources and capabilities represent the foundation upon which value-creating strategies should be built.

Resources are inputs into a firm's production process, such as capital equipment, individual employee's skills, patents, brand names, finance and talented managers.  These resources can be tangible or intangible.

Capabilities are the capacity for a set of resources to perform—integratively or in combination—a task or activity.  


Teaching Note: Thus, according to the resource-based model, a firm's resources and capabilities—found in its internal environment—are more critical to determining the appropriateness of strategic actions than are the conditions and characteristics of the external environment.  So, strategies should be selected that enable the firm to best exploit its core competencies, relative to opportunities in the external environment.  One example of this is the experience of Amazon that used its capabilities to market and distribute books using the Internet successfully to capture a 20-month first-mover advantage in this new marketplace.  However, Amazon’s capabilities may be imitable.  In fact, many experts expect that Barnes & Noble will continue to be a formidable competitor due to its extensive resources.


Core competencies are resources and capabilities that serve as a source of competitive advantage for a firm. Often related to functional skills (e.g., marketing at Philip Morris), core competencies—when developed, nurtured, and applied throughout a firm—may result in strategic competitiveness.



FIGURE 1.3
The Resource-Based Model of Above-Average Returns

The resource-based model of above-average returns is grounded in the uniqueness of a firm's internal resources and capabilities.  The five-step model describes the linkages between resource identification and strategy selection that will lead to above-average returns.

1.        Firms should identify their internal resources and assess their strengths and weaknesses.  The strengths and weaknesses of firm resources should be assessed relative to competitors.

2.        Firms should identify the set of resources that provide the firm with capabilities that are unique to the firm, relative to its competitors.  The firm should identify those capabilities that enable the firm to perform a task or activity better than its competitors.

3.        Firms should determine the potential for their unique sets of resources and capabilities to outperform rivals in terms of returns.  Determine how a firm’s resources and capabilities can be used to gain competitive advantage.

4.        Locate and compete in an attractive industry.  Determine the industry that provides the best fit between the characteristics of the industry and the firm’s resources and capabilities.

5.        To attain a sustainable competitive advantage and earn above-average returns, firms should formulate and implement strategies that enable them to exploit their resources and capabilities to take advantage of opportunities in the external environment better than their competitors.       



Resources and capabilities can lead to a competitive advantage when they are valuable, rare, costly to imitate, and non-substitutable.
•        Resources are valuable when they support taking advantage of opportunities or neutralizing external threats.
•        Resources are rare when possessed by few, if any, competitors.
•        Resources are costly to imitate when other firms cannot obtain them inexpensively (relative to other firms).
•        Resources are non-substitutable when they have no structural equivalents.       


5        Describe vision and mission and
discuss their value.       

VISION AND MISSION

Teaching Note:  Refer students to Figure 1.1 that indicates the link or relationship between identifying a firm's internal resources and capabilities and the conditions and characteristics of the external environment with the development of the firm's vision and mission.


Vision

Vision is a picture of what the firm wants to be and, in broad terms, what it wants to ultimately achieve. Vision is  “big picture” thinking with passion that helps people feel what they are supposed to be doing.

Vision statements:
•        reflect a firm’s values and aspirations
•        are intended to capture the heart and mind of each employee (and, hopefully, many of its other stakeholders)
•        tend to be enduring while it is missions can change in light of changing environmental conditions
•        tend to be relatively short and concise, easily remembered

Examples of vision statements:
•        Our vision is to be the world’s best quick service restaurant. (McDonald’s)
•        Our mission is to be recognized by our customers as the leader in applications engineering.  We always focus on the activities customers desire; we are highly motivated and strive to advance our technical knowledge in the areas of material, part design and fabrication technology. (LNP, a GE Plastics Company)
•        We must be a great company with great people. (LG Electronics)

The CEO is responsible for working with others to form the firm’s vision.  However, experience shows that the most effective vision statement results when the CEO involves a host of people to develop it.

A vision statement should be clearly tied to the conditions in the firm’s external and internal environments and it must be achievable. Moreover, the decisions and actions of those involved with developing the vision must be consistent with that vision.


Teaching Note:  A strongly-worded vision statement emphasizes “winning” (in some fashion), and this can create a mental struggle for some students.  The problem is that a focus on winning ultimately will mean that some companies will be put out of business and employees will end up losing their jobs.  It is important to point out that many who experience dislocation as a result of a business failure will soon be employed at the “winning” firm (which is in expansion mode), at another firm in the same industry, or in an entirely different industry.  Those who are not quickly reabsorbed often are those who have the skills that least fit the demands of the industry.  In the end, though, there is no getting around the fact that a competitive marketplace can produce significant hardship for some, and there is no need to argue otherwise; however, the number of customers who are better served by firms that are continuously improving dwarfs the number of individuals who are dislocated.  Thus, in the “big picture,” we are all better off as a result.  If the notion of winning is difficult to accept, then it is good to think of the alternative—a non-responsive economy with few new products, a tendency toward inefficiency, and poorly served customers.


Mission

A firm's mission is an externally focused application of its vision that states the firm's unique purpose and the scope of its operations in product and market terms.

As with the vision, the final responsibility for forming the firm’s mission rests with the CEO, though the CEO and other top-level managers tend to involve a larger number of people in forming the mission. This is because middle- and first-level managers and other employees have more direct contact with customers and their markets.

A firm's vision and mission must provide the guidance that enables the firm to achieve the desired strategic outcomes—strategic competitiveness and above-average returns—illustrated in Figure 1.1 that enable the firm to satisfy the demands of those parties having an interest in the firm's success: organizational stakeholders.

Earning above-average returns often is not mentioned in mission statements.  The reasons for this are that all firms want to earn above-average returns and that desired financial outcomes result from properly serving certain customers while trying to achieve the firm’s intended future.  In fact, research has shown that having an effectively formed vision and mission has a positive effect on performance (growth in sales, profits, employment and net worth).


6        Define stakeholders and describe their ability to influence organizations.       

STAKEHOLDERS

Stakeholders are the individuals and groups who can affect and are affected by the strategic outcomes achieved and who have enforceable claims on a firm's performance.


Classification of Stakeholders

The stakeholder concept reflects that individuals and groups have a "stake" in the strategic outcomes of the firm because they can be either positively or negatively affected by those outcomes and because achieving the strategic outcomes may be dependent upon the support or active participation of certain stakeholder groups.


Figure Note: Students can use Figure 1.4 to visualize the three stakeholder groups.


FIGURE 1.4
The Three Stakeholder Groups

Figure 1.4 provides a definition of a stakeholder and illustrates the three general classifications and members of each stakeholder group:
•        Capital market stakeholders
•        Product market stakeholders
•        Organizational stakeholders


Note: Students can use Figure 1.4 while you discuss the challenges of meeting conflicting stakeholder expectations.


Capital Market Stakeholders
Product Market Stakeholders
Organizational Stakeholders


Teaching Note: The following table was developed from the text’s presentation (and more) to assist you in organizing a discussion of each stakeholder group's expectations or demands, potential conflicts and stakeholder management strategies.


Stakeholder Groups, Membership and Primary Expectation or Demand

               
Stakeholder group        Membership        Primary expectation/demand
Capital market        Shareholders         Wealth enhancement
        Lenders        Wealth preservation
Product market        Customers        Product reliability at lowest possible price
        Suppliers        Receive highest sustainable prices
        Host communities        Long-term employment, tax revenues, minimum use of public support services
        Unions        Ideal working conditions and job security for membership
Organizational        Employees        Secure, dynamic, stimulating, and rewarding work environment


Teaching Note: From reviewing the primary expectations or demands of each stakeholder group, it becomes obvious that a potential for conflict exists.  For instance, shareholders generally invest for wealth-maximization purposes and are therefore interested in a firm's maximizing its return on investment or ROI.  However, if a firm increases its ROI by making short-term decisions, the firm can negatively affect employee or customer stakeholders.


If the firm is strategically competitive and earns above average returns, it can afford to simultaneously satisfy all stakeholders.  When earning average or below-average returns, tradeoffs must be made.  At the level of average returns, firms must at least minimally satisfy all stakeholders.  When returns are below average, some stakeholders can be minimally satisfied, while others may be dissatisfied.  

For example, reducing the level of research and development expenditures (to increase short-term profits) enables the firm to pay out the additional short-term profits to shareholders as dividends.  However, if reducing R&D expenditures results in a decline in the long-term strategic competitiveness of the firm's products or services, it is possible that employees will not enjoy a secure or rewarding career environment (which violates a primary union expectation or demand for job security for its membership).  At the same time, customers may be offered products that are less reliable at unattractive prices, relative to those offered by firms that did not reduce R&D expenditures.

Thus, the stakeholder management process may involve a series of trade-offs that is dependent on the extent to which the firm is dependent on the support of each affected stakeholder and the firm's ability to earn above-average returns.


Teaching Note:  Stakeholder management has introduced some interesting notions into business practice.  For example, business schools typically teach that there are three main stakeholder groups (owners, customers, and employees) and that they should be tended to in that order.  That is, it is important to begin with the idea that the primary purpose of the firm is to maximize shareholder wealth (i.e., tend to the interests of the owners first).  Then, it is common to introduce notions such as,  “The customer is always right.”  This suggests that customer interests are to be tended to next.  Finally, we get around to looking to the needs of employees, if resources make that possible.  This is the standard approach, but some firms have turned this formulation on its head. For example, Southwest Airlines has been extremely successful by taking great efforts to select the right employees and treat them well, which then spills over into appropriate treatment of the customer.  As you might guess, the company assumes that these emphases will naturally lead to positive outcomes for the stockholders as well (as has been the case).  This issue can lead to interesting discussions with students about their thoughts on the topic.


7        Describe the work of strategic leaders.       

STRATEGIC LEADERS

Teaching Note:  One way of covering this section is through a series of questions and answers as presented in the following format.


Who are strategic leaders?

While it is dependent on the size of the organization, all organizations have a CEO or top manager and this individual is the primary organizational strategist in every organization.  Small organizations may have a single strategist: the CEO or owner. Large organizations may have few or several top-level managers, executives or a top management team.  All of these individuals are organizational strategists.


What are the responsibilities of strategic leaders?

Top managers play decisive roles in firms’ efforts to achieve their desired strategic outcomes.  As organizational strategists, top managers are responsible for deciding how resources will be developed or acquired, at what cost and how they will be used or allocated throughout the organization.  Strategists also must consider the risks of actions under consideration, along with the firm’s vision and managers’ strategic orientations.

Organizational strategists also are responsible for determining how the organization does business.  This responsibility is reflected in the organizational culture, which refers to the complex set of ideologies, symbols, and core values shared throughout the firm and that influences the way it conducts business. The organization’s culture is the social energy that drives—or fails to drive—the organization.


The Work of Effective Strategic Leaders

While it seems simplistic, performing their role effectively requires strategists to work hard, perform thorough analyses of available information, be brutally honest, desire high performance, exercise common sense, think clearly, and ask questions and listen.  In addition, strategic leaders must be able to “think seriously and deeply … about the purposes of the organizations they head or functions they perform, about the strategies, tactics, technologies, systems, and people necessary to attain these purposes and about the important questions that always need to be asked.”  Additionally, effective strategic leaders work to set an ethical tone in their firms.

Strategists work long hours and face ambiguous decision situations, but they also have opportunities to dream and act in concert with a compelling vision that motivates others in creating competitive advantage.


Predicting Outcomes of Strategic Decisions: Profit Pools

Top-level managers try to predict the outcomes of their strategic decisions before they are implemented, but this is sometimes very difficult to do.  Those firms that do a better job of anticipating the outcomes of strategic moves will obviously be in a better position to succeed.  One way to do this is by mapping out the  profit pools of an industry.  Profit pools are the total profits earned in an industry at all points along the value chain.  Four steps are involved:
1.        Define the pool’s boundaries
2.        Estimate the pool’s overall size
3.        Estimate the size of the value-chain activity in the pool
4.        Reconcile the calculations


8        Explain the strategic management process.       

THE STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT PROCESS

Teaching Note: The final section of this chapter reviews Figure 1.1 (The Strategic Management Process), providing both an outline of the process and the framework for the next 12 chapters.  Thus, students should refer back to Figure 1.1 as you present the material to come next.


Chapters 2 and 3 will provide more detail regarding the strategic inputs to the strategic management process: assessments of the firm's external and internal environments that must be performed so that sufficient knowledge is developed regarding external opportunities and internal capabilities.  This enables the development of the firm's vision and mission.

Chapters 4 through 9 discuss the strategy formulation stage of the process. Topics covered include:
•        Deciding on business-level strategy, or how to compete in a given business (Chapter 4)
•        Understanding competitive dynamics, in that strategies are not formulated and implemented in isolation but require understanding and responding to competitors' actions (Chapter 5)
•        Setting corporate-level strategy, or deciding in which industries or businesses the firm will compete, how resources will be allocated and how the different business units will be managed (Chapter 6)
•        The acquisition of business units and the restructuring of the firm’s portfolio of businesses (Chapter 7)
•        Selecting appropriate international strategies that are consistent with the firm's resources, capabilities and core competencies, and external opportunities (Chapter 8)
•        Developing cooperative strategies with other firms to gain competitive advantage (Chapter 9)

The final section of the text, Chapters 10-13, examines actions necessary to effectively implement strategies:
•        Methods for governing to ensure satisfaction of stakeholder demands and attainment of strategic outcomes (Chapter 10)
•        Structures that are used and actions taken to control a firm's operations (Chapter 11)
•        Patterns of strategic leadership that are most appropriate given the competitive environment (Chapter 12)
•        Linkages among corporate entrepreneurship, innovation and strategic competitiveness (Chapter 13)


Teaching Note:  Students should realize that none of the chapters stands alone, just as no single step or facet of the strategic management process stands alone. If the strategic management process is to result in a firm being strategically competitive and earning above-average returns, all facets of the process must be treated as both interdependent and inter-related.


—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        What are strategic competitiveness, strategy competitive advantage, above-average returns, and the strategic management process? (pp. 4-6)

Strategic competitiveness is achieved when a firm successfully formulates and implements a value-creating strategy.

A strategy is an integrated and coordinated set of commitments and actions designed to exploit core competencies and gain a competitive advantage.

A competitive advantage is achieved when a firm’s current and potential competitors either are not able to simultaneously formulate and implement its value-creating strategy, are unable to duplicate the benefits of the strategy, or find the strategy too costly to imitate.

Above-average returns are returns that are in excess of what an investor expects to earn from other investments with a similar level or amount of risk.

The strategic management process (see Figure 1.1) is the full set of commitments, decisions, and actions required for a firm to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.


2.        What are the characteristics of the current competitive landscape?  What two factors are the primary drivers of this landscape? (pp. 6- 7)

In the current competitive landscape, the nature of competition has changed.  As a result, managers making strategic decisions must adopt a new mindset that is global in orientation.  Firms must learn to compete in highly chaotic environments that produce disorder and a great deal of uncertainty.

The two primary factors that have created the current competitive landscape are globalization of industries and markets and rapid and significant technological change.  The implication for business firms is that, to be successful, they must be able to meet or exceed global performance standards (in terms of such factors as quality, price, product features, speed to market) and be able to keep up with both the rapid pace of technological change as well as the rapid diffusion of innovation.

3.        According to the I/O model, what should a firm do to earn above-average returns? (pp.13-16)

The I/O model suggests that conditions and characteristics of the external environment (the general, industry and competitive environments) are the primary inputs to and determinants of strategies that firms should formulate and implement to earn above-average returns.  Assumptions of the I/O model are that: (1) the external environment imposes pressures and constraints that determine which strategies will result in superior profitability, (2) most firms competing in an industry (or industry segment) control similar strategically-relevant resources and pursue similar strategies in light of resource similarity, (3) resources used to implement strategies are highly mobile across firms, and (4) decision makers are assumed to be rational and committed to acting in the firm’s best interests.

The I/O model thus challenges firms to seek out the industry (or industry segment) with the greatest profit potential and then learn how to use their resources to implement value-creating strategies given the structural characteristics of the industry.

4.        What does the resource-based model suggest a firm should do to earn above-average returns? (pp. 16-18)

The resource-based model assumes that each firm is a collection of unique resources and capabilities that provides the basis for its strategy and is the primary source of its profitability.  It also assumes that, over time, firms acquire different resources and develop unique capabilities.  Thus, all firms competing within an industry (or industry segment) may not possess the same strategically relevant resources and capabilities.  In addition, resources may not be highly mobile across firms.

Thus, the resource-based model challenges firms to formulate and implement strategies that allow the firm to best exploit its core competencies—capabilities that are valuable, rare, costly to imitate, and non-substitutable—relative to opportunities in the external environment.  Resources and capabilities that meet the criteria of core competencies then serve as the basis of a firm's sustainable competitive advantage, enabling it to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.

5.        What are vision and mission? What is their value for the strategic management process? (pp. 18-20)

Vision is a picture of what the firm wants to be and, in broad terms, what it wants to ultimately achieve. Vision is “big picture” thinking with passion that helps people feel what they are supposed to be doing.

Strategic mission is externally focused and represents a statement of a firm's unique purpose and the scope of its operations in product and market terms.  It provides general descriptions of the products a firm intends to produce and the markets it will serve using its internally based core competencies.

The differences between vision and mission are important because of their different focuses.  However, they are both highly interdependent and add value to the strategic management process.  The externally-focused  mission provides a sense of purpose for the firm by indicating the products to be provided to specific markets, while the internally-set vision indicates what ultimately will be achieved.  In other words, taken together, the vision and mission will provide a firm’s managers with the insights needed to effectively formulate and implement the firm’s strategies.

6.        What are stakeholders?  How do the three primary stakeholder groups influence organizations? (pp. 20-22)

Stakeholders are individuals and groups who can affect and are affected by strategic outcomes achieved and who have enforceable claims on a firm's performance.  In other words, stakeholders have a stake (or a vested interest) in the actions of the firm. Stakeholders can influence organizations because they have the ability to withhold participation that is essential to a firm's survival, competitiveness, and profitability.  The three primary stakeholder groups are: (1) capital market stakeholders – e.g., shareholders, lenders, (2) product market stakeholders – e.g., customers, suppliers, host communities, unions, and (3) organizational stakeholders – e.g., employees, managers, and others.

There are many ways that stakeholders can influence organizations.  For example, dissatisfied lenders can impose stricter covenants on subsequent borrowing of capital.  Dissatisfied stockholders can reflect this sentiment through several means, including selling their stock (which can have a negative effect on its price).  Dissatisfied employees can organize for collective bargaining.  Dissatisfied community groups could express their disapproval by boycotting the firm’s goods.  Stakeholder groups each have ways of bringing their influence to bear on the firm.

7.        How would you describe the work of strategic leaders? (pp. 22-24)

Strategic leaders are people located n different parts of the firm using the strategic management process to help the firm reach its vision and mission.  Regardless of their location in the firm, successful strategic leaders are decisive and committed to nurturing those around them and are committed to helping the firm create value for customers and returns for shareholders and other stakeholders.

Strategic leaders can be described as hard working, thorough, honest, questioning, visionary, persuasive, analytical, and decision makers.  They also have a penchant for wanting the firm and its people to accomplish more.

The work of strategists includes scanning the environment—both internally and externally—to seek out information that will assist the firm in achieving its mission and satisfying its vision.  Strategists would think about how the resources and capabilities of the firm could be nurtured and exploited to develop core competencies that would enable the firm to exploit environmental opportunities, achieve strategic competitiveness and attain a competitive advantage which results in above-average returns.

8.        What are the elements of the strategic management process?  How are they interrelated? (pp. 24-25)

The parts of the strategic management process (illustrated in Figure 1-1) are strategic inputs, strategic actions and strategic outcomes.  Strategic inputs are represented by the firm’s vision and mission that result from the assessment of the firm’s resources, capabilities and competencies and conditions in the external environment.  These strategic inputs—vision and mission—drive the firm’s strategic actions or the formulation and implementation of strategy.  The strategic outcomes of successfully formulating and implementing value-creating strategies are strategic competitiveness and above average returns. A feedback loop links strategic outcomes with strategic inputs.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Business and Blogs

One element of industry structure analysis is the leverage that buyers can exert on firms.  Is technology changing the balance of power between customers and companies?  If so, how should business respond?

Blogs offer a mechanism for consumers to share their experiences – good or bad – regarding different companies.  Bloggers first emerged in the late 1990s, while today the Technorati search engine currently monitors roughly 100 million blogs.  With the wealth of this “citizen media” available, what are the implications for consumer power?  One of the most famous cases of a blogger drawing attention to a company was Jeff Jarvis on www.buzzmachine.com.  Jarvis, who writes on media topics, was having problems with his Dell computer, and shared his experiences on the Web.  Literally thousands of other people recounted similar experiences, and the phenomena became known as “Dell hell.”  Eventually, Dell created its own corporate blog in an effort to deflect this wave of consumer criticism.  What are the implications of the rapid growth in blogs?  Work in a group on the following exercise.

Part One

Visit a corporate blog.  Only a small percentage of large firms maintain a blog presence on the Internet.  Hint: there are multiple Wikipedias with lists of such companies.  A Web search using the terms “Fortune 500 blogs” will turn up several options.  Review the content of the firm’s blog. Was it updated regularly, or not?  Multiple contributors, or just one?  What was the writing style:  did it read like a marketing brochure, or more informally?  Did the blog allow viewer comments, or post replies to consumer questions?

Part Two

Based on the information collected in the blog review, answer the following questions:

        Have you ever used blogs to help make decisions about a possible purchase?  If so, how did the blog material affect your decision?  What factors would make you more (or less) likely to rely on a blog in making your decision?
        How did the content of corporate blog affect your perception of that company, and its good and services?  Did it make you more or less likely to view the company favorably, or have no effect at all?
        Why do so few large companies maintain blogs?  


Exercise 2: Creating a Shared Vision

Drawing on an analysis of internal and external constraints, firms create a mission and vision as a cornerstone of their strategy.  This exercise will look at some of the challenges associated with creating a shared direction for the firm.

Part One

The instructor will break the class into a set of small teams.  Half of the teams will be given an ‘A’ designation, and the other half assigned as ‘B.’ Each individual team will need to plan a time outside class to complete Part 2; the exercise should take about half an hour.

Teams given the ‘A’ designation will meet in a face to face setting.  Each team member will need paper and a pen or pencil.  Your meeting location should be free from distraction.  The location should have enough space so that no person can see another’s notepad.

Teams given the ‘B’ designation will meet electronically.  You may choose to do this either by text messaging or IM.  Be sure to confirm everyone’s contact information and meeting time beforehand.

Part Two

Each team member prepares a drawing of a real structure.  It can be a famous building, a monument, museum, or even your dorm.  Do not tell other team members what you drew.

Randomly select one team member. The goal is for everyone else to prepare a drawing as similar to the selected team member as possible.  That person is not allowed to show his or her drawing to the rest of the team.  The rest of the group can ask questions about the drawing, but only ones that can be answered ‘yes’ or ‘no’.

After ten minutes, have everyone compare their drawings.  If you are meeting electronically, describe your drawings, and save them for the next time your team meets face to face.

Next, select a second team member and repeat this process again.  

Part Three

In class, discuss the following questions:

        How easy (or hard) was it for you to figure out the ‘vision’ of your team members?  
        Did you learn anything in the first iteration that made the second drawings more successful?
        What similarities are there between this exercise and the challenge of sharing a vision among company employees?  
        How did the communication structure affect your process and outcomes?  

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES

Exercise 1: Business and Blogs

A good way to start the discussion on this exercise is to ask students which blogs they follow.  On the board, group the different blogs by topic – news, sports, politics, entertainment, and so on.  Ask class members what their usage patterns are like: How did they initially locate blogs?  What determines blogs they will visit?  How often do they visit favorite sites?  

Then, shift the focus to company blogs.  Chances are that many students will not have visited a corporate blog, except for this assignment.  Ask students to compare corporate blogs to other blogs that they visit more often. Then, discuss the Part Two questions.

For an additional discussion topic, ask how blogs can affect buyer power and leverage.  Since students have not discussed Porter’s Five Forces Model yet, this question can be helpful as a preface to studying how industries can change.  Alternately, you could re-visit this question when covering industry structure in the next chapter.

Additionally, the following sites can be used as examples of corporate blog use:

GM uses their blog to respond to criticism by the New York Times:

http://fyi.gmblogs.com/2006/06/h ... mation_in_th_1.html

Jeff Jarvis of Buzzmachine describes how Dell learned from the “Dell hell” experience:

http://www.buzzmachine.com/2007/04/03/drinks-with-dell/


Exercise 2: Creating a Shared Vision

This exercise helps to highlight a simple, yet important aspect of strategic planning: Even if a firm has a brilliant and novel strategy, the strategy will not be successful if employees do not understand it clearly.  This exercise is designed to run over two class sessions: Part One (overview of the exercise and team assignments) should be done at the end of one class, and Part Three (discussion) should be done at the beginning of the following class.  

To assign teams, first divide the class in half.  Within each half, create small teams of four to eight persons.  Assign one half of teams to the ‘A’ division, and the remainder to ‘B.’ Each team in the ‘A’ grouping should meet face-to-face to complete the assignment, while ‘B’ teams should meet electronically.  For the latter, options can include instant messaging, email, or texting via cell phone.

Each team member creates a drawing of a building.  One team member is selected randomly, and the remainder of the team creates their own drawing based on the answers to a series of ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions.  The exercise is then repeated using the drawing of a second team member.  After teams have completed the exercise, discuss the following questions in class:

        How easy (or hard) was it for you to figure out the ‘vision’ of your team members?  
        Did you learn anything in the first iteration that made the second drawings more successful?
        What similarities are there between this exercise and the challenge of sharing a vision among company employees?  
        How did the communication structure affect your process and outcomes?  

A helpful way to link the exercise to corporations is to ask students about jobs they have held.  Inquire whether the firms they worked for had a mission or vision statement, and, if so, whether they knew what that statement was or not.  As a follow-up, ask whether that statement had any effect on how they did their jobs.

A second approach is to select a well known company – Wal-Mart, for example, Starbucks, or The Body Shop.  The instructor should find the firm’s mission statement prior to the class session.  The Body Shop emphasizes dedicating their business to the pursuit of social and economic change, while Sam Walton’s goal was to “save people money so they can live better.”  Ask students to discuss the following questions:
        What is the mission statement of this company?  The goal of the discussion is to see how clearly students understand the stated mission.
        As a customer, how would you rate employees understanding and buy-in of the mission?  

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        Business success is often tied to effectively managed strategies. Using the Internet, study Starbuck’s current performance. Based on analysis, do you judge Starbucks to be a success? Why or why not?
2.          Choose several firms in your local community with which you are familiar. Describe the twenty-first century competitive landscape to them, and ask for their feedback about how they anticipate that the landscape will affect their operations during the next five years.
3.     Select an organization (e.g., school, club, or church) that is important to you. Who are the organization’s stakeholders? What degree of influence do you believe each has over the organization, and why?
4.        Are you a stakeholder at your university or college? If so, of what stakeholder group, or groups, are you a part?
5.        Think of an industry in which you want to work. In your opinion, which of the three primary stakeholder groups is the most powerful in that industry today? Why? Which do you expect to be the most powerful group in five years? Why?
6.        Do you agree or disagree with the following statement? “I think managers have little responsibility for the failure of business firms.” Justify your view.
7.        Do vision and mission have any meaning in your personal life? If so, describe it. Are your current actions being guided by a vision and mission? If not, why not?

Ethics Questions

1.        Can a firm achieve a competitive advantage and, thereby, strategic competitiveness without acting ethically? Explain.
2.        What are a firm’s ethical responsibilities if it earns above-average returns?
3.        What are some of the critical ethical challenges to firms competing in the global economy?
4.        How should ethical considerations be included in analyses of a firm’s internal and external environments?
5.        Can ethical issues be integrated into a firm’s vision and mission? Explain.
6.        What is the relationship between ethics and stakeholders?
7.        What is the importance of ethics for organizational strategists?
       


Internet Exercise

Internet-based services depend heavily on continuous change and rapid strategic decision making. Companies such as Amazon.com that rely on Internet users for their customer base have demonstrated a distinct competitive advantage in serving their customers well. Barnes & Noble (http://www.barnesandnoble.com) is one of Amazon.com’s competitors in the on-line book and music markets. How does this Web-based expansion affect the stakeholders of each? How does the entrance of these profitable retailers into the online market affect Amazon.com’s competitive advantage?

*e-project: Using other Web resources, such as current business press and financial reports, discuss Amazon.com’s continued growth and limited profits.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:55:42 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 2  
The External Environment: Opportunities,
Threats, Industry Competition, and Competitor Analysis

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK

KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Explain the importance of analyzing and understanding the firm’s external environment.
2.        Define and describe the general environment and the industry environment.
3.        Discuss the four activities of the external environmental analysis process.
4.        Name and describe the general environment’s six segments.
5.        Identify the five competitive forces and explain how they determine an industry’s profit potential.
6.        Define strategic groups and describe their influence on the firm.
7.        Describe what firms need to know about their competitors and different methods (including ethical standards) used to collect intelligence about them.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   Environmental Pressures on Wal-Mart
THE GENERAL, INDUSTRY, AND COMPETITOR ENVIRONMENTS
EXTERNAL ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS
        Scanning
        Monitoring
        Forecasting
        Assessing
SEGMENTS OF THE GENERAL ENVIRONMENT
        The Demographic Segment
        The Economic Segment
        The Political/Legal Segment
        The Sociocultural Segment
        The Technological Segment
        The Global Segment
Strategic Focus   Does Google Have the Market Power to Ignore External Pressures?
INDUSTRY ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS
        Threat of New Entrants
        Bargaining Power of Suppliers
        Bargaining Power of Buyers       
        Threat of Substitute Products
        Intensity of Rivalry among Competitors
INTERPRETING INDUSTRY ANALYSES
STRATEGIC GROUPS
Strategic Focus   IBM Closely Watches Its Competitors to Stay at the Top of Its Game
COMPETITOR ANALYSIS
ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  

LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: This chapter can be introduced with a general statement regarding the importance of understanding what is happening outside of the firm itself and how what is happening can affect the firm’s ability to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns. This importance is illustrated by the Opening Case, which discusses the impact events in the external environment can have on a firm’s performance, despite efforts to adjust to industry dynamics.



OPENING CASE  
Environmental Pressures on Wal-Mart

Since the mid-1960s, Sam Walton has been nurturing his vision of what discount retailing should be.  His dream is now a mega-giant of approximately 6500 discount stores and clubs employing 1.9 million associates in 15 countries.   In addition to a phenomenal growth rate, Wal-Mart was designated the most admired retailer in 2006 by Fortune magazine.

But all is not happy in Bentonville, Arkansas.  Wal-Mart has hit a speed bump in its growth pattern driven by its cost leadership strategy.  Compared to some of Wal-Mart’s formidable competition, it has experienced the smallest percentage in new store sales.  In November 2006, existing store sales growth actually netted negative growth.  So why has a company that has experienced phenomenal growth and cited for outstanding performance recently found itself struggling to regain its proud growth posture?

Wall Street analysts feel that Wal-Mart’s growth strategy is relying too heavily on opening new stores to offset sagging same-store sales.  So why are same-store sales sagging?  The answer lies with legal and political troubles, public relation problems, and labor issues.  The public, including Wal-Mart customers, has been “turned-off” by open criticism leveled at Wal-Mart.  Thus, an anti-Wal-Mart movement has manifested itself with legal obstacles barring construction of new Wal-Mart stores in specific areas.  The company has become notorious for low pay and poor benefits.  Environmentalists have challenged Wal-Mart to become more “green.”

Everything mentioned above is part of the external environment in which the discount retail industry operates.  People have perceptions of how they want suppliers to look within this environment.  Wal-Mart has fallen short of buyers’ expectations, and is now having to deal with the consequences.  Companies need to understand that “customer expectations” are an element of the external environment.  People act and react to their perceptions and it appears that Wal-Mart is realizing just how powerful perceptual influences within the environment can be.  Wal-Mart is being reactive through efforts to control the damage resulting from perceptions that it is not being as good a corporate citizen as potential and former customers desire.



1        Explain the importance of analyzing and understanding the firm’s external environment.       

               
Teaching Note: Given that the external environment will continue to change—and that change may be unpredictable in terms of timing and strength—a firm’s management is challenged to be aware of, understand the implications of, and identify patterns represented in these changes by taking actions to improve the firm’s competitive position, improve operational efficiency, and to be effective global competitors.       
               
               
External environmental factors—like the war in Iraq, variations in the strength of national economies, and new technologies—affects firm growth and profitability in the U.S. and beyond.

Environmental conditions in the current global economy differ from those previously faced by firms:
•        Technological advances require more timely and effective competitive actions and responses.
•        Rapid sociological changes abroad affect labor practices and product demand of diverse consumers.
•        Governmental policies and laws affect where and how firms may choose to compete.

Understanding the external environment helps to build the firm’s base of knowledge and information which can (1) help to build new capabilities, (2) buffer the firm from environmental impacts, and (3) build bridges to influential stakeholders.

               
Teaching Note:  This section introduces definitions, Figure 2.1 (which deals with the general environment), and the competitor/industry environment.  Because of the chapter layout, it is best to delay a detailed presentation/discussion of the general environment until after discussing the external environmental analysis process because the characteristics of the general environment are presented in more detail later in the chapter.        
               

2        Define and describe the general environment and the industry environment.       


Teaching Note:  The firm’s understanding of the external environment is matched with knowledge about its internal environment (discussed in Chapter 3) to form its vision, to develop its mission, and to take strategic actions that result in strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.  This is an important point to make.


THE GENERAL, INDUSTRY, AND COMPETITOR ENVIRONMENTS



FIGURE 2.1
The External Environment

Figure 2.1 illustrates the three components of a firm’s external environment and the elements or factors that are part of each component.  They are:

1.        the general environment

•        Demographic        •        Political/Legal        •        Sociocultural
•        Economic        •        Technological        •        Global

2.        the industry environment

•        Threat of New Entrants        •        Power of Buyers        •        Power of Suppliers
•        Intensity of Rivalry        •        Product Substitutes       

3.        the competitor environment

(Note: These components of the external environment and their elements or factors and how they are related to each and to firm performance will be discussed in detail in later sections of the chapter.)



The general environment is composed of elements in the broader society that can indirectly influence an industry and the firms within the industry.  But firms cannot directly control the general environment’s segments and elements.




TABLE 2.1
The General Environment: Segments and Elements

Table 2.1 lists elements that characterize each of the six segments of the general environment: demographic, economic, political/legal, sociocultural, technological, and global.  Each of these segments will be discussed in more detail later in this chapter, following a discussion of the external environmental analysis process.



The industry environment is the constellation of factors—threat of new entrants, suppliers, buyers, product substitutes, and the intensity of rivalry among competitors—that directly influence a firm and its competitive decisions and responses.

Competitor analysis represents the firm’s understanding of its current competitors.  This understanding will complement information and insights derived from investigating the general and industry environments.

The following are important distinctions to make regarding different external analyses:
•        Analysis of the general environment focuses on the future.
•        Industry analysis focuses on factors and conditions influencing firm profitability within its industry.
•        Competitor analysis focuses on predicting the dynamics of rivals’ actions, responses, and intentions.

Performance improves when the firm integrates the insights provided by analyses of the general environment, the industry environment, and the competitor environment.

               
Teaching Note: It should be noted that, while firms cannot directly control the elements of the general environment, they can influence—and will be influenced by—factors in their industry and competitor environments.       
               

The strategic challenge is to develop an understanding of the implications of these elements and factors for a firm’s competitive position.  Processes and frameworks for the analysis of the external environment are provided in this chapter.


Teaching Note: Global implications should be—and are—integrated into the discussion of the general environment while global issues related to a firm’s industry environment are integrated throughout the text.  Students will find that Chapter 8 covers this topic in detail.


3        Discuss the four activities of the external environmental analysis process.       

EXTERNAL ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS

In addition to increasing a firm’s awareness and understanding of an increasingly turbulent, complex, and global general environment, external environmental analysis also is necessary to enable the firm’s managers to interpret information to identify opportunities and threats.

Opportunities represent conditions in the general environment that may help a company achieve strategic competitiveness by presenting it with possibilities, while threats are conditions that may hinder or constrain a company’s efforts to achieve strategic competitiveness.

Information used to analyze the general environment can come from multiple sources: publications, observation, attendance at trade shows, or conversations with customers, suppliers, and employees of public-sector organizations. And this information can be formally gathered by individuals occupying traditional “boundary spanning” roles (such as a position in sales, purchasing, or public relations) or by assigning information-gathering responsibility to a special group or team.  


Teaching Note:  According to a recent comment by an industry analyst from a national firm, the Internet is becoming an increasingly valuable source of data and information for analyzing the general environment.  Showing students how to do this in class or via an assignment can be a very helpful exercise.

               
One strategy that firms can use to enhance their awareness of conditions in the external environment is to establish an analysis process involving scanning, monitoring, forecasting, and assessing (see Table 2.2).       


TABLE 2.2
Components of the External Environmental Analysis

Table 2.2 identifies the four components of the external environmental analysis: scanning, monitoring, forecasting, and assessing.



Scanning

Scanning entails the study of all segments in the general environment.  Firms use the scanning process to either detect early warning signals regarding potential changes or to detect changes that are already underway.  In most cases, information and data being collected or observed are ambiguous, incomplete, and appear to be unconnected.  Scanning is most important in highly volatile environments, and the scanning system should fit the organizational context (e.g., scanning systems designed for volatile environments are not suitable for firms competing in a stable environment).

               
Teaching Note: Scanning may signal a future change in the needs and lifestyles of baby boomers as they approach retirement age. This may not only provide opportunities for financial institutions as they prepare for an increase in the number of retirees, but also may provide opportunities for packagers and marketers of retirement communities and other products specifically targeted to this segment.       
               

The Internet provides significant opportunities to obtain information. For example, Amazon.com records significant information about individuals visiting its website, particularly if a purchase is made. Amazon then welcomes the individual by name when s/he visits the website again. It even sends messages to the individual about specials and new products similar to that purchased in previous visits. Additionally, many websites and advertisers on the Internet obtain information surreptitiously from those who visit their sites via the use of “cookies”.


Monitoring

Monitoring represents a process whereby analysts observe environmental changes (over time) to see if, in fact, an important trend begins to emerge.

The critical issue in monitoring is that analysts be able to detect meaning from the data and information collected during the scanning process.  (Remind students that this data is generally ambiguous, incomplete and unconnected.)  For example, in the United States, middle class African Americans are growing in number and wealth and are pursuing investment options, an opportunity in the economic segment that companies in the financial planning sector could monitor.  

Effective monitoring requires the firm to identify important stakeholders. Because the importance of different stakeholders can vary over a firm’s life cycle, careful attention must be given to the firm’s needs and its stakeholder groups over time.  Scanning and monitoring can also provide information about successfully commercializing new technologies.


Forecasting

The next step is for analysts to take the information and data gathered during the scanning and monitoring phases and attempt to project forward.  Forecasting represents the process where analysts develop feasible projections of what might happen—and how quickly—as a result of the changes and trends detected through scanning and monitoring.  Because of uncertainty, forecasting events and outcomes accurately is a challenging task.


Assessing

Assessing represents the step in the external analysis process where all of the other steps come together.  The objective of assessing is to determine the timing and significance of the effects of changes and trends in the environment on the strategic management of a firm.  Getting the strategy right will depend on the accuracy of the assessment.


Teaching Note:  It is good to alert students to the fact that a major challenge for managers and firms engaging in the process of external analysis is to recognize biases and assumptions that may affect the analysis process.  This is important, because these may limit the accuracy of forecasts and assessments.  For example, managers may choose to disregard certain information, thus missing critical indicators of future environmental changes.  Or, past experiences may prejudice the ways that opportunities or threats are perceived—if they are perceived at all.  One solution might be to solicit multiple inputs so a single source is not able to manipulate the information and to seek frequent feedback regarding the accuracy or usefulness of forecasts and assessments.       
       

4        Name and describe the general environment’s six segments.       

SEGMENTS OF THE GENERAL ENVIRONMENT

As outlined in Table 2.1, the general environment consists of six segments: demographic, economic, political/legal, sociocultural, global, and technological.  The challenge is to scan, monitor, forecast, and assess all six segments of the general environment, focusing the primary effort on those elements in each segment of the general environment that have the greatest potential impact on the firm.  


Teaching Note:  In the twenty-first century competitive landscape, analysts are cautioned against confining their analysis to domestic markets alone.  Any analysis of the general environment and its segments should recognize global elements that may have an impact on the firm.


External analysis efforts should focus on segments most important to the firm’s strategic competitiveness to identify environmental changes, trends, opportunities, and threats that can be matched with the firm’s core competencies so that it can achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.


The Demographic Segment

The demographic segment is concerned with a population’s size, age structure, geographic distribution, ethnic mix, and distribution of income.


Teaching Note:  While each of the elements of this segment are discussed below, you might note that the challenge for analysts (and managers) is to determine what the changes that have been identified in the demographic characteristics or elements of a population imply for the future strategic competitiveness of the firm.


Population Size

While population size itself may be important to firms that require a “critical mass” of potential customers, changes in the specific make-up of a population’s size may have even more critical implications.  One of the most important changes in a population’s size is changes in a nation’s birth rate and/or family size, as well as demographic changes in the population of developed versus developing countries.


Age Structure

Changes in a nation’s birth rate or life expectancy can have important implications for firms.  Are people living longer?  What is the life expectancy of infants?  These will impact the health care system (and firms serving that segment) and the development of products and services targeted to an older (or younger) population.


Geographic Distribution

Population shifts—as have occurred in the U.S.—from one region of a nation to another or from metropolitan to non-metropolitan areas may have an impact on a firm’s strategic competitiveness.  Issues that should be considered include:
•        The attractiveness of a firm’s location may be influenced by governmental support, and a shrinking population may imply a shrinking tax base and a lesser availability of official financial support.
•        Firms may have to consider relocation if tax demands require it.
•        Advances in communications technology will have a profound effect on geographic distribution and the workforce.


Ethnic Mix

This reflects the changes in the ethnic make-up of a population and has implications both for a firm’s potential customers and for the workforce.  Issues that should be addressed include:
•        Will new products and services be demanded or can existing ones be modified?
•        How will changes in the ethnicity of a population affect the composition of the workforce?
•        Are managers prepared to manage a more culturally diverse workforce?
•        How can the firm position itself to take advantage of increased workforce heterogeneity?


Income Distribution

Changes in income distribution are important because changes in the levels of individual and group purchasing power and discretionary income often result in changes in spending (consumption) and savings patterns.  Tracking, forecasting, and assessing changes in income patterns may identify new opportunities for firms.


The Economic Segment

The economic segment of the general environment refers to the nature and direction of the economy in which a firm competes or may compete.  Analysts must scan, monitor, forecast, and assess a number of key economic indicators or elements, including levels and trends of

•        inflation rates and interest rates
•        trade deficits and surpluses
•        budget deficits and surpluses
•        personal savings rates
•        business savings rates
•        gross domestic product

for both domestic and key international markets.  In addition, the implications of changes and trends in the economic segment may affect the political/legal segment both domestically and in other global markets.  This may be of critical importance as nations eliminate or reduce trade barriers and integrate their economies.


The Political/Legal Segment

The political/legal segment is the arena in which organizations and interest groups compete for attention, resources, and a voice in overseeing the body of laws and regulations guiding the interactions among nations.  In other words, this segment is concerned with how interest groups and organizations attempt to influence representatives of governments (and governmental agencies) and how they, in turn, are influenced by them.

Because of the influence that this segment can have on the nature of competition as well as on the overall profitability of industries and individual firms, analysts must assess changes and trends in administration philosophies regarding:

•        Anti-trust regulations and enforcement
•        Tax laws
•        Industry deregulation
•        Labor training laws
•        Commitments to education
•        Free trade versus protectionism

               
Teaching Note: It would be good to comment (using examples from the text or examples that may be even more current) on strategies followed by firms as they attempt to manage or influence the political/legal segment.
•        How can firms in the electric utility industry manage the costs of deregulation, including write-offs of inefficient plants?  Who will pay these costs? Consumers? Governmental units? Stockholders? Bondholders?
•        How can individual firms and industries manage the effects of free trade which will lower entry barriers for new, lower-cost competitors?  How might firms position themselves to take advantage of emerging, free-market economies?
•        What is likely to be the competitive impact of loosening governmental controls in the entertainment industry? In the telecommunications industry? What strategies can firms use to manage or influence deregulation to their advantage?
       

The Sociocultural Segment

The sociocultural segment is concerned with different societies’ social attitudes and cultural values.  This segment is important because the attitudes and values of society influence and thus are reflected in changes in a society’s economic, demographic, political/legal, and technological segments.

Analysts are especially cautioned to pay attention to sociocultural changes and effects that they may have on:

•        Workforce composition—and the implications for managing—resulting from an increase in the number of women, and increased ethnic and cultural diversity
•        Changes in attitudes about the growing number of contingency workers
•        Shifts in population toward suburban life, and resulting transportation issues  
•        Shifts in work and career preferences, including a trend to work from home made possible by technology advances


The Technological Segment

As noted in many of the other segments of the general environment—and as discussed in Chapter 1 as a key driver of the new competitive landscape—technological changes can have broad effects on society.  The technological segment includes institutions and activities involved with creating new knowledge and translating that knowledge into new outputs, products, processes, and materials.

Firms should pay careful attention to the technological segment, since early adopters can gain market share and above average returns.

Important technology-related issues that might affect a broad variety of firms include:
•        Increasing plant automation
•        Internet technologies and their application to commerce and data gathering
•        Uses of wireless technology


The Global Segment

As discussed in Chapter 1, the 21st-century competitive landscape requires that firms also must analyze global factors.  Among the global factors that should be assessed are:
•        The potential impact of significant international events such as peace in the Middle East or the recent entry of China into the WTO
•        The identification of both important emerging global markets and global markets that are changing  
•        The trend toward increasing global outsourcing
•        The differences between cultural and institutional attributes of individual global markets (the focus in Korea on inhwa, or harmony, based on respect for hierarchical relationships and obedience to authority; the focus in China on guanxi, or personal relationships; the focus in Japan on wa, or group harmony/social cohesion)
•        Global market expansion opportunities
•        The opportunities to learn from doing business in other countries
•        Expanding access to the resources firms need for success (e.g., capital)




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Does Google Have the Market Power to Ignore External Pressures?

Google has become a “generic” like Kleenex, Xerox, and Jell-O.  Internet users of all ages “Google” regardless of the search engine used.  Currently, Google is the most widely used Internet search engine. However, has its strategy of “search with content” been the catalyst to return Google to the real world?  Viacom has filed a $1 billion copyright infringement lawsuit against Google and YouTube, a subsidiary of Google.  In addition to Viacom, a number of other firms, including Microsoft, have filed copyright infringement lawsuits.  Google’s image has been tarnished.  The investment community no longer considers Google to be a hot company.  As a result, Google’s stock price has fallen.  Google now has rivals, and it is getting attention from the government.  

There is strong similarity between Google’s above plight and that of Wal-Mart referenced earlier in this chapter. Both firms have been challenged with pressure from their respective political and legal environments.  Google’s competitors will realize the benefits of alleged copyright snafus, as Google’s advertiser customer-base begins to jump ship.  Investor interests reflect the same concerns as those of advertisers. Both cases reflect that elements of the environment can change rather quickly and consequently change a firm’s perceived competitive advantage.      


5        Identify the five competitive forces and explain how they determine an industry’s profit potential.       

INDUSTRY ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS

An industry is a group of firms producing products that are close substitutes for each other.  As they compete for market share, the strategies implemented by these companies influence each other and include a broad mix of competitive strategies as each company pursues strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.

It should be noted that, unlike the general environment which has an indirect effect on strategic competitiveness and firm profitability, the effect of the industry environment is more direct.  Industry—and individual firm—profitability and the intensity of competition in an industry are a function of five competitive forces as presented in Figure 2.2.

               
Figure Note: Students should refer to Figure 2.2 as it provides a framework that can be used to analyze competition in an industry.  A broader discussion of the five competitive forces and other factors follows Figure 2.2.               


FIGURE 2.2
The Five Forces Model of Competition

The Five Forces Model of Competition indicates that these forces interact to determine the intensity or strength of competition, which ultimately determines the profitability of the industry.


•        Threat of New Entrants
•        Threat of Substitute Products
•        Bargaining Power of Buyers (Customers)
•        Bargaining Power of Suppliers
•        Rivalry Among Competing Firms in an industry




Assessing the relative strength of the five competitive forces is important to a firm’s ability to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.

Viewed differently, competition should be seen as groupings of alternative ways that customers can obtain desired results.  Thus, any analysis of an industry must expand beyond the traditional practice of concentrating on direct competitors to include potential competitors.  For example:
•        Suppliers can become competitors by integrating forward.
•        Buyers or customers can become competitors by integrating backward.
•        Firms that are not competitors today could produce products that serve as substitutes for existing products offered by firms in an industry, transforming themselves into competitors.


Threat of New Entrants

New entrants to an industry are important because, with new competitors, the intensity of competitive rivalry in an industry generally increases.  This is because new competitors may bring substantial resources into the industry and may be interested in capturing a significant market share.  If a new competitor brings additional capacity to the industry when product demand is not increasing, prices that can be charged to consumers generally will fall.  One result may be a decline in sales and lower returns for many firms in the industry.

               
Teaching Note: To help students grasp the potential impact of new entrants on an industry, it is helpful to illustrate this effect by referring to a number of examples that may be familiar to them, such as:
•        the transformation of the steel industry when mini-mills (such as Nucor and Birmingham Steel) entered the industry in competition with integrated domestic producers such as U.S. Steel and Bethlehem Steel
•        the impact of the increase in the number of cell phone providers on the cost of having a cell phone (and the long-range, potential impact on the cost of local telephone service)
•        the increase in the number of Internet access providers and the effects of increased competition on such firms as CompuServe and America Online
       
               
The seriousness or extent of the threat of new entrants is affected by two factors: barriers to entry and expected reactions from—or the potential for retaliation by—incumbent firms in the industry.


Barriers to Entry

Barriers to entering an industry are present when entry is difficult or when it is too costly and places potential entrants at a competitive disadvantage (relative to firms already competing in the industry).  There are seven factors that represent potentially significant entry barriers that can emerge as an industry evolves or might be explicitly “erected” by current participants in the industry to protect profitability by deterring new competitors from entry.  


Economies of Scale refers to the relationship between quantity produced and unit cost: As the quantity of a product produced during a given time period increases, the cost of manufacturing each unit declines.

Economies of scale can serve as an entry barrier when existing firms in the industry have achieved these scale economies and a potential new entrant is only able to enter the industry on a small scale (and produce at a higher cost per unit).

Economies of scale can be overcome as a potential entry barrier by firms that produce multiple customized products or that enter an industry on a large-enough scale.  New manufacturing technology facilitated by advanced information systems has allowed the development of “mass customization” in an increasing number of industries, and online ordering has enhanced the ability of customers to obtain customized products (often referred to as “markets of one.”)


Product Differentiation: Customers may perceive that products offered by existing firms in the industry are unique as a result of service offered, effective advertising campaigns, or being first to offer a product of service to the market.  If customers perceive a product or service as unique, they generally are loyal to that brand.  Thus, new entrants may be required to spend a great deal of money over a long period of time to overcome customer loyalty to existing products.

While new entrants may be able to overcome perceived uniqueness and brand loyalty, the cost of such strategies generally will be high: offering lower prices, adding additional features, or allocating significant funds to a major advertising and promotion campaign.  In the short run, new entrants that try to overcome uniqueness and brand loyalty may suffer lower profits or may be forced to operate at a loss.


Capital Requirements: Firms choosing to enter any industry must commit resources for facilities, to purchase inventory, to pay salaries and benefits, etc.  While entry may seem attractive (because there are no apparent barriers to entry), a potential new entrant may not have sufficient capital to enter the industry.


Switching Costs:  These are the one-time costs customers will incur when buying from a different supplier.  These can include such explicit costs as retraining of employees or retooling of equipment as well as the psychological cost of changing relationships. Incumbent firms in the industry generally try to establish switching costs to offset new entrants that try to win customers with substantially lower prices or an improved (or, to some extent, different) product.


Access to Distribution Channels: As existing firms in an industry generally have developed effective channels for distributing products, these same channels may not be available to new firms entering an industry.  Thus, access (or lack thereof) may serve as an effective barrier to entry.

This may be particularly true for consumer nondurable goods (e.g., because of the limited amount of shelf  space available in retail stores) and in international markets.  In the case of some durable goods or industrial products, to overcome the barrier, new entrants must again incur costs in excess of those paid by existing firms, either through lower prices or price breaks, costly promotion campaigns, or advertising allowances.  New entrants may have to incur significant costs to establish a proprietary distribution channel.  As in the case of product differentiation or uniqueness barriers, new entrants may suffer lower profits or operate at a loss as they battle to gain access to distribution channels.


Cost Disadvantages Independent of Scale:  Existing firms in an industry often are able to achieve cost advantages that cannot be costlessly duplicated by new entrants (i.e., other than those related to economies of scale and access to distribution channels).  These can include proprietary process (or product) technology, more favorable access to or control of raw materials, the best locations, or favorable government subsidies.

Potential entrants must find ways to overcome these disadvantages to be able to effectively compete in the industry.  This may mean successfully adapting technologies from other industries and/or non-competing products for use in the target industry, developing new sources of raw materials, making product (or service) enhancements to overcome location-related disadvantages, or selling at a lower price to attract customers.


Government Policy: Governments (at all levels) are able to control entry into an industry through licensing and permit requirements.  For example, at the firm level, entry into the banking industry is regulated at both the federal and state levels, while liquor sales are regulated at the state and local levels.  In some cases, state and/or federal licensing requirements limit entry into the personal services industry (securities sales and law), while in others only state requirements may limit entry (barbers and beauticians).


Teaching Note:  Students should be reminded of the monopolistic nature (on a market-by-market basis) of the public utility industry, including local telephone service, water, electric power, and cable television.  The “regulated monopolies” will provide helpful illustrations to make sense of this section.


Expected Retaliation

Even if a firm concludes that it can successfully overcome all of the entry barriers, it still must take into account or anticipate reactions that might be expected from existing firms.

Strong retaliation is likely when existing firms have a heavy investment in fixed assets (especially when there are few alternative uses for those assets) or when industry growth is slow or declining.  Retaliation could take the form of announcements of anticipated future investments to increase capacity, new product plans, price-cutting or a study to assess the impact of lower prices (this might imply price-cutting as a “promised” entry barrier-creation strategy by existing firms).

Small entrepreneurial firms can avoid retaliation by identifying and serving neglected market segments. For example, Honda first entered the U.S. market by concentrating on small-engine motorcycles, a market that firms such as Harley-Davidson ignored.  After consolidating its position, Honda went on the offensive by introducing larger motorcycles and competing in the broader market.

               
Teaching Note: To illustrate competitive retaliation, consider the example of the potential for increased competition in the 24-hour news market that had at one time been monopolized by CNN (Cable News Network).
•        The BBC is establishing a global news network.
•        NBC formed an alliance with Microsoft to implement its 24-hour news network, MSNBC, including a parallel site on the World Wide Web.
•        Capital Cities/ABC launched a 24-hour news service, using ABC News anchors and correspondents.


Bargaining Power of Suppliers

The bargaining power of suppliers depends on suppliers’ economic bargaining power relative to firms competing in the industry.  Suppliers are powerful when firm profitability is reduced by suppliers’ actions.  Suppliers can exert their power by raising prices or by restricting the quantity and/or quality of goods available for sale.

Suppliers are powerful relative to firms competing in the industry when:

•        the supplier segment of the industry is dominated by a few large companies and is more concentrated than the industry to which it sells
•        satisfactory substitute products are not available to industry firms
•        industry firms are not a significant customer group for the supplier group
•        suppliers’ goods are critical to buyers’ marketplace success
•        effectiveness of suppliers’ products has created high switching costs for buyers
•        suppliers represent a credible threat to integrate forward into the buyers’ industry, especially when suppliers have substantial resources and provide highly differentiated products

In the airline industry, suppliers’ bargaining power is changing. There are few suppliers, but demand for the major aircraft is also low. Boeing and Airbus compete strongly for most orders of major aircraft. However, China recently announced plans to enter the market by building large commercial aircraft, significant in a country which is projected to purchase thousands.


Bargaining Power of Buyers

While firms seek to maximize their return on invested capital, buyers are interested in purchasing products at the lowest possible price (the price at which sellers will earn the lowest acceptable return).  To reduce cost or maximize value, customers bargain for higher quality or greater levels of service at the lowest possible price by encouraging competition among firms in the industry.

Buyer groups are powerful relative to firms competing in the industry when:

•        buyers are important to sellers because they purchase a large portion of the supply industry’s total sales
•        products purchased from a supply industry represent a significant portion of the seller’s annual revenues
•        buyers are able to switch to another supplier’s product at little, if any, cost
•        suppliers’ products are undifferentiated and standardized, and the buyers represent a real threat to integrate backwards into the suppliers’ industry using resources or expertise

Armed with greater amounts of information about the manufacturer’s costs and the power of the Internet as a shopping and distribution alternative, consumers appear to be increasing their bargaining power in many industries. One reason for this shift is that individual buyers incur virtually zero switching costs when they decide to purchase from one manufacturer rather than another or from one dealer as opposed to a second or third one.


Threat of Substitute Products

All firms must recognize that they compete against firms producing substitute products, those products that are capable of satisfying similar customer needs but come from outside the industry and thus have different characteristics.  In effect, prices charged for substitute products represent the upper limit on the prices that suppliers can charge for their products.

The threat of substitute products is greatest when:

•        buyers or customers face few, if any switching costs
•        prices of the substitute products are lower
•        quality and performance capabilities of substitutes are equal to/greater than those of the industry’s products

Firms can offset the attractiveness of substitute products by differentiating their products in ways that are perceived by customers as relevant.  Viable strategies might include price, product quality, product features, location, or service level.





Examples of Traditional and Substitute Products, and Their Usage

Traditional product        Substitute product        Usage
Overnight delivery         Fax machines/e-mail        Document delivery
Sugar        NutraSweet        Sweetener
Glass        Plastic        Containers
Coffee        Tea         Beverages
Paper bags        Plastic bags        Flexible packaging


Intensity of Rivalry among Competitors

The intensity of rivalry in an industry depends upon the extent to which firms in an industry compete with one another to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns because success is measured relative to other firms in the industry. Competition can be based on price, quality, or innovation.

Because of the interrelated nature of firms’ actions, action taken by one firm generally will result in retaliation by competitors (also known as competitive response).  In addition to actions and reactions that result as firms attempt to offset the other competitive forces in the industry—threat of new entry, power of suppliers and buyers, and threat of substitute products—the intensity of competitive rivalry is also a function of a number of other factors.




Numerous or Equally Balanced Competitors

Industries with a high number of firms can be characterized by intense rivalry when firms feel that they can make competitive moves that will go unnoticed by other firms in the industry.  However, other firms will generally notice these moves and offer countermoves of their own in response.  Patterns of frequent actions and reactions often result in intense rivalry, such as in local restaurant, retailing, or dry-cleaning industries.

Rivalry also will be intense in an industry that has only a few firms of equivalent resources and power.  The firms’ resource bases enable each to take frequent action to improve their competitive positions which, in turn, produces a reaction or countermove by competitors.  Battles for market share in the fast food industry between McDonald’s and Burger King; in the automobile industry between such firms as General Motors, Ford, and Toyota; and in athletic shoes between Nike and Reebok are examples of intense rivalry between relatively equivalent competitors. Of course, Boeing versus Airbus is an especially useful example.


Slow Industry Growth

When a market is growing at a level where there seem to be “enough customers for everyone,” competition generally centers around effective use of resources so that a firm can effectively serve a larger, growing customer base.  Because of sufficient growth in the market, firms do not concentrate on taking customers away from other firms.

The intensity of competition often results in a reduction in industry profitability as observed in the fast food industry with the battle for a slower growing traditional, U.S. customer base between McDonald’s, Burger King, and Wendy’s.  The intensity of competition can be illustrated by the various competitive strategies followed by firms in the fast food industry:

•        rapid and continuous introduction of new products and new packaging schemes
•        the introduction of innovative-pricing strategies
•        product and/or service differentiation

High Fixed Costs or High Storage Costs

When an industry is characterized by high fixed costs relative to total costs, firms produce in quantities that are sufficient to use a large percentage, if not all of their production capacity so that fixed costs can be spread over the maximum volume of output.  While this may lower per unit costs, it also can result in excess supply if market growth is not sufficient to absorb the excess inventory.  The intensity of competitive rivalry increases as firms use price reductions, rebates, and other discounts or special terms to reduce inventory as observed in the automobile industry from the 1980s to the present.

High storage costs, especially those related to perishable or time-sensitive products (such as fruits and vegetables) also can result in high levels of competitive intensity as such products rapidly lose their value if not sold within a given time period.  Pricing strategies often are used to sell such products.


Lack of Differentiation or Low Switching Costs

Products that are not characterized by brand loyalty or perceived uniqueness are generally viewed by buyers as commodities.  For such products, industry rivalry is more intense and competition is based primarily on price, service, and other features of interest to consumers.

Switching costs can be used to decrease the likelihood that customers will switch to competitors’ products.  Products for which customers incur no or few switching costs are subject to intense price- and service-based competition, similar to undifferentiated products.


High Strategic Stakes

The intensity of competitive rivalry increases when success in an industry is important to a large number of firms (such as the domestic airline industry following deregulation).  For example, the success of a diversified firm may be important to its effectiveness in other industries, especially when the firm is in interdependent or related industries.   

Geographic stakes may also be high.  The importance of geographic stakes can be illustrated by the intense rivalry in the U.S. automobile industry as Japanese manufacturers recognized the strategic importance of a U.S. marketplace presence and U.S. manufacturers responded.


High Exit Barriers

Exit barriers—created by economic, strategic, and emotional factors that cause companies to remain in an industry, even though the profitability of doing so is in question—also can increase the intensity of competition in an industry.  The higher the barriers to exit, the greater the probability that competitive actions and reactions will include price cuts and extensive promotions.

Some sources of exit barriers include:

•        investments in specialized assets, or assets whose value is linked to use in a particular industry or location, with little or no value as salvage or in other uses
•        fixed costs of exit, such as labor agreements or a requirement to repay federal, state or local aid packages
•        strategic relationships, interdependencies within the organization (e.g., shared facilities, market access)
•        emotional barriers, such as loyalty to employees or fear for one’s own career
•        government and/or social restrictions based on concern for job losses or the economic impact of exit

               
Teaching Note: The firm that was formerly Greyhound Corporation has been transformed over the years into what is today a very different looking Dial Corporation.  Of course, the firm was at one time so well known for its bus lines that we now use the term “greyhound bus” as a generic term referring to a general design of bus.  Dial Corp. sold the bus lines to a Dallas, Texas concern a number of years ago, but in fact the firm held on to the transportation unit through a number of years of poor performance, long after the unit lost its fit with the Dial portfolio.  Why did the firm do this?  Some would say it was because the firm had an emotional attachment to the business that got it all started.       
               

Teaching Note:  One way to get students to recognize the industry forces Porter presents is to allow them to learn about a given industry and report on these forces as they see them and assess their strength.  For example, one adopter of the text shows students the first segment of a PBS video series by Daniel Yergin called “The Prize.”  This one-hour video profiles the formation of the oil industry and its rapid transformation in the early days.  Students are asked to identify as many illustrations of “Porter’s Five Forces in action” as they watch the video (e.g., profits were much greater early in the first part of the industry’s first decade than in the last years of that period because barriers to entry were low and the rapid influx of new entrants expanded supply and depressed prices).  As an incentive for diligent observation, the student who identifies the greatest number of legitimate illustrations is rewarded with bonus points.


INTERPRETING INDUSTRY ANALYSES

Effective industry analyses are products of careful study and interpretation of data from multiple sources.  Because of globalization, international markets and rivalry must be included in the firm’s analyses; in fact, research shows international variables may have more impact on strategic competitiveness than domestic ones, in some cases.

Following study of the five industry forces, the firm has the insights required to determine an industry’s attractiveness in terms of the potential to earn adequate or superior returns on its invested capital. In general, the stronger the competitive forces, the lower the profit potential for an industry’s firms. An unattractive industry has low entry barriers, suppliers and buyers with strong bargaining positions, strong competitive threats from product substitutes, and intense rivalry among competitors, which make it difficult for firms to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns.  An attractive industry has the mirror image of these features and offers little potential for favorable performance.


Teaching Note: A good example of the need to understand the global structure of the industry and the implications for competitive strategy is illustrated by the intensity of global competition for market share between Kimberly-Clark and Procter & Gamble (P&G). The former attempts to compete more effectively with P&G in Europe, as well as in emerging markets, while maintaining its dominant U.S. position.


Characteristics of attractive and unattractive industries are summarized below.       

Industry Characteristic        Attractive        Unattractive
Threat of New Entry        Low        High
Bargaining Power of Suppliers        Low        High
Bargaining Power of Buyers        Low        High
Threat of Substitute Products        Low        High
Intensity of Competitive Rivalry        Low        High


Teaching Note: It may be helpful to explain that the relationship between the strength of industry forces and prices/profits in the industry is an inverse one.  When the forces are strong, prices/profits in the industry tend to be low, whereas weak forces usually lead to higher prices/profits. The mental image is one of a playground “teeter-totter” or balance scale.


6        Define strategic groups and describe their influence on the firm.       

STRATEGIC GROUPS

As implied by the previous discussion, not all firms in an industry may adopt the same strategies in their quest for strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.  However, many firms in an industry may follow similar strategies.  These firms are generally classified as strategic groups, or groups of firms in an industry following the same or similar strategies along the same strategic dimensions.

Membership in a particular strategic group is determined by the essential characteristics of a firm’s strategy, which may include the

•        extent of technological leadership
•        degree of product quality
•        pricing policies
•        choice of distribution channels
•        degree and type of customer service       


Teaching Note: It may be helpful to assign students (or students teams) the task of developing a strategic group map of an industry with which they are familiar (e.g., fast food, automobile manufacturing, computers, or the financial services industry).       
               

Teaching Note: Many strategy experts believe that the strategic group concept provides a useful tool for analyzing an industry from firm-specific perspectives in order to learn how to compete successfully.  However, some critics indicate that there is no convincing evidence that (1) strategic groups exist or (2) that firm performance is dependent upon membership in a particular group.  Others contend that little additional understanding can be gained from industry analysis by looking at strategic groups, but recent research provides some evidence to support the usefulness of this analysis.       
               

The strategic group concept can be useful in analyzing the competitive structure of an industry and can serve as a framework for assessing competition, positioning alternatives, and potential profitability of firms in an industry.  

High mobility barriers, high rivalry, and low resources among the firms within an industry will limit the formation of strategic groups. However, research suggests that once formed, strategic group membership remains relatively stable over time, making analysis easier and more useful.

Use of the strategic group concept requires that analysts be aware of several implications:
•        A firm’s major or primary competitors are those in its strategic group, thus competitive rivalry within the strategic group is expected to be more intense than rivalry with other firms in the industry.
•        The relative strengths of the five competitive forces will differ among groups, thus firms in different groups may adopt different competitive strategies.
•        The closer the strategic groups on the relevant dimensions, the greater the likelihood of their rivalry.


7        Describe what firms need to know about their competitors and different methods (including ethical standards) used to collect intelligence about them.       


STRATEGIC FOCUS
IBM Closely Watches Its Competitors to Stay at the Top of Its Game

Here’s an excellent example of effective competitive intelligence. You’ll realize that there are no cloak and dagger tactics involved, nor is there anything clandestine about competitive information gathering.  IBM has effectively monitored and analyzed marketing strategies that its key competitors are applying in the market place.  IBM not only manufactures and sells mainframes, servers, storage systems, and peripherals but also has the largest computer service operation in the world. Service accounts for over 50 percent of IBM’s total revenue.  IBM has established a competitive analysis team for the sole purpose of monitoring and analyzing its competitors.  The output from this group allows IBM to adjust strategies and business plans to effectively compete with competitors such as Sun Microsystems and Hewlett-Packard. Examples of meaningful information generated by this team include learning that Sun’s direct sales team focuses on the top 1500 accounts in its customer base and that the remaining installed base is served by Sun’s business partners.  Another significant finding that affects IBM marketing strategy is that Sun also concentrates on hardware sales rather than selling solutions.  The IBM team also determined that HP operates in a similar fashion as an equipment supplier relying on its hardware customers to seek support from third parties such as Cisco, Accenture, EDS, and HP retailers.   

Existing competitors often try to develop barriers to entry to protect their commercial interests, but sometimes the rivalry comes from outside the established set of players.  As seen in this Strategic Focus, cable firms are entering the phone service business, and local firms such as SBC Communications are taking measures to prevent customer loss/turnover.  What can be done to protect the firm from outside attacks?  Differentiating a product along dimensions that customers value (such as price, quality, service after the sale, and location) reduces a substitute’s attractiveness.  Local phone server companies have lost significant subscriber base to cable companies offering phone services.  Similarly, cable companies have lost TV subscriber base to satellite TV operators.  Each company has been using a bundling approach to increase switching costs to forestall these substitutions.  But it could be argued that the focus should be on creating value for the customer, rather than simply blocking them from accessing greater value from some other option.




COMPETITOR ANALYSIS

Competitor analysis represents a necessary adjunct to performing an industry analysis.  An industry analysis provides information regarding potential sources of competition (including the possible strategic actions and reactions and effects on profitability for all firms competing in an industry).  However, a structured competitor analysis enables the firm to focus its attention on those firms with which it will directly compete, and is especially important when a firm faces a few powerful competitors.

Competitor analysis is interested ultimately in developing a profile on how competitors might be expected to respond to a firm’s strategic moves.  The process involves developing answers to a series of questions about:

•        the firm’s and its competitors’ future objectives
•        current strategy
•        assumptions
•        capabilities

               
Teaching Note: To help students understand the usefulness of competitor analysis, have them develop a profile of another university or college, assume the role of a Pepsi product manager and develop a competitive profile of Coca-Cola, or take the perspective of Intel and describe AMD’s competitive characteristics. A specific case that contains the bulk of the required information also could be used to perform an in-class competitor analysis.

Another significant component are the complementors of a firm’s products and strategy. These are the networks of companies that sell goods and services compatible with the firms own product or service.       
               

ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS

A major concern of many managers is the methods that are used to gather data on competitors, a process generally referred to as competitor intelligence.  The illustration of Microsoft’s struggle to understand Google is especially helpful in explaining this concept. It is a great managerial challenge to ensure that all data and information related to competitors is gathered both legally and ethically.  This is important because many employees may feel pressure to rely on techniques that are questionable from an ethical perspective to gather information that may be valuable to their firm, especially if they perceive value to their own careers from successfully obtaining such information.

It seems obvious that information that (1) is either publicly available (annual reports, regulatory filings, brochures, advertising and promotional materials) or (2) is obtained by attending trade shows and conventions can be used without ethical or legal implications.  However, information obtained illegally (as a result of activities such as theft, blackmail, or eavesdropping) cannot—or, at least, should not—be used since its use is unethical as well as illegal.

               
Teaching Note: It might be useful and insightful to require students to develop (and bring to class) their own lists of questionable intelligence-gathering techniques or formulate an argument as to the circumstances (if any) under which these techniques might be considered ethical. This could make for a lively discussion of the issue.         
               

—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        Why is it important for a firm to study and understand the external environment? (pp. 34-35)

The external environment influences the firm’s strategic options as well as the decisions made in light of them.  The firm’s understanding of the external environment is especially useful when it is matched with knowledge about its internal environment.  Matching the conditions of the two environments is the foundation the firm needs to form its vision, mission, and to take strategic actions in the pursuit of strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.  The importance of understanding the external environment is further underscored by the fact that the environmental conditions facing firms in the global economy of the 21st century differ from those firms faced previously.  For example, technological changes and the explosion in information gathering and processing capabilities demand more timely and effective competitive actions and responses.  The rapid sociological changes occurring in many countries affect labor practices and the nature of products demanded by increasingly diverse consumers.  Governmental policies and laws affect where and how firms choose to compete.  Competitive advantage goes to those firms who know their external environment and plan their strategies so they are relevant to these conditions.

2.        What are the differences between the general environment and the industry environment?  Why are these differences important? (pp. 35-36)

The general environment represents those elements in the broader society that can influence all (or most) industries and the firms that compete in those industries; it represents elements or segments that firms cannot directly control.  The general environment is composed of the following segments: demographic, economic, political/legal, sociocultural, technological, and global segments.

The industry environment is the constellation of factors that directly influences a firm and its competitive actions and responses.  Firms are influenced by these factors and should attempt to establish a position in the industry that enables the firm to favorably influence the factors or to successfully defend against the factors’ influence.  These factors are: threat of new entrants, bargaining power of suppliers, bargaining power of buyers, threat from substitute products, and intensity of rivalry among competitors.

3.        What is the external environmental analysis process? What does the firm want to learn when using this process? (p. 37-39)

The environmental analysis process represents an organized attempt by the firm to better understand turbulent, complex, and global environments.  This is achieved by scanning (studying all segments of the general environment to identify existing or potential changes), monitoring (observing the pattern of changes over time in an attempt to detect meaning or identify trends), forecasting (developing feasible projections of what might happen, and how quickly, as a result of changes and trends identified from scanning and monitoring activities) and assessing (determining the timing and significance of environmental changes and trends on the strategic management of the firm).  Stated differently, this analysis should examine and process external data on a continuous basis.

An important objective of the environmental analysis process is to identify potential threats (conditions that may hinder the firm’s efforts to achieve strategic competitiveness) and opportunities (that may assist or help the firm in its efforts to achieve strategic competitiveness).

4.        What are the six segments of the general environment? Explain the differences among them.  (pp. 40-47)

The demographic segment is concerned with characteristics of the population or society that makes up the general environment.  Characteristics of interest are size, age, structure, geographic distribution, ethnic mix, and income distribution.

The economic segment refers to the nature and direction of the economy in which a firm competes or may compete in the future.  Important characteristics include inflation and interest rates, trade deficits (or surpluses), budget deficits (or surpluses), individual and business savings and investment rates, and gross domestic product.

The political/legal segment is the arena in which organizations and interest groups compete for attention, resources, and a voice in overseeing the body of laws and regulations guiding interactions between nations. In other words, this segment is concerned with how firms and other organizations attempt to influence government and how governmental entities in turn influence them.

The sociocultural segment is concerned with the social attitudes and cultural values of different societies.

The technological segment is made up of the institutions and activities involved with creating new knowledge and translating that knowledge into new outputs, products, processes, or materials.

The global segment includes relevant new global markets and existing ones that are changing, important international political events, and critical cultural and institutional characteristics of relevant global markets.  This segment recognizes that firms now compete in a competitive landscape where both competitors and customers are global, due in part to the rapid diffusion of both information and technology.  Competitors will no longer be domestic; they can originate from industrialized, newly industrialized, or emerging countries.  Customer demands and expectations have changed; they are based on an ever-increasing awareness of global products and services.

5.        How do the five forces of competition in an industry affect its profit potential?  Explain.  (pp. 48-55)

An industry’s competitive intensity and profit potential can be determined by the relative strengths of five competitive forces. This model of industry competition recognizes that suppliers can influence industry profitability by raising prices or reducing the quality of goods sold if industry participants are unable to recover cost increases through pricing structures.  Buyers can influence the profit potential of an industry if the buyer group is able to successfully bargain for higher quality, greater levels of service, and lower prices. Substitute products influence an industry’s profit potential by placing an upper limit on prices that can be charged.  New entrants to an industry influence industry profitability because they bring additional production capacity to the industry.  Unless product demand is increasing, additional capacity holds down (or reduces) buyers’ costs, reducing profitability for all firms in the industry.  The intensity of rivalry among competitors reflects competitor actions and responses as firms initiate moves to improve their competitive position or when they act in retaliation for competitive pressures brought about by the strategic actions of rival firms.  Generally, the greater the intensity of competitive rivalry, the lower the overall profitability of an industry.

6.        What is a strategic group?  Of what value is knowledge of the firm’s strategic group in formulating that firm’s strategy? (pp. 55-56)

A strategic group is a group of firms within an industry that generally follow the same (or a similar) strategy, competing along the same strategic dimensions (such as product quality, pricing policy, distribution channels, or level of customer service).

The strategic group concept is valuable to a firm’s strategic decision makers because a firm’s primary competitors are those within its strategic group (all group members are selling similar products to a similar group of customers), the strengths of the five competitive forces varies across strategic groups, and strategic groups that are similar (in terms of strategies followed and competitive dimensions emphasized) increases the possibility of increased competitive rivalry between the groups.

The notion of strategic groups can be useful for analyzing an industry’s competitive structure.  Such analyses can be helpful in diagnosing competition, positioning, and the profitability of firms within an industry.   Strategic group analysis shows which companies are competing similarly in terms of how they use similar strategic dimensions.  At the same time, research has found that strategic groups differ in performance, suggesting their importance.  Strategic group membership also remains relatively stable over time, making analysis easier and more useful.

Strategic groups have several implications. First, because firms within a group offer similar products to the same customers, the competitive rivalry among them can be intense. The more intense the rivalry, the greater the threat to each firm’s profitability. Second, the strengths of the five industry forces (the threats posed by new entrants, the power of suppliers, the power of buyers, product substitutes, and the intensity of rivalry among competitors) differ across strategic groups. Third, the closer the strategic groups are in terms of their strategies, the greater is the likelihood of rivalry between the groups. In the end, having a thorough understanding of primary competitors helps a firm formulate and implement an appropriate strategy.

7.        What is the importance of collecting and interpreting data and information about competitors? What practices should a firm use to gather competitive intelligence and why? (pp. 58-60)

Competitor analysis can help the firm to understand and better anticipate competitors’ future objectives, current strategies, assumptions, and capabilities.  The firm should gather intelligence about its competitors as well as about public policies in countries across the world, which can serve as an early warning of threats and opportunities emerging from the global public policy environment that may affect the achievement of the company’s strategy.  Through effective competitive and public policy intelligence, the firm gains the insights needed to create a competitive advantage and to increase the quality of the strategic decisions it makes when deciding how to compete against its rivals.

Firms want to know how competitor intelligence is gathered to determine whether the practices employed are legal and, further, to assess whether these methods are ethical, given the firm’s culture and the image it desires as a corporate citizen.  The line between legal and ethical practices can be difficult to ascertain, especially when it comes to electronic transmissions.  Often it is difficult for a firm to know how to gather intelligence and how to prevent competitors from gathering competitive intelligence that may threaten its own competitive advantage.

Openly discussing intelligence-gathering techniques that the firm employs goes a long way toward assuring that people understand the firm’s convictions about what is ethical and acceptable for use and what is not ethical and is unacceptable for use when gathering competitor intelligence.  The firm can frame these practices in terms of respect for the principles of common morality and the right of competitors not to reveal information about their products, operations, and strategic intentions.

Despite its importance, evidence suggests that a relatively small percentage of firms use formal processes to study competitors.  Beyond this, some firms fail to analyze a competitor’s future objectives when trying to understand its current strategy, assumptions, and capabilities, but it is important to study the present and the future when examining competitors.  Failure to do so may lead to incomplete or distorted insights about competitors.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Airline Competitor Analysis

The International Air Transport Association (IATA) reports statistics on the number of passengers carried each year by major airlines.  Passenger data for 2006 is reported for the top ten fliers in three categories:
        Domestic flights  
        International flights  
        Combined traffic, domestic and international flights
The table below lists both passenger data and rankings for each category.  


        Int'l        Int'l         Domestic        Domestic        Combined        Combined
Airline        Ranking        Passengers        Ranking        Passengers        Ranking        Passengers
Air France        3        30,417                          7        49,411
All Nippon Airlines                          6        45,328        8        49,226
American Airlines        7        21,228        2        78,607        1        99,835
British Airways        4        29,498                                    
Cathay Pacific        10        16667                               
China Southern Airlines                          7        45,249        10        48,512
Continental Airlines                          9        35,852                  
Delta Airlines                          3        63,446        3        73,584
Easyjet        6        21,917                                    
Emirates        9        16,748                                    
Japan Airlines Int'l                          8        37,154        9        48,911
KLM        5        22,322                                    
Lufthansa        2        38,236                          6        51,213
Northwest Airlines                          5        45,743        5        55,925
Ryanair        1        40,532                                    
Singapore Airlines        8        18,022                                    
Southwest Airlines                          1        96,277        2        96,277
United Airlines                          4        58,801        4        69,265
US Airways                          10        32,094                  

For this exercise, you will develop competitor profiles of selected air carriers.

Part One

Working in groups of five to seven people, each team member selects one airline from the table.  The pool of selected airlines should contain a roughly even balance of three regions: North America, Europe/Middle East, and Asia.  Using outside resources, answer the following questions:

        What drives this competitor (i.e., what are their objectives)?  
        What is their current strategy?
        What does this competitor believe about their industry?
        What are their strengths and weaknesses?

When researching your companies, you should use multiple resources.  The company’s Website is a good starting point.  Public firms headquartered in the U.S. will also have annual reports and 10-K reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.  

Part Two

As a group, summarize the results of each competitor profile into a single table.  Then, discuss the following topics:

        Which airlines in your group had the most similar strategies?  The most different?  Would you consider any of the firms you studied to be in the same strategic group – i.e., a group of firms that follow similar strategies along similar dimensions?
        Create a composite five forces model based on the firms you reviewed.  How might these elements of industry structure (e.g., substitutes, or bargaining power of buyers) differ from the perspective of individual airlines?
        How well do the strategies of these airlines fit with their industry and general environments?  Which airlines do you expect to advance in passenger rankings, and which will lose ground?


Exercise 2: The Oracle at Delphi

In ancient Greece, people traveled to the temple at Delphi when they had important questions about the future.  A priestess, who was ostensibly a direct connection to the god Apollo, would answer these questions in the form of a riddle.  Today, executives are still faced with significant challenges in predicting the future, albeit with very different processes.  

Many strategies rely in part on qualitative forecasts and untested assumptions, simply because hard data may not exist, or because the data may be of poor quality.  Such problems are particularly common in new product segments (e.g., early stages of the Internet), or in emerging economies (e.g., when Western firms first started selling in China).  When making a subjective forecast, it is often helpful to rely on multiple opinions and perspectives.  However, group discussions can often be skewed if some participants are more vocal than others, or if group members differ by status.  The Delphi Method provides a process for helping a group to reach consensus while minimizing individual biases.  

The decision process starts with the selection of a question, or set of questions.  A facilitator is designated to manage the process, and a group of experts is selected to provide input. The facilitator polls each expert, and creates a summary of the responses.  The summary is then sent back to the expert pool, and each person is given the opportunity to revise their estimates.  This process repeats until the summary scores have stabilized.

Part One

Select one group member to serve as facilitator.  The facilitator’s role is to select an issue currently in the news that has implications for a specific industry.  Once a topic has been selected, the facilitator should prepare a couple of survey questions that can be numerically ranked by the expert panel (i.e., the rest of the team).  For example, assume that the topic was an upcoming election, and how the results of that election might affect the attractiveness of an industry.  If there were three candidates, the sample questions might look like this:

What is your assessment of the likelihood of Candidate Smith being elected?
What is your assessment of the likelihood of Candidate Jones being elected?
What is your assessment of the likelihood of Candidate Doe being elected?
(Scale 1 = extremely unlikely          3 = moderately likely        5 = extremely likely)

If Candidate Smith is elected, what is the likely effect on industry growth and profitability?
If Candidate Jones is elected, what is the likely effect on industry growth and profitability?
If Candidate Doe is elected, what is the likely effect on industry growth and profitability?
(Scale 1 = worsened substantially     3 = unchanged     5 = improved substantially)

Part Two

The facilitator should administer the survey to each group member. Prepare a summary that includes the average score and range for each item. Repeat the survey, using the same questions two more times following this process.  

Part Three

As a group, discuss the following questions:

        How much did the feedback of composite scores affect your assessment?
        In your opinion, were the final scores an improvement over the initial scores?  Why or why not?
        How might a Delphi process lead to low quality results?  What steps could you take to help ensure a more accurate forecast?
        Bonus question: How is the logic of the Delphi forecast similar to that of the book Wisdom of Crowds, by James Surowiecki?

INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Airline Competitor Analysis

The goals of this exercise are to develop skills in analyzing companies, and to gain experience in researching non-U.S. firms.  Working in teams, each student is asked to choose one firm from a list of airlines.  As a group, there should be a roughly even mix of airlines representing North America, Europe/Middle East, and Asia.  Each student is asked to answer the following questions for their respective target firms:

        What drives this competitor (i.e., what are their objectives)?  
        What is their current strategy?
        What does this competitor believe about their industry?
        What are their strengths and weaknesses?

Next, teams are requested to develop an integrative table that summarizes the results of the individual analyses.  The table should look something like this:

Firm        Objectives        Current
Strategy        Beliefs        Strengths        Weaknesses
Air France
                                       
Cathay Pacific                                       
Southwest Airlines                                       
Etc
                                       

An effective way to debrief this assignment is to have students discuss Part Two questions in class.  To facilitate this discussion, it can be helpful for teams to share their summary tables.  One option is to ask teams to bring enough copies of their table to share in class.  Alternately, they can create tables on flip chart paper, and hang all of the tables side-by-side on the wall.  Having all of the tables together on the wall makes it easier to identify similarities and differences in the assessment of a particular firm across teams.

Teams are given a series of questions to discuss once they have created their integrative table.  When doing the debrief in class, the instructor will cover the same questions, allowing students to compare their conclusions to those of other teams.  The questions are:

        Which airlines in your group had the most similar strategies?  The most different?  Would you consider any of the firms you studied to be in the same strategic group?
        Create a composite five forces model based on the firms you reviewed.  How might these elements of industry structure (e.g., substitutes, or bargaining power of buyers) differ from the perspective of individual airlines?
        How well do the strategies of these airlines fit with their industry and general environments?  Which airlines do you expect to advance in passenger rankings, and which will lose ground?

The first discussion question aims to identify airlines with common strategies to one another, as well as airline with unique strategies.  In some cases (e.g., RyanAir and Southwest), an airline may have adopted a particular strategy in direct emulation of another firm.  In other cases, two firms may have independently arrived at similar strategies.  Topics that should be addressed for this question include geographic scope (emphasis on domestic versus international flights), positioning and competencies (emphasis on price, service, and timeliness), and target customers.

The second question is used to create a composite five forces model.  The purpose of this discussion is to illustrate that industry structure is not monolithic.  Instead, individual five  forces elements can vary across regional segments or for different strategic groups.  Additionally, the salience of particular industry constraints may be different across firms.  One way to illustrate these differences is to develop a table on the board which illustrates the variability of the five forces:

        Buyer
power        Supplier
power        Threat of entrants        Threat of substitutes        Rivalry
Strong pressure                                       
Moderate pressure                                       
Minimal pressure                                       

Based on class discussion, the instructor would highlight different market segments where each of the five forces vary in importance.  For example, differences in distance and alternate modes of transportation would lead to a higher threat of substitution in Europe than for Australia.  Similarly, the scarcity of airline choices in Australia versus the U.S. or Europe will affect the intensity of rivalry and buyer leverage.

Finally, the instructor should conclude the discussion by asking which airlines are best positioned for the future.  Students should explain why certain bundles of firm resources are a good match to a specific strategy and market structure.  Since this is only the second chapter in the book, instructors should not set the expectations for this question too high.  Rather, the question can be used as a bridge to the topics that will be covered in subsequent chapters.  

Exercise 2: The Oracle at Delphi

The purpose of this exercise is to illustrate how managers can use a structured decision process to make forecasts and recommendations in the absence of hard data.  The Delphi method is a tool to help experts on a topic share their opinions, and to help revise their views after hearing different perspectives.

A limitation of this exercise is that a group of students will not constitute a true expert panel.  However, the exercise is still a useful mechanism to explain the basic Delphi process.  To compensate for a lack of expertise, the instructor should choose a current topic that students would be familiar with, in order to facilitate discussion.  The topic choice should be something that has implications for a particular industry.  A quick scan of publications such as Fortune, Business Week, or the Wall Street Journal should provide a range of possible topics.  The example provided to students in the textbook concerns a hypothetical election, and how the results of that election might affect a particular industry.  

Once a topic has been selected, the instructor should create two or three survey questions that can be numerically ranked.  Following is another sample topic and survey questions:

Topic: Illegal immigration.  Assume that some new system is being proposed to control the flow of undocumented workers into the US.

Q1: What is the likelihood of the new system being enacted?
(Scale 1 = extremely unlikely          3 = moderately likely        5 = extremely likely)

Q2: If passed, what is the likely effectiveness of this new system?
(Scale 1 = completely ineffective         3 = moderately effective        5 = completely effective)

Q3: How will the effectiveness of this system affect the cost structure and profit margin in Industry X?

(Scale 1 = an effective system will have no to minimal affect on cost structure and profit margin
3 = an effective system will moderately affect cost structure and profit margin
5 = an effective system will have a large effect on cost structure and profit margin)

Using these survey items, the Delphi process is executed within teams.  One team member should be selected in advance to serve as the group’s facilitator.  The facilitator’s duties are as follows:

1.        Distribute a copy of the survey items to each other team member.
2.        Prepare a summary report with descriptive statistics for each item.  The summary should list the high and low score, and the mean score for each question.  Scores of individuals are anonymous.
3.        After receiving the summary report, each member is asked to complete the survey a second time, with the opportunity to revise their scores from the prior iteration.
4.        Another summary report is issued.

The instructor may decide whether to have students complete this process for a specific set of iterations (three rounds are recommended), or to continue until there is no more change in individual scores.

A helpful way to debrief this activity is to ask students for other situations where they have relied on consensus opinions.  One example that works well to illustrate this topic is movie reviews: Ask who relies on Yahoo or other compilations of movie critic reviews when deciding what film to attend.  Other examples may include Amazon book reviews; this is a good option as well since there is likely a much broader variation in the ‘expert’ nature of the reviews.  Car buyer reviews, and the Jaywalk Consensus  ‘buy/sell/hold’ ratings are also good topics.  Questions to ask on these topics include:

        How much emphasis do you place on the average score, best score, and worst score?  Some students may rely heavily on the ‘typical’ score.  Others may place more emphasis on the outliers – e.g., a movie with a below average score but lots of ‘A’ ratings could be seen as risky but with good potential.  Similarly, other students might be influenced by the smallest number of ‘F’ scores – minimizing downside risk, essentially.  Based on discussion of this question, ask students how much and how often they changed their own scores in subsequent rounds of the Delphi exercise, and what factors drove these changes.
        How influential is the source of the rating?  In the context of a movie review, students might place a great deal of emphasis – or none at all – based on a particular source (e.g., “he’s never right” or “I have always agreed with that newspaper’s reviews” or “I’ve heard her reviews on TV”).  Some students will be very influenced by a prominent reviewer, and others not at all.  In cases of the former, inquire whether the influence is due to that person’s prestige, or the actual rationale for the rating.  An important part of the Delphi process is that the scores are anonymous, specifically to minimize such biases.
        How do you react when you see two reviews which are diametrically opposed?  The purpose of this question is to bring out the processes that people use to integrate very different perspectives.
Based on this framing, the instructor should revisit the questions in class that were previously discussed within the teams:
        How much did the feedback of composite scores affect your assessment?
        In your opinion, were the final scores an improvement over the initial scores?  Why or why not?
        How might a Delphi process lead to low quality results?  What steps could you take to help ensure a more accurate forecast?
        Bonus question: How is the logic of the Delphi forecast similar to that of the book Wisdom of Crowds, by James Surowiecki?

Additional material for the bonus question:
The question on the Wisdom of Crowds book can be used as a follow-up assignment, or simply used for additional debrief in class.  Surowiecki’s book starts with a story of the 1906 West of England Fat Stock and Poultry show.  At the show, several hundred people placed wagers on the weight of a certain ox.  Many of the bettors were neither butchers nor farmers.  Yet, on average, the consensus weight was remarkably close to the actual weight of the ox.  In the remainder of the book, Surowiecki outlines four criteria that can lead to the creation of ‘wise’ crowds:
        Diverse opinions among group members
        Independence of member
        Decentralization
        Presence of a good mechanism for aggregating opinions.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions       

1.        Given the importance of understanding the external environment, why do some firms fail to do so? Students can provide examples of firms that did not understand their external environment. What were the implications of the firm’s failure to understand that environment?
2.        Have the students select a firm and describe its external environment. What actions do you believe the firm should take, given its external environment, and why?
3.        How is it possible that one firm could see a condition in the external environment as an opportunity while a second firm sees it as a threat?
4.        Select a firm in the local community. What materials would help one understand the firm’s external environment? How could the Internet be used to complete this activity?
5.        Have the students select an industry that is of interest to them. What actions could firms take to erect barriers of entry to this industry?
6.        What conditions would cause a firm to retaliate aggressively against a new entrant to the industry?


Ethics Questions

1.        How can a firm use its “code of ethics” to analyze the external environment?
2.        What ethical issues, if any, may be relevant to a firm’s monitoring of its external environment? Does use of the Internet to monitor the environment lead to additional ethical issues? If so, what are they?
3.        Think of each segment in a firm’s general environment. What is an ethical issue associated with each segment? Are firms across the globe doing enough to deal with the issue?
4.        What is the importance of using ethical practices between a firm and its suppliers?
5.        In an intense rivalry, especially one that involves competition in the global marketplace, how can the firm gather competitor intelligence ethically while maintaining its competitiveness?
6.        Ask the class what they believe determines whether an intelligence-gathering practice is or is not ethical? Do they see this changing as the world’s economies become more interdependent? If so, why? Do they see this changing because of the Internet? If so, how?



Internet Exercise
       
Firms rely on gathering and analyzing the general, industry, and competitor environments to assess their potential for global growth and profitability. Go to the website for the U.S. retail chain Wal-Mart at http://www.wal-mart.com. Wal-Mart’s global expansion plans are extensive. List how each of the six segments of the general environment prompted Wal-Mart to expand into the markets that it has. Target is a major U.S. competitor of Wal-Mart. Check out the Target website at http://www.target.com. What are the firm’s plans for global expansion? What types of opportunities and threats would prohibit Target from taking Wal-Mart’s route? Would the students consider Target a future key global rival of Wal-Mart?

*e-project: What U.S. firms offer global Web shopping in other countries’ currencies and shipping specifications? How do their non-U.S. Websites compare with their U.S. Websites?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:56:09 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 3
The Internal Organization:
Resources, Capabilities, Core Competencies and Competitive Advantages

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Explain the need for firms to study and understand their internal organization.
2.        Define value and discuss its importance.
3.        Describe the differences between tangible and intangible resources.
4.        Define capabilities and discuss how their development.
5.        Describe four criteria used to determine whether resources and capabilities are core competencies.
6.        Explain how value-chain analysis is used to identify and evaluate resources and capabilities.
7.        Define outsourcing and discuss the reasons for its use.
8.        Discuss the importance of identifying internal strengths and weaknesses.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case  Managing the Tension Between Innovation and Efficiency
THE CONTENT OF INTERNAL ANALYSIS
        The Context of Internal Analysis
        Creating Value
        The Challenge of Analyzing the Internal Organization
RESOURCES, CAPABILITIES, AND CORE COMPETENCIES  
        Resources  
Strategic Focus   Hyundai Cars: The Quality Is There, So Why Aren’t the Cars Selling?
        Capabilities  
        Core Competencies  
BUILDING CORE COMPETENCIES  
        Four Criteria of Sustainable Competitive Advantage   
        Value Chain Analysis  
OUTSOURCING  
COMPETENCIES, STRENGTHS, WEAKNESSES, AND STRATEGIC DECISIONS
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES
NOTES   



LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction:  As indicated in Chapter 1, firms follow two competing models to generate the inputs needed to formulate and implement strategies. Chapter 2 focused on the external environment, which is the foundation of the I/O model. The emphasis in Chapter 3 is on internal resources and their potential to create competitive advantage for the firm, which falls in line with the resource-based model.  This orientation is perhaps best captured by the elements of Figure 3.1, which should be emphasized.  


OPENING CASE
Managing the Tension between Innovation and Efficiency

For decades, 3M, the widely-diversified technology company with six business segments, was a model of successful corporate innovation. The firm’s commitment to innovation, and the importance innovation had to its competitive actions, is suggested by its slogan: “The Spirit of Innovation. That’s 3M.” In a practical, everyday sense, innovation’s importance is signaled by 3M’s famous intention of generating at least one-third of its annual sales from products introduced to the marketplace in the most recent five years.  3M has relied on its skill-base of scientists and engineers to meet this goal and to maintain a continual inflow of innovative products. The company developed over thirty core competencies which have been the foundation for more than 55,000 products sold worldwide.  

But things have begun to change at 3M.  As recently as mid-2007, sales of products introduced in the last five years have dropped to only one-fourth of total sales. This shortfall represents nearly a 25 percent deficiency in actual performance versus goal.  What are possible root-causes of this decline?  Could it be that 3M was spending less money on R&D? A number of Wall Street analysts felt this was the reason that 2006 profits were below expectations.  Other people feel that the introduction of the Six Sigma program into the 3M culture was, not only a diversion of people’s attention, but also a deterrent to innovation.  Six Sigma is a widely-used “series of management techniques designed to decrease production defects and increase efficiency.”  Focusing on work processes, Six Sigma techniques help spot problems and use rigorous measurements to reduce production variations and eliminate defects.  

Using techniques such as Six Sigma is completely appropriate in that reducing waste and increasing efficiency contribute to a firm’s profitability. The issue is that innovation generating and efficient quality focused actions can be at odds with each other. In an analyst’s words: “When (Six Sigma) types of initiatives become ingrained in a company’s culture, as they did at 3M, creativity (and innovation that results from it) can easily get squelched.”  Your students may have some creative ideas as to how innovation and conformity can co-exist.




Teaching Note: Firms such as Coca-Cola, Goldman Sachs, Sony Corporation, Nike, and McDonald’s have implemented value-creating strategies using their unique resources, capabilities, and core competencies.  In particular, they have developed unique capabilities related to the management of their brands.
•        The ultimate goal of such strategies is for the firms to achieve a sustainable competitive advantage that will enable them to earn above-average returns.
•        To achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns, firms must leverage their core competencies to exploit opportunities in the external environment.
•        However, a competitive advantage does not always last, because value-creating strategies may be successfully imitated or duplicated by competitors.
       

Several features of the global economy, such as technological changes, can result in the erosion of the competitive advantage of established competitors.  For example, the Internet is undermining the competitive advantage of brick-and-mortar rivals.

Competitive advantages are often strongly related to the resources firms hold and how they are managed. Resources are the foundation for strategy and these can generate competitive advantages leading to wealth creation when they are bundled together uniquely.

People are an especially critical resource for producing innovation and gaining a competitive advantage. Even if they are not as critical in some industries, they are necessary for the development and implementation of firms’ strategies.

The sustainability of a competitive advantage is a function of three factors:
•        the obsolescence of a core competence—the basis of value creation—as a result of environmental changes
•        the availability of substitutes for the core competence (or the extent to which competitors can use different core competencies to overcome value created by the original core competence)
•        the imitability of the core competence (or the abilities of competitors to develop the same core competence)

To sustain a competitive advantage, firms must manage current core competencies while simultaneously developing new competencies.  In other words, strategists must continuously make investments that will both enhance the value of current competencies while striving to develop new ones (discussed further in Chapter 5).

This chapter represents the next phase in the strategy development process: what a firm can do.  It is linked to the understanding that managers gain by assessing the external environment to determine what the firm might do, or to identify opportunities that might be pursued.


Teaching Note:  It is important to stress that the outcomes of the external and internal analyses of a firm's environment must be linked.  Analyzing the external environment enables strategists to identify opportunities that the firm can choose to pursue if it is capable of doing so.  This capability is determined by a careful analysis of the firm's internal environment, or by determining whether or not it has the resources, capabilities, and core competencies that will enable it to successfully implement value-creating strategies that fit with its vision and mission (previously discussed in Chapter 1).


1        Explain the need for organizations to study and understand their internal organization.       

ANALYZING THE INTERNAL ORGANIZATION

The Context of Internal Analysis

In the global economy, traditional factors such as labor costs, access to financial resources and raw materials, and protected or regulated markets continue to be sources of competitive advantage, but to a lesser degree (mostly because the advantages created by these more traditional sources can be overcome by competitors through an international strategy and by the flow of resources throughout the global economy).

Increasingly, those analyzing their firm’s internal environment should use a global mind-set (i.e., the ability to study an internal environment in ways that are not dependent on the assumptions of a single country, culture, or context).

Analysis of the firm’s internal environment requires that evaluators examine the firm’s portfolio of resources and the bundles of heterogeneous resources and capabilities managers have created. Understanding how to leverage the firm’s unique bundle of resources and capabilities is a key outcome decision makers seek when analyzing the internal environment.

       
Teaching Note: It might be appropriate at this point in the discussion to remind students of the primary differences between the I/O and resource-based models. The I/O model presumes that resources and capabilities are distributed homogeneously among firms and freely move between them; the primary determining factor is how firms react to changes in the external environment. The resource-based model presumes a heterogeneous distribution of resources and capabilities and assumes that they do not move freely between firms.       
               

By using or exploiting their core competencies, firms are in a position to develop and perform value-creating strategies better than their competitors or to create and perform value-creating strategies that competitors either are unable or unwilling to imitate.

Teaching Note: Although it will be discussed in detail in Chapter 4, it is appropriate to provide students with some introductory remarks on value at this point.  Value represents a concept of the relationship between a product's features (such as quality) and its price relative to those offered by competitors.  As will be discussed in Chapter 4, value can be provided by low cost, high differentiation of product features, or a combination of low cost and differentiated features.       
               
       
Figure Note: Relationships between the components of an internal strategic analysis—resources, capabilities, and core competencies—and a sustainable competitive advantage and strategic competitiveness are illustrated in Figure 3.1.  This is a very helpful figure as it ties together much of the material in the chapter.       


FIGURE 3.1
Components of Internal Analysis Leading to         Competitive Advantage and Strategic Competitiveness

As illustrated in Figure 3.1,
•        a firm's tangible and intangible resources (for example, its facilities and corporate culture, respectively) represent sources of capabilities
•        these capabilities (teams or bundles of resources) represent sources of core competencies
•        when exploited and nurtured (and valuable, costly to imitate, rare, and non-substitutable), core competencies are potential sources of competitive advantage
•        if a firm is able to use its core competencies to achieve a competitive advantage, it will achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns so long as competitors are unable or unwilling to imitate them successfully

               

Teaching Note: The importance of a firm's internal characteristics—represented by its resources and capabilities—highlights a shift in the priorities and prescriptions of strategic management research. The field has evolved or developed from a position that understanding industry characteristics and then positioning the firm to take advantage of industry characteristics relative to competitors was of primary importance to recognizing that it is a firm's resources and capabilities (which represent sources of core competencies) that should serve as the foundation for firm strategy. This shift recognizes that industry attractiveness is not dependent only on industry characteristics. Industry attractiveness is ultimately determined by both industry characteristics (which can be translated into opportunities and threats) or what a firm might do and its internal strengths (its resources, capabilities, and core competencies) which determine what a firm is capable of doing to take advantage of (or exploit) external opportunities.       
               

2        Define value and discuss its importance.       

Creating Value

Some thoughts on “value”:
•        Firms create value by exploiting core competencies and meeting the standards of global competition.  
•        Value is measured by the product’s performance and by its attributes for which customers are willing to pay.  
•        Firms must provide value to customers which is superior to the value provided by competitors in order to create a competitive advantage.
•        Customers perceive higher value in global rather than domestic-only brands.
•        Firms create value by innovatively bundling and leveraging their resources and capabilities.
•        Ultimately, value is the foundation for earning above-average profits.
•        Core competencies, combined with product-market positions, are the most important sources of advantage.
•        The core competencies of a firm, in addition to analysis of its general, industry, and competitor environments, should drive its selection of strategies.


The Challenge of Analyzing the Internal Organization

Correctly identifying, developing, deploying, and protecting firm resources, capabilities, and core competencies requires managers to make difficult decisions.  In part, these challenges are a result of characteristics of both the internal and external environments of the firm.  This challenge is multiplied because of three conditions that characterize important strategic decisions—uncertainty, complexity, and intraorganizational conflict.


Figure Note: Suggest that students refer to Figure 3.2 during your discussion of the three conditions that characterize important strategic decisions.


FIGURE 3.2
Conditions Affecting Managerial Decisions about Resources, Capabilities, and Core Competencies

The conditions or decision characteristics presented in Figure 3.2 are:
•        Uncertainty regarding the assessment of the general and industry environments, assessments, and predictability of competitive actions, and customer preferences
•        Complexity regarding the nature of any interrelatedness of the causes of change in the environment and how the environments are perceived, especially regarding decisions as to which of the firm’s resources and capabilities might serve as the foundation for competitive advantage
•        Intraorganizational conflicts among managers making decisions about which core competencies are to be nurtured and about how the nurturing should take place



Teaching Note: The descriptions of uncertainty, complexity, and intraorganizational conflict (see below) expand upon the material presented in the text. This should help you to explain these concepts in greater depth, if you should choose to do so.

Uncertainty is present because of the inherent difficulty in identifying, assessing, and predicting changes and trends in characteristics of the external environment.  Among these characteristics are correctly predicting the extent, direction, and timing of changes in the general environment, such as those resulting from societal values, political and economic conditions, customer preferences, and emerging technologies from other industries (and how they might ultimately affect the firm).

Complexity is increased because of the uncertain nature of interrelationships among the characteristics of the external environment and the related challenge regarding how to assess the effects of changes in one set of characteristics on other characteristics.  The issue becomes more complex when managers must relate the complex external environment to their assessment of the firm's internal environment and thus affects decisions regarding the firm's resources, capabilities, and core competencies, and their relationship to opportunities in the external environment that can be exploited successfully to achieve a competitive advantage.

Intraorganizational conflicts often develop as a result of uncertainty and complexity.  When managers make decisions regarding the identification of the firm's capabilities and choose to nurture them (with resources) to develop core competencies that can be exploited to achieve a competitive advantage, they must make these important decisions without absolute certainty that the decision is correct.  And, such decisions may result in changes or shifts in power and interrelationships among individuals and groups within the firm.  When this occurs, there may be conflict as those who are affected adversely—or perceive that they will be so affected—may resist these changes.  In some cases, managers faced with decisions that may have unpleasant consequences or are uncomfortable often experience denial, an unconscious coping mechanism used to block out and not initiate major changes that may have some pain associated with them.

Thus, managers that must make decisions under conditions of uncertainty, complexity, and intraorganizational conflict must exercise judgment, a capacity for making a successful decision in a timely manner when no correct model is available or when relevant data are unreliable or incomplete.

When exercising judgment, decision makers often take intelligent risks. In the current competitive landscape, executive judgment can be a particularly important source of competitive advantage. One reason is that, over time, effective judgment allows a firm to build a strong reputation and retain the loyalty of stakeholders whose support is linked to above-average returns.

Significant changes in the value-creating potential of a firm’s resources and capabilities can occur in a rapidly changing global economy.  Because these changes affect a company’s power and social structure, inertia or resistance to change may surface.  Even though these reactions may happen, decision makers should not deny the changes needed to assure the firm’s strategic competitiveness.  By denying the need for change, difficult experiences can be avoided in the short run.


STRATEGIC FOCUS
Hyundai Cars: The Quality is There, So Why Aren’t the Cars Selling?

Once defined as “cheap, tin-pot vehicles,” Hyundai automobiles suffered from multiple manufacturing defects.  But in a move to reposition itself in a very competitive business, Hyundai Motor Company became intent on establishing a new image of producing high-quality vehicles.  In a 2007 study done by a well-known market research and auto-industry consulting firm, Hyundai held leadership positions in five different categories (including large car, minivan, and small SUV).  A J.D. Power’s study supported these findings.  These evaluations supported Hyundai’s goal of establishing a brand that stood for quality.  Hyundai’s quality ratings exceeded Toyota’s ratings and were exceeded only by those of Lexus and Porsche.

With quality endorsements by highly respected third parties, Hyundai felt that its quality efforts had been validated and that it was in a position to become a new player in a market dominated by Japanese and European quality automakers. Unfortunately for Hyundai, the market has yet to recognize it as a manufacturer of high-quality vehicles. Is this an example of having one chance to make a first impression?  What suggestions do students have for Hyundai to recreate itself and establish an image of quality?

Later in this chapter, students will be reminded of the power of a brand.  You might want to refer back to this case, asking if there is a handicap associated with branding.




3        Describe the differences between tangible and intangible resources.       

RESOURCES, CAPABILITIES, AND CORE COMPETENCIES

This section develops the background and relationships between resources, capabilities, and core competencies that represent potential sources upon which a firm can build the foundation for a competitive advantage.


Resources

Resources represent inputs into a firm's production process, such as capital equipment, the skills of individual employees, brand names, financial resources, and talented managers.

By themselves—or individually—resources generally will not enable a firm to achieve a competitive advantage.  They must be combined or integrated with other firm resources to establish a capability. When these capabilities are identified and nurtured, they can result in core competencies, which may lead to a competitive advantage.  A firm's resources can be classified either as tangible or intangible.


Tangible Resources

Tangible resources are assets that can be seen or quantified, such as a firm's physical assets (e.g., its plant and equipment).  Tangible resources are classified in one of four ways, as illustrated in Table 3.1.



TABLE 3.1
Tangible Resources

A firm's tangible resources generally can be placed into one of four categories:
•        Financial resources, such as borrowing capacity
•        Organizational resources, such as its formal reporting structure and systems
•        Physical resources, such as location
•        Technological resources, such as patents and trademarks



Teaching Note: One statement made in the chapter deserves special attention.  Paraphrased slightly, the authors declare that the value of tangible resources is constrained because they are difficult to leverage: it is hard to derive more business or additional value from a tangible resource. For example, an airplane is a tangible resource or asset, but it can only be used on one route at a time, and it is equally impossible to put the same crew on five different routes at the same time.  This is also true for the financial investment made in the airplane, but intangible assets such as a new innovation in manufacturing processes can be applied to many assembly lines.  These dynamics are considered next.       
               

Intangible Resources

A firm's intangible resources may be less visible, but they are no less important.  In fact, they may be more important as a source of core competencies.  Intangible resources range from innovation resources, such as knowledge, trust, and organizational routines, to the firm's people-dependent or subjective resources of know-how, networks, organizational culture, to the firm's reputation for its goods and services and the way it interacts with others (such as employees, suppliers, or customers).

               
Teaching Note: It is interesting to note that tangible resources may be less valuable today than they were in the past.  To support this conclusion, economist John Kendrick has found intangible assets to have contributed increasingly to U.S. economic growth since the early 1900s.  The ratio of intangible business capital to tangible business capital in 1929 was 30 percent to 70 percent, but that ratio was 63 percent to 37 percent in 1990.       
               

Table Note:  Three classifications of intangible resources are presented in Table 3.2.


TABLE 3.2
Intangible Resources

A firm's intangible resources can be classified as:
•        Human resources, such as knowledge, trust, and managerial capabilities
•        Innovation resources, such as scientific capabilities and capacity to innovate
•        Reputational resources, such as the firm's reputation with customers or suppliers



Because tangible resources are those that can be seen (such as plants), touched (such as equipment), documented (such as contracts with suppliers of raw materials), or quantified (such as the value of a specific asset), they generally will not, by themselves, represent capabilities that will serve as sources of core competencies.  However, they still have value and will contribute to the development of capabilities and core competencies.

               
Teaching Note: Remind students of the relationships illustrated in Figure 3.2. Resources are the source of firm capabilities, capabilities are the source of core competencies, and core competencies are the foundation for achieving a competitive advantage and strategic competitiveness.       
               

Because they cannot be quantified, touched, or seen, and are more difficult to explain, intangible resources are more likely to be sources of sustainable competitive advantage.   And, if they also are difficult for competitors to identify and/or understand, they also may represent the most likely source(s) of a firm's capabilities, core competencies, and sustained competitive advantage.


Teaching Note: One can report to the class that two surveys asked managers to identify the source of their firms' competitive advantage or overall success.  In both instances, one intangible asset was identified as the most important: Company Reputation/Reputation for Quality.  As time permits, you may want to have the class discuss what makes a company's reputation.  This also can be assigned as a "thought-provoking" question for an outside assignment or for future class discussion.       

       


STRATEGIC FOCUS
Seeking to Repair a Tarnished Brand Name

In this case, PepsiCo and other soft drink manufacturers operating within India are accused of having unsafe levels of pesticides (per European standards) in their respective products.  These accusations, made by a highly respected Indian private research and advocacy group, resulted in the public reacting in a predictable fashion by buying 30 to 40 percent fewer PepsiCo products.  Pepsi refuted the accusations.  Tests conducted by an Indian government agency support PepsiCo’s claim that Indian-produced PepsiCo products meet European and American content standards.  

So who is the public to believe?  Critics are now leveling charges against all soft-drink manufacturers in India, claiming that they are using excessive amounts of groundwater to manufacture their products. Now critics have refocused their claims from using pesticide-infested water to using too much water.  In an effort to restore its name as a good corporate citizen and demonstrate sensitivity to the Indian culture and its respect for water, PepsiCo is undertaking various actions within India including digging wells in villages for the local citizenry, harvesting rainwater, and teaching better techniques for growing rice and tomatoes.  

PepsiCo has been trying to do the right thing as a good corporate neighbor.  It faced claims of producing unhealthy product followed by allegations of using an excessive amount of precious water.  It appears that PepsiCo is always in the defensive mode. Why is PepsiCo a popular or easy target for “environmentalists?”  PepsiCo’s CEO is an Indian woman. Is this a consideration in this case?






The Value of Brands: A Mini-Lecture

One intangible resource that may enable a firm to create a reputation and serve as a source of competitive advantage is a brand name.  Specifically, what a brand name communicates to customers about the performance characteristics or attributes of a firm's product(s) represents a direct link to a firm's reputation with its customers.

When the brand name communicates positive characteristics of a product (for example, superior performance, high quality, or superior value), consumers will tend to purchase the brand name product rather than similar products offered by competing firms.  Thus, it is important that companies with strong brand names nurture the core competencies that provide the brand name with value and continually communicate that value through consistent advertising messages.

When a firm has a brand name that serves as a foundation for competitive advantage, the firm often will try to leverage the power of that brand name.  Using an example in the chapter, Harley Davidson's name now adorns a limited edition Barbie doll, a popular restaurant in New York City, and a line of L’Oreal cologne.  Moreover, Harley-Davidson Motorclothes generates over $100 million in revenue for the firm each year, and the Harley brand adorns many clothing items, from black leather jackets to fashions for tots.

The value of a brand name can be lessened or reduced by competitive actions, which the firm either does not recognize or to which it fails to respond.  In the consumer goods segment, national brands are under attack by private label store brands.  And, some appear to be losing the battle as customer preferences are shifting toward private labels that may be perceived as providing more value than the national brands.  In many cases, national brands have reacted to such threats by cutting prices.

However, cost-cutting is not the only strategy that can be used to safeguard a brand.
•        For companies whose brand names are expected to thrive and continue to provide a competitive advantage (such as Nike or Hanes), their challenge is to nurture and exploit the resources, capabilities, and core competencies that are the source of competitive advantage.
•        For companies whose brands are under fire (such as Marlboro or Budweiser), the challenge is to re-establish the value of the brand.  They must reconfigure their existing bundle of resources, capabilities, and core competencies to renew them as sources of competitive advantage.
•        For companies whose brands are troubled, because the brands are no longer a source of competitive advantage, the challenge is even greater: they must identify and develop new bundles of resources and capabilities and nurture them to establish a new source of competitive advantage.
•        Firms also may choose to package their brand as a way to differentiate themselves from competitors, as Century 21 Real Estate has done by using technology to make its offices virtual home stores by offering many discounted home services, including cable service, appliances, insurance, mortgages.
•        Other firms (e.g., Procter & Gamble, General Motors, and Philip Morris) support their brand-name products through heavy advertising expenditures.  

It is important to remember that resources—both tangible and intangible—represent the primary sources that enable a firm to establish capabilities, the capacity for a set or bundle of unique resources to perform a task or activity integratively. In other words, individual resources alone, while they may have value, will contribute to the development of capabilities only when they are put together in unique combinations to provide the foundation for core competencies and the establishment of competitive advantage.  Examples include a firm’s information-based tangible resources (Table 3.1) and/or its intangible resources (Table 3.2).




4        Define capabilities and discuss their development.       

Capabilities

As implied in the definition, a firm's capabilities represent its capacity to integrate individual firm resources to achieve a desired objective, though this ability does not emerge overnight.

Capabilities develop over time as a result of complex interactions that take advantage of the interrelationships between a firm's tangible and intangible resources that are based on the development, transmission, and exchange or sharing of information and knowledge as carried out by the firm's employees (its human capital).

A firm's ability to achieve a competitive advantage is thus reflected in its knowledge base and the ability of its human capital to successfully exploit firm capabilities.  Thus, human capital is of significant value in the firm's ability to develop capabilities and core competencies to achieve strategic competitiveness.


Teaching Note: As discussed in the chapter, the strategic value of resources is increased when they are integrated or combined.  Unique combinations of the firm’s tangible and intangible resources can be molded into capabilities—what the firm can do when it deploys teams of resources working together.  You can use a firm like Microsoft to illustrate this point.


The knowledge possessed by the firm's human capital may be one of the most significant sources of a firm's competitive advantage because it represents everything that the firm has learned, and thus everything that it knows about successfully linking or bundling sets of individual resources to develop capabilities as a foundation for developing core competencies and, ultimately, to achieve a competitive advantage.


Teaching Note:  A number of firms have gone so far as to hire Chief Learning Officers (CLO) to find ways for the organization to acquire, internalize, and share knowledge in competitively relevant ways.  Managing knowledge is critical since enterprises view this as their primary source of competitive advantage and believe it should be used in ways that will create value for customers.


Establishing and nurturing the skills and abilities of the workforce is of critical importance to a firm's ability not only to establish, but to sustain a competitive advantage by acquiring new knowledge and developing new skills that will enhance existing capabilities and core competencies, as well as aid in the development of new ones.

               
Teaching Note: Firms use a variety of methods to nurture the value of their human capital.  For example, Microsoft contends its best asset is the intellectual potential of its employees. To support the trend, the firm strives to hire people who are more talented than the current set of employees in hopes of defending and extending the domain of its intellectual property.  It is not uncommon for prospective employees to be asked questions like, “Why are manhole covers round?” (The answer: A round cover cannot fall into the hole no matter which way it is turned.) Such questions may seem silly, but the goal is to identify people with powerful reasoning skills, and thus (conceivably) the capacity to generate outstanding software solutions.
       
               
Firms also have functional area capabilities they have nurtured and are now considered as core competencies.  As a result, these core competencies provide the foundation for the firm’s competitive advantage.


Table Note: Table 3.3 illustrates the value-creating potential of functional areas for a broad array of firms in a variety of industries.  Rather than going over the table item-by-item, students should be asked to discuss why a particular firm’s capabilities serve as a source of competitive advantage.  In other words, involve your students in a discussion of why one firm’s functional activity is being performed better than that of its competitors.  For example, ask students to compare and contrast the marketing approaches of Proctor & Gamble and Polo Ralph Lauren Company or the manufacturing capabilities of Komatsu and Sony.


TABLE 3.3
Examples of Firm’s Capabilities

Table 3.3 provides examples of functional areas, capabilities, and firm examples across a variety of industries.  It indicates that a number of functional area capabilities have the potential to serve as the foundation for a firm’s competitive advantage.



5        Describe four criteria used to determine whether resources and capabilities are core competencies.       

Core Competencies

Once a firm has identified its resources and capabilities, it is ready to identify its core competencies, the resources and capabilities that are a source of competitive advantage for the firm over its competitors.  Core competencies emerge over time through an organizational process of accumulating and learning how to deploy different resources and capabilities.  As the capacity to take action, core competencies are the “crown jewels of a company,” the activities the company performs especially well compared with competitors and through which the firm adds unique value to its goods or services over a long period.


Teaching Note: Remember, resources and capabilities serve as the foundation upon which firms formulate and implement value-creating strategies so that the firm can achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns. However, if a firm has a deficiency in some of its resources, it may not be able to achieve strategic competitiveness.  For example, insufficient financial resources may prevent a firm from implementing the processes or integrating the activities required to add superior value by limiting its ability to hire workers with the necessary skills or to invest in the capital assets (facilities and equipment) that are needed.

Thus, firms not only are challenged to scan the external environment to identify opportunities that can be exploited, but also to have an in-depth understanding of their resources and capabilities.  This enables the firm to develop strategies to exploit external opportunities while it also avoids competing in areas where the firm's resources and capabilities are inadequate.


Not all of a firm’s resources and capabilities are strategic assets—that is, assets that have competitive value and the potential to serve as a source of competitive advantage. Some resources and capabilities may result in incompetence, because they represent competitive areas in which the firm is weak compared to competitors. Thus, some resources or capabilities may stifle or prevent the development of a core competence.

When the firm's resources and capabilities result in a core competence, the firm will be able to produce goods or services with features and characteristics that are valued by customers.  This implies that firms can implement value-creating strategies only when its capabilities and resources can be combined to form core competencies.

The question is asked: "How many core competencies are required for a competitive advantage?"  McKinsey & Company recommends that firms identify 3 or 4 competencies around which to frame their strategic actions.

               
Teaching Note: In support of the “McKinsey Rule”, it is interesting to note that McDonald’s has four main competencies (in real estate, restaurant operations, marketing, and its global infrastructure).  Also, with the actual manufacturing of automobiles and trucks expected to become a declining part of its operations, Ford Motor Company is framing its twenty-first century competitive success around competencies in the areas of design, branding, sales, and service operations.       


BUILDING CORE COMPETENCIES

This section discusses two conceptual tools/frameworks firms can use to identify competitive advantages:
•        Four criteria determine which of the firm’s resources and capabilities are core competencies.
•        Value chain analysis, a tool for determining which value-creating competencies should be maintained, upgraded, and developed and which should be outsourced.


Four Criteria for Sustainable Competitive Advantage

Four criteria should be used to determine whether or not a firm’s capabilities are core competencies and can be a source of competitive advantage.

       
Table Note: Table 3.4 describes the four criteria for determining strategic capabilities. These criteria will be discussed in more detail following the table.



TABLE 3.4
The Four Criteria of Sustainable Strategic Capabilities

Before they can be sources of competitive advantage, capabilities must be:

•        valuable        •        rare        •        costly-to-imitate        •        nonsubstitutable



               
It is important to understand that a firm's capabilities must meet all four of the criteria noted earlier before they can be core competencies and enable the firm to achieve a sustainable competitive advantage.

However, a short-term competitive advantage is available when firm capabilities are valuable, rare, and non-substitutable.  The length of time that a firm possessing such capabilities can expect to sustain a competitive advantage depends on how long it takes for competitors to successfully imitate the value-creating activity or process, or reproduce valued features or characteristics of the product or service.

Thus, the ability to sustain a competitive advantage is dependent on firm capabilities being valuable, rare, non-substitutable, and costly to imitate.

Valuable

Capabilities that are valuable help a firm exploit opportunities and/or neutralize threats in the external environment. Valuable capabilities allow a firm to develop and implement strategies that create customer value.

Rare

Capabilities are rare when they are possessed by few, if any, current or potential competitors.  If many firms have the same capabilities, the same value-creating strategies will be selected.  As a result, none of the firms will be able to achieve a sustainable competitive advantage.  A competitive advantage will be achieved by firms that develop and exploit capabilities that are different from those held by other firms.

Costly-to-Imitate

Capabilities are costly to imitate when other firms are unable to develop them except at a cost disadvantage relative to firms that already have them.  This usually is a result of one or a combination of three conditions:

1.        Unique historical conditions can make duplication of capabilities costly. For example, establishing facilities in a key location that can preempt competition when no other locations have similar value-related characteristics or developing a unique organizational culture in the early stages of the organization's life may not be cheap to duplicate by firms that are developing theirs at a different time.

A unique culture may not only serve as a source of competitive advantage, but also can be a source of competitive disadvantage.  The latter may be the case when a firm's culture prevents it from recognizing or successfully adapting to changes in a turbulent environment.


Teaching Note: This may explain why such companies as IBM and General Motors, whose cultures developed early in each company's history—and during relatively calm or stable environments—were able to rely on formal controls and multiple approvals of strategies and be successful.  However, their respective cultures, grounded in rigidity and bureaucracy, may have prevented them from successfully adapting to rapid environmental change in a fast-paced global environment.       
               

2.        Causal ambiguity also may prevent competitors from perfectly imitating a competency if the link between a firm's capabilities and core competencies is not identified or understood.  Competitors may not be able to identify or determine how a firm uses its competencies to achieve a sustainable competitive advantage.

3.        Social complexity means that a firm's capabilities are the product of complex social phenomena such as interpersonal relationships within the firm (e.g., how managers and subordinates at Hewlett-Packard work with each other) or a firm’s reputation with its customers and suppliers.

Nonsubstitutable
A firm's capabilities are nonsubstitutable when they do not have strategic equivalents.  Firm resources are strategically equivalent when they each can be separately exploited to implement the same strategies.  If capabilities are invisible, it is even more difficult for competitors to identify viable substitutes.   Examples of capabilities that can be difficult to identify or to find suitable substitutes for include firm-specific knowledge and trust-based working relationships.


Table Note: Table 3.5 summarizes the relationship between the characteristics of firm capabilities, sustainability of competitive advantage, and performance implications.  Rather than repeating the table in a lecture, students should be advised to refer to it as needed.       


TABLE 3.5
Outcomes from Combinations of         the Criteria for Sustainable Competitive Advantage

Highlights from Table 3.5 are:
•        Resources and capabilities that are neither valuable, rare, costly-to-imitate, nor nonsubstitutable mean that the firm will be at a competitive disadvantage and will earn below-average returns.
•        Resources and capabilities that are valuable, but are neither rare nor costly to imitate and may or may not be nonsubstitutable mean that the firm can achieve competitive parity and earn average returns.
•        Resources and capabilities that are both valuable and rare, but are not costly to imitate and may or may not be nonsubstitutable, may enable the firm to achieve a temporary competitive advantage and will earn above-average to average returns.
•        Resources and capabilities that are valuable, rare, costly-to-imitate, and nonsubstitutable will enable the firm to achieve a sustainable competitive disadvantage and earn above-average returns.



Teaching Note: Given the criteria for the sustainability of a competitive advantage, ask students if The Gap’s Old Navy concept (or another case with which they are likely to be personally familiar) represents a source of competitive advantage that can be sustained over time.  One likely interpretation using the criteria set out in Table 3.5 is that The Gap’s competitive advantage in the Old Navy concept can only be sustained until competitors successfully imitate or duplicate the value created.  Thus, the Old Navy concept represents a temporary competitive advantage.  This will enable The Gap to earn above-average returns until the value created is successfully imitated by competitors.       
               

6        Explain how value-chain analysis is used to identify and evaluate resources and capabilities.       

Value Chain Analysis

A framework that firms can use to identify and evaluate the ways in which their resources and capabilities can add value is value chain analysis.  This framework is useful because it enables firms to understand which parts of their operations or activities create value by segmenting the value chain into primary and secondary activities as illustrated in Figure 3.3.

               
Figure Note: Students should refer to Figure 3.3 and Tables 3.6 and 3.7 during your explanation of the value chain concept.  Tables 3.6 and 3.7 develop the criteria for examining the value-creating potential of the firm's primary and secondary activities, respectively, after these terms are introduced in Figure 3.3.       




FIGURE 3.3
The Basic Value Chain

Figure 3.3 illustrates how the value-creating activities performed by the firm can be separated into primary and secondary activities.

Primary activities represent traditional line activities such as inbound logistics, operations, outbound logistics, marketing and sales, and service.

Support activities are represented by a firm's staff activities and include its financial infrastructure, human resource management practices, technological development, and procurement activities.



Table Note: The first step in value chain analysis is to carefully examine each of the firm's primary activities to assess the potential for creating or adding value (see Table 3.6).


TABLE 3.6
Examining the Value-Creating Potential of Primary Activities

Table 3.6 presents value-creating issues to be addressed for each primary activity.  Activities are rated as superior, equivalent, or inferior (relative to competitors).  Students can refer to this table during your discussion.

•        Inbound logistics: Examine all activities related to the receipt, control, warehousing, inventory, and distribution of raw materials or component parts into the production process.

•        Operations: Activities to be examined are all of those necessary to convert the inputs (raw materials or components) available as a result of inbound logistics into finished products. Examples include machining, assembly, equipment maintenance, and packaging.

•        Outbound logistics: This category represents the firm's activities involved with the collection, storage, and physical distribution of products to customers.  Examples include warehousing or storage of finished products, material handling, and order processing.

•        Marketing and sales: Several marketing and sales activities must be completed to both induce customers to purchase products and ensure that products are available.  Activities include developing advertising and promotion campaigns; selecting and developing distribution channels; and selecting, training, developing, and supporting a sales force.

•        Service: These are the activities that a firm offers to enhance or maintain a product's value, including installation, product use training, adjustment, repair, and warranty services.


               
Table Note: The next step in the value chain analysis process is to examine the firm's support activities to determine any value-creating potential in those activities (see Table 3.7).


TABLE 3.7
Examining the Value-Creating Potential of Support Activities

Table 3.7 presents value-creating issues to be addressed for each support activity.  Activities are rated as superior, equivalent or inferior, relative to competitors.   Students can refer to this table during your discussion.

•        Procurement: These are activities that are completed to purchase the inputs needed to produce a firm's products, including items consumed or used in the manufacturing process (such as raw materials or component parts), supplies, and fixed assets (machinery, equipment and facilities).

•        Technological development: All activities that are completed to either improve a firm's products or its production processes.  This includes basic research, process and equipment design, product design, and servicing procedures.

•        Human resource management: These activities are related to the recruiting, hiring, training, developing, and compensating (including performance assessment and reward systems) of a firm's employees.

•        Firm infrastructure: These activities support the activities performed in the firm's value chain, including general management practices, planning, finance, accounting, legal, and government relations. By performing its infrastructure-related activities, a firm identifies external opportunities and threats, and internal strengths and weaknesses related to firm resources and capabilities, and supports or nurtures its core competencies.



Using the value chain framework enables managers to study the firm's resources and capabilities in relationship to the primary and support activities performed to design, manufacture, and distribute products, and to assess them relative to competitors' capabilities.  For these activities to be sources of competitive advantage, a firm must be able to:
•        perform primary or support activities in a manner superior to the ways that competitors perform them
•        perform a primary or support activity that no competitor is able to perform to create superior value for customers and achieve a competitive advantage

This implies that, given that individual firms are comprised of unique or heterogeneous bundles of activities, reconfiguring the value chain—or rebundling resources and capabilities—may enable a firm to develop unique value-creating activities.


Figure Note: The potential to configure the value chain to create a core competency and achieve competitive advantage is illustrated in Figure 3.4, and with a great deal of detail.


FIGURE 3.4
Prominent Application of the Internet in the Value Chain

This is a very involved figure, but it helps to illustrate the vast potential of the Internet to change the way managers think about the value chain.  Explaining the ins-and-outs of the figure will take a good bit of time, but it is worth the investment.



The managerial challenge is that the value-creation process is difficult and there is no one best way to assess a firm's primary and support activities or to evaluate the value-creating potential of those activities either within the firm or relative to competitors, because of incomplete or ambiguous data.

By being objective, managers may be able to use the value chain framework to identify new, unique ways to combine resources and capabilities to create value that are difficult for competitors to recognize, understand, or imitate.  The longer a firm is able to keep competitors "in the dark" as to how resources and capabilities have been combined to create value, the longer a firm will be able to sustain a competitive advantage.

Firms can use outsourcing as an alternative to identify primary or support activities for which its resources and capabilities are not core competencies and do not enable the firm to add superior value and achieve competitive advantage.


7        Define outsourcing and discuss the reasons for its use.       

OUTSOURCING

Outsourcing describes a firm's decision to purchase a value-creating activity from an external supplier.  Outsourcing has become important—and may become more important in the future—for two reasons:
•        There are limits to the abilities of firms to possess all of the bundles of resources and capabilities that are required to achieve superior performance (relative to competitors) in all its primary and support activities.
•        With limited resources and capabilities, firms can increase their ability to develop resources and capabilities to form core competencies and achieve competitive advantage by nurturing a few core competencies.

Firms engaging in outsourcing can increase their flexibility, mitigate risks, and reduce their capital investment.


Teaching Note: When outsourcing, a firm seeks the greatest value. In other words, a company wants to outsource only to firms possessing a core competence in terms of performing the primary or support activity that is being outsourced. This was the case between Nissan and IBM.  In fact, the firm’s services division, the group to which Nissan outsourced some of its computer operations, was the fastest-growing part of IBM. A few years back, IBM sold its Global Network division to AT&T at a price of $5 billion.  As part of this transaction, IBM agreed to pay AT&T Solutions $5 billion to run its global telecom network through 2004, a deal that allows AT&T and IBM to concentrate their efforts on different operations (those in which the companies have core competencies).       
               

Other research suggests that outsourcing does not work effectively without extensive internal capabilities to coordinate external sourcing as well as core competencies.

To ensure that the appropriate primary and support activities are outsourced, four skills are essential for managers involved in outsourcing programs:
•        strategic thinking – understanding whether/how outsourcing creates competitive advantage within the company
•        deal making – able to secure rights from external providers that can be fully used by internal managers
•        partnership governance – able to oversee and govern appropriately the relationship with the company to which the services were outsourced
•        change management – because outsourcing can significantly change how an organization operates, managers administering these programs must also be able to manage that change, including resolving employee resistance that accompanies any significant change effort

               
Teaching Note: Outsourcing can take several forms, depending on a firm's strategic objectives.  Examples of outsourcing strategies that, while different, enable outsourcing firms to achieve their strategic objectives while changing the face of college campuses include:
•        Universities and colleges outsourcing the management of college bookstores to Follett College Stores and Barnes & Noble
•        Food Service management companies such as ARA and Marriott licensing with Burger King to establish national chain restaurants on college campuses
•        Colleges in the U.S. contracting with private firms to manage or build on-campus housing
       
               
8        Discuss the importance of identifying internal strengths and weaknesses.       

COMPETENCIES, STRENGTHS, WEAKNESSES, AND STRATEGIC DECISIONS

Tools such as outsourcing help the firm focus on its core competencies as the source of its competitive advantages. However, evidence shows that the value-creating ability of core competencies should never be taken for granted. Moreover, the ability of a core competence to be a permanent competitive advantage can’t be assumed.

All core competencies have the potential to become core rigidities. As Leslie Wexner, CEO of The Limited, Inc., says: “Success doesn’t beget success. Success begets failure because the more that you know a thing works, the less likely you are to think that it won’t work. When you’ve had a long string of victories, it’s harder to foresee your own vulnerabilities.” Thus, each competence is a strength and a weakness—a strength because it is the source of competitive advantage and, hence, strategic competitiveness, and a weakness because, if emphasized when it is no longer competitively relevant, it can sow the seeds of organizational inertia.

Events occurring in the firm’s external environment create conditions through which core competencies can become core rigidities, generate inertia, and stifle innovation. According to one observer, “Often the flip side, the dark side, of core capabilities is revealed due to external events when new competitors figure out a better way to serve the firm’s customers, when new technologies emerge, or when political or social events shift the ground underneath.”

In the final analysis, changes in the external environment do not cause core competencies to become core rigidities; rather, strategic myopia and inflexibility on the part of managers are the cause.  Thus, nurturing existing competencies must be balanced by efforts to encourage the development of new competencies.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        Why is it important for a firm to study and understand its internal environment? (p. 71-72)

As they analyze their internal environment, a manager should think of the firm as a bundle of heterogeneous resources and capabilities that can be used to create an exclusive market position.  This means that firms should no longer focus only on the traditional sources of competitive advantage (e.g., labor costs, access to capital, and raw materials) as these advantages can be overcome through an international strategy and the relative free flow of global resources.   Instead, firms should seek out those resources and capabilities that other firms do not have, at least not in the same combinations.  A firm's resources are the source of its capabilities, some of which can lead to core competencies that enable a firm to perform value-creating activities better than its competitors or that its competitors cannot duplicate.  

2.        What is value?  Why is it critical for a firm to create value? How does it do so? (pp. 72-73)

Value is represented by the bundle of performance characteristics and attributes that a firm provides to customers in the form of goods or services for which customers are willing to pay.  Broadly speaking, value can be provided by a product's/service's low cost, highly-differentiated features, or a combination of the two (when these strategies are superior to those offered by competitors).  

Ultimately, it is critical that a firm be able to create customer value since it is the source of a firm's potential to earn above-average returns.  Therefore, in the rapidly changing environments of the 21st-century competitive landscape, firms must evaluate continuously the degree to which their core competencies create customer value.  What the firm intends to do to create value affects its choice of business-level strategy and its organizational structure

3.        What are the differences between tangible and intangible resources?  Why is it important for decision makers to understand these differences? Are tangible resources linked more closely to the creation of competitive advantages than are intangible resources, or is the reverse true?  Why? (pp. 76-78)

Tangible resources are represented by assets which can be seen and quantified.  They are not only represented by the firm's physical resources (such as plant and equipment), but also by other assets, such as the firm's borrowing capacity, the skills and attributes of its staff, and its technological capacities.  Intangible resources (because they are less visible and more embedded in the firm's history) are more difficult for competitors to understand and imitate.  These include such resources as scientific capabilities, knowledge within the firm, organizational routines, or the firm's reputation for quality.

Resources are the source of a firm's capabilities.  Capabilities are the source of a firm's core competencies, which are the basis of competitive advantages.  Intangible resources (as compared to tangible resources) are a superior and more potent source of core competencies.  In fact, in the global economy, intellectual and systems capabilities are more important to the success of a corporation than are its physical assets, and the capacity to manage human intellect is now a critical executive skill.  Intangible resources are less visible and more difficult for competitors to understand, purchase, imitate, or substitute, and thus firms prefer to rely on these resources as the foundation for their capabilities and core competencies.  Therefore, unobservable (i.e., intangible) resources provide a better platform for competitive advantage than do tangible resources.  And unlike tangible resources, the use of intangible resources can be leveraged for even greater benefits to firm performance.

4.        What are capabilities?  What must firms do to create capabilities? (p. 80)

Capabilities represent the firm's capacity or ability to successfully integrate sets of firm resources and deploy these resources to achieve some desired end.  Capabilities evolve or develop over time through interactions among and between tangible and intangible resources.  It is also critical to recognize that capabilities are based on the development, carrying, and exchange of information and knowledge by the firm's human capital.  Thus, a firm's capabilities are a reflection of its knowledge base: the skills and knowledge of its employees and (often) their functional expertise.

Global business leaders increasingly support the view that the knowledge possessed by human capital is among the most significant of an organization’s capabilities and may ultimately be at the root of all competitive advantages.  But firms must also be able to utilize the knowledge that they have and transfer it among their business units.  Given this reality, the firm’s challenge is to create an environment that allows people to integrate their individual knowledge with that held by others in the firm so that, collectively, the firm has significant organizational knowledge.

5.        What are the four criteria used to determine which of a firm’s capabilities are core competencies?  Why is it important for these criteria to be used? (pp. 81-84)

Capabilities are a firm's core competencies when they satisfy the four criteria of sustainable competitive advantage: they must be valuable, rare, costly to imitate, and nonsubstitutable.  A capability is valuable when it helps a firm exploit opportunities or neutralize threats in its external environment.  A capability that is rare is possessed by few, if any, current or potential competitors.  Capabilities are costly to imitate when other firms cannot develop them except at a cost disadvantage relative to firms that already possess them.  (This can be the case when the capabilities derive from unique historical conditions, are causally ambiguous, or socially complex.)  Finally, capabilities are non-substitutable when they do not have strategic equivalents.

It is important for these criteria to be used because a competitive advantage is sustainable over time only when competitors are unsuccessful at duplicating the benefits of the firm's strategy or when they are unable to imitate the strategy.

6.        What is value chain analysis?  What does a firm gain when it successfully uses this tool? (pp. 84-87)

The value chain is a template that the firm uses to understand its cost position and to identify the multiple means that might be used to facilitate the implementation of its business-level strategy.  Managers would use value chain analysis to examine the firm's resources and capabilities in relationship to the activities performed in the design, manufacture, and distribution of products.  Specifically, this framework differentiates primary activities (those involved with a product's physical creation, its sale and distribution to buyers, and its service after the sale) from support activities (which provide the support necessary for the primary activities to take place).   

Managers should scrutinize and assess activities and capabilities with competitors' capabilities in mind because the firm must be able to either perform an activity in a manner that provides value superior to or better than any competitor or identify and perform value-adding activities that competitors are unable to perform, if these capabilities are to be a source of competitive advantage.   Nonetheless, it is important to remember that value chain analysis is a highly subjective process.  Just as identifying and valuing a firm's resources and capabilities requires judgment, so does the process of assessing the relative value added by activities performed.  Studying the value chain will enable managers to better understand their cost structure and the activities in which they can create and capture value.

7.        What is outsourcing?  Why do firms outsource?  Will outsourcing's importance grow in the 21st century?  If so, why? (pp. 87-88)

Outsourcing is the purchase of a value-creating activity from an outside supplier that can provide the greatest value.  A firm is likely to engage in outsourcing when it identifies primary and support activities in which its resources and capabilities are neither sources of competence nor of sustainable competitive advantage.  In such instances, firms should consider purchasing these activities from firms that can add value to the activity (relative to the firm's competitors).

Outsourcing has several advantages for firms but also carries some important risks as well.  Outsourcing can potentially reduce costs and increase the quality of the activities outsourced.  In this way, it adds value to the product provided to consumers.  Thus, outsourcing can contribute to a firm’s competitive advantage and its ability to create value for its stakeholders.  However, the risk of the outsourcing partner’s learning the technology and becoming a competitor is very real and should be taken seriously.

Outsourcing is important to firms competing in the 21st-century landscape because few, if any firms possess all of the resources and capabilities that are necessary for them to achieve competitive superiority in all necessary primary and support activities.  By outsourcing activities in which it lacks the competence to create value and by nurturing a few core competencies, a firm increases its probability of developing a sustainable competitive advantage.  To maximize value, firms should scan the entire globe to locate the source (supplier or performer) of the to-be-outsourced activity to locate the best producer in the world of the activity that is being outsourced.  Given the increasing complexity of products/services offered (e.g., based on combined, sophisticated technologies), firms looking forward should anticipate that even more outsourcing of non-strategic activities is likely to be necessary.

8.        How do firms identify internal strengths and weaknesses?  Why is it vital that firms base their strategy on such strengths and weaknesses? (pp. 88-90)

By completing the internal analysis, firms can (must) identify their strengths and weaknesses in resources, capabilities, and core competencies.  For example, if they have weak capabilities or do not have core competencies in areas required to achieve a competitive advantage, they must acquire those resources and build the capabilities and competencies needed.  Alternatively, they could decide to outsource a function or activity where they are weak in order to improve the value that they provide to customers.

Firms need to have the appropriate resources and capabilities to develop the desired strategy and create value for customers and shareholders as well.  Having many resources does not necessarily lead to success.  Firms must have the right ones and the capabilities needed to produce superior value to customers.  Undoubtedly, having the appropriate and strong capabilities required for achieving a competitive advantage is a primary responsibility of top-level managers.  These important leaders must focus on both the firm’s strengths and weaknesses.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Dot com boom and bust

The focus of this chapter is on understanding how firm resources and capabilities serve as the cornerstone for competencies, and, ultimately, a competitive advantage.  Strategists have long understood the importance of internal analysis: for example, Porter’s value chain model was introduced in 1985, more than twenty years ago.  How, then, can a large number of prominent firms create strategies while apparently disregarding the importance of internal analysis?

The late 1990s saw the launch of thousands of Internet start-ups, often supported by venture capital.  These new businesses were heralded as part of the “new economy” and were characterized as having a superior business model compared to models being used by traditional “bricks and mortar” firms.  The collapse of the dot com bubble had global economic ramifications.  Some of the more prominent e-business failures include:

        Webvan.com                Pets.com
        Kosmo.com                Zap.com
        Cyberrebate.com                Flooz.com
        Go.com                Digiscents.com
        Boo.com                eToys.com
        Kibu.com                Yadayada.com


As a group, select a failed dot com business.  You may choose one of the companies from the above list, or another dot com that you identify on your own.  Using library and Internet resources, prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation that covers these questions:

        How did the company describe its value proposition – i.e., how did the firm plan to create value for its customers?
        Describe the resources, capabilities, and competencies that supported this value proposition.
        Why do you think the firm failed?  Was it a poor concept, or a sound concept that was not well executed?  Apply the concepts of value, rarity, imitation and sustainability when preparing your answer.
        Are there presently other firms that use a similar approach to creating value for their customers?  If so, what makes them different from the failed company that you studied?

Exercise 2: Competitive advantage and pro sports

What makes one team successful while another team struggles?  At first glance, a National Football League franchise or women’s National Basketball Association team may not seem like a typical business.  However, professional sports have been around for a long time: pro hockey in the United Stated emerged around World War I, and pro basketball shortly after World War II; both could be considered newcomers relative to the founding of baseball leagues.  Pro sports are big business as well, as evidenced by David Beckham’s 2007 multi-million dollar contract with Major League Soccer.  

With this exercise, we will use tools and concepts from the chapter to analyze factors underlying the success or failure of different sports teams.  Working as a group, pick two teams that play in the same league.  For each team, address the following questions:

        How successful are the two teams you selected?  How stable has their performance been over time?
        Make an inventory of the characteristics of the two teams.  Characteristics you might choose to identify include reputation, coaching, fan base, playing style and tactics, individual players, and so on.  For each characteristic you describe,
o        Decide if it is best characterized as a tangible, intangible, or capability.
o        Apply the concepts of value, rarity, imitation and sustainability to analyze its value-creating ability.
        Is there evidence of bundling – i.e., the combination of different resources and capabilities?
        What would it take for these two teams to substantially change their competitive position over time?  For example, if a team is a leader, what types of changes in resources and capabilities might affect it negatively?  If a team is below average, what changes would you recommend to its portfolio of resources and capabilities?


—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Dot com boom and bust

The goal of this exercise is to use the dot com bubble to analyze the role of resources and capabilities in building a competitive advantage.  Working in groups, students are asked to select a failed dot com and develop a PowerPoint presentation which answers the following questions:

        How did the company describe its value proposition – i.e., how did they plan to create value for their customers?
        Describe the resources, capabilities, and competencies that supported this value proposition.
        Why do you think the firm failed?  Was it a poor concept, or a sound concept that was not well executed?  Apply the concepts of value, rarity, imitation and sustainability in your answer.
        Are there presently other firms which use a similar approach to creating value for their customers?  If so, what makes them different from the failed company that you studied?

Michael Porter’s Strategy and the Internet article (Harvard Business Review, March 2001) is an excellent complement to this assignment.  Porter discusses how the exuberance associated with the Internet led to a number of adverse outcomes, including the adoption of strategies that hurt both individual firms and entire industries, as well as the creation of many businesses that were fundamentally unsustainable.
The instructor should distribute copies of Porter’s article when the exercise is assigned.  Following is a recommended teaching plan for discussing the exercise in class:
Ask two or three student teams to share their presentations with the class.  To obtain variety in the presentations, ask several questions before selecting teams.  For instance:

What firm did you pick?
What is the reason for failure?  Who thought the idea was sound, but poorly executed?  Who thought the basic idea was flawed? How severe were the failures? Who studied firms that came and went quickly?  Who studied firms that lasted for awhile before going under?
Next, discuss how these failures relate to concepts in Porter’s article.  Some of the relevant topics from the article include:

distorted market signals
effects on industry structure
first mover issues
competitive advantage
value chain
If there is sufficient time available, business models can be included as a topic in the discussion.  Porter is highly critical of this term, which was popularized during the Internet boom as a shorthand term for how a firm creates revenue.  Porter notes that the “business model approach to management becomes an invitation to faulty thinking and self-delusion (2001: 12).” Elsewhere, Michael Lewis noted that the term business model was used during the boom “to justify all manner of half-baked plans.”  
A good discussion question is to ask whether Porter’s critique is overly harsh. Joan Magretta’s article Why Business Models Matter (Harvard Business Review May 2002) offers a good counterpoint to Porter’s negative assessment.
Exercise 2: Competitive advantage and professional sports
The intent of this exercise is to frame the discussion of resources, capabilities, and competitive advantage in a familiar topic – professional sports.  Student teams are asked to pick two teams that compete in the same league and answer the following questions:
        How successful are the two teams you selected?  How stable has their performance been over time?
        Make an inventory of the characteristics of the two teams.  For example, reputation, coaching, fan base, playing style and tactics, individual players, and so on.  For each of the features that you describe,
o        Decide if they are best characterized as a tangible, intangible, or capability.
o        Apply the concepts of value, rarity, imitation and sustainability each of the resources and capabilities you identified.
        Is there evidence of bundling – i.e., the combination of different resources and capabilities?
        What would it take for these two teams to substantially change their competitive position over time?  For example, if a team is a leader, what types of changes in resources and capabilities might affect them negatively?  If a team is below average, what changes would you recommend to their portfolio of resources and capabilities?
To debrief this exercise in class, ask students which teams they chose for analysis.  Focus on the league with the greatest number of teams represented.  Draw on the results of the team analyses to fill in the following table.
For each team, identify no more than four characteristics that students believe are important to that team’s success.  If more than four items are offered, have students rank order the different components.  For each of the items:
        Classify the type as T, I, or C, for Tangible, Intangible, or Capability.
        Evaluate each item whether it adds value, is rare, is free from imitation, and is sustainable.  
Next, discuss whether multiple characteristics are bundled together for a particular team.  Assign a score of ‘1’ for no bundling, ‘2’ for some bundling, and ‘3’ for extensive bundling.
Finally, ask what would be necessary for a firm to substantially change their competitive position over time.  
Team        Key
Characteristics        Type
(I,T, or C)        Is It…        Bundling
(1,2, or 3)        Keys to Change
                        Valuable        Rare        Imitable        Sustainable               
Team 1                                                               
                                                               
                                                               
                                                               
Team 2                                                               
                                                               
                                                               
                                                               
Team 3                                                               
                                                               
                                                               
                                                               


—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
       
1.        Several companies use their brand as a competitive advantage. Ask the class, given their knowledge about the global economy, which brands they believe have the strongest likelihood of remaining a source of advantage in the twenty-first century? Why? What effects do they believe the Internet’s capabilities will have on this brand, and what should the owner of the brand do in light of them?
2.        Students should visit the manager of a local store to obtain the following information. Using the definition presented in the chapter, define value for the manager. Ask the manager if the definition is consistent with how her or his firm thinks of value. If there is a difference, ask the manager to assess why the difference exists.
3.        Have the students consider a group (e.g., a fraternity or sorority, Toastmaster’s, or a volunteer organization) in which they hold membership. Using the categories shown in Tables 3.1 and 3.2, list what are perceived as the group’s tangible and intangible resources. Show the list to another member of the group. Does the person agree with your assessment of the group’s resources? If not, what might account for the differences? If differences do exist between you and your colleague, what is the meaning of such differences in terms of trying to form the group’s capabilities?
4.        Refer to the third question. Ask the students if it was easier to list the tangible or the intangible resources? Why? How confident are they with their assessments?
5.        What competitive advantage do the individual students feel that the university or college possesses? What evidence can they provide to support this opinion? Does the class as a whole agree with the assessments? If not, why not?
6.        Ask the students what effects they believe the Internet will have on the university or college within the next five years as it seeks to develop new competitive advantages? In their view, do the strategic decision makers in your educational institution understand the Internet’s capabilities? If not, why not?
7.        Trust is identified in the chapter as a potential source of competitive advantage. Ask the students if they have ever been involved in a situation in which trust was instrumental in accomplishing an organization’s goals? If so, what outcomes were made possible because of trust?


Ethics Questions

1.        Can efforts to develop sustainable competitive advantages result in employees using unethical practices? If so, what unethical practices might be used to compare a firm’s core competencies with those held by rivals? How do the Internet’s capabilities affect actions taken to form competitive advantages that will help the firm in efforts to outperform its rivals?
2.        Do ethical practices affect a firm’s ability to develop brand as a source of competitive advantage? If so, how does this happen? Can you think of brands that are a source of competitive advantage at least in part because of the firm’s ethical practices?
3.        What is the difference between exploiting a firm’s human capital and using that capital as a source of competitive advantage? Are there situations in which the exploitation of human capital can be a source of advantage? If so, can you name such a situation? If the exploitation of human capital can be a source of competitive advantage, is this a sustainable advantage? Why or why not?
4.        Are there any ethical dilemmas associated with outsourcing? If so, what are they? How would you deal with outsourcing ethical dilemmas you believe exist?
5.        What ethical responsibilities do managers have if they determine that a set of employees has skills that are valuable only to a core competence that is becoming a core rigidity?
6.        Through the Internet, firms sometimes make a vast array of data, information, and knowledge available to competitors as well as to customers and suppliers. What ethical issues, if any, are involved when the firm finds competitively relevant information on a competitor’s Web site?
7.        Firms are aware that competitors read information that is posted on their Web sites. Given this reality, is it ethical for a firm to include false information, for example, about its sources of competitive advantage on its Web site in hopes that the information will influence competitors to take certain actions as a result of viewing it?

Internet Exercise
       
A fairly recent global development in the automobile industry has been the mergers and acquisitions going on among firms. These include the coupling of Daimler-Benz with Chrysler; VW with Audi, Rolls Royce, and Bentley; GM with Saab; and Ford’s acquisition of Volvo. The new partnerships have allowed firms to combine resources and capabilities to build a new breed of universal car. Explore the Websites of these firms. Is there still a specific brand identification associated with each type of car? How important will branding be in the future for these products?

*e-project: Imagine that you are able to purchase your dream car from among the current year’s models. Before buying, though, you would like to learn something about how the car is produced. (For example, is your Rolls Royce being assembled alongside a Beetle?) Using Internet sources, attempt to trace the origins of the car’s major components, technology, and performance-testing resources, as well as the production and advertising or marketing facilities.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:56:28 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 4
Business-Level Strategy

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK



KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define business-level strategy.
2.        Discuss the relationship between customers and business-level strategies in terms of who, what, and how.
3.        Explain the differences among business-level strategies.
4.        Use the five forces of competition model to explain how above-average returns can be earned through each business-level strategy.
5.        Describe the risks of using each of the business-level strategies.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case  From Pet Food to PetSmart  
CUSTOMERS: THEIR RELATIONSHIP WITH BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES
        Effectively Managing Relationships with Customers
        Reach, Richness, and Affiliation
        Who: Determining the Customers to Serve  
        What: Determining Which Customer Needs to Satisfy  
        How: Determining Core Competencies Necessary to Satisfy Customer Needs  
THE PURPOSE OF A BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGY  
TYPES OF BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES
          Cost Leadership Strategy
        Differentiation Strategy
Strategic Focus  Caribou Coffee: When You Are Number Two, You Try Harder
        Focus Strategies
        Integrated Cost Leadership/Differentiation Strategy  
Strategic Focus  Zara: Integrating Both Sides of the Coin
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES


LECTURE NOTES
               
Chapter Introduction:  Firms that perform well, even in very competitive industries, will follow some pattern of decision-making and execution that is internally consistent.  That is, the firm will line up its resource commitments in a way that reinforces the direction of the enterprise.  If these decisions are inconsistent, the outcome will be resource commitments that work against one another and hinder the progress of the business.  This chapter will lay out the basic strategy patterns that can lead to competitive advantage.  Knowing these will help students understand how to make the most of the firm’s potentials.       
               


OPENING CASE
From Pet Food to PetSmart

This opening case epitomizes being in touch with customers and responding to their needs and values which is paramount in business level strategy.  It also explains and demonstrates how PetSmart has “evolved” at a very rapid rate.  Twenty years ago (1987), PetFood Warehouse opened two warehouse stores.  Over the next two years, the company changed its warehouse strategy to become a “MART for PETs that’s SMART about PETs.”  The name and logo were changed to “PetsMart.” The focus was providing the best selection of products at competitive prices.  By 1994, PetsMart had changed its slogan to “Where pets are family.” By 2000, the company realized importance of its services to pet owners (referred to as “pet parents”) and developed a new vision statement: “To provide Total Lifetime Care for every pet, every parent, every time.”  In 2001, PetsMart began an extensive associate training program (the company’s name for employees). Associates were trained to identify customers’ needs and how to provide solutions.  By 2005, top executives decided to leave the “mart” concept and move to a new focus on providing “Smart” solutions and information. The name was changed to PetSmart and a new logo was created.

Specialized services and dedication to the community distinguish PetSmart from its competitors. Services
available at most PetSmart stores include pet training classes where the customer is allowed to retake the class if not 100 percent satisfied, grooming facilities with certified pet groomers,  PetsHotels that provide daycare and extended stay facilities with 24-hour caregivers on duty, full-service pet hospitals, pet adoption centers, and new pet centers.  In addition to services, PetSmart has implemented a universal return policy, which means that it will accept returned merchandise even if it was purchased from a competitor. Through its PetPerks customer loyalty program, customers use a card such as the ones used in many grocery stores to track customer purchases and to help develop effective marketing strategies. In return customers receive special discount offers and communications to help them become more knowledgeable about caring for their pets. PetSmart Charities, an independent nonprofit animal welfare association, was started in 1994 and has donated more than $52 million to animal welfare programs.

In addition to traditional brick-and-mortar stores, PetSmart offers products and services through catalog and Internet sales.  PetSmart.com is the largest retailer of pet products and services.  PetSmart continues to emphasize customer service and continues to grow.  It currently offers 13,000 products and employs 39,000 associates in over 900 stores.

Students should be engaged to identify the elements of business level strategy.  Have the evolutionary changes that have transpired over the last twenty years been in response to customer needs, expectations and values?  Has PetSmart become “smart” over its brief lifetime as to the role of pets in families?




1        Define business-level strategy.       

As stated in Chapter 1, strategies represent integrated and coordinated sets of actions that are taken to exploit core competencies and gain a competitive advantage. To be more specific, strategies are purposeful, precede the taking of actions to which they apply, and demonstrate a shared understanding of the firm’s vision and mission.  An effectively formulated strategy marshals, integrates, and allocates the firm’s resources, capabilities, and competencies so that it will be properly aligned with its external environment.  A properly developed strategy also rationalizes the firm’s vision and mission along with the actions taken to achieve them.

Determining the businesses in which the firm will compete is a question of corporate-level strategy and is discussed in Chapter 6. Competition in individual product markets is a question of business-level strategy.

The firm’s core competencies should be focused on satisfying customer needs or preferences through business-level strategies, which detail actions taken to provide value to customers and gain a competitive advantage by exploiting core competencies in specific, individual product or service markets.  In other words, business-level strategies are developed based on a firm’s core competencies and indicate how an organization chooses to compete in a particular market to gain a competitive advantage over competitors.

               
Teaching Note: Indicate that, following a discussion of the customer, two broad categories of business-level strategies will be discussed in this chapter:
•        Cost leadership, a strategy that provides products—goods or services—with features acceptable to customers at the lowest competitive price.  For example, many of Taiwan’s PC manufacturers target the low-priced segment of the PC market through extreme forms of the cost leadership strategy. To drive their costs lower and to exploit the competitive advantage their low-cost structures provide, these companies rely on suppliers from China to supply low-priced components that will allow the PC manufacturers to drive production costs still lower.
•        Differentiation, a strategy that provides products that customers perceive as being unique in ways that are important to them and, because this uniqueness offers value, customers are willing to pay a premium price for them.  Jaguar is a manufacturer of high-prestige cars for which customers are willing pay high prices.


A customer focus requires that firms simultaneously evaluate or consider
•        who to serve,
•        what customer needs will be satisfied, and
•        how those needs will be satisfied through the strategy selected.


2        Discuss the relationship between customers and business-level strategies in terms of who, what, and how.       

CUSTOMERS: THEIR RELATIONSHIP WITH BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES

To survive and achieve strategic competitiveness in the twenty-first century competitive landscape, firms must:
•        identify who their customers are
•        determine customer needs or preferences
•        focus on satisfying the needs of some group of customers
•        determine how to compete (select a strategy) that enables them to satisfy customer needs


Teaching Note: The text discusses Dell and Hewlett Packard to demonstrate how HP worked to better satisfy customer needs, thus capturing some of Dell’s market. Dell had been the acknowledged customer service leader, until HP took note and moved in.


Effectively Managing Relationships with Customers

Key connections in managing customer relationships are as follows:
•        The firm’s relationships with its customers are strengthened when it delivers superior value to them.
•        Delivering superior value often results in increased loyalty from customers.
•        Customer loyalty is positively related to profitability.

A number of companies have become skilled at managing all aspects of their relationship with their customers.
•        Amazon.com is known for the quality of information it maintains about its customers, the service it renders, and its ability to anticipate customers’ needs.
•        Cemex uses the Internet to link its customers, cement plants, and main control room, allowing the firm to automate orders and optimize truck deliveries in highly congested Mexico City.


Reach, Richness, and Affiliation

In the Internet age, firms can maintain competitive advantage by:
•        thinking continuously about accessing and connecting with customers (reach)
•        maintaining information with depth and detail for (and from) customers (richness)
•        facilitating useful interactions (affiliation)


Who: Determining the Customers to Serve

The first step is to identify customers based on differences in needs or preferences (often called market segmentation).  This enables the firm to have a better grasp on what might be important to customers because of the lack of any in-depth insights relevant for decision making that are provided by central tendencies (averages) of the market in general.


Table Note:  It might be interesting to ask students which of the dimensions in this table help to identify the most promising market segments.


TABLE 4.1
Basis for Customer Segmentation

Dimensions that can be used to identify potential customers include the following factors:

For consumer markets:
•        Demographic factors
•        Socioeconomic factors
•        Geographic factors
•        Psychological factors
•        Consumption patterns
•        Perceptual factors        For industrial markets:
•        End-use segments
•        Product segments
•        Geographic segments
•        Common buying factor segments
•        Customer size segments
                

Teaching Note: Once customers have been segmented into groups, firms must determine whether or not differences in needs or preferences among customer groups are significant.  If they are not, firms might decide to offer a standard product to all customers (a standard product being one that appeals to or satisfies the needs of an average or typical customer).  They also may do this because they believe that the product cannot easily be customized or differentiated, or the firm’s competencies may be best suited to manufacturing standard products.  Firms that offer standard, undifferentiated products typically offer them at the lowest competitive price as they follow a cost leadership strategy.  However, firms that choose to ignore significant differences in customer needs may find that they no longer are strategically competitive.       
               

It is imperative that firms pay careful attention to differences in customer needs among customer groups and not arbitrarily “lump” them together because:
•        Almost any identifiable human or organizational characteristic can be used to sub-divide a market into segments that differ from one another on a given characteristic.
•        Customer characteristics are often combined to segment markets into specific groups that have unique needs.
•        Demographic factors can also be used to segment markets into generations with unique interests and needs.

               
Teaching Note: In the U.S., the teenage market segment is a competitively relevant customer group.  Generate discussion by asking students about their assessments of the size, growth, and spending-related characteristics of this market.  Then, follow up by asking how clothing retailers like JCPenney are using sophisticated approaches to pinpoint the needs of customer groups and then offer products that will meet those customers’ needs. In 1999, JCPenney launched a magazine called Noise to cover the latest styles and trends in beauty and fashion and about music and sports-related events.  The magazine was fashioned to create a strong, personal relationship with teenage customers. How well do such approaches work?  What works best?       
               

What: Determining Which Customer Needs to Satisfy

As noted in Chapter 3, one challenge for firms is to identify ways in which they can bundle their resources and capabilities to create value for customers, because, given the choice, customers are most interested in purchasing products that both satisfy their needs and provide value.

After the firm decides who it will serve, it must identify the targeted customer group’s needs that its goods or services can satisfy.  This is important in that successful firms learn how to deliver to customers what they want and when they want it.

In a general sense, needs (wants) are related to a product’s benefits and features.  Having close and frequent interactions with both current and potential customers helps the firm identify those individuals’ and groups’ current and future needs.  From a strategic perspective, a basic need of all customers is to buy products that create value for them.

The most effective firms continuously strive to anticipate changes in customers’ needs.  Failure to do this results in the loss of customers to competitors who are offering greater value in terms of product features and functionalities.

In any given industry, there is great variety among consumers in terms of their needs, e.g., high-quality, lower-cost with acceptable quality, quick delivery.  

Diversified food and soft-drink producer PepsiCo believes that “any one consumer has different needs at different times of the day.”


Teaching Note: The chapter reports research findings suggesting that middle-market consumers “are willing to pay premiums of 20 percent to 200 percent for the kinds of well-designed, well-engineered, and well-crafted goods—often possessing the artistic touches of traditional luxury goods—not before found in the mass middle market.” Engage the class in a discussion about whether or not they think this is true. Would the higher end of this range apply only to certain products (e.g., luxury cars)? Will their perceptions change once they are employed and personally move up to “middle-market” status?


How: Determining Core Competencies Necessary to Satisfy Customers’ Needs

As explained in Chapters 1 and 3, core competencies are resources and capabilities that serve as a source of competitive advantage for the firm over its rivals.  Firms use core competencies (how) to implement value-creating strategies and thereby satisfy customers’ needs.  Only those firms with the capacity to continuously improve, innovate, and upgrade their competencies can expect to meet and hopefully exceed customers’ expectations across time.

               
Teaching Note: The next section of the chapter describes generic business-level strategies that can be implemented to provide customers with distinctive products that meet customer needs and enable the firm to achieve a competitive advantage and earn above-average returns.  Indicate that the business-level strategies are considered generic because they generally apply across industries, products, and the public and private sectors.       
               


FIGURE 4.1
Southwest Airlines’ Activity System

This figure shows how the numerous components of the strategy at Southwest Airlines came together around six strategic themes – i.e., limited passenger service; frequent, reliable departures; lean, highly productive ground and gate crews; high aircraft utilization; very low ticket prices; and short-haul, point-to-point routes between midsized cities and secondary airports.  In total, there are 18 different features identified in the figure.




3        Explain the differences among business-level strategies.       

4        Use the five forces of competition model to explain how above-average returns can be earned through each business-level strategy.       

5        Describe the risks of using each of the business-level strategies.       

THE PURPOSE OF A BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGY

Choosing to perform activities differently or to perform different activities than rivals is the essence of business-level strategy.  Thus, the firm’s business-level strategy is a deliberate choice about how it will perform the value chain’s primary and support activities in ways that create unique value.  Indeed, in the complex twenty-first century competitive landscape, successful use of a business-level strategy results only when the firm learns how to integrate the activities it performs in ways that create competitive advantages that can be used to create value for customers.


Teaching Note:  The text shows Southwest Airlines’ activity map in Figure 4.1. The manner in which Southwest has integrated its activities is the foundation for the successful use of its integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy.  The tight integration among Southwest’s activities is a key source of the firm’s ability to operate more profitably than its competitors.  Individual clusters of tightly linked activities make it possible for the outcome of a strategic theme to be achieved.  And Southwest’s tightly integrated activities make it difficult for competitors to imitate the firm’s integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy.  Many students will have first-hand experience flying Southwest Airlines.  Explore Figure 4.1 with them and see if they can catch the genius of the Southwest Airlines model.


Fit among activities is a key to the sustainability of competitive advantage for all firms.  As Michael Porter observes, “strategic fit among many activities is fundamental not only to competitive advantage, but also to the sustainability of that advantage.  It is harder for a rival to match an array of interlocked activities than it is merely to imitate a particular sales-force approach, match a process technology, or replicate a set of product features.  Positions built on systems of activities are far more sustainable than those built on individual activities.”


TYPES OF BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES

Business-level strategy is concerned with a firm’s position in an industry, relative to competitors. Firms are challenged to select business-level strategies to position themselves favorably by performing activities differently or performing different activities as compared to its rivals. Thus, the firm’s business-level strategy is a deliberate choice about how it will perform the value chain’s primary and support activities in ways that create unique value.


Figure Note: As illustrated in Figure 4.2, firms select their business-level strategies based on a combination of competitive or market scope and product uniqueness or standardization (cost).


FIGURE 4.2
Five Business-Level Strategies

Firms can choose one of five strategies from the generic strategy matrix based on the source of competitive advantage—uniqueness or cost—and breadth of competitive scope—broad or narrow.

A firm choosing to compete across a broad market determines that it should compete in a number of customer segments. Competitive advantage is achieved either by offering unique products—a differentiation strategy—or by establishing a low-cost position and providing standardized products at the lowest competitive price—a cost leadership strategy.

Firms that choose to compete in narrow customer segments select a focus strategy, which may be either a focused differentiation strategy (few segments, unique products) or a focused cost leadership strategy (narrow segment, standardized products at the lowest competitive price).

An integrated cost leadership/differentiation incorporates both of these emphases.



None of the five business-level strategies shown in Figure 4.2 is inherently or universally superior to the others.  The effectiveness of each strategy is contingent both on the opportunities and threats in a firm’s external environment and on the possibilities provided by the firm’s unique resources, capabilities, and core competencies.  It is critical, therefore, for the firm to select a business-level strategy that is based on a match between the opportunities and threats in its external environment and the strengths of its internal environment as shown by its core competencies.


Cost Leadership Strategy

The cost leadership strategy is an integrated set of actions taken to produce goods or services with features that are acceptable to customers at the lowest cost, relative to that of competitors.

Firms that choose a cost-leadership strategy offer relatively standardized products with characteristics or features that typical customers accept (but with competitive levels of differentiation) at the lowest competitive price.
               
Firms that wish to be successful by following a cost-leadership strategy must maintain constant efforts aimed at lowering costs (relative to rivals’ costs) and creating value for customers.  Cost-reduction strategies can include:
•        Building efficient-scale facilities
•        Establishing tight control of production and overhead costs
•        Minimizing the costs of sales, product research and development, and service
•        Investing in state-of-the-art manufacturing technologies

Implementing and maintaining a cost leadership strategy means that a firm must consider its value chain of primary and secondary activities (as discussed in Chapter 3) and effectively link those activities, if it is to be successful (as illustrated in Figure 4.3).

As primary activities, inbound logistics and outbound logistics often account for much of the total cost to produce some goods and services. Research suggests that a competitive advantage in logistics creates more value with cost leadership strategies than with differentiation strategies, prompting cost leaders to focus on these primary activities.

Cost leaders also carefully examine all support activities to find additional sources of potential cost reductions.


Figure Note: Figure 4.3 points out that the critical focus in successfully implementing a cost leadership strategy is on efficiency and cost reduction, regardless of the value-creating activity.


FIGURE 4.3
Examples of Value-Creating Activities Associated with the Cost Leadership Strategy

As suggested in Figure 4.3, the firm’s focus throughout each of its primary and secondary value-creating activities is on the following:
•        simplification of processes and procedures
•        achieving efficiency and effectiveness
•        reducing costs
•        monitoring costs of activities provided by others that interface with the firm’s inbound or outbound logistics



A firm that successfully implements a cost leadership strategy can earn above-average returns even when the five competitive forces are strong.


Rivalry with Existing Competitors

Achieving the lowest cost position means that a firm’s rivals will hesitate to compete based on price because, in a price war, the low cost firm will still earn profits even after its competitors compete away all profits.

Having the low-cost position is a valuable defense against rivals.  For example, Wal-Mart controls and reduces costs so well that rivals cannot compete against it based on price.  To build its cost position, the discount retailer achieves strict cost control in several ways.   Kmart’s decision to compete against Wal-Mart on the basis of cost contributed to the firm’s failure and subsequent bankruptcy filing. Its inferior distribution system—an inefficient and high-cost system compared to Wal-Mart’s—is one of the factors that prevented Kmart from having a competitive cost structure relative to Wal-Mart.


Bargaining Power of  Buyers (Customers)

Achieving the low cost position provides some protection against powerful customers who attempt to drive down prices.  If customers attempt to drive prices below the cost of the next most efficient firm, that firm might choose to exit the market (rather than remain and earn below average profits), leaving the low cost firm with a monopoly position.  If that happens, customers would lose any bargaining power as the monopoly firm would be in a position to raise prices.


Bargaining Power of Suppliers

Because they have achieved the lowest cost position in the industry, the cost leadership strategy enables a firm to absorb a greater amount of cost increases from powerful suppliers before it must raise prices charged to customers.  This may enable the firm to be alone among its competitors in earning above-average returns.

In addition, a low-cost leader that also has a dominant market share may be in a position to force suppliers to reduce prices or to hold down the level of price increases, and thus reduce the power of suppliers. Again, Wal-Mart is a good example of a firm that follows this pattern.


Potential Entrants

Firms successfully following cost leadership strategies generally must produce and sell in large volumes to earn above-average returns.  And, with a continuous focus on efficiency and reducing costs, cost leadership firms create barriers to entry.

New entrants must either enter the industry at a large scale (large enough to achieve the same economies of scale as the next lowest cost firm) or be satisfied with average profits until they move sufficiently far down the experience curve to match the efficiencies of the low-cost leader.


Product Substitutes

The cost leader is in a more attractive position relative to substitute products than are other firms in the industry.  To retain customers, the cost leader can more easily reduce prices to maintain the price-value relationship and retain customers.


Competitive Risks of the Cost Leadership Strategy

Despite the attractiveness of the cost leadership strategy, it is accompanied by risks such as the following:
•        Technological innovations by competitors could eliminate the cost leader’s cost advantage.
•        Overly focusing on process efficiency may cause the cost leader to overlook needed differentiation features.
•        Competitors may successfully imitate the low-cost leader’s value chain configuration.

In the event of any of the above, the low-cost leader is challenged to increase value to customers.  This may mean reducing prices or adding product features without raising prices.  However, if prices are reduced too low, it may be difficult for the firm to earn satisfactory margins and customers may resist any price increases.


Differentiation Strategy
In contrast to the cost leadership strategy, implementation of a differentiation strategy means that value is provided to customers through the unique features and characteristics of a firm’s products rather than by the lowest price.

Because differentiated products satisfy customers’ unique needs or preferences, firms can charge a premium price for differentiated products.  But the premium cannot exceed what customers are willing to pay.

For the firm to be able to outperform its competitors and earn above-average returns, the price charged for the differentiated product must exceed the cost of differentiation.  In other words, the price charged must exceed total product cost. Because of this, the differentiated product’s premium prices generally exceed the low price of the standard product.

Firms that follow a differentiation strategy concentrate or focus on product innovation and developing product features that customers value rather than on maintaining the lowest competitive price (the case for cost leadership strategy).  Often this strategy seeks to differentiate the product/service on as many dimensions as possible.

Products can be differentiated in a number of ways so that they stand apart from standardized products:
•        superior quality
•        unusual or unique features
•        more responsive customer service
•        rapid product innovation
•        advanced technological features
•        engineering design and performance
•        additional features
•        an image of prestige or status

Some examples of differentiation strategies would include the following:
•        Ralph Lauren differentiates its clothing lines through image.
•        Lexus cars are differentiated by prestige and image.
•        Apple (iPod and iPhone) are differentiated by innovative design.
•        McKinsey and Company offers differentiated consulting services.

Successfully implementing (and maintaining) a differentiation strategy requires a firm to consider its value chain of primary and secondary activities and effectively link those activities as illustrated in Figure 4.3.

               
Figure Note: Use Figure 4.4 to show that the critical focus in a successful differentiation strategy is on quality and product innovation, regardless of the value-creating activity.       


FIGURE 4.4
Examples of Value-Creating Activities Associated with the Differentiation Strategy

As suggested in Figure 4.4, the firm’s focus in its primary and secondary value-creating activities is on
•        establishing the importance of quality
•        accuracy, speed, and responsiveness
•        understanding and meeting customers’ unique preferences
•        monitoring the speed, reliability, and quality of activities provided by others that interface with the firm’s inbound and outbound logistics



Teaching Note:  The chapter mentions that firms following differentiation strategies cannot completely ignore costs and the need for minimal spending on process-related innovations.  Porter refers to this as maintaining “parity” on the alternative dimension.  When speaking of cost leadership strategies, a useful example of “differentiation parity” comes from the automobile manufacturing industry.  Hyundai has been able to compete based on cost, but it still produces a car that is “in the ballpark” on differentiation.  Failed manufacturer Yugo offered a very inexpensive car (introduced at a mere $1995 in the early 1980s), but these were of such poor quality that buyers refused to purchase them once news of their reliability problems got out.  A car that will not run is not a value, even if it sells for only a fraction of the price of all other available models!  In a similar way, a company that competes on differentiation must maintain “cost parity” so that the differentiated features that customers want are not beyond the reach of their pocketbooks.  Consumers recognize the superior quality of Sony televisions, but the premium charged is justifiable, given the quality of the product.  Obviously, controlling costs plays an important part in pricing possibilities.

               
A firm that successfully implements a differentiation strategy can earn above-average returns even when the five competitive forces are strong.


Rivalry with Existing Competitors

Achieving customer loyalty means differentiating products in ways that are meaningful to customers.  Brand loyalty means that customers will be less sensitive to price increases.  As long as the firm satisfies the differentiated needs of loyal customers, it may be insulated from price-based competition.


Bargaining Power of Buyers (Customers)

Through meaningful differentiation, firms develop products that are considered unique.  This uniqueness may insulate the firm from competitive rivalry and reduce customer sensitivity to price increases (similar to the insulation from rivalry with existing competitors).

By satisfying customer preferences in ways that no competitor can, firms also are able to charge higher prices (because there are no comparable product alternatives).


Bargaining Power of Suppliers

Because of the differentiator’s focus on product quality and responsiveness to customer preferences, suppliers also may be forced to provide differentiators with higher quality materials, components, or services, which can drive up the firm’s per-unit costs.

Since the differentiator charges premium prices, they are somewhat insulated from suppliers’ price increases (as the differentiator can absorb a greater level of cost increases from powerful suppliers through its higher margins).  Alternatively, because of lower price sensitivity by customers, differentiators may be able to raise prices to cover increased supplier-related costs.


Potential Entrants

The principal barrier to entry is customers’ loyalty to the uniquely differentiated brand.  This means that a potential entrant must either overcome (or surpass) the uniqueness of existing products or provide similarly differentiated products at a lower price to increase customer value.


Product Substitutes

Brand loyalty may insulate differentiated products from substitutes.  Without brand loyalty, customers may switch to substitutes that offer similar features at a lower price or to products with more attractive features at the same price.


Competitive Risks of the Differentiation Strategy

Like the cost leadership strategy, the differentiation strategy also carries risks such as the following:
•        Customers may decide that the cost of uniqueness is too high. In other words, the price differential between the standardized and differentiated product is too high.  Perhaps the firm provides a greater level of uniqueness than customers are willing to pay for.
•        The firm’s means of differentiation no longer provides value to customers.  For instance, what is the value of prestige or exclusivity?  And, how long will they last as customers become more sophisticated?
•        Customer learning may reduce the customer’s perception of the value of the firm’s differentiation.  Through experience, customers may learn that the extra price for a differentiated good is no longer a value.
               


Teaching Note: This loss of value through customer learning or changes in customer perceptions can be illustrated by the experiences of IBM.  Initially, the IBM name on a personal computer signaled value to customers; however, clones soon challenged IBM’s preeminent position in the PC market.  As customers learned that the clone machines offered similar features at lower prices, the value attached to the IBM brand name diminished and IBM’s sales suffered.       


•        A fourth risk is concerned with counterfeiting. Increasingly, counterfeit goods (products that attempt to convey differentiated features to customers at significantly reduced prices) are a concern for many firms using the differentiated strategy.

In the event of any of the above, differentiators are challenged to increase value to customers. This may mean reducing prices, adding product features without raising prices, or developing new efficiencies in its value chain of primary and secondary activities.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Caribou Coffee: When You Are Number Two, You Try Harder

Perhaps the title of this Strategic Focus should be “Caribou...: When You Are Number Two, You Try Differently.”  Caribou Coffee is a mere 15 years old and has solidly established itself as a challenger to Starbuck’s in the specialty coffee and coffeehouse market.  But with over 430 stores and more than 20 franchises, it still has a long way to go to catch #1.  Caribou employees over 5,000 people in stores concentrated primarily in the central and eastern United States who focus on “providing an experience that makes the day better.”  Although both Caribou Coffee and Starbucks are dedicated to providing the highest quality products and customer service, their methods of delivering them are quite different. Starbucks provides a comfortable setting for urban customers who prefer references to sizes such as “venti” and “grande.”  Caribou has chosen to use the more common names of “small”, “medium,” and “large” that are familiar to most customers. Caribou’s coffeehouses focus on customer comfort and are modeled after mountain ski lodges and Alaskan cabins. Décor includes fireplaces, wooden ceiling beams and comfortable furniture such as large chairs and sofas.  They also provide a children’s play area with toys and games, contributing to a family-friendly atmosphere.  

In 2006 Caribou formed an alliance with Wandering WiFi to become the first coffee company to offer free WiFi service and the latest security technology to its customers. Wandering WiFi president, John Marshall believes that Caribou Coffee is committed to providing the most customer convenience, excellent coffee, and a comfortable atmosphere.

Caribou also formed an alliance with Apple Computer to offer a podcast version of an instant win game from Caribou’s CEO Michael Coles, called “Wake Up and Smell the Music.”  In this game, customers can win iTunes, iPods, and coffee. Michael Coles emphasizes the synergies between Apple and Caribou, calling them both “challenger brands” that offer desirable products and compete through innovation to provide a unique customer experience.  Caribou has alliances with a number of other firms such as Frontier Airlines, USA Today, General Mills (Caribou Coffee Bars), Lifetime Fitness, Kemps (Caribou Coffee Ice Cream), and Mall of America. Finally, in January 2007 Caribou entered a partnership with Keurig, Inc., a leading manufacturer of single-cup coffee makers for home and office use. Plans include an alliance with Coca-Cola to market Caribou Coffee ready-to-drink products.


Ask students to explain the advantages to both Caribou and Coke in their recently announced alliance. The advantages to Caribou (access to Coke’s distribution network) are probably more obvious to your students than the advantages to Coke (another “indulgent” drink). Are the differentiation factors applied by Caribou customer appealing or are they just different without any value creating substance?  


Focus Strategies

By implementing a cost leadership or differentiation strategy, firms choose to compete by exploiting their core competencies on an industry-wide basis and adopt a broad competitive reach.

Alternatively, firms can choose to follow a focus strategy by seeking to use their core competencies to serve the needs of a particular customer group in an industry. In other words, firms focus on specific, smaller segments (or niches) of customers rather than across the entire market.

Markets can be segmented by:
•        particular buyer group (e.g., youths or senior citizens)
•        different segments of a product line (e.g., products for professional or “do-it-yourselfers”)
•        different geographic market (e.g., the eastern or western United States)

Firms may choose to follow a focus strategy because:
•        they can serve a narrow segment more effectively than competitors that choose to compete industry wide
•        the narrow segment’s needs are so special that industry-wide competitors choose not to meet them
•        certain narrow segments are being poorly served by industry-wide competitors


Teaching Note: The Station Inn represents an interesting (and extreme) illustration of the focus differentiation strategy. The Station Inn serves the unique needs of a particular buyer group that does not appear to be of interest to industry-wide competitors such as Hilton, Marriott and Sheraton, among others. The Station Inn caters to the needs of railroad buffs, allowing these devotees to stay in a hotel located a mere 125 feet from Conrail, Inc. tracks. Through the night, guests sleep next to freight trains that pass by more than 60 times during every 24-hour period.  Students should enjoy discussing this unusual case.                       


Note:  Emphasize again that focus strategies can be based either on cost leadership or differentiation.


Focused Cost Leadership Strategy

Firms that compete by following cost leadership strategies to serve narrow market niches generally target the smallest buyers in an industry (those who purchase in such small quantities that industry-wide competitors cannot serve them at the same low cost).

Global furniture retailer Ikea provides customers with “good design and function at low prices” through use of the focused cost leadership strategy.  Ikea does this by offering low-cost, modular furniture (assembled by customers), using self-service as an alternative to having sales associates follow and pressure customers to buy.  Ikea displays its products in room-like settings so that customer can view different combinations of furniture, eliminating the need for assistance from sales associates or decorators to visualize the setting and reducing employee costs.  Customers also pick up their own purchases to reduce the firm’s costs.  However, the company also differentiates somewhat.  For example, stores address the needs of shoppers (e.g., extended hours and in-store childcare) while they shop.


Focused Differentiation Strategy

Firms following focused differentiation strategies produce customized products for small market segments.

They can be successful when either the quantities involved are too small for industry-wide competitors to handle economically, or when the extent of customization (or differentiation) requested is beyond the capabilities of the industry-wide differentiator.


Teaching Note: Examples of focused differentiators follow:
•        Upscale apartment buildings in various locations are being designed to serve the needs of technologically savvy city dwellers, offering differentiated features such as high-speed digital Internet access and other sophisticated telecommunications services.
•        Manufacturers such as Ferrari, Aston Martin, and Lamborghini compete in the tiny supercar category with prices starting at $150,000 and running as high as $600,000.  These cars are more than just transportation.


Just as was noted for industry-wide differentiators and low-cost producers, firms choosing to focus must be particularly adept at completing primary and secondary value chain activities in a superior way. Issues related to the five competitive forces are similar to those discussed for the differentiation and cost leadership strategies; however, the competitive scope of the focus is on a narrow segment rather than the industry.  Students should review Figures 4.3 and 4.4 (Value-Creating Activities) as well as the earlier discussion of the five competitive forces for the cost leadership and differentiation strategies.


Competitive Risks of Focus Strategies

The competitive risks of focus firms are similar to those previously noted for the cost leadership and differentiation strategies with the following additions:
•        Competitors may successfully focus on an even smaller segment of the market, “outfocusing” the focuser, or focus only on the most profitable slice of the focuser’s chosen segment.


Teaching Note: For example, Confederate Motor Co. is producing a highly differentiated motorcycle that might appeal to some of Harley Davidson’s customers.  Obsessed with making a “fiercely American motorcycle” (one that is even more American than are Harley’s products), Confederate’s motorcycles are produced entirely by hand labor.  In fact, a full week is required to make a single bike.  Digital technology is used to design Confederate’s products, which have a radical appearance.  At a price of $62,000 or above, the firm’s products will appeal only to customers wanting to buy a truly differentiated product such as the F113 Hellcat (which is receiving “rave reviews in the motorcycling press”).


•        An industry-wide competitor may recognize the attractiveness of the segment served by the focuser and mobilize its superior resources to better serve the segment’s needs.
•        Preferences and needs of the narrow segment may become more similar to the broader market, reducing or eliminating the advantages of focusing.


Integrated Cost Leadership/Differentiation Strategy

This new hybrid strategy may become even more important—and more popular—as global competition rises.

Compared to firms relying on a single generic strategy, firms that integrate the generic strategies may position themselves to improve their ability to adapt quickly to environmental changes.

Successfully pursuing the cost leadership and differentiation strategies simultaneously yields additive benefits:
•        Differentiation enables the firm to charge premium prices.
•        Cost leadership enables the firm to charge the lowest competitive price.


STRATEGIC FOCUS
Zara: Integrating Both Sides of the Coin

Zara is a chain of more than 1,000 stores located in 64 countries owned by highly respected Inditex SA of Spain (awarded Global Retailer of the Year in 2007 by the World Retail Congress).  The first store opened in 1975, and its first overseas operation began in 1990.

Zara sells “fast” fashion, “disposable” fashion, fashion “on demand,” or “fashion that you wear ten times.” It copies runway fashions, produces quality goods and sells them at affordable prices. The actual prices are market based. Zara determines the existing market price for a product, and then establishes a price below the lowest competitor’s price for a similar product.

Zara is vertically integrated, and controls its operation from the design decision to the point of sale.  This level of control allows Zara to keep the costs low.  Designers closely monitor popular fashions, styles that celebrities are seen wearing, clothes worn on MTV, and so on. A just-in-time manufacturing system was implemented, and its most fashion sensitive items are produced internally.  Zara has the ability to develop and begin manufacturing a new product line in three weeks compared to an industry average of nine months.  Approximately 10,000 separate items are produced annually, all shipped directly from a central distribution center twice each week, eliminating the need for warehouses. Only a limited number of products are provided to stores, maintaining the perception of scarcity. The most fashionable items are considered riskier and are produced in smaller quantities. Rapid product turnover also keeps customers coming back to the stores more frequently.

Zara locates attractive storefronts in prime locations in major shopping districts and designs them with the comfort of customers in mind. An emphasis on an attractive décor motivates customers to return frequently. Salespeople frequently change the location of items in the stores, which also contributes to the perception of scarcity. Information downloaded on a daily basis from each store enables designers to better monitor customer preferences.  Zara spends a relatively small amount on advertising—usually only for its end-of-season sales—compared to its major competitors such as Benetton, The Gap, and H&M of Sweden.


This case addresses the question that some of your students have asked, “Does fashionable attire have to always be so expensive?”  Zara offers a financial reprieve to persons who are vogue yet have somewhat limited resources to satisfy their trendy tastes.  This is an ideal time for discuss the difference between “price” and “cost.”  Students and even some authors are very prone to use the terms synonymously, but they are not synonyms.  Does Zara apply an integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy?  Also note that Zara applies a unique “twist” on how JIT is utilized to manage the “perception of scarcity.”  Does this translate into JIT being a critical element of both Zara’s cost and pricing strategy?  


Thus, the firm is able to achieve a competitive advantage by delivering value to customers based on both product features and low price.


Teaching Note:  In an earlier Strategic Focus, an activity map for Southwest Airlines demonstrated how a firm gains a competitive advantage by tightly integrating its primary and support activities. Southwest uses the integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy with success, allowing the firm to adapt quickly, learn rapidly, and meaningfully leverage its core competencies.  It is helpful to review that material here.


A variety of other factors also may enable firms to gain a competitive advantage and earn above-average returns from an integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy.


Flexible Manufacturing Systems

A flexible manufacturing system is a computer-controlled process used to produce a variety of products in moderate, flexible quantities.  It enables firms to achieve the flexibility necessary to simultaneously respond to changes in customer needs and preferences while maintaining the low-cost advantages of large-scale manufacturing.  This increases a firm’s ability to engage in an integrated low-cost/differentiation strategy.


Information Networks

Information networks enable a firm to coordinate interdependencies between internally- and externally-performed value-creating activities to increase flexibility and responsiveness.  Examples include real-time linkages between manufacturers and suppliers or subcontractors, or between retailers and suppliers.  These linkages can improve time-to-market of new products by coordinating design and production activities and reduce out-of-stock occurrences by shortening the order-restock cycle.

Customer relationship management (CRM) is one form of an information-based network process that firms use to better understand customers and their needs. An effective CRM system provides a 360-degree view of the company’s relationship with customers, encompassing all contact points, involving all business processes, and incorporating all communication media and sales channels. The firm can then use this information to determine the trade-offs its customers are willing to make between differentiated features and low cost, which is vital for companies using the integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy.



Enterprise Resource Planning Systems: A Mini-Lecture

Enterprise Resource Planning is an information system used to identify and plan the resources required across the firm to receive, record, produce, and ship customer orders. For example, salespeople for aircraft parts distributor Aviall use handheld equipment to scan bar-code labels on bins in customers’ facilities to determine when parts need to be restocked. Data gathered through this procedure are uploaded via the Web to the Aviall back-end replenishment and ERP system, allowing the order fulfillment process to begin within minutes of scanning. Growth in ERP applications such as the one used at Aviall has been significant.  Full installations of an ERP system are expensive, running into the tens of millions of dollars for large-scale applications.

Improving efficiency on a company-wide basis is a primary objective of using an ERP system. Efficiency improvements result from the use of systems through which financial and operational data are moved rapidly from one department to another. The transfer of sales data from Aviall salespeople to the order entry point at the firm’s manufacturing facility demonstrates the rapid movement of information from one function to another. Integrating data across parties that are involved with detailing product specifications and then manufacturing those products and distributing them in ways that are consistent with customers’ unique needs enable the firm to respond with flexibility to customer preferences relative to cost and differentiation.


       
Total Quality Management Systems

These systems have been established to improve product quality (from a customer perspective) and to improve productivity in the performance of the internal value-creating activities.

Firms develop and use TQM systems in order to (1) increase customer satisfaction, (2) cut costs, and (3) reduce the amount of time required to introduce innovative products to the marketplace.

Improving product quality focuses on product reliability, performance and utility, and enables the firm to differentiate its products and charge higher prices, while lowering the costs of manufacturing and service.


Teaching Note:  Following are the key assumptions upon which total quality management (TQM) systems are based:
•        The costs of poor quality exceed the costs of developing processes that produce high quality products and services (in other words, it is less costly to do things right the first time).
•        Employees care about their work and will take the initiative to improve it (but, only if the firm provides the resources, tools, and training necessary and management listens to their ideas).
•        Since organizations are systems of highly interdependent parts, decision processes must be integrated and include participation from all affected functional areas.
•        Responsibility for effective TQM rests with top-level managers who must support TQM processes and appropriately design the firm so that employees can function effectively.


Competitive Risks of the Integrated Cost Leadership/Differentiation Strategy

This is a risky strategy, as it is difficult for firms to perform primary and support activities in ways that allow them to produce relatively inexpensive products with levels of differentiation that create value for the target customers.  Moreover, to properly use this strategy across time, firms must be able to simultaneously reduce costs incurred to produce products (as required by the cost leadership strategy) while increasing products’ differentiation (as required by the differentiation strategy).

Being “stuck-in-the-middle” implies that the firm will not be able to manage successfully the five competitive forces and will not achieve strategic competitiveness. In fact, these firms can only earn average profits when industry structure is favorable or when other firms in the industry also are “stuck-in-the-middle.”


—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.         What is a business-level strategy? (pp. 98-99)

Business-level strategy (the focus of Chapter 4) is an integrated and coordinated set of commitments and actions designed to provide value to customers and gain a competitive advantage by exploiting core competencies in specific, individual product markets.  Thus, a business-level strategy reflects a firm’s belief about where and how it has an advantage over its rivals, while guiding decisions to choose to perform activities differently or to perform different activities than competitors.

Key issues the firm must address when choosing a business-level strategy are the good or service to offer, how to manufacture or create it, and how to distribute it to the marketplace. Once formed, the business-level strategy reflects where and how the firm has an advantage over its rivals.  The essence of a firm’s business-level strategy is choosing to perform activities differently or to perform different activities than rivals.

2.         What is the relationship between a firm’s customers and its business-level strategy in terms of who, what, and how?  Why is this relationship important? (pp. 101-103)

The relationship between a firm’s customers and its business-level strategy is that, to survive and achieve strategic competitiveness, firms must create value that satisfies some group of customers’ needs.  In other words, successful business-level strategies are founded or based on customers’ needs.

Who represents the determination of specific customer groups to be served.  The primary focus here is market segmentation.  What is concerned with customer needs that will be satisfied.  How represents the core competencies of the firm that can be used to satisfy customers’ needs that have been identified.

Increasing segmentation of markets throughout the global economy creates opportunities for firms to identify increasingly unique customer needs they can try to serve by using one of the business-level strategies.

3.        What are the differences among the cost leadership, differentiation, focused cost leadership, focused differentiation, and integrated cost leadership/differentiation business-level strategies? (pp. 105-119)


        Strategy                                Source(s) of Competitive Advantage

Cost Leadership        Lowest cost with a level of product features or characteristics acceptable to the most typical customers in the industry

Differentiation        Product’s unique attributes and characteristics that are valued by a broad group of customers

Focused Cost Leadership        Lowest cost with a level of product features or characteristics targeted to a particular customer group or segment in an industry

Focused Differentiation        Product’s unique attributes and characteristics that are valued by a particular customer group (niche) or segment in an industry

Integrated Cost Leadership/
Differentiation        Products have attributes of both relatively low-cost and unique attributes, characteristics, or features; the level of product differentiation is less than the pure differentiator while cost is higher than that of the low-cost leader

4.        How can each one of the business-level strategies be used to position the firm relative to the five forces of competition in a way that helps the firm earn above-average returns? (pp. 105-119)

        Strategy                                Dealing with the Five Forces of Competition

Cost Leadership        Can compete against rivals on price
Can price below rivals to interest buyers
Can absorb prince increases by suppliers better than rivals
Discourages new entrants that can’t endure low profit margins
Can reduce prices to maintain attractiveness over substitutes

Differentiation        Customers are loyal to firms offering differentiated products
Uniqueness reduces sensitivity of buyers to price increases
High margins shield the firm from losses to powerful suppliers
Customer loyalty to differentiated products deters new entrants
Unlikely to switch to substitutes when loyal to products

Focused Cost Leadership        An adaptation of the above

Focused Differentiation        An adaptation of the above

Integrated CL/Differentiation        An adaptation and combination of the above


5.        What are the specific risks associated with using each business-level strategy? (pp. 105-119)

        Strategy                                Risk(s) of Selecting and Implementing

Cost Leadership        Minimal investment in technology could result in process obsolescence; firm misses change in customers’ needs due to cost-only focus; competitors imitate strategy

Differentiation        Customers decide price differential between low cost producer and differentiator is too large; too many features offered; product’s means of differentiation no longer provides value to customers; customer learning (experience) may change their perception of the value of differentiation; counterfeit products displace the firm’s offerings

Focused Cost Leadership &
Focused Differentiation        Beyond the general risks noted for the low-cost leader and the differentiator, focus strategies have the following risks:  Competitor “outfocuses” the focuser by defining a narrower segment; a firm competing on an industry-wide basis may decide that the segment served by the focus strategy firm is attractive and decides to pursue that segment; the needs of customers within the narrow segment may become more similar to all customers in the market, reducing or eliminating the advantages of a focus strategy

Integrated Cost Leadership/
Differentiation        Product features not sufficiently valued by customers; product         is not sufficiently differentiated; product is too expensive to compete with low-cost leader’s products



—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Customer needs and stock trading

Nearly 100 million Americans have investments in the stock market through shares of individual companies or positions in mutual funds.  At its peak volume, the New York Stock Exchange has traded more than 3.5 billion shares in a single day.  Stock brokerage firms are the conduit to help individuals plan their portfolios and manage transactions.  Given the scope of this industry, there is no single definition of what customers consider as “superior value” from a brokerage operation.  

Part One

After forming small teams, the instructor will ask the teams to count off by threes.  The teams will study three different brokerage firms, with team 1 examining AG Edwards (ticker: AGE), team 2 E*Trade (ticker: ETFC), and team 3, Charles Schwab (ticker: SCHW).

Part Two

Each team should research its target company to answer the following questions:

        Describe the  “who, what, and how” for your firm.  How stable is this focus?  How much have these elements changed in the last five years?
        Describe your firm’s strategy.
        How does your firm’s strategy offer protection against each of the five forces?

Part Three

In class, the instructor will ask two teams for each firm to summarize their results.

Then, the whole class will discuss which firm is most effective at meeting the needs of its customer base.


Exercise 2: Attribute maps

How can companies better understand what customers really need?  One helpful tool is the attribute map, described by McGrath and MacMillan in their 2000 book, The Entrepreneurial Mindset.  The map is a grid of product attributes and customer attitudes.  On the vertical axis are different types of customer attitudes toward a specific product; these attitudes can be positive or negative.  On the vertical axis are product attributes that will affect the intensity of a customer’s attitude.  A simplified attribute map is shown below.



A nonnegotiable is a positive feature that is also expected as a ‘given’ by your customers.  

A differentiator is a product attribute that is valued by customers and is not readily available from competitors.

An exciter is essentially a turbo-charged differentiator.  Typically, this is a feature or attribute that is so desirable that it often serves as a deal-closer in purchasing decisions.

A tolerable attribute is something that the customers dislike, but are willing to put up with.

A dissatisfier is a negative feature or attribute that is more intense than a tolerable.  These attributes will gradually drive away customers.

Finally, an enrager is an attribute that leads to very strong negative feelings about a product.  Enragers will drive off customers quickly and have the potential to cripple or kill off demand for a specific product.

Part One

The instructor will ask for suggestions of commonly used products – shampoos, cell phone providers, college bookstores are possible examples.  After selecting a product category, the instructor will break the class into six teams: one team for every cell in the attribute map.  

Part Two

Each team will brainstorm for ten minutes in order to develop a list of product attributes for its cell in the attribute map.  The instructor will ask for one person from each team to summarize their findings.

Part Three

Based on the completed attribute map, discuss the following questions:

        Are there any products/companies that seem to be competing solely on a basis of nonnegotiables?  Is this a viable strategy, or not?
        Has anyone had exciter or enrager experiences in this product category?  How did these experiences affect future purchases in this area?
        If you were going to build a customer’s dream product based on this map, what would it be?  What steps can a company take to prevent a competitor from rolling out a duplicate good?


—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Customer needs and stock trading

The purpose of this exercise is to compare three firms competing in the same industry, and assess (a) how they differ from each other in terms of customer focus, (b) the strategy for each firm, and (c) how each firm’s strategy provides protection against Porter’s five forces.

The instructor should dive the class into three groups.  Assign one group Edward Jones, a second group E*Trade, and the third group to Charles Schwab.  Depending on class size, the instructor may want to assign multiple teams per company, and have all of the groups work independently of each other.

Following are snapshots of the three firms, as of this writing:

E*Trade:  Publicly held (ticker: ETFC), E*Trade handles stock trades primarily through the Internet.  They also support trades via telephone.  While their presence is primarily through the Internet, they also have a number of ‘brick-and-mortar’ facilities in different cities.  They offer similar brokerage services in a number of countries outside the U.S.  In addition to their brokerage offerings, E*Trade offers a range of other financial services, including banking, mutual funds, and the administration of stock plans.  Revenues in 2006 were approximately $2.4 billion, with over 4,000 employees.

Charles Schwab was launched in 1973 as a discount brokerage.  The firm went public in 1987 (ticker: SCHW).  The company operates a number of branch offices as well as Internet trading.  They provide an array of financial services, including banking, insurance, and support for retirement accounts, as well as many other products.  Schwab has operations outside the U.S. in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom. Schwab had approximately 13,000 employees in 2007, and managed $1.4 trillion in customer assets at that time.

Edward Jones differs from E*Trade and Schwab in that they are not publicly traded; instead, EJ is organized as a partnership.  Consequently, students will have to look for sources other than an annual report and 10-K for company information.  The firm’s website (www.edwardjones.com) is a good starting point, however.  EJ is a much older firm than either E*Trade or Schwab, and was founded in 1955.  The company provides securities, mutual funds, and insurance products to retail customers.  They operate in the U.S., Canada, and the United Kingdom.  EJ operates approximately 9,000 branch locations, and has annual revenues in excess of $3 billion.  Their sales model emphasizes face-to-face transactions, and targets buy-and-hold investors.

For the in-class discussion, the first step is to describe the ‘who/what/how’ for each of the firms, and whether these items have changed over the last five years.  Use the class discussion to fill out the following table:
 
Company        Who        What        How        Changes in last five years
Edward Jones

                               
E*Trade

                               
Schwab

                               


Next, you want to define the strategy of each firm.  Subsequently, ask the class how each approach offers protection against each of the five competitive forces.  Again, drawing on the class discussion, you will want to fill in this table at the board:

Company        Buyer
Leverage        Supplier
Leverage        Threat of Entrants        Threat of Substitutes        Intensity of Rivalry
Edward Jones

                                       
E*Trade

                                       
Schwab

                                       


Exercise 2: Attribute maps
To facilitate a discussion of attribute maps, the instructor will find it useful to read McGrath and MacMillan’s 2000 book The Entrepreneurial Mindset.  Chapter 3 of the book describes attribute maps in more detail. Product attributes are also discussed in the 1986 Harvard Business Review article “Discover your products’ hidden potential” by the same authors.  The attribute map used for this exercise is a simplified version of that found in the McGrath and MacMillan book.
Briefly, attribute maps provide a framework for understanding how different product attributes can provoke different intensities of positive and negative customer attitudes.  These maps can be used to alleviate potential threats or weaknesses in a product, or identify new ways to differentiate from a competitor.
The purpose of this exercise is to extend on the ‘who/what/how’ concepts described in the chapter to gain a better understanding of customer needs and expectations.  Start by asking for suggestions of commonly used products – the exercise works best when focused around a product that most students have experienced as a consumer.
After choosing a product, divide the class into six groups: one for each of the categories (nonnegotiable, differentiator, exciter, tolerable, dissatisfier, and enrager).  Give each team ten minutes to describe relevant product attributes, and associated companies that fit their category.  Then, ask one student from each team to summarize their results.
One topic that will emerge from the discussion is that many of the attributes will overlap.  For example, in the context of mobile phone service, a minimal level of dropped calls is a tolerable problem.  When a particular carrier has an excessive level of dropped calls, however, it moves into the realm of a dissatisfier – meaning the firm is at a competitive disadvantage relative to its peers.  Conversely, some minimal level of customer service is a nonnegotiable, while higher levels of service move this to a differentiator status.  
Once the attribute map has been fleshed out on the board, ask the following questions:
        Are there any products/companies that seem to be competing solely on a basis of nonnegotiables?  Is this a viable strategy, or not?
        Has anyone had exciter or enrager experiences in this product category?  How did these experiences affect future purchases in this area?
        If you were going to build a customers ‘dream product’ based on this map, what would it be?  What steps can a company take to prevent a competitor from rolling out a duplicate good?

Conclude the discussion by linking the ‘dream product’ to the business-level strategies described in the chapter.  Ask what is so special about the product from a ‘who/what/how’ perspective.  Is the product more desirable because of price, uniqueness, or a combination of these aspects?  Finally, ask how the firm with the ‘dream product’ could act in order to prevent competitors from duplicating this product or service.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        Students are customers of the university or college. What actions does your school take to recognize and satisfy its students’ needs? Students should be prepared to discuss their views.
2.        Students should select a local firm, and based on interactions with this company, determine which business-level strategy they think the firm is implementing. Ask what evidence they can provide to support their opinions? Is the Internet affecting the firm’s strategic actions? If so, how?
3.        Assuming that the students have decided to establish and operate a restaurant in your local community, ask them shat market segment would they intend to serve? What needs do these customers have that the students could satisfy with their restaurant? How would they satisfy those needs? They should be prepared to discuss their responses.
4.        What business-level strategy do the students think your school is implementing? What core competencies are being used to implement this strategy?
5.        Propose the following statement to the class: “It is impossible for a firm to produce a relatively low-cost, yet somewhat highly differentiated, product.” Is this statement true or false? Ask the students what is the reasoning behind their answer.
6.        Do the students feel the Internet is potentially of more value for firms implementing either the differentiation strategy or the focused differentiation strategy than for those using either the cost leadership or focused cost leadership strategy? If so, why?
7.        Is it possible for a traditional firm to become too reliant on the Internet? If so, why? If not, why not?


Ethics Questions

1.        Can a commitment to ethical conduct on issues such as the environment, product quality, and fulfilling contractual agreements affect a firm’s competitive advantage? If so, how?
2.        Is there more incentive for differentiators or cost leaders to pursue stronger ethical conduct? Think of an example to support your answer.
3.        Can an overemphasis on cost leadership or differentiation lead to ethical challenges (such as poor product design and manufacturing) that create costly problems (e.g., product liability lawsuits)?
4.        Reexamine the assumptions about effective TQM systems presented in the chapter. Do these assumptions urge top-level managers to maintain higher ethical standards than they now have? If so, how?
5.        As discussed in Chapter 3, a brand image is one way a firm can differentiate its good or service. However, many questions are now being raised about the effect brand images have on consumer behavior. For example, considerable concern has arisen about brand images that are managed by tobacco firms and their effect on teenage smoking habits. Should firms be concerned about how they form and use brand images? Why or why not?
6.        What ethical issues do you believe are associated with use of the Internet to implement the firm’s business-level strategy?
7.        If ethical issues do exist regarding Internet use, who do you believe should be responsible for addressing them:  governments or companies themselves? Why?
       
Internet Exercise
               
Colleges and universities use different strategies to draw a wider customer base as well as to serve the needs of their current students and staff. Explore the websites of these diverse U.S. universities: University of Phoenix (http://www.phoenix.edu/), University of Chicago (http://www.uchicago.edu), Oglala Lakota College (http://www.olc.edu), the Ohio State University (http://www.ohio-state.edu), and Central Community College (http://www.cccneb.edu). Decide what types of strategy each pursues. How does each university or college determine its customer groups and utilize its core competencies to attract and retain its customers? With online course offerings increasing, do some of the institutions target markets overlap?

*e-project: Go to the website of the school you currently attend. Based on your knowledge of students, staff, and curricula, what steps can be taken to improve customer satisfaction?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:56:47 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 5
Competitive Rivalry and Competitive Dynamics


Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK

KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define competitors, competitive rivalry, competitive behavior, and competitive dynamics.
2.        Describe market commonality and resource similarity as the building blocks of a competitor analysis.
3.        Explain awareness, motivation, and ability as drivers of competitive behavior.
4.        Discuss factors affecting the likelihood a competitor will take competitive actions.
5.        Discuss factors affecting the likelihood a competitor will respond to actions taken against it.
6.        Explain competitive dynamics in slow-cycle, fast-cycle and standard-cycle markets.


CHAPTER OUTLINE
Opening Case   Competition Between Hewlett-Packard and Dell: The Battle Rages On
A MODEL OF COMPETITIVE RIVALRY
COMPETITOR ANALYSIS
        Market Commonality
Resource Similarity
DRIVERS OF COMPETITIVE ACTIONS AND RESPONSES
Strategic Focus   Who Will Win the Competitive Battles Between Netflix and Blockbuster?
COMPETITIVE RIVALRY
        Strategic and Tactical Actions
Strategic Focus Using Aggressive Pricing as a Tactical Action at Wal-Mart
LIKELIHOOD OF ATTACK
        First-Mover Incentives
        Organizational Size
        Quality
LIKELIHOOD OF RESPONSE
        Type of Competitive Action
        Actor’s Reputation
        Dependence on the Market
Popped the Top?
COMPETITIVE DYNAMICS
        Slow-Cycle Markets
        Fast-Cycle Markets
        Standard-Cycle Markets
SUMMARY
REVIEW QUESTIONS
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES
NOTES



LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: The competitive landscape of the twenty-first century will be characterized by increasing globalization, advanced technological development, and other factors that will lead to an environment that is more dynamic and charged with rivalry.  Firms will act and react in a dance of sorts, but one involving very high stakes—even survival.  This chapter introduces terms and concepts relevant to the conversation about competitive behavior in a variety of markets. Figure 5.2 is central to the discussion of most of the chapter.


OPENING CASE
Competition Between Hewlett-Packard and Dell: The Battle Rages On

At the end of 2006, Hewlett-Packard had caught and passed Dell for the lead in worldwide PC market share.  Dell’s share of the PC market fell to 14.7 percent while HP’s share grew to 18 percent.  This deterioration of market share contributed to a 32 percent total decline in Dell’s stock price, while the increase in market share resulted in an increase of 100 percent in HP’s stock price for the same period.

An innovative business model that was deemed a stroke of genius in 1984 became ineffectual with time.  The reason(s) for this change are based in competitive dynamics.  Dell expanded usage of its once-innovative business model to attempt to continuously lower product costs, ultimately allowing it to lower its prices.  The uniqueness of Dell’s model became less valuable to PC customers.  Concentrating on a single business model can lead to quick growth when demand for a firm’s products continues to expand. Over a longer period, however, innovation and reinvention are the foundation for ongoing success.

Hewlett-Packard’s recent overtaking of Dell was not a result of challenging Dell at its own game.  Over the past several years, HP found ways to innovate and reinvent itself. After examining its business model, Todd Bradely, the HP executive who now heads PC operations, concluded that “HP was fighting on the wrong battlefield. HP was concentrating its resources to fight Dell where Dell was strong, in direct sales over the Internet and phone. Instead (Bradely) decided, HP should focus on its strength, retail stores, where Dell had no presence at all.” To successfully change its focus, HP developed close relationships with retailers, even trying to “personalize” PCs.  For example, HP worked with Best Buy to design and produce a white-and-silver notebook computer. Aimed at attracting female customers, this machine, priced at $1,100, was one of Best Buy’s top-selling notebooks during the 2006 holiday season.  

Dell’s decision to venture into retail selling is a competitive reaction to HP’s actions. Dell is now partnering with a Japanese retailer (Bic Camera Inc.) to sell notebooks and desktops throughout Japan.  Additionally, Dell is experimenting with its own retail stores, opening its first one in Dallas, Texas, in July 2007. (Other Dell retail outlets are in the planning stages.) Dell is also committing additional monies to research and development (to find product innovations) and is restructuring some of its advertising campaigns “to remind consumers of the benefits of customizing computers.”


Students must recognize that success is often the result of changing the game or the rules of the game, rather than beating a competitor at its game.  Hewlett-Packard has been able to dislodge Dell’s dominant position in the PC market by focusing on retailers as a critical path to new customers, rather than attempting to bolster its internet presence and challenge Dell head-on.  Dell has now been forced into playing HP’s game of establishing a physical brick-and-mortar retail presence, a new strategy for Dell.



1        Define competitors, competitive rivalry, competitive behavior and competitive dynamics.       

A strategy’s success is determined not only by the firm’s initial competitive actions, but also by how well it anticipates competitors’ responses to them and by how well the firm anticipates and responds to its competitor’s initial actions (also called attacks).

Some important definitions:
•        Firms operating in the same market with similar products targeting similar customers are competitors.
•        Competitive rivalry is the ongoing set of competitive actions and competitive responses occurring between rivals as they compete against each other for an advantageous market position.
•        Competitive behavior is the set of competitive actions and competitive responses the firm takes to build or defend its competitive advantages and to improve its market position.
•        Firms competing against each other in several product/geographic markets are in multimarket competition.
•        All competitive behavior—that is, the total set of actions and responses taken by all firms competing within a market—is called competitive dynamics.


Teaching Note: Firms must learn to compete differently if they are to achieve strategic competitiveness in the twenty-first century competitive landscape. To provide an idea of what this means, new ways of competing may include the following:
•        bringing new goods and services to market more quickly
•        the use of new technologies (e.g., Amazon.com)
•        diversifying the product line (e.g., Barnes and Noble into music as a catalyst for growth)
•        shifting product emphasis (e.g., U-haul’s focus on accessory sales)
•        consolidation (e.g., the merger of Hewlett Packard and Compaq)
•        combining online selling with physical stores (e.g., Sears’s acquisition of Lands’ End)
       
       
The focus of this chapter is on competitive dynamics, the series of competitive actions and competitive responses among firms competing within a particular industry.   The implication that should be strongly stated is that the strategic management process (as described in Chapter 1 and Figure 1.1) is dynamic, not static.



FIGURE 5.1
From Competitors to Competitive Dynamics

This figure features the key concepts involved in competitive dynamics, which refers to the total set of actions and responses taken by all of the firms competing in a given market.



Expanding geographic scope contributes to the increasing intensity in competitive rivalry among firms.  That is, firms trying to predict competitive rivalry should anticipate that they will meet a larger number of increasingly diverse competitors in the future; thus, competitive rivalry will affect their strategies more than in the past.


Teaching Note:  Figure 5.2 provides a model of competitive dynamics and rivalry, but it also serves as an outline for this chapter’s discussion.  You might briefly summarize the model at this point and comment that students can refer to it throughout your discussion.


A MODEL OF COMPETITIVE RIVALRY

Competitive rivalry exists when firms jockey with one another to pursue an advantageous market position.   When one or more firms competing in an industry feels pressure to act or perceives an opportunity to improve their competitive position, competitive rivalry occurs as various firms initiate a series of actions and responses.

Research findings showing that intensified rivalry within an industry results in decreased average profitability for firms competing in it supports the importance of understanding these effects.



FIGURE 5.2
A Model of Competitive Rivalry

Viewing the model leads to a number of observations:
•        Interfirm rivalry or competitive dynamics begin with an assessment of competitors’ awareness and motivation to attack and/or respond to competitive moves.
•        Market commonality and resource similarity are affected by a firm’s awareness, and motivation affects the likelihood of attack or response.
•        The likelihood of attack and response result in competitive outcomes, with outcomes moderated by a firm’s ability to take strategic actions or responses.
•        Feedback from competitive outcomes will affect future competitive dynamics by affecting the nature of a firm’s awareness, motivation, and ability for action/response.


               
Teaching Note: Competitive rivalry exists because of competitive asymmetry, which describes the fact that firms differ from one another in terms of their resources, capabilities, core competencies, and the opportunities and threats in their competitive environments and industries.  It is important that firms see that competition results in mutual interdependence among firms in the industry as each firm tries to establish a sustainable competitive advantage.
•        As firms strive to achieve strategic competitiveness and above-average returns, they must recognize that strategies are not deployed in isolation from rival’s actions and responses.
•        The strategic management process represents firms taking a series of actions, fending off counter-actions or responses and developing responses of their own.


2        Describe market commonality and resource similarity as the building blocks of a competitor analysis.       

COMPETITOR ANALYSIS

A competitor analysis is the first step in predicting the extent and nature of rivalry with each competitor.  Appropriate features of this kind of analysis are described below.


Market Commonality

Market commonality is represented by the extent to which firms compete in the same markets. And market commonality is increasing as more and more firms compete internationally.

               
Teaching Note:  If firms overlap in a number of markets—which is sometimes referred to as multipoint competition—this results in a situation where firms compete against each other simultaneously in multiple geographic or product markets.  This can have a significant impact on competitive dynamics (e.g., expanding into a new market that the competitor has entered to ensure that the rival does not tap a market opportunity that could then be used to support competition in core markets).       
               

In a number of industries (e.g., airlines, chemicals, pharmaceuticals, and consumer foods) the largest domestic firms compete in many of the same markets. Thus there is high market commonality. This means that each has awareness and motivation to respond to competitive interaction.

Interestingly, high levels of commonality reduce the likelihood of competitive interaction.  For firms that are in many common markets, there generally is competitive peace.  However, when one of these firms makes a competitive move, the others are compelled to respond rapidly and aggressively.
               
Resource Similarity

Resource similarity is the extent to which a firm’s tangible and intangible resources are comparable to a competitor’s in terms of both type and amount.  Firms with similar types and amounts of resources are likely to have similar strengths and weaknesses and to use similar strategies.


Teaching Note: In contrast to market commonality, assessing resource similarity can be difficult, particularly when critical resources are intangible (e.g., brand name, knowledge, trust, capacity to innovate) rather than tangible (e.g., access to raw materials, ability to borrow capital).


In most cases, dissimilar resources may increase the likelihood of an attack while firms with similar resources (overlap between their resource portfolios) will be less likely to attack because resource similarity increases the likelihood of retaliation.


Teaching Note: Coca-Cola and Pepsi’s decision to target the fast-growing market for bottled water provides an example of how resource dissimilarity may cause potential competitors to be overlooked, especially by an industry’s dominant firms. This means that competitive responses of firms such as Perrier Group to protect its key bottled water brands may be delayed due to resource dissimilarity.



FIGURE 5.3
A Framework of Competitor Analysis

The results of the firm’s competitor analyses can be mapped for visual comparisons. Figure 5.3 shows different hypothetical intersections between the firm and individual competitors in terms of market commonality and resource similarity. These intersections indicate the extent to which the firm and those to which it has compared itself are competitors. For example, the firm and its competitor displayed in quadrant I of Figure 5.3 have similar types and amounts of resources and use them to compete against each other in many markets that are important to each. These conditions lead to the conclusion that the firms modeled in quadrant I are direct and mutually acknowledged competitors. In contrast, the firm and its competitor shown in quadrant III share few markets and have little similarity in their resources, indicating that they aren’t direct and mutually acknowledged competitors. The firm’s mapping of its competitive relationship with rivals is fluid as firms enter and exit markets and as companies’ resources change in type and amount. Thus, those with whom the firm is a direct competitor change across time.



3        Explain awareness, motivation, and ability as drivers of competitive behavior.       

DRIVERS OF COMPETITIVE ACTIONS AND RESPONSES

Awareness refers to whether or not the attacking or responding firm is aware of the competitive market characteristics such as the market commonality and the resource similarity of a potential attacker or respondent.

When managers are not aware of these factors or assess them inaccurately, industry overcapacity or excessive competition may result. For example, this may be a partial explanation for the recent decline in Levi Strauss’ core market as the firm appeared to be unaware of changes in teenagers’ interests as competition for their business intensified.

Market commonality affects the firm’s perceptions and resulting motivation.  For example, all else being equal, the firm is more likely to attack the rival with whom it has low market commonality than the one with whom it competes in multiple markets.  The primary reason is that there are high stakes involved in trying to gain a more advantageous position over a rival with whom the firm shares many markets.

Motivation is represented by the incentives that a firm has to either initiate an attack or to respond when attacked.

Resource dissimilarity also influences competitive actions and responses between firms, in that the greater the resource imbalance between the acting firm and competitors or potential responders, the greater will be the delay in response by the firm with a resource disadvantage.

Ability relates to each firm’s resources and the flexibility they provide. Without available resources (such as financial capital and people), the firm lacks the ability to attack a competitor or respond to its actions. However, similar resources suggest similar abilities to attack and respond.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Who Will Win the Competitive Battles Between Netflix and Blockbuster?

Netflix pioneered the online movie rental business and prospered during its first eight years as new subscribers were added to the firm’s customer base.  Since adding subscribers was a critical path to Netflix’s ongoing success, prices of Netflix’s various plans were reduced in late 2004.  This pricing strategy worked.  And because profit margins had remained very adequate at 2004 price levels, prices had remained unchanged up through early 2007.  Netflix’s profits grew from $6.5 million in 2003 to $49 million in 2006.

Blockbuster, Netflix’s chief rival, is aware of every competitive move made by Netflix.  Blockbuster has retaliated by lowering its pricing to its subscribers.  Analysts feel that the situation between Netflix and Blockbuster has become “ugly.”  Some are predicting that the two competitors are locking into a mutually destructive competitive situation.  

Evidence suggests that Netflix’s momentum tapped out somewhat dramatically when Blockbuster launched a new option in its online rental service in 2006. Called “Total Access,” subscribers pay an additional $1 per month for the ability to return and check out rentals in Blockbuster’s physical stores as well as handle these transactions online.  How will Netflix counter?  It has no brick-and-mortar infrastructure to support a similar option to its customers, relying on the mail for distribution.  In 2007, Netflix countered by lowering its already-low 2004 prices.  Of course, Netflix’s profits will suffer.  In addition to lowering prices, Netflix initiated its “Watch Now” movie downloading service. This service uses high-speed Internet connections to allow customers to download movies and watch them on their television sets or PCs.  Students might wonder how Blockbuster will react to Netflix’s “Watch Now” service. It seems that Blockbuster could easily imitate this service, hoping that it will be difficult for Netflix to gain a competitive advantage through using it. And both firms will have to decide how long they are willing to engage in competitive battles that are severely damaging their ability to earn profits. The window for this level of destructive competition may soon close. In mid-2007, Blockbuster stated in a Securities and Exchange Commission filing that the firm would modify its online service “to strike the appropriate balance between continued subscriber growth and enhanced profitability.”

Imitation is the best form of flattery….or is it?  This case is analogous to two buck deer that have literally locked horns in a scrap and will each pay the ultimate price.  Remind students that pricing decisions affect the bottom line dollar for dollar, i.e., if prices are reduced by a dollar, profit will be reduced by a dollar because costs do not change.  Ask students to identify options that each firm has.  Should Netflix and Blockbuster merge?  And is there a greater threat to the survivability of each firm?


COMPETITIVE RIVALRY

Competitive rivalry is the ongoing set of competitive actions and responses occurring between competing firms for an advantageous market position. Because the ongoing competitive action/response sequence between a firm and a competitor affects the performance of both firms, it is important for companies to carefully study competitive rivalry to successfully use their strategies.


Strategic and Tactical Actions

Firms use both strategic and tactical actions when forming their competitive actions and competitive responses in the course of engaging in competitive rivalry.
•        A competitive action is a strategic or tactical action the firm takes to build or defend its competitive advantages or improve its market position.
•        A competitive response is a strategic or tactical action the firm takes to counter the effects of a competitor’s competitive action.
•        A strategic action or a strategic response is a market-based move that involves a significant commitment of organizational resources and is difficult to implement and reverse.
•        A tactical action or a tactical response is a market-based move that is taken to fine-tune a strategy; it involves fewer resources and is relatively easy to implement and reverse.
•        Hyundai Motor Co.’s expenditures on research and development and plant expansion to support the firm’s desire to be one of the world’s largest carmakers by 2010 are strategic actions.
•        Tactical actions are easily reversed – pricing decisions are often taken by these firms to increase demand in certain markets during certain periods.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Using Aggressive Pricing as a Tactical Action at Wal-Mart

In mid-2007, Wal-Mart had 6,775 stores and was projected to generate revenues in excess of $350 billion.  Approximately 40 percent of this revenue is being generated outside of the United States as Wal-Mart continues to expand internationally.  Analysts believe that Wal-Mart’s business model will prove successful in some emerging markets even though the firm struggles with adequate profitability in some developed markets such as Germany and Japan.  

Europe’s Carrefour, Costco Wholesale, and Target are Wal-Mart’s major competitors, although a number of other companies (including Kohl’s, J.C. Penney, and BJ’s Wholesale Club) also compete against the retailing giant.  As a tactical action, Wal-Mart prices some products to increase overall sales revenue and to attract customers to its stores in hopes that they will purchase other items as well.  Aggressive pricing works (for Wal-Mart and others such as Costco Wholesale using the practice) when reduced prices generate sales revenues in excess of those generated without the price cuts, and when customers buy other higher-margin items while shopping.  Both Wal-Mart and Costco now offer gasoline filling stations to attract customers to their stores.  The same pricing tactics are utilized as an enticement to draw customers into their stores to hopefully purchase other items.

As a tactical action, aggressive pricing is used with virtually all products that Wal-Mart sells.  Toys and electronics (i.e., flat panel televisions, PCs, and telephones) are priced aggressively during holiday seasons. More recently, Wal-Mart aggressively priced appliances in order to compete against Best Buy, Home Depot, and Lowe’s in this product category. For the back-to-school season, Wal-Mart often cuts prices anywhere from 10 percent to 50 percent on as many as 16,000 school-related items.

Firms must carefully evaluate the effectiveness of all of their competitive actions and competitive responses. Some feel that Wal-Mart’s emphasis on low prices is preventing the firm from allocating sufficient resources to remodel aging stores and to upgrade the quality of its merchandising mix. Competitors Kohl’s and Costco appear to be attracting some of Wal-Mart’s customers by offering more appealing mixes of merchandise and a marginally more pleasant shopping experience that modernized facilities provide. Thus, Wal-Mart must carefully assess the degree to which its tactical action of aggressive pricing is allowing it to successfully engage competitors in marketplace competitions.


Students should be reminded that the cost of utilizing a pricing tactic may be more extensive than the profit forgone.  The real cost in this case is not having funding available to maintain, improve, and expand current infrastructure and product mix in order to retain current customer levels.  Wal-Mart has established itself as a target at which competition is aiming.  No single firm can challenge Wal-Mart head-on, but each accepts Wal-Mart as the price leader in its respective market, and will employ tactics to protect its respective turf.   




4        Discuss factors affecting the likelihood a competitor will take competitive actions.       

LIKELIHOOD OF ATTACK

In addition to market commonality, resource similarity, and the drivers of awareness, motivation, and ability, other factors affect the likelihood a competitor will use strategic actions and tactical actions to attack its competitors. Three of these factors—first-mover incentives, organizational size, and quality—are described below.

First-Mover Incentives

First movers are the firms that take an initial competitive action, either strategic or tactical. First movers are firms that have the resources, capabilities, and core competencies that enable them to gain a competitive advantage through innovative and entrepreneurial competitive actions.

By being early, the first mover hopes to:
•        earn above-average returns until competitors respond effectively
•        gain customer loyalty, thus creating a barrier to entry by competitors
•        gain market share that can be difficult for competitors to take in the future

               
Teaching Note: Consider the success of Harley-Davidson in large motorcycles (cruisers). In the 1980s Harley-Davidson set the standard for low, heavyweight motorcycles and has successfully defended its position by emphasizing its reputation and brand name.                         

The firm trying to predict its rivals’ competitive actions might conclude that they will take aggressive strategic actions to gain first movers’ benefits.  However, while a firm’s competitors might be motivated to be first movers, they may lack the ability to do so.  First movers tend to be aggressive and willing to experiment with innovation and take higher, yet reasonable, levels of risk.  To be a first mover, the firm must have readily available the resources to significantly invest in R&D as well as to rapidly and successfully produce and market a stream of innovative products.

Organizational slack is what makes it possible for firms to have the ability (as measured by available resources) to be first movers. Slack is the buffer or cushion provided by actual or obtainable resources that aren’t currently in use. Thus, slack is liquid resources that the firm can quickly allocate to support the actions (e.g., R&D investments and aggressive marketing campaigns) that lead to first mover benefits.

There also are dangers or disadvantages to being a first mover.
•        It is difficult to accurately estimate the returns that will be earned from introducing product innovations.
•        The first mover’s cost to develop a product innovation can be substantial, reducing the slack available to support further innovation.
•        Lack of product acceptance over the course of the competitor’s innovations may indicate less willingness in the future to accept the risks of being a first mover.

Second movers are firms that respond to a first mover’s competitive action, typically through imitation. Doing so allows the second mover to
•        avoid both the mistakes and the huge spending of the pioneers (first movers)
•        have time to develop processes and technologies that are more efficient than those used by the first mover
•        respond quickly to first movers’ successful, innovation-based market entries
•        rapidly and meaningfully interpret market feedback to respond quickly, yet successfully to the first mover’s successful innovations

               
Teaching Note: An example of industry dynamics—and how a second mover can succeed—is provided by looking at the competitive dynamics of the athletic shoe industry.
•        New Balance is a second mover in the athletic shoe industry.
•        It effectively competes against industry leaders Nike and Reebok by focusing on the needs of a well-defined market segment.
•        New Balance products are not particularly innovative compared to industry leader, Nike.
•        New Balance is able to succeed by doing a better job of satisfying the needs of baby boomers, whose ages are significantly higher than those of Nike’s and Reebok’s core customer groups, 42, compared to 25 and 33, respectively.
•        New Balance offers a new model every 17 weeks, compared to six weeks for most rivals.
•        New Balance’s success seems to come not from rapid introductions of innovative new products, but by offering high-quality products at moderate prices and by making them available in multiple widths (ranging from AA to EEEE), recognizing that many people do not have “average” feet.
       

Late movers are firms that respond to a competitive action, but only after considerable time has elapsed after the first mover’s action and the second mover’s response.

Typically, a late response is better than no response at all, although any success achieved from the late competitive response tends to be slow in coming and considerably less than that achieved by first and second movers.

As late movers are the last to respond to the first and second movers’ actions, late movers tend to be poor performers and often are weak competitors.  For example, Avon was a late mover in e-commerce and Dell was a late mover in providing Internet access.


Organizational Size

An organization’s size affects the likelihood that it will take competitive actions as well as the types of actions it will take and their timing.  Small firms are more likely to, and quicker to, launch competitive actions.

Large firms are likely to initiate more competitive actions as well as strategic actions during a given time period. Thus, the competitive actions a firm will likely encounter from larger competitors will be different than the competitive actions it will encounter from smaller competitors.

Large organizations often have slack resources to launch a larger number of total competitive actions, and thus do.  However, smaller firms have the flexibility needed to launch a greater variety of competitive actions.

Wal-Mart appears to be an example of a large firm that has the flexibility required to take many types of competitive actions.  Analysts believe that Wal-Mart’s tactical actions are critical to its success and show a great deal of flexibility (such as a quick advertising change for 2007 back-to-school sales, after disappointing spring, 2007 sales).  In other words, Wal-Mart’s competitive actions will be a combination of the tendencies shown by small and large companies.


Quality

Product quality shapes the competitive dynamics in many industries. In fact, product quality is no longer a competitive issue but a necessary or mandatory product attribute if firms expect to successfully implement any of the generic business strategies discussed in Chapter 3—low cost, differentiation, focus, or integrated cost leadership/differentiation. Quality involves meeting or exceeding customer expectations in the products and/or services offered.

               
Teaching Note: The following observations may prove useful in presenting this section:
•        The necessity of quality is illustrated by competition in the automobile industry and the uphill battle of U.S. automakers to produce cars with a quality level comparable to those produced by the Japanese.
•        While U.S. automakers appear to have reached quality parity, they should expect that Japanese automakers will initiate strategic responses to their competitive actions.  In fact, many observers expect the Japanese to use their core competencies to develop a source of competitive advantage other than quality.  In turn, this will stimulate U.S. (and European) automakers to develop and implement competitive responses.
•        In the long run, it costs less to make quality products or to offer quality services than it does to make or offer defective ones (because of the costs related to repairing defects or correcting service errors).
       
               
While quality is necessary, it is not a sufficient product attribute for firms to achieve strategic competitiveness.  An acceptable level of quality merely provides firms with the opportunity to compete.  Products and services must continue to meet customer preferences.

Quality is as important in the services sector as it is in manufacturing.  For the importance of quality to permeate the entire organization (and affect all of its processes and value-creating activities), a dedication to quality must come from the organization’s top-level executives.

               
Teaching Note: This is what has happened at Dell Computer as top management, especially Michael Dell, is obsessed with maintaining high levels of product quality and continuous quality improvements.  At Dell, a total quality management process is found throughout the firm’s activities and processes.               


Quality affects competitive rivalry.
•        The firm studying a competitor with poor quality products can predict that the competitor’s costs are high and that its sales revenue will likely decline until the quality issues are resolved.
•        The firm can predict that the competitor is unlikely to be aggressive in terms of taking competitive actions, given that its quality problems must be corrected in order to gain credibility with customers.
•        Once corrected, the competitor will likely act by emphasizing additional dimensions of competition.


Teaching Note: To improve quality or to maintain a focus on it, firms often become involved with total quality management, which is a “managerial innovation that emphasizes an organization’s total commitment to the customer and to continuous improvement of every process through the use of data-driven, problem-solving approaches based on empowerment of employee groups and teams.” Through TQM, firms seek to (1) increase customer satisfaction, (2) cut costs, and (3) reduce the amount of time required to introduce innovative products to the marketplace.

       

TQM: A Mini-Lecture

TQM combines W. Edward Deming’s and Joseph Juran’s teachings on statistical process control (SPC is a technique used to continually upgrade the quality of goods or services that a firm produces) with group problem-solving processes and Japanese values related to quality and continuous improvement.

A key attribute of SPC is the early detection and elimination of variations in the processes used to manufacture a good or service (compared to waiting until a product is completed).

It is interesting—and, at the same time, discouraging—to note that Japanese firms adapted and implemented Deming’s and Juran’s quality management techniques long before they were recognized as important by U.S. firms.  This lag by U.S. firms explains how Japanese firms were able to achieve a competitive advantage based on product quality that forced U.S. firms to play catch up.

The principal goals of TQM are increasing customer satisfaction with the firm’s goods and/or services, compressing product introduction time (time-to-market) and reducing costs.

Critical to successfully implementing Deming’s framework is recognizing that the firm (and all of its employees) must continuously strive to improve the quality of the firm’s processes as well as that of its goods and services.

Newer methods of TQM use benchmarking and emphasize organizational learning for firms attempting to gain competitive advantage.  Benchmarking facilitates TQM by developing information on best practices that can guide the firm’s own TQM efforts.



Table Note: Quality-related dimensions of goods and services are shown in Table 5.1.


TABLE 5.1
Quality Dimensions of Goods and Services

Indicated in Table 5.1, the quality dimensions of products and services differ slightly from each other. As presented, the quality dimensions of products are more objective or measurable, relating to:
•        how the product performs and how it conforms with pre-established standards
•        what features it has
•        its flexibility, durability, conformance, and serviceability
•        how it looks or feels and an overall perception of quality

In contrast, the quality dimensions of services are more subjective, dealing with:
•        timeliness, courtesy, and convenience
•        accuracy, completeness, and consistency



5        Discuss factors affecting the likelihood a competitor will respond to actions taken against it.       

LIKELIHOOD OF RESPONSE

Once a competitive action has been taken, its success generally is determined by the likelihood and nature of the competitive response.

In general, a firm is likely to respond to a competitor’s action when
1.        the action leads to better use of the competitor’s capabilities to gain or produce stronger competitive advantages or an improvement in its market position,
2.        the action damages the firm’s ability to use its capabilities to create or maintain an advantage, or
3.        the firm’s market position becomes less defensible.

To predict how a competitor is likely to respond to competitive actions, firms should consider (see Figure 5.2):
•        market commonality and resource similarity
•        awareness, motivation, and ability
•        type of competitive action, reputation and market dependence


Type of Competitive Action


Teaching Note: Remember, competitive actions are significant competitive moves taken by a firm that are designed to gain a competitive advantage in a market, with the type of competitive action taken being based on the firm’s strategy (described in Chapter 4).  Competitive actions can be classified based on the scope or breadth and significance of the action.


The likelihood of a competitive response to an action depends on the type of action taken—strategic or tactical—and the potential effect on competitors.

Because strategic actions require the use or dedication of specific organizational resources, are more difficult to implement successfully, are more time consuming, and are difficult (and often costly) to reverse, it is more likely that tactical actions will be implemented and responded to more often.

Because tactical actions require fewer organizational resources and are relatively easy to implement and reverse, their effects on the competitive situation are more immediately felt.

Some examples of strategic actions include:
•        Wal-Mart’s entry into the European market
•        Continental’s decision to initiate flights into Lima, Peru
•        Bank One’s implementation of an Internet banking company


Teaching Note: Tactical actions are taken to fine-tune a strategy. They involve fewer and more general organizational resources and are relatively easy to implement and reverse, if necessary. Fare increases (decreases) in the airline industry represent tactical actions. They require few organizational resources (other than communicating new prices), are relatively easy to implement, and can be reversed.  Tactical actions also are generally more quickly responded to by competitors than are strategic actions.


Teaching Note: It can be instructive to compare the rapid response by airlines to competitors’ tactical actions (such as fare reductions) to American Airline’s acquisition of another airline company and its $1 billion purchase of gates at JFK airport to respond to Continental’s efforts to gain market share (strategic actions).       

Actor’s Reputation

To predict the likelihood of a competitor’s response to a current or planned action, the firm studies the responses that that competitor has taken previously when attacked, in that past behavior is assumed to be a reasonable predictor of future behavior.

Competitors are more likely to respond to either strategic or tactical actions that are taken by a market leader.  For example, competitive actions taken by Home Depot are almost certain to incite a response from Lowe’s.

               
Teaching Note: Some likely effects of reputation are the following:
•        Actions initiated by firms with a previous history of success also will be more likely to result in quick reactions and imitation.
•        Actions taken by firms with reputations for risk-taking and for initiating complex and unpredictable actions are less likely to be responded to.
•        Actions taken by price predators (firms who cut prices to capture market share and then raise prices) are seen as having a negative effect on competitors and their actions receive only minimal response and imitation.


Dependence on the Market

Market dependence denotes the extent to which a firm’s revenues/profits are derived from a particular market.
Firms that are highly concentrated in—or dependent on—an industry (or market) in which a competitive action has been taken are more likely to respond than are firms who do business in multiple industries and markets.


6        Explain competitive dynamics in slow-cycle, fast-cycle and standard-cycle markets.       

COMPETITIVE DYNAMICS


Teaching Note: Recall that Figure 5.1 illustrates the potential outcomes of interfirm rivalry.


Whereas competitive rivalry concerns the ongoing actions and responses between a firm and its competitors for an advantageous market position, competitive dynamics concerns the ongoing actions and responses taking place among all firms competing within a market for advantageous positions.

To explain competitive dynamics, it is important to understand the effects of varying rates of competitive speed in different markets (called slow-cycle, fast-cycle, and standard-cycle markets, defined below) on the behavior (actions and responses) of all competitors within a given market.  Competitive behaviors as well as the reasons or logic for taking them are similar within each market type, but differ across market type.  Thus, competitive dynamics differ in slow-cycle, fast-cycle, and standard-cycle markets.  The sustainability of the firm’s competitive advantages differs across the three market types.


Slow-Cycle Markets

Slow-cycle markets are those in which the firm’s competitive advantages are shielded from imitation, often for long periods of time and where imitation is costly.  Thus, competitive advantages are sustainable in slow-cycle markets.

Building a unique competitive advantage that is proprietary leads to competitive success in a slow-cycle market. This type of advantage is difficult for competitors to understand. Copyrights, geography, patents, and ownership of an information resource are examples of what leads to unique advantages.  


Teaching Note: Noted in Chapter 3, a difficult-to-understand and costly-to-imitate advantage can be the result of unique historical conditions, causal ambiguity, and/or social complexity.  


Once a proprietary advantage is developed, the firm’s competitive behavior in a slow-cycle market is oriented to protecting, maintaining, and extending that advantage.


Teaching Note: Providing some examples may help students understand what has been involved in establishing and defending a one-of-a-kind competitive advantage.  The following are some possibilities:
•        IBM’s historical dominance of the mainframe computer industry
•        Boeing’s dominant position in larger, commercial jet aircraft (at least until the Airbus super-jumbo jet hits the market)
•        Microsoft’s dominant position in the market for PC operating system software (though diminished somewhat by a recent swell of new competitors)
•        Wal-Mart’s use of local market monopolies as it established its dominant position in discount retailing by setting up stores in small, rural communities
               
               
Figure Note: The sustainability of competitive actions in slow-cycle markets is illustrated in Figure 5.4.               


FIGURE 5.4
Gradual Erosion of a Sustained Competitive Advantage

As indicated by Figure 5.4, a firm operating in a slow-cycle market may be able to retain its competitive advantage over time.
•        Returns from the competitive action increase during the early, launch years of the strategy.
•        When returns level out, the firm exploits its position.
•        Competitors counterattack or launch strategies that cause the first firm’s bases for competitive advantage to erode. As a result, returns are competed away.



Fast-Cycle Markets

Fast-cycle markets are markets in which the firm’s competitive advantages aren’t shielded from imitation and where imitation happens quickly and somewhat inexpensively through reverse engineering and technology diffusion. Competitive advantages aren’t sustainable in fast-cycle markets.   

The technology often used by fast-cycle competitors isn’t proprietary, nor is it protected by patents as is the technology used by firms competing in slow-cycle markets. For example, only a few hundred parts readily available on the open market are required to build a PC. Patents protect only a few of these parts, such as microprocessor chips.

Fast-cycle markets are more volatile than slow-cycle and standard-cycle markets.  Prices fall quickly in these markets, so companies need to profit quickly from their product innovations (e.g., rapid declines in the prices of microprocessor chips produced by Intel and Advanced Micro Devices continuously reduces their prices to end users).

Imitation of many fast-cycle products is relatively easy, as demonstrated by Dell and Gateway, along with a host of local PC vendors. All of these firms have partly or largely imitated IBM’s initial PC design to create their products.


Teaching Note: The focus of fast-cycle competition is competitive disruption, an approach where competition is based on one set of resources and then shifted to another—in other words, using price as a first step toward sustaining a competitive advantage, then shifting to quality, then speed, then innovation, and so on. The principle is that the primary basis of the competitive advantage is shifted as the firm disrupts, and changes, the rules of the game.


Firms in fast-cycle markets avoid “loyalty” to any of their products, preferring to cannibalize their own before competitors learn how to do so through successful imitation. This emphasis creates competitive dynamics that differ substantially from what is witnessed in slow-cycle markets. Instead of concentrating on protecting, maintaining, and extending competitive advantages, these companies focus on learning how to rapidly and continuously develop superior advantages.


Figure Note:  Figure 5.5 can be used to discuss how competitive advantage would unfold in a fast-cycle market.


FIGURE 5.5
Obtaining Temporary Advantages to Create Sustained Advantage

As illustrated, one way in which firms might sustain a competitive advantage is to move continuously from advantage to advantage.  This is accomplished by moving from one source of advantage to another, never allowing competitors to catch up.

Examples of firms that have successfully followed the incremental approach to sustain competitive advantage are Vodaphone in telecommunications services and Cisco Systems in telecommunications systems.



Teaching Note:  The following has been prescribed as the incremental or step-by-step approach to managing competitive advantages in fast-cycle markets.
1.        Disrupt the status quo – a firm should identify new opportunities to meet customer needs, thereby shifting or changing the basis of competition.
2.        Create a temporary advantage – the temporary advantage should be based on improved knowledge of customers’ needs, innovative application of technology, and an attempt to define the future basis of customer satisfaction.
3.        Seize the initiative¬ – move aggressively and rapidly, forcing competitors to play catch up; taking a proactive approach while leaving competitors to be reactive.
4.        Sustain the momentum – continue to develop new sources of advantage; don’t wait for competitors to catch up; stay one step ahead.


Teaching Note:  As discussed earlier, the new competitive landscape requires that firms (1) introduce more new products, (2) develop broader product lines, and (3) provide more rapid product upgrades.


Standard-Cycle Markets

Standard-cycle markets are those in which the firm’s competitive advantages are moderately shielded from imitation and where imitation is moderately costly. Competitive advantages are partially sustainable in standard-cycle markets, but only when the firm is able to continuously upgrade the quality of its competitive advantages.

The competitive actions and responses that form a standard-cycle market’s competitive dynamics find firms seeking large market shares, trying to gain customer loyalty through brand names, and carefully controlling their operations to consistently provide the same usage experience for customers without surprises.

Because of large volumes, the size of mass markets, and the need to develop scale economies, the competition for market share is intense in standard-cycle markets.  P&G and Unilever are direct competitors—they share multiple markets, have similar types and amounts of resources, and follow similar strategies.  For example, they both compete aggressively for market share in laundry detergents, where tiny fractions make a huge difference at the bottom line.

Innovation has a substantial influence on competitive dynamics as it affects the actions and responses of all companies competing within a slow-cycle, fast-cycle, or standard-cycle market.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        Who are competitors? How are competitive rivalry, competitive behavior, and competitive dynamics defined in the chapter? (pp. 128-129)

Competitors are firms competing in the same market, offering similar products, and targeting similar customers.  Competitive rivalry is the ongoing set of competitive actions and competitive responses occurring between competitors as they compete against each other for an advantageous market position. The outcomes of competitive rivalry influence the firm’s ability to sustain its competitive advantages as well as the level (average, below-average, or above-average) of its financial returns.  For the individual firm, the set of competitive actions and responses it takes while engaged in competitive rivalry is called competitive behavior. Competitive dynamics is the set of actions taken by all firms that are competitors within a particular market.

2.        What is market commonality? What is resource similarity? What does it mean to say that these concepts are the building blocks for a competitor analysis? (pp. 131-133)

Market commonality refers to the number of markets with which competitors are jointly involved and their importance to each.  Resource similarity refers to how comparable competitors’ resources are in terms of type and amount.   These are the building blocks of a competitor analysis (which is the first step the firm takes to be able to predict its competitors’ actions and responses) because they are foundational to this understanding. Chapter 2 discussed what firms must do to understand competitors. The discussion is extended further in the current chapter as the authors describe what the firm does to predict competitors’ market-based actions. Thus, understanding precedes prediction. And in general, the greater the market commonality and resource similarity, the more firms acknowledge that they are direct competitors.

3.        How do awareness, motivation, and ability affect the firm’s competitive behavior? (pp. 133-135)

As shown in Figure 5.2, market commonality and resource similarity influence the drivers (awareness, motivation, and ability) of competitive behavior. In turn, the drivers influence the firm’s competitive behavior, as shown by the actions and responses it takes while engaged in competitive rivalry.

Awareness, which is a prerequisite to any competitive action or response being taken by the firm or its competitor, refers to the extent to which competitors recognize the degree of their mutual interdependence that results from market commonality and resource similarity. Awareness tends to be greatest when firms have highly similar resources (in terms of types and amounts) to use while competing against each other in multiple markets. Awareness affects the extent to which the firm understands the consequences of its competitive actions and responses.

Motivation, which concerns the firm’s incentive to take action or to respond to a competitor’s attack, relates to perceived gains and losses. Thus, a firm may be aware of competitors but may not be motivated to engage in rivalry with them if it perceives that its position will not improve as a result of doing so or that its market position won’t be damaged if it doesn’t respond.

In some instances, the firm may be aware of the large number of markets it shares with a competitor and may be motivated to respond to an attack by that competitor, but it lacks the ability to do so. Ability relates to each firm’s resources and the flexibility they provide. Without available resources (such as financial capital and people), the firm lacks the ability to attack a competitor or respond to its actions. However, similar resources suggest similar abilities to attack and respond. When a firm faces a competitor with similar resources, careful study of a possible attack before initiating it is essential because the similarly resourced competitor is likely to respond to that action.

4.        What factors affect the likelihood that a firm will take a competitive action? (pp. 136-141)

In addition to market commonality and resource similarity and awareness, motivation, and ability, three more specific factors affect the likelihood a competitor will take competitive actions. The first of these concerns is first mover incentives.  First movers, those taking an initial competitive action, often earn above-average returns until competitors can successfully respond to their action and gain loyal customers.  Not all firms can be first movers in that they may lack the awareness, motivation, or ability required to engage in this type of competitive behavior.  Moreover, some firms prefer to be a second mover (the firm responding to the first mover’s action).  One reason for this is that second movers, especially those acting quickly, can successfully compete against the first mover. By studying the first mover’s product, customers’ reactions to it, and the responses of other competitors to the first mover, the second mover can avoid the early entrant’s mistakes and find ways to improve upon the value created for customers by the first mover’s good or service.  Late movers (those that respond a long time after the original action was taken) often are lower performers and much less competitive.

Organizational size, the second factor, tends to reduce the number of different types of competitive actions that large firms launch while it results in smaller competitors’ using a wide variety of actions.  Ideally, the firm would like to initiate a large number of diverse actions when engaged in competitive rivalry.  The third factor, quality, dampens firms’ abilities to take competitive actions, in that product quality is a base denominator to successful competition in the global economy.

5.        What factors affect the likelihood a firm will initiate a competitive response to the action taken by a competitor? (pp. 141-143)

The type of competitive action (strategic or tactical) the firm took, the competitor’s reputation for the nature of its competitor behavior, and its dependence on the market in which the action was taken are studied to predict a competitor’s response to the firm’s action.  In general, the number of tactical responses taken exceeds the number of strategic responses.  Competitors respond more frequently to the actions taken by the firm with a reputation for predictable and understandable competitive behavior, especially if that firm is a market leader.  In most cases, the firm can anticipate that when its competitor is highly dependent for its revenue and profitability in the market in which the firm took a competitive action, that competitor is likely to launch a strong response.  However, firms that are more diversified across markets are less likely to respond to a particular action that affects only one of the markets in which they compete.

6.        What competitive dynamics can be expected among firms operating in slow-cycle markets?  In fast-cycle markets?  In standard-cycle markets? (pp. 143-147)

Competitive dynamics concerns the ongoing competitive behavior occurring among all firms competing in a market for advantageous positions. Market characteristics affect the set of actions and responses firms take while competing in a given market as well as the sustainability of firms’ competitive advantages. In slow-cycle markets, where competitive advantages can be maintained, competitive dynamics finds firms taking actions and responses that are intended to protect, maintain, and extend their proprietary advantages. In fast-cycle markets, competition is almost frenzied as firms concentrate on developing a series of temporary competitive advantages. This emphasis is necessary because firms’ advantages in fast-cycle markets aren’t proprietary and as such, are subject to rapid and relatively inexpensive imitation. Standard-cycle markets are between slow-cycle and fast-cycle markets, in that firms are moderately shielded from competition in these markets as they use competitive advantages that are moderately sustainable. Competitors in standard-cycle markets serve mass markets and try to develop economies of scale to enhance their profitability. Innovation is vital to competitive success in each of the three types of markets. Firms should recognize that the set of competitive actions and responses taken by all firms differs by type of market.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Win-win, win-lose, or lose-lose?

A key aspect of company strategy concerns the interactions between two or more firms.  When a new market segment emerges, should a firm strive for a first-mover advantage, or wait to see how the market takes shape?  Diversified firms compete against one another in multiple market segments and must often consider how actions in one market might be subject to retaliation by a competitor in another segment.  Similarly, when a competitor initiates a price war, a firm must decide whether it should respond in kind or not.

Game theory is helpful for understanding the strategic interaction between firms.  Game theory uses assumptions about the behavior of rivals to help a company choose a specific strategy that maximizes its return.  In this exercise, you will use game theory to help analyze business decisions.

Individual

One of the classic illustrations of game theory can be found in the prisoner’s dilemma.  Two criminals have been apprehended by the police for suspicion of a robbery.  The police separate the thieves and offer them the same deal: inform on your peer and receive a lesser sentence.  Let your peer inform on you, and receive a harsher sentence.  What should you tell the police?  

Visit www.gametheory.net where you can play the prisoner’s dilemma against a computer.  Play the dilemma using different parameters, and make notes of your experience.

Groups

There are many examples of game theory in popular culture, from the reality show Survivor to episodes of The Simpsons.  Revisit www.gametheory.net and select either a TV or movie illustration. Discuss the applications of game theory with your team.

As a group, prepare a one page summary of how game theory can be applied to competitive interactions between firms.


Exercise 2: Strategy as warfare

It is common to see military analogies and phrasing used to describe strategy topics, particularly in regard to competitive dynamics and inter-firm rivalry.  For example, executives often speak about guerilla marketing, launching pre-emptive strikes on rivals, or battles for market share.  Al Dunlap, a former CEO of Sunbeam, was once known as “Rambo in pinstripes” and even posed for a business magazine photo shoot wearing machine guns.  

Military texts are often used to help understand how firms should act in relation to their competitors.  Von Clauswitz’s book On War draws on his experience in the Napoleonic Wars.  Sun Tzu’s Art of War is a much earlier – circa 500 BC – and more influential text, however.  Sun Tzu was a Chinese general who, according to legend, was hired by the king after a demonstration of training using the king’s concubines.

Part One

Break into teams of four to six persons.  Each member should select a different chapter of Art of War (there are thirteen chapters in total).  There are numerous sources on the Internet for free downloads of the book, including an audio book version at Project Gutenberg. (www.gutenberg.org). After reading your chapter, prepare a bullet-point summary for your team members on the chapter’s relevance to corporate strategy.

Part Two

Have the team meet and ask each member to explain her/his summary of what was read.  Then, answer the following questions:

        Which of Sun Tzu’s ideas offered the most insightful analogies for inter-firm rivalry?
        Which of Sun Tzu’s ideas seemed to be the least relevant for understanding competitive dynamics among firms?
        What ideas from Art of War can you apply to an example used earlier in this chapter?  


—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Win-win, win-lose, or lose-lose?

The purpose of this exercise is to illustrate basic concepts of game theory, so they can be more readily related to competitive dynamics.  The exercise has both individual and group components.
In the first half of the exercise, students are asked to play the prisoner’s dilemma, using the computer version of the exercise at www.gametheory.net.  The prisoner's dilemma is based on the following elements:
•        Two criminals are arrested as suspects in a bank robbery.
•        Before they have a chance to coordinate their alibis, the criminals are moved to separate cells.
•        Each criminal is given a choice: stay silent or betray their partner.  If they betray their partner, and the partner remains silent, they will go free while the partner will serve 10 years in prison. If they each betray their partner, they will each serve 2 years.  If they stay silent, the will be jailed on a lesser charge, and each serve six months.
•        What should each criminal do?
Note: the exact terms of the sentences vary across different versions of this exercise.  
There are four possible outcomes that are possible, depending on whether each criminal stays silent or betrays his partner:

        B stays silent        Betrays
A stays silent        A serves 6 months
B serves 6 months        A serves 10 years
B goes free
A betrays        A goes free
B serves 10 years        A serves 2 years
B serves 2 years

The best solution is for neither criminal to confess: total time served is one year, compared to four or ten years in other scenarios.  But, individual utility is maximized by betraying the partner, with the opportunity for freedom.  Recognizing that the partner may come to the same conclusion, each criminal decides to betray the other, and both serve two year sentences.
When discussing this exercise in class, it may be useful to supplement a discussion of the dilemma with a discussion of the tragedy of the commons.  Garrett Hardin published the article ‘Tragedy of the commons’ in Science magazine in 1968.  Science has a .pdf reprint of the article available online, as well as an extensive set of subsequent articles, available at http://www.sciencemag.org/sciext/sotp/commons.dtl.
Hardin’s discussion starts with the following scenario:
Imagine a common grazing area in a rural community:
•        Ten families each have one cow that grazes on the commons
•        The land can optimally support ten cows
•        Each cows sells for $100 at the end of the season
•        Family revenue is $100
•        Community revenue is $1,000
The scenario extends with the question, "What happens if one farmer adds a second cow?"
•        Because of overgrazing, each cow feeds less, and sells for only $85 at the end of the season
•        The community is now earning only $935 overall
•        Most farmers are earning $15 less
•        The farmer with two cows earns $170
Then, another farmer adds a second cow.
•        With more overgrazing, each cow sells for $70 at the end of the season
•        The community is now earning only $840 overall
•        Most farmers are earning $30 less
•        The farmers with two cows earn $140
The rational decision at the macro level is to only graze one cow per family on the common. However, the rational decision at the individual level is to add an extra cow.  Eventually, everyone follows suit, and all members of the community earn far less than they did previously.
To make a connection between game theory and strategy, ask students how the prisoner's dilemma and the tragedy of the commons relate to competitor interactions. Topics that can be addressed here include:
•        Head-to-head market share battles
•        Multipoint competition and mutual forbearance
Additional resources include:
For a good example of a market share battle, see the article on TAC and Orange competing in the Thai phone market, in “Pre-emptive strike” in Far Eastern Economic Review, April 26, 2001, p.50.
For a more general article on the economics of price competition, see the paper “The deadly dynamics of price competition” in Marketing Research, Winter 2004, 14(4) by Dozoretz and Matanovich.
Exercise 2: Strategy as warfare
The purpose of this exercise is for students to examine the overlap between military strategy and business strategy.  Working in small teams, each member is assigned one of the thirteen chapters in Sun Tzu’s Art of War, and to prepare a chapter summary.  There are numerous sources on the Internet for free downloads of the book, including an audiobook version at Project Gutenberg. (www.gutenberg.org).  Next, the entire team meets to discuss the following questions:

        Which of Sun Tzu’s ideas offered the most insightful analogies for inter-firm rivalry?
        Which of Sun Tzu’s ideas seemed to be the least relevant for understanding competitive dynamics among firms?
        What ideas from Art of War can you apply to an example used earlier in this chapter?  

The Art of War is organized into the following chapters:
Chapter I. LAYING PLANS
Chapter II. WAGING WAR
Chapter III. ATTACK BY STRATAGEM
Chapter IV. TACTICAL DISPOSITIONS
Chapter V. ENERGY
Chapter VI. WEAK POINTS AND STRONG
Chapter VII. MANEUVERING
Chapter VIII. VARIATION IN TACTICS
Chapter IX. THE ARMY ON THE MARCH
Chapter X. TERRAIN
Chapter XI. THE NINE SITUATIONS
Chapter XII. THE ATTACK BY FIRE
Chapter XIII. THE USE OF SPIES
A useful resource for structuring the debrief is the book Sun Tzu and the Art of Business (2000), by Mark McNeely, Oxford Press.  McNeely integrates the Art of War chapters into six business principles:

•        Gaining market share without destroying value
•        Avoiding direct confrontation with competitors
•        Utilizing market information
•        Speed
•        Shaping your opponent
•        Leadership
•        Mark McNeely maintains a Website on Sun Tzu and business applications at:

http://www.suntzu1.com/

Exercise 2: Corporate Juggling

The corporate juggling exercise is very different from prior activities used in the textbook.  The main differences are (a) that it is physical, and (b) it will require that the instructor invest in a set of props to conduct the exercise.  However, this exercise is often welcomed by students, as it gets them out for their seats for part of the class period.  The exercise also offers a highly visual metaphor that makes the concepts of diversification and complexity far more tangible.

To run the exercise, you will divide the class into two types of groups: Small teams (5-7 persons) and large teams (10-14 persons).   You will need to assemble one bag of resources for each team.  For example, with a class enrollment of 40, you might have two large teams, and three to four small teams.  

Part One

Each team gets a bag of items to be juggled.  The items should be lightweight enough so that no one is hurt.  Each bag should contain just one type of object, and the items should vary from team to team.  Sample objects can include ping pong balls, tennis balls, used film canisters (ask at photo processing shops), balled socks, and even crumpled pieces of butcher pad paper.  You should have at least as many objects in the bag as there are team members.

Give the bags to the team facilitators, and allow them to practice for ten minutes.  Then, ask the following questions:
        How did group size affect your process and outcomes?  
        How did the nature of the objects being tossed affect your process and outcomes?  

Part Two
After the discussion of these two questions, trade objects so that each team has a mix of different items.  For example, a small team might have a couple of ping pong balls, one tennis ball, a sock, and a paper ball.  Have the team repeat the juggling process using this diverse set of resources.  The, ask:
        How did the variability in inputs affect your process and outcomes?  
So far, the discussion has focused on team processes versus diversification.  To sharpen the focus on the chapter, ask students “How are elements of the exercise similar to topics in Chapter 6?”  Mentioning some of the following may help in stimulating further conversation:
        How easy or hard was it to process multiple objects?  How does a CEO manage many different business segments concurrently?
        How important was the dissimilarity between objects in your team’s effectiveness?  How does that relate to a firm’s ability in managing dissimilar business units?
        What strategies did the team use to “create value” (i.e., keep more objects in the air at one time)?  Teams may use very different approaches to maximize their output: e.g., switching facilitators, creating rules for adding more objects into play, building structures and processes to handling more capacity.
—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        Have the students read the popular business press (e.g., Business Week, Fortune, Fast Company), and identify a strategic action and a tactical action taken by firms approximately two years ago. Next, they should use the Internet to search the popular business press to see if, and how, competitors responded to those actions. They should be able to explain the actions and the responses, linking their findings to the discussion in this chapter.
2.        Why would a firm regularly choose to be a second mover? Likewise, why would a firm purposefully be a late mover?
3.        How did Wal-Mart’s strategic actions affect its primary European competitors? How has Wal-Mart’s e-commerce strategy affected competitors?
4.        Have the students choose a large firm and examine the popular business press to identify how its size, speed of actions, level of innovation, and quality of goods or services have affected its competitive position in its industry. Ask them to explain their findings.
5.        Identify a firm in a fast-cycle market. What strategic actions account for its success or failure over the last several years? How has the Internet affected the firm?


Ethics Questions

1.        Are there some industries in which ethical practices are more important than in other industries? If so, name the industries that are ethical, and explain how the competitive actions and competitive responses might differ for these industries compared with a typical industry?
2.        When engaging in competitive rivalry, firms jockey for a market position that is advantageous, relative to competitors. In this jockeying, what types of competitor intelligence-gathering approaches are ethical? How has the Internet affected competitive intelligence activities?
3.        A second mover is a firm that responds to a first mover’s competitive actions, often through imitation. Is there anything unethical about how a second mover engages in competition? Why or why not?
4.        Standards for competitive rivalry differ in countries throughout the world. What should firms do to cope with these differences? How do the differences relate to ethical practices?
5.        Could total quality management practices result in firms operating more ethically than before such practices were implemented? If so, what might account for an increase in the ethical behavior of a firm using TQM principles?
6.        What ethical issues are involved in fast-cycle markets?


Internet Exercise       
       
Cisco Systems ranks as one of the greatest success stories of the last decade.  The firm used acquisitions to gain access to R&D, with a pace that accelerated from four companies in 1995 to twenty-three companies in 2000. This strategy allowed Cisco to adopt and integrate innovations faster than its competitors.  But when the Internet bubble burst in early 2000, venture funding for the kinds of startups upon which Cisco had been feasting (i.e., those spawning networking innovations) evaporated.  The firm faced two immediate problems: (1) dealing with the complexity of managing the integration of a fast growing stable of new technology products and (2) learning again how to innovate without acquisition.  Look up Cisco Systems (http://www.cisco.com) on the Web and try to discern what the firm is doing to adjust to its new industry circumstances.

*e-project: Discuss how the Internet has become a vital component in increasing the speed, ease, and frequency of today’s large mergers and acquisitions.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:57:08 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 6
Corporate-Level Strategy


Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK

KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define corporate-level strategy and discuss its purpose.
2.        Describe different levels of diversification with different corporate-level strategies.
3.        Explain three primary reasons firms diversify.
4.        Describe how firms can create value by using a related diversification strategy.
5.        Explain the two ways value can be created with an unrelated diversification strategy.
6.        Discuss the incentives and resources that encourage diversification.
7.        Describe motives that can encourage managers to overdiversify a firm.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   Procter and Gamble’s Diversification Strategy
LEVELS OF DIVERSIFICATION  
        Low Levels of Diversification  
        Moderate and High Levels of Diversification  
REASONS FOR DIVERSIFICATION  
VALUE-CREATING DIVERSIFICATION:  RELATED CONSTRAINED AND RELATED LINKED DIVERSIFICATION  
        Operational Relatedness: Sharing Activities  
        Corporate Relatedness: Transferring of Core Competencies  
        Market Power  
        Simultaneous Operational Relatedness and Corporate Relatedness
UNRELATED DIVERSIFICATION
Strategic Focus  Operational and Corporate Relatedness: Smith & Wesson and Luxottica
          Efficient Internal Capital Market Allocation         
        Restructuring of Assets
VALUE-NEUTRAL DIVERSIFICATION: INCENTIVES AND RESOURCES  
        Incentives to Diversify
Strategic Focus  Revival of the Unrelated Strategy (Conglomerate): Small Firms Acquire Castoffs from Large Firms and Seek to Improve Their Value
        Resources and Diversification  
VALUE-REDUCING DIVERSIFICATION: MANAGERIAL MOTIVES TO DIVERSIFY  
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  


LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction:  Chapters 4 and 5 looked at strategy at the level of the business and focused on the factors and approaches that can lead to competitive advantage and superior performance.  Chapter 6 takes this a step further by standing back to consider strategy at a higher level—corporate strategy.  The concern here is for the performance benefits that are derived from putting together an effective “portfolio of businesses”—that is, putting businesses together in a way that makes sense and can generate synergies between units.  The discussion of this chapter builds toward a summary presented in Figure 6.4.  It might be helpful to review that figure carefully before starting into the material of the chapter.



OPENING CASE
Procter and Gamble’s Diversification Strategy

This opening case focuses on establishing and maintaining economies of scope.  Economies of scope are cost savings that a firm creates by successfully sharing some of its resources and capabilities or transferring one or more corporate-level core competencies from one of its businesses to another.  After reading this case, you’ll begin to develop an appreciation for difficulties regarding diversification, bundling, consolidating corporate families, and the blending of corporate cultures.

In 2005, Procter & Gamble Companies acquired the Gillette Company with high expectations to create synergies between these businesses. Because Gillette’s consumer health care products were focused mainly on masculine market areas and P&G had more female beauty and baby care products, management saw complementary opportunities between these two corporations.  

One area in which they sought to create the potential synergy was combining the toothbrush and toothpaste businesses.  Procter and Gamble (Crest) had recently lost its lead in toothpaste market-share to Colgate.  In order to regain its top position, P&G decided on a bundling strategy of packaging a tube of Crest Toothpaste with an Oral-B Toothbrush under a new “Pro-Health” label.  Retailers welcomed this new bundling concept as it freed up precious shelf space previously used for two separate products in two separate areas.  P&G’s new oral-health bundling strategy resembles hair care and skin care products that are usually located together.

While various bundling strategies across the P&G and Gillette product lines appeared to have real potential, the feasibility of sharing activities between the two businesses (operational readiness) was not without obstacles.  Prior to P&G’s acquisition of Gillette, the two firms had been competitors in some markets.  Top management of both firms decided to commingle the employees in one place. Accordingly, they moved basic  operations to Cincinnati, Ohio, near P&G’s headquarters.  In the process, however, many of the Boston-area Gillette employees decided not to move, leading to an exit of talent. Secondly, P&G and Gillette had different ways of making business decisions. Gillette had established a strong empowerment environment, whereas the culture of P&G was more of a consensus-seeking process in making major decisions. The business cultures never truly united.  

The combination of the research unit in charge of providing new products for the Pro-Health project proceeded much better than the combination of the production and marketing personnel in Ohio. The most likely reason is that the research unit employees were able to stay in their general locations and collaborate through conferences and electronic means.  Despite the difficulties, in 2007 the combined P&G brands overtook Colgate in market share with 35 percent to Colgate’s 32 percent. As this case illustrates, merging two diverse firms to create operational relatedness or synergy between products can be more difficult to achieve than is apparent in the design phase.


Remind students that corporate culture is driven from the top downward.  Although there is limited information given in this case, do students see possible solutions to the apparent culture-gap? The two companies had been competitors prior to P&G’s acquisition.  Does the fact that they competed in some markets prior to the formal acquisition affect the likelihood of successfully blending their different cultures?  Is it necessary to blend the cultures?  Discuss the pros and cons of building a common culture.





1        Define corporate-level strategy and discuss its purpose.       

Remember that in Chapters 4 and 5 the discussion centered around selecting and implementing a business-level or competitive strategy—actions a firm should take to compete in a single industry or product market—and the actions and responses that affect the competitive dynamics of a single industry or product market.

In contrast, when a firm diversifies its operations by operating business in several industries, corporate level strategy becomes a primary focus.  This means that a diversified firm has two levels of strategy: business-level (or competitive) and corporate-level (or company-wide), the latter of which entails selecting a strategy that focuses on the selection and management of a mix of businesses.


Teaching Note:  Students sometimes have a difficult time grasping the concept of levels of strategy.  One useful way of explaining this is to draw their attention to PepsiCo and its portfolio of businesses prior to the 1997 spin-off of Tricon Global Restaurants, Inc., which later changed its name to Yum! Brands Inc.  Yum controls Pizza Hut, Taco Bell, and KFC, all of which were part of PepsiCo at one time.  The students are very familiar with these products, which is why the illustration works so well with them.  PepsiCo’s strategy was at the corporate level, whereas Pizza Hut, Taco Bell, and KFC each have separate, and very different, business-level strategies. It is easy to help students to see that PepsiCo’s corporate-level strategy was to generate synergies among the businesses (e.g., selling the firm’s soft drinks in all the restaurants).  But they can also readily see the differences in business-level strategies at Pizza Hut (differentiated product), Taco Bell (cost leadership), and KFC (perhaps somewhere in between). The illustration can also be used to help students understand other levels of strategy (e.g., functional, operational, and enterprise).


Corporate-level strategies detail actions taken to gain a competitive advantage through the selection and management of a mix of businesses competing in several industries or product markets.  Primary concerns of corporate-level strategy are:
•        What businesses should the firm be in?
•        How should the corporate office manage its group of businesses?
•        How can the corporation as a whole add up to more than the sum of its business parts?

The ultimate measure of the value of a firm’s corporate-level strategy is that the businesses in the firm’s portfolio are worth more under current management (and by following the firm’s corporate-level strategy) than they would be under different ownership or management.

Teaching Note:  Indicate to students that the unique organizational structure that is required by this strategy will be discussed in Chapter 11.

LEVELS OF DIVERSIFICATION

Diversified firms vary according to two factors:
•        the level of diversification
•        connection or linkages between and among business units


Figure Note:  Five levels of diversification are listed and each is defined in Figure 6.1.  It is recommended that you refer students to Figure 6.1 as you begin to discuss levels of diversification in more detail.  


FIGURE 6.1
Levels and Types of Diversification

Figure 6.1 should be used by students as a reference point during your discussion of diversification types.  Students’ attention should be directed to inter-unit linkages depicted on the right side of Figure 6.1.

Levels and types of diversification defined in Figure 6.1 and discussed in more detail in the next sections of this chapter are:

Low levels of diversification
•        Single business
•        Dominant business

Moderate to high levels of diversification
•        Related-constrained diversification
•        Related-linked diversification (mixed related and unrelated)

Very high levels of diversification
•        Unrelated diversification



2        Describe different levels of diversification with different corporate-level strategies.       

Low Levels of Diversification

Firms that follow single- or dominant-business strategies have low levels of diversification.  A single business is a firm where more than 95 percent of its revenues are generated by the dominant business.  

Firms such as the Wrigley Co. are examples of single-business firms.  Wrigley Co. has dominated the global gum-related industry as the largest manufacturer of chewing gum, specialty gums, and gum bases.  Its brands, Doublemint, Spearmint and Juicy Fruit, led the market.


Teaching Note:  Wrigley has chosen to focus its attention on its historic (since 1915) core business.  It competes effectively (and successfully) against large diversified firms, including RJR Nabisco (Beechnut and Carefree) and Warner-Lambert (Trident and Dentyne).  Focusing on its core business has enabled Wrigley’s top-level managers to maintain strategic control of the business.  As a result, Wrigley maintains a clear, strategic focus and is highly competitive in its core business (though it is beginning to diversify somewhat in recent years).


A dominant business is a firm that generates between 70 and 95 percent of its sales within a single business area.


Teaching Note: Hershey Foods Corp. is an example of a dominant business firm because, although it manufactures other food products, the bulk of the firm’s revenues are earned through its dominant confectionery business.


Moderate and High Levels of Diversification

A related-diversified firm is one that earns at least 30 percent of its revenues from sources outside of the dominant business and whose units are related to each other—e.g., by the sharing of resources and by product, technological, and distribution linkages.

Related-constrained firms also earn at least 30 percent of their revenues from the dominant business, and all business units share product, technological, and distribution linkages, as illustrated in Figure 6.1.  Kodak, Procter & Gamble, and Campbell’s Soup Company are related-constrained firms.

Mixed related and unrelated or related-linked firms, such as Johnson and Johnson and General Electric, generate at least 30 percent of their total revenues from the dominant business, but there are few linkages between key value-creating activities.

Unrelated-diversified (or highly diversified) firms do not share resources or linkages, as illustrated in Figure 6.1. Firms that pursue unrelated diversification strategies—often known as conglomerates—include United Technologies, Samsung, and Textron.

While there are more unrelated diversified firms in the U.S. than in most other countries, conglomerates (firms following unrelated diversification strategies) dominate the private sector economy in Latin America and in several emerging economies (such as China, South Korea, and India).


Teaching Note: Many firms that have at one time pursued unrelated diversification strategies are restructuring to focus on a less diversified mix of businesses, a move that may reflect:
•        an inability to manage high levels of diversification
•        recognition that a lower level of diversification would improve the match between the firm’s core competencies and environmental opportunities and threats

3        Explain three primary reasons firms diversify.       

REASONS FOR DIVERSIFICATION

Teaching Note: The content of this section of the chapter generally is limited to a discussion of Table 6.1, which provides some of the reasons that firms implement diversification strategies. The various value-related motives for diversification will be discussed in more detail in the remainder of the chapter as specific diversification strategies are discussed.


Firms may implement diversification strategies to enhance or increase the strategic competitiveness of the overall organization, and thus the value of the firm increases.

Value can be created through either related or unrelated diversification if the strategies enable the firm’s mix of businesses to increase revenues and/or decrease costs when implementing business-level strategies.

Firms may implement diversification strategies that are either value neutral or result in devaluation of the firm.  They may attempt to diversify
•        to neutralize a competitor’s market power
•        to reduce managers’ employment risk (i.e., risk of the CEO being unemployed when a dominant-business firm fails as compared to this risk when a single business fails when it is only one part of a diversified firm)
•        to increase managerial compensation because of the positive relationships between diversification, firm size, and compensation


Table Note:  Reasons or motives for implementing diversification strategies are presented in Table 6.1.  These will be discussed in the following chapter sections.




TABLE 6.1
Reasons for Diversification

Firms follow diversification strategies for many reasons.  These can be grouped into three broad sets of motives:

Motives to enhance strategic competitiveness:
•        economies of scope (related diversification) through activity-sharing and the transfer core competencies
•        market power motives (related diversification) by vertical integration or blocking competitors via multipoint competition
•        financial economies motives (unrelated diversification) to improve efficiency of capital allocation through an internal capital market or by restructuring the portfolio of businesses

Motives that are value-neutral with respect to strategic competitiveness:
•        to avoid violations of antitrust regulations
•        to take advantage of tax incentives
•        to overcome low performance
•        to reduce the uncertainty of future cash flows
•        to reduce overall firm risk
•        to exploit tangible resources
•        to exploit intangible resources

Managerial or value-reduction motives:
•        to diversify managerial employment risk
•        to increase managerial compensation




Figure Note:  As illustrated in Figure 6.2, firms seek to create value by sharing activities and transferring skills or corporate core competencies.  This figure can help students organize their thoughts about the options firms have to exploit various forms of relatedness.




FIGURE 6.2
Value-creating Strategies of Diversification: Operational and Corporate Relatedness

Firms seek to create value from economies of scope through two basic kinds of operational economies: sharing activities and transferring skills (corporate core competencies).  However, the levels of the two of these will lead to different corporate strategies with different advantages associated with each.

Combinations of economies        Resulting Strategy        Economies for advantage

High operational/low corporate        Vertical integration        Market power

Low operational/low corporate        Unrelated diversification        Financial economies

High operational/high corporate        Both operational and relatedness        Rare capability and can create diseconomies of scope

High operational/high corporate        Related-linked diversification        Economies of scope




VALUE-CREATING DIVERSIFICATION:  RELATED CONSTRAINED AND RELATED LINKED DIVERSIFICATION

Firms implement related diversification strategies in order to achieve and exploit economies of scope and build a competitive advantage by building on existing resources, capabilities, and core competencies.

For firms that operate in multiple industries or product markets, economies of scope represent cost savings attributed to entering an additional business and sharing activities or using capabilities and core competencies developed in another business that can be transferred to a new business without significant additional costs.

The difference between activity sharing and core competence sharing is based on how different resources are used jointly to create economies of scope:
•        To create economies of scope, tangible resources, such as plant and equipment or other business-unit physical assets, often must be shared.  Less tangible resources, such as manufacturing know-how, also can be shared.
•        Know-how transferred between separate activities with no physical or tangible resource involved, is a transfer of a corporate-level core competence, not an operational sharing of activities.

A key to creating value through sharing essentially separate activities is to share know-how or skills rather than physical or tangible resources.

Operational Relatedness: Sharing Activities

Because all of its businesses share product, technological, and distribution linkages, activity sharing is common among related-constrained diversified firms, such as Procter & Gamble.

P&G’s paper towel and disposable diaper units can share many activities due to their common characteristics:
•        Each business uses paper products as a key input, so they are likely to share key facets of procurement and inbound logistics, as well as primary manufacturing activities.
•        Because all three businesses produce consumer products that are sold in similar (if not the same) outlets, they will likely share outbound logistics, distribution channels, and possibly sales forces.


Teaching Note:  Recall from the discussion of the primary and support activities in a firm’s value chain in Chapter 3 that primary activities (such as inbound logistics, outbound logistics, and operations) might have several shared activities.  Firms that are able to develop core competencies through effective (and efficient) sharing of primary activities will achieve a competitive advantage.  Examples of activity sharing may include the following:
•        Inbound logistics: inventory delivery systems, warehouse facilities, quality assurance
•        Operations: assembly facilities, quality control systems, maintenance operations
•        Outbound logistics: sales force and service management
•        Support activities: procurement, technology development


Firms also must recognize that, while activity sharing is intended to reduce costs through achieving economies of scope, there are incremental costs related to sharing activities (costs that are created by sharing).  These costs must be recognized and taken into account when planning activity sharing or scope economies may not result.

Activity sharing can also result in new risks since closer linkages between business units create tighter interrelationships and/or interdependencies.  For example, if two business units share production facilities and sales in one unit’s products decline to the point that revenues no longer cover the costs of shared production, then each business unit’s ability to achieve strategic competitiveness may be adversely affected.

Regardless of the risks that accompany activity sharing, research indicates that activity sharing—or the potential for activity sharing—can increase the value of the firm.  Some findings are summarized here:
•        Acquiring firms in the same industry—a horizontal acquisition—where sharing of activities and resources is implemented results in improved performance and higher returns to shareholders.
•        Selling off units where resource sharing is a possible source of economies of scope results in lower returns to shareholders than does selling off business units unrelated to the firm’s core business.
•        Firms with more related units have less risk.


4        Describe how firms can create value by using a related diversification strategy.       

Corporate Relatedness: Transferring of Core Competencies

Over time, most firms develop intangible resources that can become a foundation for core competencies that are competitively valuable. In diversified firms, these core competencies generally are made up of managerial and technical knowledge, experiences, and expertise.

There are at least two ways the related linked diversification strategy helps firms to create value:
•        any costs related to developing the competence have already been incurred
•        competencies based on intangible resources, such as marketing know-how, are less visible and therefore are more difficult for competitors to understand and imitate


Teaching Note:  As an example, Philip Morris acquired Miller Brewing at a time when competition in the brewing industry was focused on establishing efficient operations.
•        Philip Morris used marketing competencies coming from the competitive cigarette industry.
•        No brewing firm used marketing capabilities as a source of competitive advantage.
•        By transferring its marketing competence to Miller, Philip Morris introduced marketing as a source of competitive advantage to the brewing industry.
•        Because its primary competitor, Anheuser-Busch, was unable to develop the capability to respond for several years, Miller’s strategic action (mostly effective advertising campaigns) let Miller achieve a temporary competitive advantage and earn above-average returns.

       
Other firms have focused on transferring a variety or resources/capabilities across businesses in their control.
•        Virgin has transferred its marketing skills across travel, cosmetics, music, drinks, and other retail businesses.  
•        Thermo Electron has employed its entrepreneurial skills in starting up a number of new ventures and maintaining a new venture network.  
•        Honda has developed and transferred across its businesses its expertise in small and now larger engines for a number of vehicle types—from motorcycles and lawnmowers to its range of automotive products.

One way that firms can facilitate the transfer of competencies between or among business units is to move key personnel into new management positions in the receiving unit.  However, research suggests that transferring expertise often does not lead to performance improvement.


Teaching Note:  It is good to help students understand the human dimensions of strategic decisions—e.g., expertise transfers may be difficult or costly because of the following:
•        A business-unit manager of an older division may be reluctant to transfer key people who have accumulated knowledge and experience critical to the business unit’s success.
•        Managers able to facilitate the transfer of core competencies may come at a premium.
•        The key people involved may not want to transfer.
•        The top-level managers from the transferring division may not want the competencies transferred to a new division to fulfill the firm’s diversification objectives.


Market Power

Firms also may implement related diversification strategies in an attempt to gain market power.
•        Market power exists when a firm is able to sell its products at prices above the existing competitive level or decrease the costs of its primary activities below the competitive level, or both.
•        Market power through diversification may be gained through multipoint competition, a condition where two or more diversified firms compete in the same product areas or geographic markets.

Firms also might gain market power by following a vertical integration strategy, which exists when a company produces its own inputs (backward integration) or owns its own distribution system (forward integration).

A vertical integration strategy may be motivated by a firm’s desire to strengthen its position in its core business relative to competitors by increasing its market power.

Vertical integration enables a firm to increase market power by:
•        developing the ability to save on its operations  
•        avoiding market costs  
•        improving product quality
•        protecting its technology from imitation by rivals
•        having strong ties between their assets for which no market prices exist

Note: establishing a market price would result in high search and transaction costs, so firms seek to vertically integrate rather than remain separate businesses.

Teaching Note: As an example of vertical integration, CVS, a Walgreen’s competitor, recently merged with Caremark, a pharmaceutical benefits manager. This represents a vertical move for CVS from a retail-only firm to broader-based health care. However, CVS risks alienating Walgreen’s, which may then choose to align with another benefits manager.

However, like other strategies that create value and aid the firm in achieving strategic competitiveness, vertical integration may not be the perfect answer because of risks and costs that accompany it.
•        Outside suppliers may be able to provide inputs at a lower cost (and, possibly also of a higher quality).
•        The costs of coordinating vertically integrated activities may exceed the value of the control realized.
•        Vertical integration may result in the firm losing strategic competitiveness if the internal unit does not keep up with changes in technology.
•        To vertically integrate, the firm may need to build a facility with capacity that exceeds the ability of its internal units to absorb, forcing the selling unit to sell to outside users in order to achieve scale economies.

Many manufacturing firms no longer pursue vertical integration.  In fact, deintegration is the focus of most manufacturing firms, such as Intel and Dell, and even among large automobile companies, such as Ford and General Motors, as they develop independent supplier networks. Solectron Corp., a contract manufacturer, represents a new breed of large contract manufacturers that is helping to foster this revolution in supply-chain management. Such firms often manage their customers’ entire product lines, and offer services ranging from inventory management to delivery and after-sales service.

E-commerce allows vertical integration to turn into “virtual integration,” permitting closer relationships with suppliers and customers through electronic means of integration.  This lets firms reduce transaction costs while boosting supply-chain management skills and tightening inventory control.


Simultaneous Operational and Corporate Relatedness

As Figure 6.2 suggests, some firms simultaneously seek operational and corporate relatedness to create economies of scope.  Because simultaneously managing two sources of knowledge is very difficult, such efforts often fail, creating diseconomies of scope.



A Bit of Disney History: A Mini-Case

By using operational relatedness and corporate relatedness, Disney made $3 billion on the 150 products that were marketed with its movie, The Lion King. Sony’s Men in Black was a super hit at the box office and earned $600 million, but box-office and video revenues were practically the entire success story. Disney was able to accomplish its great success by sharing activities regarding the Lion King theme within its movie, theme park, music, and retail products divisions, while at the same time transferring knowledge into these same divisions, creating a music CD, Rhythm of the Pride Lands, and producing a video, Simba’s Pride. In addition, there were Lion King themes at Disney resorts and Animal Kingdom parks. However, it is difficult for analysts from outside the firm to fully assess the value-creating potential of the firm pursuing both operational relatedness and corporate relatedness. As such, Disney’s assets as well as other media firms such as AOL Time Warner have been discounted somewhat because “the biggest lingering questions is whether multiple revenue streams will outpace multiple-platform overhead.”



5        Explain the two ways value can be created with an unrelated diversification strategy.       

UNRELATED DIVERSIFICATION

Firms implementing unrelated diversification strategies hope to create value by realizing financial economies, which are cost savings realized through improved allocations of financial resources based on investments inside or outside the firm.

Financial economies are realized through internal capital allocations (that are more efficient than market-based allocations) and by purchasing other companies and then restructuring their assets.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Operational and Corporate Relatedness: Smith & Wesson and Luxottica

Smith & Wesson, a traditional handgun manufacturer, has been pursuing the combined operational and corporate relatedness strategy.  Interestingly, until a short time ago Smith & Wesson had not ventured into other weapons-related products besides handguns.  Recently it moved beyond its traditional handgun market into producing shotguns and rifles.  In 2004, Michael F. Golden took over as CEO of Smith & Wesson and initiated an operationally related diversification strategy by purchasing Thompson/Center Arms Company, a shotgun and rifle manufacturer.  Thompson’s expertise in the long-barrel market has facilitated Smith & Wesson’s move into this market.  It’s interesting to note that Golden’s background had not been in the weapons, but rather in marketing tools for Black & Decker.  In addition to pushing into the long-barrel market, Golden developed a corporate relatedness effort by Smith & Wesson using its highly reputed name by licensees in their advertisements.  Its licensing revenues rose 17 percent in the second quarter of 2007. With its dual diversification strategy (using both operational and corporate relatedness), Smith & Wesson expects sales gains of “40 percent or more for fiscal 2007 and 2008.”  In addition, Smith & Wesson will continue to introduce new handguns such as its recently announced .45 caliber–sized handgun with both military and law enforcement applications.

In a similar move, Luxottica moved from a focus on fashion to sports brand sunglasses. To make this shift, Luxottica acquired Oakley, Inc., which is primarily focused in the sports eyewear segment. Operationally, due to synergies between these two businesses, Luxottica expects to see proposed savings over three years equivalent to $932 million due to opportunities for operational relatedness: higher than the premium paid of $663 million for Oakley. The big question is whether it can manage the brand change from fashion to sports using a corporate relatedness strategy given its image as a fashion sunglass manufacturer. Another concern is that the acquisition will make Luxottica 80 percent focused on retail markets in the United States. It had signaled earlier that it would like to expand its retail outlets in more affluent markets. Thus, it has risked being overly focused in the U.S. market.

In summary, both Smith & Wesson and Luxottica are examples of firms that are pursuing both operational and corporate relatedness as they diversify to increase their opportunities for growth.

Market power is one of the forces driving Smith & Wesson’s acquisition of Thompson and Luxottica’s acquisition of Oakley. This is a common strategy. Size, after all, can help to boost economies of scale, market reach, and general formidability in an industry. However, there are drawbacks to acquisition strategies as a means of gaining strength in the market.  For example, integrating newly-combined operations can prove challenging, especially when turf wars and other managerial machinations create complications. As explained, Smith & Wesson recently expanded its market scope into long barreled weapons in order to achieve leverage in the marketplace off its reputation in handguns. Will this effort capture synergies between businesses? What are the drawbacks to this approach?


Efficient Internal Capital Market Allocation

Although capital generally is efficiently distributed in a market economy through the capital markets, large diversified firms may be able to distribute capital more efficiently to divisions and thus create value for the overall organization. This generally is possible because:
•        Corporate offices have more detailed and accurate information on actual division performance and future prospects.
•        Investors have limited access to internal information and generally can only estimate division performance.

One implication of increased access to information is that the internal capital market may be able to allocate resources between investment opportunities more accurately (and at more adequate levels) than the external capital market.  There are several reasons for this:
•        Information disclosed to capital markets through annual reports may not fully disclose negative information, reporting only positive prospects while meeting all regulatory disclosure requirements.
•        External capital sources have limited knowledge of what is taking place within large, complex firms.
•        While owners have access to information, full and complete disclosure is not guaranteed.
•        An internal capital market may enable the firm to safeguard information related to its sources of competitive advantage that otherwise might have to be disclosed.  Through disclosure, the information could become available to competitors who might use the information to duplicate or imitate the firm’s sources of competitive advantage.

Other advantages of internal capital markets:
•        Corrective actions may be more efficiently structured and underperforming management can be more effectively disciplined through the internal capital market than through external capital market mechanisms.  Thus, the internal capital market is more capable of taking specific, finely-tuned corrective actions compared to the external market.
•        If external intervention is required, only drastic alternatives generally are available, such as forcing the firm into bankruptcy or forcing the removal of top-level managers.
•        With an internal capital market, the corporate office can adjust managerial incentives or can suggest strategic changes to make the desired corrections.

Research suggests that in efficient capital markets, the unrelated diversification strategy may be discounted.  Stock markets have applied what some have called a “conglomerate discount” reflected in the valuation of diversified manufacturing conglomerates at 20 percent less, on average, than the value of the sum of their parts.

The Achilles heel of the unrelated diversification strategy is that conglomerates in developed economies have a fairly short life cycle because financial economies are more easily duplicated than are the gains derived from operational relatedness and corporate relatedness.  This is less of a problem in emerging economies, where the absence of a “soft infrastructure” (e.g., effective financial intermediaries, sound regulations, and contract laws) supports and encourages use of the unrelated diversification strategy. In fact, in emerging economies such as those in India and China, diversification increases performance of firms from large diversified business groups.


Restructuring of Assets

A restructuring approach to creating value in an unrelated diversified firm involves the buying and selling of other companies (and their assets) in the external market.

Following the asset sale and layoffs, under-performing divisions (those acquired in the purchase) are sold to other firms and remaining divisions are placed under strict budgetary controls accompanied by the reporting of cash inflows and outflows to the corporate office.  



Tyco International: A Question of Ethics
Under former CEO Dennis L. Kozlowski, Tyco International, Ltd. excelled at exploiting financial economies through restructuring. Tyco focused on two types of acquisitions: platform, which represented new bases for future acquisitions, and add-on, in markets where Tyco currently had a major presence. As with many unrelated diversified firms, Tyco acquired mature product lines. However, completing large numbers of complex transactions resulted in accounting practices that aren’t as transparent as stakeholders now demand. In fact, many of Tyco’s top executives, including Kozlowski, were arrested for fraud, and the new CEO, Edward Breen, has been restructuring the firm’s businesses to overcome “the flagrant accounting, ethical, and governance abuses of his predecessor.” Actions being taken in firms such as Tyco suggest that firms creating value through financial economies are responding to the demand for greater transparency in their practices. Responding in this manner will provide the information the market needs to more accurately estimate the value the diversified firm is creating when using the unrelated diversification strategy.



Success in implementing unrelated diversification strategies usually requires that firms:
•        focus on firms in mature, low technology industries
•        avoid service businesses because of their client- or sales-orientation


6        Discuss the incentives and resources that encourage diversification.       

VALUE-NEUTRAL DIVERSIFICATION: INCENTIVES AND RESOURCES

As mentioned earlier, not all firms diversify to increase the value of the overall firm.  Some attempts at diversification are implemented to prevent the value of the firm from decreasing.


Incentives to Diversify

In most instances managers have a choice regarding the level of diversification that their firm should implement.  In addition, both the external and internal environments are sources of incentives or reasons that managers might use to justify diversification choices.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Revival of the Unrelated Strategy (Conglomerate): Small Firms Acquire Castoffs from Large Firms and Seek to Improve Their Value

Many large diversified firms are feeling pressure by major shareholders to focus their portfolios and to divest themselves of entities perceived by shareholders as diversions of corporate resources, such as managerial resources.  A number of small, unrelated firms have been anxious to purchase these castoffs.  One smaller firm with huge appetites is Jarden Corporation.  Jarden Corporation acquired Coleman Camping Goods in 2005 after its previous owner had gone into bankruptcy.  Jarden’s CEO Martin Franklin was able to transact a low price in a friendly takeover of this firm that had otherwise been pressured by competitors.  Franklin stated, “We look for brands that are market leaders but haven’t been innovative.” Similar acquisitions by Jarden include Ball Canning Jars, Bicycle Playing Cards, and Crock-Pot Cookers.

Prestige Brands Holdings, Inc. is also an active player in buying these castoffs. Prestige has been buying
castoffs from large consumer product companies, such as Procter & Gamble, Unilever, and Colgate-Palmolive, as they sell their underperforming brands such as Sure and Right Guard deodorants, Comet
Cleaner, Aqua Net standard products, Pert Plus Shampoo, and Rit Dye. Prestige also sought to revive Cutex Nail Polish Remover and Spic-n-Span cleaner, among other brands.

Innovative Brands, in partnership with promotional agent Ten United, bought and revived old brands such as Cloraseptic Sore Throat Treatment and Pert Shampoo. This restructuring strategy is attractive to these firms as less money is required to revive old brands than create new ones.
.
This diversification strategy is not only found in consumer product industries, but also in the clothing, hardware, and tool industries. VF Corporation has been transformed from a manufacturer of Lee and Wrangler Jeans and Vanity Fair underwear labels into the largest apparel maker in the world.  VF Brands also include Reef, JanSport, Nautica, and John Varvatos.  It’s interesting that VF Corporation seeks to maintain an entrepreneurial approach by keeping the founders of the business and managers, if possible, and giving them lots of autonomy, but at the same time alerting them that they will be under the tight financial control systems of the corporation to make sure that the entrepreneurs know how things will
operate after the acquisition.

Illinois Tool Works (ITW) started out as a toolmaker and tripled its size in the past decade to 750 business units worldwide. Its acquisition and diversification strategy focuses on small, low-margin but mature industrial businesses. Examples of its products include screws, auto parts, deli-slicers, and the plastic rings that hold together soft drink cans. It seeks to restructure each business it acquires in order to increase the business unit’s profit margins by focusing on a narrowly defined product range and targeting the most lucrative products and customers using the 80/20 concept, where 80 percent of revenues are derived by 20 percent of customers. Most acquisitions are under $100 million, and the price is usually relatively cheap.

This Strategic Focus offers instructors a plethora of thought-provoking questions to challenge students.  You might ask students why the above examples of acquisitions by smaller companies have proven successful.  Are shareholders becoming more vocal with their concerns about diversity?  What alternatives did previous owners have other than selling to current owners?   


Antitrust Regulation and Tax Laws

In the 1960s and 1970s, government policies—in the form of antitrust enforcement and tax laws—provided U.S. firms with incentives to diversify the mix of businesses controlled by the firm.  As a result of these policies, the vast majority of mergers during the period represented unrelated diversification.  They were classified as conglomerate mergers.

Conglomerate mergers (unrelated diversification) were encouraged in large part by the Celler-Kefauver Act which discouraged horizontal and vertical mergers.  That is, federal legislation (and enforcement by the U.S. Department of Justice) discouraged market power boosting via related diversification.  As one measure of the effectiveness of official “discouragement,” almost 80 percent of mergers during the 1973-1977 period were conglomerate mergers.

During the 1980s, enforcement of antitrust laws slackened and firms chose to implement horizontal merger strategies (or mergers with firms in the same [or a related] line of business).

At the same time, investment bankers aggressively promoted merger and acquisition activity to the extent that many acquisitions were classified as unfriendly or as hostile takeovers.

Firms that had diversified (in an unrelated fashion) in the 1960s and 1970s began to implement strategies to refocus their firms, and an era of restructuring began.

When firms generate more cash than they are able to profitably reinvest in the firm’s primary activities, the excess funds, or “free cash flows,” should be returned to shareholders in the form of dividends.  However, during the 1960s and 1970s, dividends were taxed more heavily than ordinary personal income.   (Dividends are taxed twice: once when the firm pays taxes on its operating income and a second time when net income is paid out to shareholders in the form of dividends as shareholders pay a tax on dividends received at their personal income tax rate).

In 1986, the perspective shifted once again, as the Tax Reform Act of 1986 reduced the top personal income tax rate from 50 percent to 28 percent.  Capital gains rules were changed so that capital gains would be taxed at the ordinary personal income tax rate, and personal interest deductibility was eliminated.

These changes in federal tax laws, which affected individual tax rates for dividends and capital gains (with the former decreasing and the latter increasing), have created an incentive for shareholders to favor reduced levels of diversification (after 1986) unless funded by tax-deductible debt.

The recent changes recommended by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB), regarding the elimination of the “pooling of interests” method for accounting for the acquired firm’s assets and the elimination of the write-off for research and development in process, reduce some of the incentives to make acquisitions, especially related acquisitions in high-technology industries.

Although there was a loosening of federal regulations in the 1980s and a retightening in the late 1990s, a number of industries have experienced increased merger activity due to industry-specific deregulation activity, including banking, telecommunications, oil and gas, and electric utilities.


Low Performance

When firms are able to earn above-average or superior returns in a single business, they have little incentive to diversify (as previously discussed in the Wrigley Co. example).

However, low performance may provide an incentive for diversification as a low-performing firm may become more risk-seeking in an effort to improve overall firm performance.

In response to low returns (or poor performance), firms often choose to seek greater levels of diversification.  At some point, however, poor performance slows the pace of diversification, often resulting in restructuring divestitures of businesses to lower the level of firm diversification.


Figure Note:  The relationship between level of performance and diversification (for firms that already have diversified) is illustrated by Figure 6.3.


FIGURE 6.3
The Curvilinear Relationship between Diversification and Performance

As Figure 6.3 illustrates, firms exhibiting low performance in their dominant businesses often implement related-constrained diversification strategies which, to some point, result in increased performance.

In search of even higher performance, related-diversified firms may continue to diversify, but elect to acquire unrelated businesses.

When a firm’s core competencies do not create value in unrelated businesses, firm performance decreases.



Teaching Note: DaimlerChrysler had to deal with the challenges that were created partly by its failed diversification efforts.  The firm faced the task of reversing this strategy, which started with the sale of its electronics operation, divesting a 34 percent stake in Cap Gemini (a French software services company), and liquidating Fokker (a Dutch aircraft manufacturer).  The firm also eliminated a layer of upper-level executives and shaped a culture of responsibility and entrepreneurship, with innovation (using cross-functional project teams) as the force supporting the new culture.


Uncertain Future Cash Flows

Firms also may implement diversification strategies when their products reach maturity (in the product life cycle) or are threatened by external factors that the firm cannot overcome.  Thus, firms may view diversification as a survival strategy.

In the 1960s and 1970s, railroads diversified because of the threat from the trucking industry to reduce demand for rail transportation.

Uncertainty can be derived from supply, demand, and distribution sources. For example, at one time PepsiCo acquired Quaker Oats to fortify its growth with Gatorade and healthy snacks, on the projection that these products would experience greater growth rates than Pepsi’s soft drinks.

Teaching Note: Uncertainty can derive from supply sources or demand conditions.
•        ENEL, Italy’s state-owned electricity company, has diversified broadly in recent years to cope with anticipated deregulation across Europe, which may mean that ENEL will have to cede 30 percent of its generating capacity to new rivals with cheaper electricity production.  Thus, since ENEL’s future sources of revenue are threatened, ENEL is using corporate-level diversification to compete in multiple segments of the utility market.
•        To adapt to decreases in government defense spending in Russia, Reuben Central Design Bureau (the celebrated submarine designer) used a diversification strategy.  With its world class design engineers, it continued its marine business while expanding into other areas—e.g., developing a high-speed rail system, a floating sea launch for rocket companies, real estate development, a restaurant chain, and a tea business, among others.  The Bureau’s diversification strategy has allowed it to survive in the chaotic Russian economic environment.


Synergy and Firm Risk Reduction

As you will recall from the discussion earlier in this chapter, firms that diversify in pursuit of economies of scope take advantage of linkages between primary value-creating activities to realize synergy from sharing.

Synergy exists when the value created by business units working together exceeds the value the units create when working independently.

These linkages—and the inter-relatedness or interdependencies that result—produce joint profitability between business units, and the flexibility of the firm to respond may be constrained, increasing the risk of failure.

To eliminate this risk, firms may do one of two things:
•        operate in more certain environments to reduce the level of technological change and choose not to pursue potentially profitable, yet unproven product lines
•        constrain or reduce the level of activity-sharing, thus foregoing the potential benefits of synergy

However, these decisions could lead to further diversification
•        to diversify into industries where more certainty exists
•        to additional, but unrelated diversification

Research suggests that a firm using a related diversification strategy is more careful in bidding for new businesses, whereas a firm pursuing an unrelated diversification strategy may be more likely to overprice its bid, because an unrelated bidder may not have full information about the acquired firm.  However, firms using either a related or an unrelated diversification strategy must understand the consequences of paying large premiums.


Resources and Diversification

In addition to having incentives to diversify, a firm also must possess the correct mix of resources—tangible, intangible, or financial—that makes diversification feasible.

However, remember that resources create value when they are rare, valuable, costly to imitate, and nonsubstitutable.  In other words, resources that do not have these characteristics can be more easily duplicated (or acquired) by competitors.  Thus, it may not be possible to create value using such resources.


Teaching Note:  This implies that acquisitions purchased at market prices using a firm’s “free cash flow,” such as Anheuser-Busch’s purchase of the St. Louis Cardinals baseball team, acquisition of the Campbell Taggart’s bakery business, and $400 million investment in the development and operation of Eagle Snacks, were not likely to create value exceeding average returns because of the flexibility (or mobility) and common nature of liquid assets.  As a result of poor performance, Anheuser-Busch sold off Campbell Taggart and closed its Eagle Snacks business. However, it continues to use its free cash flows to support some of its other businesses.


The excess capacity of tangible resources may be used to justify diversification, especially when the firm sees opportunities for activity sharing.  However, value-creation may be possible only in related diversification.  Remember, using tangible resources also creates interrelationships through its activity linkages in production, marketing, procurement, and technology, and these interdependencies often reduce firm flexibility and may, in fact, increase the risk of failure.

Ideally, as discussed earlier, a firm’s intangible resources—because they are less visible and less understood by competitors—should be used to facilitate and create value from diversification.


7        Describe motives that can encourage managers to overdiversify a firm.       

VALUE-REDUCING DIVERSIFICATION:  MANAGERIAL MOTIVES TO DIVERSIFY

Some managers may be motivated to diversify their firms even if there are no incentives, and a lack of resources can constrain inclinations toward diversification.  Managers’ motives for diversification include the following:
•        Diversification may enable managers to reduce employment risk (the risks related to the loss of their jobs or a reduction in compensation) because by diversifying the firm (i.e., by adding a number of additional businesses), managers may be able to diversify their employment risk, as long as profitability does not decline greatly as a result of the diversification.
•        Diversification allows managers to increase their compensation because of positive correlations between diversification, firm size, and executive compensation (which is based on the logic that large firms are more difficult to manage).


Teaching Note:  Indicate to students that corporate governance is covered in much greater detail in Chapter 10. The discussion in this chapter is introductory in nature.


If properly structured and used, governance structures—such as the firm’s board of directors, performance monitoring, executive compensation limits, and the market for corporate control—may provide the means to exert control over managers’ tendencies to overdiversify because of self-interest motives.

However, if a firm’s internal governance structure is not strong (or functions imperfectly), managers may diversify the firm beyond the optimal level. As a result, the overall firm may fail to earn average returns (illustrated by Figure 6.3).

When the internal governance structure fails to restrain managers from over-diversifying (and performance declines), external governance mechanisms, such as the takeover market, may come into play.

In the takeover market (also known as the market for corporate control), improved levels of diversification (and improved performance) are achieved by replacing incumbent or current managers and restructuring the firm.  However, managers may be able to avoid takeovers through defensive tactics, such as golden parachutes, poison pills, greenmail, or increasing the firm’s leverage ratio.

In spite of the preceding comments, most managers take positive strategic actions (such as those related to diversification) that result in overall firm profitability and contribute to the strategic competitiveness of the firm.

In addition to the internal and external governance mechanisms discussed, managers also may be provided with incentives to limit firm diversification to optimal levels by a concern for their personal reputations in the labor market and the related market for managerial talent (also known as the market for managers).

One signal that the firm may be overdiversified is when operating diversified businesses reduces, rather than improves, the overall performance of the firm.


Figure Note: It is useful to note that two factors appearing in Figure 6.4 will be discussed in greater detail in future chapters.  Governance structures will be discussed in Chapter 10 and strategy implementation is covered in Chapter 11.  The overall relationship between reasons for diversification, governance, and firm performance is provided in Figure 6.4.


FIGURE 6.4
Summary Model of the Relationship between         Firm Performance and Diversification

As shown in Figure 6.4, a firm’s diversification strategy is determined by three inter-related factors,
•        economies of scope
•        resources and incentives
•        managerial motives

In turn, the relationship between diversification strategy and firm performance is moderated by:
•        external governance mechanisms
•        internal governance mechanisms
•        the success with which the diversification strategy is implemented



As noted in this chapter, diversification strategies can be used to enhance a firm’s strategic competitiveness and enable it to earn above-average returns.  However, positive outcomes from diversification are possible only when the firm achieves the appropriate level of diversification, given its resources, capabilities, and core competencies, and taking into account the external environmental opportunities and threats.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        What is corporate-level strategy and why is it important? (pp. 154-155)

Corporate-level strategies are strategies that detail actions taken to gain a competitive advantage through the selection and management of a mix of businesses competing in different product markets.  They are concerned with what businesses the firm should be in and how the corporate office should manage its group of businesses.  

Corporate-level strategies are important to the diversified firm because developing and implementing multi-business strategies is necessary for effective utilization of resources, capabilities, and core competencies across multiple businesses to create value.  In the final analysis, a corporate-level strategy’s value is ultimately determined by the degree to which the businesses in the portfolio are worth more under the management of the company than they would be under any other ownership.

2.        What are the levels of diversification firms can pursue by using different corporate-level strategies? (pp. 155-157)

Low levels of diversification.  Single- and dominant-business firms represent those for which at least 95 percent and 70 percent of total sales, respectively, come from a single business.  Several advantages accrue to these firms.  For example, managers of single- and dominant-business firms may be more capable of understanding the competitive dynamics of the smaller number of industries in which their business(es) compete.  Furthermore, managers in these firms can develop more specialized skills, concentrating on formulating and implementing a narrower range of business-level strategies and managing synergies between businesses that may be easier to identify and master.  However, these firms must also overcome a number of disadvantages.  For example, single- and dominant-business firms are affected more negatively by an economic downturn that affects their single or dominant industry.  Also, by focusing their operations, these firms cannot enjoy the advantages that are realized only by diversified firms

Moderate to high levels of diversification.  A firm generating more than 30 percent of its revenue outside a dominant business and whose businesses are related to each other in some manner uses a related diversification corporate-level strategy.  When the links between the diversified firm’s businesses are rather direct, a related constrained diversification strategy is being used.

The diversified company with a portfolio of businesses with only a few links between them is called a mixed related and unrelated firm and is using the related linked diversification strategy. Compared with related constrained firms, related linked firms share fewer resources and assets between their businesses, concentrating instead on transferring knowledge and core competencies between the businesses.  As with firms using each type of diversification strategy, companies implementing the related linked strategy constantly adjust the mix in their portfolio of businesses as well as make decisions about how to manage their businesses.

Very high levels of diversification.  A highly diversified firm that has no relationships between its businesses follows an unrelated diversification strategy.  These businesses are not related to each other, and the firm makes no efforts to share activities or to transfer core competencies between or among them.

3.        What are three reasons causing firms choose to diversify their operations? (pp. 157-174)

Firms may chose to move from a single- or dominant-business position to a more diversified position for three general reasons.  First (value-creating), they do this to enhance strategic competitiveness via increased economies of scope (e.g., by sharing activities and transferring core competencies), market power (e.g., by blocking competitors through multipoint competition or implementing vertical integration), and financial economies (e.g., from efficient internal capital allocations and business restructuring).   Second (value-neutral), firms may diversify in response to incentives.  For example, they may do so to respond to advantages from tax law, to overcome a low performance trend, or to balance out uncertain future cash flows.  Finally (value-reducing), unrelated acquisitions also may be made for managerial reasons (either to diversify managerial employment risk or to increase managerial compensation).  It is important to note that diversification is not always pursued in an effort to enhance the firm’s strategic competitiveness; in fact, diversification may have neutral or even negative effects on firm performance.

4.        How do firms create value when using a related diversification strategy? (pp. 159-163)

Activity sharing and transferring core competencies are used to obtain economies of scope while pursuing a related diversification strategy because cost savings are attributed to entering an additional related business using capabilities and competencies developed in one business that can be transferred to another business without significant additional costs.  In other words, it may be possible for related firms to share production facilities or distribution networks, or a core competency such as marketing expertise might be transferred between related business units.  However, related firms also must take into account the costs related to activity sharing and core competency transfers, namely the cost of coordination and sharing of control created by the interdependencies that result or the savings imputed to economies of scope may not be realized.

Firms using a related diversification strategy may gain market power when successfully using their related constrained or related linked strategy.  Market power exists when a firm is able to sell its products above the existing competitive level or to reduce the costs of its primary and support activities below the competitive level, or both.

Some firms using a related diversification strategy engage in vertical integration to gain market power.  Vertical integration exists when a company produces its own inputs (backward integration) or owns its own source of output distribution (forward integration).

5.        What are the two ways to obtain financial economies when using an unrelated diversification strategy? (pp. 163-166)

Two ways to obtain financial economies when pursuing an unrelated diversification strategy are by establishing an efficient internal capital market and by restructuring the assets of purchased businesses.

Financial economies can be achieved by establishing an efficient internal capital market which enables corporate managers—because they have access to more detailed and more accurate (or more relevant) information—to make better (more value-enhancing) capital allocation decisions relative to those made by the market.  Restructuring focuses exclusively on buying and selling other firms’ assets in the external market.  This usually entails selling off corporate headquarters facilities, laying off corporate staff, selling underperforming divisions to other firms that may be able to enhance the division’s strategic competitiveness, and managing the remaining business units to maximize net cash flow.

6.        What incentives and resources encourage diversification? (pp. 166-172)

Incentives that encourage diversification include antitrust regulation, tax laws, low firm performance, uncertain future cash flows, and opportunities to reduce overall firm risk.  Resources that encourage diversification include both tangible and intangible resources such as plant and equipment (excess productive capacity) and financial resources (free cash flows) for which no attractive (positive) investment opportunities are available as the firm is currently structured.

7.        What motives might encourage managers to overdiversify their firm? (pp. 172-174)

Managers might be encouraged to push a firm towards a more diversified position to reduce the risk of job loss by diversifying employment risk (so long as profitability does not suffer excessively) or to increase their compensation.  Increased levels of diversification are strongly correlated with firm size, and firm size in turn is strongly correlated with managerial compensation because of the increased complexity that results from increases in firm size and diversification level.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Comparison of Diversification Strategies

The use of diversification varies both across and within industries. In some industries, most firms may follow a single- or dominant-product approach. Other industries are characterized by a mix of both single-product and heavily diversified firms. The purpose of this exercise is to learn how the use of diversification varies across firms in an industry, and the implications of such use.

Part One

Working in small teams of four to seven persons, choose an industry to research. You will then select two firms in that industry for further analysis. Many resources can aid in identifying specific firms in an industry for analysis. One option is to visit the Web site of the New York Stock Exchange (http://www.nyse.com), which has an option to screen firms by industry group. A second option is http://www.hoovers.com, which offers similar listings. Identify two public firms based in the United States. (Note that Hoovers includes some private firms, and the NYSE includes some foreign firms. Data for the exercise are often unavailable for foreign or private companies.)

Once a target firm is identified, you will need to collect business segment data for each company. Segment data break down the company’s revenues and net income by major lines of business. These data are reported in the firm’s SEC 10-K filing, and may also be reported in the annual report. Both the annual report and 10-K are usually found on the company’s Website; both the Hoovers and NYSE listings include company homepage information. For the most recent three-year period available, calculate the following:
        Percentage growth in segment sales

        Net profit margin by segment

        Bonus item: compare profitability to industry averages (Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios publishes profit norms by major industry segment.)

Next, based on your reading of the company filings and these statistics, determine whether the firm is best classified as:
        Single product

        Dominant product

        Related diversified

        Unrelated diversified

Part Two

Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation for use in class discussion. Address the following in the presentation:
        Describe the extent and nature of diversification used at each firm.

        Can you provide a motive for the firm's diversification strategy, given the rationales for diversification put forth in the chapter?
        Which firm’s diversification strategy appears to be more effective? Try to justify your answer by explaining why you think one firm’s strategy is more effective than the other.

Exercise 2: Corporate Juggling

What are the implications for managers when their firm shifts from competing in a single product segment to multiple segments? Additionally, how is the manager’s role affected by the similarity or dissimilarity of these segments?

This exercise will be completed in class. The instructor will assign students randomly to two different types of teams: part of the class will be assigned to teams of five to seven persons, and the remainder of the class will be assigned to teams of ten to fourteen persons. Each team will assign one person to serve as a facilitator.

The instructor will give each facilitator a bag of objects. The goal is for each team to juggle as many objects as possible. The team will start with one object, which should be tossed from person to person. When the group is ready, ask the facilitator for a second object. Continue to add objects up to your group’s ability.


—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES


Exercise 1: Comparison of Diversification Strategies

The goals of this exercise are two-fold: first, to understand how diversification strategies differ across firms in an industry, and second, to gain more experience in collecting company information.  In Part One, teams collect business segment data for two firms that are competing in the same industry.  

For an example of the data that is to be collected, a search of pharmaceutical firms yields a number of companies, including Merck and Schering Plough.  Data on revenues and profits from the 10-K reports filed in February of 2007 for each firm are as follows:

                Merck data (in millions)               
                                               
        2006        2005        2004        2006        2005        2004
Segment        Revenues        Revenues        Revenues        Profit        Profit        Profit
                                               
Pharmaceutical        20374.8        20678.8        21591        13649.4        13157.9        13560.3
Vaccines        1705.5        984.2        972.8        892.8        767        881.4
Other        555.7        348.9        409        -8320.8        -6561        -6438.9
                                               
Total        22636        22011.9        22我是神经病.2        6221.4        7363.9        8002.8
                                               
                                               
                                               
                Schering Plough data (in millions)               
                                               
        2006        2005        2004        2006        2005        2004
Segment        Revenues        Revenues        Revenues        Profit        Profit        Profit
                                               
Pharmaceuticals        8561        7564        6417        1394        733        13
Consumer Health        1123        1093        1085        228        235        234
Animal Health        910        851        770        120        120        88
Other                                -259        -591        -503
                                               
Total        10594        9508        8272        1483        497        -168

Both firms draw the vast majority of their revenues from the pharmaceutical segment, although with differing intensity: About ninety percent of revenues come from pharmaceuticals for Merck, while the figure is around eighty percent for Schering Plough.  A review of the product lines for these two firms is also helpful in discussing how closely these two firms compete with one another.

Both firms compete in other drug-related business: Merck primarily in vaccines, and Schering Plough in Consumer Health Products and Animal Health.  A closer look at the SP Consumer division reveals that this includes both prescription and over-the-counter (OTC) products.  Additionally, SP sells many other goods, such as Dr. Scholl's (foot care) and Coppertone (sunscreen).

Trend data and profit patterns also differ for these two competitors.

For a more pronounced comparison, Proctor & Gamble is also considered a competitor in the pharmaceutical industry.  P&G has a much broader portfolio of goods, including beauty products, household goods, as well as the Duracell, Braun, and Gillette product lines.

Drawing on their independent analysis, ask the students to prepare a short PowerPoint summary of their findings.  The findings should describe the nature and extent of diversification used at each firm, and assess which had a more effective approach to diversification.

Typically, there is not enough time to review and discuss PowerPoint presentations for all teams.  As such, it often works well to use this as a homework or other graded assignment.  Then, the instructor can select a subset of teams to make in-class presentations.  


Exercise 2: Corporate Juggling

The corporate juggling exercise is very different from prior activities used in the textbook.  The main differences are (a) that it is physical, and (b) it will require that the instructor invest in a set of props to conduct the exercise.  However, this exercise is often welcomed by students, as it gets them out for their seats for part of the class period.  The exercise also offers a highly visual metaphor that makes the concepts of diversification and complexity far more tangible.

To run the exercise, you will divide the class into two types of groups: small teams (five to seven persons) and large teams (ten to fourteen persons).  You will need to assemble one bag of resources for each team.  For example, with a class enrollment of 40, you might have two large teams, and three to four small teams.  

Part One

Each team gets a bag of items to be juggled.  The items should be lightweight enough so that no one is hurt.  Each bag should contain just one type of object, and the items should vary from team to team.  Sample objects can include ping pong balls, tennis balls, used film canisters (ask at photo processing shops), balled socks, and even crumpled pieces of butcher pad paper.  You should have at least as many objects in the bag as there are team members.

Give the bags to the team facilitators, and allow them to practice for ten minutes.  Then, ask the following questions:
        How did group size affect your process and outcomes?  
        How did the nature of the objects being tossed affect your process and outcomes?  

Part Two
After the discussion of these two questions, trade objects so that each team has a mix of different items.  For example, a small team might have a couple of ping pong balls, one tennis ball, a sock, and a paper ball.  Have the team repeat the juggling process using this diverse set of resources.  Then, ask:
        How did the variability in inputs affect your process and outcomes?  
So far, the discussion has focused on team processes versus diversification.  To sharpen the focus on the chapter, ask students “How are elements of the exercise similar to topics in Chapter 6?”  Mentioning some of the following may help in stimulating further conversation:
        How easy or hard was it to process multiple objects?  How does a CEO manage many different business segments concurrently?
        How important was the dissimilarity between objects in your team’s effectiveness?  How does that relate to a firm’s ability in managing dissimilar business units?
        What strategies did the team use to “create value” (i.e., keep more objects in the air at one time)?  Teams may use very different approaches to maximize their output: e.g., switching facilitators, creating rules for adding more objects into play, building structures and processes to handling more capacity.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        This chapter suggests that there is a curvilinear relationship between diversification and performance. Ask the students how this relationship can be modified so that the negative relationship between performance and diversification is reduced and the downward curve has less slope or begins at a higher level of diversification?
2.        The Fortune 500 firms are very large, and many of them have significant product diversification. Ask the students if they believe these large firms are overdiversified? Do they experience lower performance than they should?
3.        What is the primary reason for overdiversification? Is it industrial policies, such as taxes and antitrust regulation, or do firms overdiversify because managers pursue their own self-interest through increased compensation, and a reduced risk of job loss? Why? Have the students explain.
4.        One rationale for pursuing related diversification is to obtain market power. In the United States, however, too much market power may result in a challenge by the U.S. Justice Department (because it may be perceived as anticompetitive). Ask the students in what situations related diversification might be considered unfair competition?
5.        Tell the students they have two job offers, one from a dominant-business firm and one from an unrelated diversified firm (suppose the beginning salaries are virtually identical). Which offer would they accept and why?
6.        Ask the students if they believe that by the year 2015 large firms will be more or less diversified than they are today. Why? Will the trends regarding diversification be identical in Europe, the United States, and Japan? Explain.
7.        Will the Internet make it easier for firms to diversify? Why or why not?


Ethics Questions

1.        Propose the following statement: “Those managing an unrelated diversified firm face far more difficult ethical challenges than do those managing a dominant-business firm.” Based on their reading of this chapter, do the students this statement true or false? Why?
2.        Is it ethical for managers to diversify a firm rather than return excess earnings to shareholders? Have the students provide their reasoning in support of their answers.
3.        What unethical practices might occur when a firm restructures? Explain.
4.        Ask the students if they believe that ethical managers are unaffected by the managerial motives to diversify discussed in this chapter? If so, why? In addition, do they believe that ethical managers should help their peers learn how to avoid making diversification decisions on the basis of the managerial motives to diversify? Why or why not?

Internet Exercise
               
Search the Websites of CMGI (http://www.cmgi.com), Cisco Systems (http://www.cisco.com), EMC (http://www.emc.com), and ICG (http://www.internetcapital.com). Compare their business models, and explain the type of strategy and level of diversification that describes each one. In the extremely fast-cycle Internet economy, these companies run exceptional risks. Track the success of each company’s stocks over the past six months. Can you pinpoint changes within the industry that have affected the rise and fall of stock prices? What advancements in information technology and electronic commerce have had the greatest effect on the continuing strategies of these companies? Does this type of collaboration amongst Internet companies foster growth and value within the industry?

*e-project: In January 2000, Hyundai (http://www.hyundai.com), Samsung (http://www.samsung.com), and LG Group (http://www.lg.co.kr) were fined for illegally allocating funds to their failing subsidiaries. Using the information provided on the company Websites, choose one of these companies, and provide alternative strategies for it to better compete in international markets.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:57:27 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 7
Acquisition and Restructuring Strategies

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Explain the popularity of acquisition strategies in firms competing in the global economy.
2.        Discuss reasons why firms use an acquisition strategy to achieve strategic competitiveness.
3.        Describe seven problems that work against developing a competitive advantage using an acquisition strategy.
4.        Name and describe attributes of effective acquisitions.
5.        Define the restructuring strategy and distinguish among its common forms.
6.        Explain the short- and long-term outcomes of the different types of restructuring strategies.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   The Increased Trend Toward Cross-Border Acquisitions
THE POPULARITY OF MERGER AND ACQUISITION STRATEGIES  
        Mergers, Acquisitions, and Takeovers: What Are the Differences?  
REASONS FOR ACQUISITIONS  
        Increased Market Power
Strategic Focus  Oracle Makes a Series of Horizontal Acquisitions While CVS Makes a Vertical Acquisition
        Overcoming Entry Barriers
        Cost of New Product Development and Increased Speed to Market
        Lower Risk Compared to Developing New Products
        Increased Diversification
        Reshaping the Firm’s Competitive Scope
        Learning and Developing New Capabilities
PROBLEMS IN ACHIEVING ACQUISITION SUCCESS  
        Integration Difficulties
        Inadequate Evaluation of Target
        Large or Extraordinary Debt
        Inability to Achieve Synergy
        Too Much Diversification
        Managers Overly Focused on Acquisitions
        Too Large
EFFECTIVE ACQUISITIONS  
RESTRUCTURING
Strategic Focus  DaimlerChrysler Is Now Daimler AG: The Failed Merger with Chrysler Corporation
       Downsizing  
        Downscoping  
        Leveraged Buyouts  
        Restructuring Outcomes  
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  



LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction:  With continued merger and acquisition activity, this chapter is very important. The chapter’s material is summarized in Figure 7.1, which can be used to help students mentally organize what they learn in the chapter about mergers and acquisitions.



OPENING CASE
The Increased Trend toward Cross-Border Acquisitions

Cross-border business is becoming more prevalent each year.  The number of cross-border acquisitions is one indicator of the intensity of global markets.  Foreign direct investments increased 76.7 percent from 2005 to 2006.  Both the United States and the United Kingdom have become beneficiaries from having open borders and markets that allow foreign capital to purchase domestic assets and from the importation of foreign managerial talent associated with managing acquired assets. However, concerns have surfaced about whether or not foreign acquisitions will make it much harder for domestic employees to become top-level managers.  Examples of foreign takeovers include renowned professional soccer team, Manchester United, which was purchased by a U.S. sports tycoon.

Students should note that the U.S. and UK are not the only targets of foreign investors.  Other European firms, such as those from Spain, have been purchasing a significant number of foreign firms.  Spanish firms gained experience through an international push in Latin America decades ago. Particularly Telefonica, a large telecommunication firm, purchased a number of telecommunication companies that had been privatized in Latin American. This experience has now been transferred across Europe not only in the merging of telecommunication firms and banks, but also in merging train and airport management services, and infrastructure management services. Recently Abertis sought to takeover Autostrade SpA, providing the Spanish firm control over the train routes in Italy and other countries in Europe.  Japanese firms have also become active in large overseas takeovers after being somewhat inactive for a number of years.

Many firms, not only from developed countries, but also from emerging economies, are increasingly becoming involved in merger and acquisition activities.  In the latter half of the twentieth century, acquisition became a prominent strategy used by major corporations to achieve growth and meet competitive challenges. Even smaller and more focused firms began employing acquisition strategies to grow and to enter new markets.  However, acquisition strategies are not without problems, as some acquisitions fail.

Interestingly, much of the acquisition activity by European and Japanese firms have been driven by currency valuations, especially relative to the United States, as the dollar is much lower in value than either the euro or the Japanese yen currencies compared to the 1990s.  Emerging economies, such as India, have become quite aggressive in overseas transactions as well. India’s Tata Group won the bid for British steel maker Corus Group PLC for $13.2 billion.

In summary, the number of cross-border deals continues to increase, leading many emerging-country firms to pursue acquisitions in developed countries, especially in the United States, the United Kingdom, and elsewhere in Europe. These developed economies have more open policies that allow emerging-country economies to make inroads, especially in mature globalizing businesses such as steel and aluminum, or basic services including managing airports and railroads.

American firms have been the most active acquirers of companies outside their domestic market, but in the global economy, companies from all over the world are choosing this strategic option with increasing frequency (despite the fact that such acquisitions can be difficult to negotiate and later to operate because of the differences in foreign cultures). Still other firms diversify primarily via acquisition.  For example, Telefonica of Spain has acquired a number of recently privatized Latin American telecommunication companies to compete against cable firms entering the local phone service business. Similarly, Autotrade of Italy has become a targeted acquisition of Abertis of Spain.  Autotrade oversees Italy’s toll road system.  But despite sound logic for acquisition, integration and synergy formation can prove very elusive. Make a short list of the most likely challenges to acquisition.  What steps can firms take to avoid these?



1        Explain the popularity of acquisition strategies in firms competing in the global economy.       

In the latter half of the 20th century, acquisition became a prominent strategy used by major corporations to achieve growth and meet competitive challenges.  Even smaller and more focused firms began employing acquisition strategies to grow and to enter new markets.  However, acquisition strategies are not without problems; a number of acquisitions fail.  Thus, the chapter focuses on how acquisitions can be used to produce value for the firm’s stakeholders.

THE POPULARITY OF MERGER AND ACQUISITION STRATEGIES

Acquisitions have been a popular strategy among U.S. firms for many years. Some believe that this strategy played a central role in the restructuring of U.S. businesses during the 1980s, 1990s, and into the twenty-first  century.

Increasingly, acquisition strategies are becoming more popular with firms in other nations (e.g., those of Europe). In fact, about 40 to 45 percent of the acquisitions in recent years have been made across country borders (i.e., where a firm headquartered in one country acquires a firm headquartered in another country).

Merger and acquisition trends:
•        There were five waves of mergers and acquisitions in the 20th century, the last two in the 1980s and 1990s.  
•        There were 55,000 acquisitions valued at $1.3 trillion in the 1980s.
•        Acquisitions in the 1990s exceeded $11 trillion in value.
•        World economies (especially the U.S. economy) slowed in the new millennium, reducing M&As completed.
•        Mergers and acquisitions peaked in 2000 at about $3.4 billion and fell to about $1.75 billion in 2001.
•        The global volume of announced acquisition agreements was up 41 percent from 2003 to $1.95 trillion for 2004, the highest level since 2000, and the pace in 2005 was significantly above the level of 2004.
•        Although the frequency of acquisitions has slowed, their number remains high.  
•        In the latest acquisition boom between 1998 and 2000, acquiring firm shareholders experienced significant losses relative to the losses in all of the 1980s.

A firm may make an acquisition to do the following:
•        increase its market power because of a competitive threat
•        enter a new market because of an available opportunity
•        spread the risk due to the uncertain environment
•        shift its core business into more favorable markets (e.g., because of industry or regulatory changes)

Evidence suggests that at least for acquiring firms, acquisition strategies may not result in desirable outcomes. Studies have found that shareholders of acquired firms often earn above-average returns from an acquisition, while shareholders of acquiring firms are less likely to do so.  In approximately two-thirds of all acquisitions, the acquiring firm’s stock price falls immediately after the intended transaction is announced, indicating investors’ skepticism about the likelihood that the acquirer will be able to achieve the synergies required to justify the premium.


Mergers, Acquisitions, and Takeovers: What Are the Differences?

Before starting the discussion of the reasons for acquisitions, problems related to acquisitions, and long-term performance, three terms should be defined because they will be used throughout this chapter and Chapter 10.

A merger is a transaction where two firms agree to integrate their operations on a relatively co-equal basis because they have resources and capabilities that together may create a stronger competitive advantage.

An acquisition is a transaction where one firm buys a controlling or 100 percent interest in another firm with the intent of making the acquired firm a subsidiary business within its portfolio.

While most mergers represent friendly agreements between the two firms, acquisitions sometimes can be classified as unfriendly takeovers.  A takeover is an acquisition—and normally not a merger—where the target firm did not solicit the bid of the acquiring firm and often resists the acquisition (a hostile takeover).


2        Discuss reasons why firms use an acquisition strategy to achieve strategic competitiveness.       

REASONS FOR ACQUISITIONS

Teaching Note: You may find it helpful to refer students to Figure 7.1, which lists the reasons for acquisitions (discussed more fully in the sections that follow).



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Oracle Makes a Series of Horizontal Acquisitions While CVS Makes a Vertical Acquisition

Oracle, SAP, and Microsoft compete in the database management software arena.  SAP holds approximately 22 percent of the market share while Oracle and Microsoft each hold 10 and 5 percent respectively.  Competitive intensity between these three players is becoming more intense as they target customer firms that have not integrated their firms’ business units using databases.  Once a software provider is selected by a targeted firm, it becomes relatively costly for that firm to switch to another platform.  Because of these significant switching costs, Oracle is utilizing a horizontal acquisition strategy in order to pursue growth.  The logic applied is that each acquisition has an established customer-base that will likely be retained because of the high switching costs incurred to switch platforms.  In addition, the products offered by the acquired firm’s sales force will be expanded to include Oracle’s catalog, and Oracle’s sales staff will have an expanded catalog to offer current Oracle customers.     

Oracle’s acquisition strategy began when Oracle’s CEO, Larry Ellison, decided that the corporate-software industry had matured and needed consolidation.  A series of acquisitions led to Oracle’s 50 percent revenue increase to $17.7 billion in the fiscal year ending May 2007.  The acquisitions also enabled Oracle to develop a refined set of industry focuses with applications in retail, financial services, utilities, communications, and government service.

In addition, Oracle acquired three organizations specializing in retail software.  These acquisitions allowed Oracle to win thirty new retail customers in 2006 and 2007, including Wal-Mart, Nordstrom, and Perry Ellis International.  Perry Ellis International expects to save more than $20 million a year in improved just-in-time inventory controls, improved merchandising efficiency, and software that helps to adapts its pricing by store and region efficiently through the application of the newly integrated Oracle software applications.

Comparatively, SAP is ahead in specific industry applications. It has applications in twenty-six industries compared to Oracle’s five. Also, beyond large corporations in specific industries, both companies are pursuing growth in small- to medium-sized enterprises.

In a vertical merger, CVS Corporation, a drugstore chain, purchased pharmacy-benefits manager (PBM) Caremark RX, Inc., for $21 billion in 2007. The combined company will have $75 billion in annual sales, far higher than any other competitor, including Walgreens and comparable PBMs such as Medco Health. In this vertical acquisition CVS is purchasing a powerful customer that negotiates on behalf of large companies and their health insurance providers. One of the incentives for this vertical merger is that PBMs have put pressure on drugstores by negotiating prices on behalf of their clients and forcing firms into mail-order plans for prescription drugs. The merger will help CVS obtain large deals with big companies by offering significant discounts to employees for CVS private-label products. When Wal-Mart began charging much lower prices for generic drugs in many of their stores, drugstores and PBM firms felt additional pressure for mergers. Walgreens, a large competitor of CVS, also plans to increase its PMB business, but it has not signaled whether it will use an acquisition process.

Students should be able to differentiate between horizontal and vertical acquisitions and the reasons for each. The above examples of both vertical and horizontal acquisitions are well explained. You may want to defer discussion of this article until you visit the later one on DaimlerChrysler. The above acquisitions have achieved operational and financial goals. The DaimlerChrysler merger did not achieve intended goals and can be considered a failure.  Perceived synergies never came to fruition, and differences in markets were too great to overcome.  How did Oracle, SAP, and CVS overcome these common snags?   




Increased Market Power

As discussed in Chapter 6, a primary reason for acquisitions is that they enable firms to gain greater market power.  Acquisitions to meet a market power objective generally involve buying a supplier, a competitor, a distributor, or a business in a highly related industry.

While a number of firms may feel that they have an internal core competence, they may be unable to exploit their resources and capabilities because of a lack of size.


Horizontal Acquisitions

When a competitor in the same industry is acquired, a firm has engaged in a horizontal acquisition.  Horizontal acquisitions increase a firm’s market power by exploiting cost-based and revenue-based synergies.

Research suggests that horizontal acquisitions of firms with similar characteristics result in higher performance than when firms with dissimilar characteristics combine their operations. Examples of important similar characteristics include strategy, managerial styles, and resource allocation patterns.

Horizontal acquisitions are often most effective when the acquiring firm integrates the acquired firm’s assets with its assets, but only after evaluating and divesting excess capacity and assets that do not complement the newly combined firm’s core competencies.


Vertical Acquisitions

A vertical acquisition has occurred when a firm acquires a supplier or distributor, which is positioned either backward or forward in the firm’s cost/activity/value chain.


Related Acquisitions

When a target firm in a highly related industry is acquired, the firm has made a related acquisition.


Teaching Note:  Remind students that, as discussed in Chapter 6, during the 1960s and 1970s, both horizontal and related acquisitions were discouraged as they were regularly challenged by agencies of the federal government.  The ability of firms to make horizontal acquisitions increased in the 1980s because of changes in the interpretation and enforcement of anti-trust laws and regulations by the courts and the Justice Department.


It is important to note that acquisitions intended to increase market power are subject to regulatory review, as well as to analysis by financial markets.


Overcoming Entry Barriers

As discussed in Chapter 2, barriers to entry represent factors associated with the market and/or firms operating in the market that make it more expensive and difficult for new firms to enter the market.

It may be difficult to enter a market dominated by large, established competitors. As noted in Chapter 2, such markets may require:
•        investments in large-scale manufacturing facilities that enable the firm to achieve economies of scale so that it can offer competitive prices
•        significant expenditures in advertising and promotion to overcome brand loyalty toward existing products
•        establishing or breaking into existing distribution channels so that goods are convenient to customers

When barriers to entry are present, the firm’s best choice may be to acquire a firm already having a presence in the industry or market.  In fact, the higher the barriers to entry into an attractive market or industry, the more likely it is that firms interested in entering will follow acquisition strategies.

Entry barriers firms face when trying to enter international markets are often great.  Commonly, acquisitions are used to overcome entry barriers in international markets.  It is important to compete successfully in these markets since global markets are growing faster than domestic markets.  Also, five of the emerging markets (China, India, Brazil, Mexico, and Indonesia) are among the fastest growing economies in the world.


Cross-Border Acquisitions

Acquisitions between companies with headquarters in different countries are called cross-border acquisitions.


Teaching Note: Chapter 9 examines cross-border alliances and the justification for their use. Cross-border acquisitions and cross-border alliances are alternatives firms consider while pursuing strategic competitiveness. Compared to a cross-border alliance, a firm has more control over its international operations through a cross-border acquisition.


Historically, U.S. firms have been the most active acquirers of companies outside their domestic market. However, in the global economy, companies throughout the world are choosing this strategic option with increasing frequency. In recent years, cross-border acquisitions have represented as much as 40 percent of the total number of acquisitions made annually.

Some trends in cross-border acquisitions:
•        Because of relaxed regulations, the amount of cross-border activity among nations within the European community also continues to increase.
•        Many large European corporations have approached the limits of growth within their domestic markets and thus seek growth in other markets.
•        Many European and U.S. firms participated in cross-border acquisitions across Asian countries that experienced a financial crisis due to significant currency devaluations in 1997, and this facilitated the survival and restructuring of many large Asian companies such that these economies recovered more quickly than they would have otherwise.

Acquisitions represent a viable strategy for firms that wish to enter international markets because these:
•        may be the fastest way to enter new markets
•        provide more control over foreign operations than do strategic alliances with a foreign partner



Cost of New Product Development and Increased Speed to Market

Acquisitions also may represent an attractive alternative to developing new products internally because of the cost and time required to start a new venture and achieve a positive return.

Also of concern to firms’ managers is achieving adequate returns from the capital invested to develop and commercialize new products—an estimated 88 percent of innovations fail to achieve adequate returns. Perhaps contributing to these less-than-desirable rates of return is the successful imitation of approximately 60 percent of innovations within four years after the patents are obtained. Because of outcomes such as these, managers often perceive internal product development as a high-risk activity.

Internal development of new products is often perceived by managers to be costly and to represent high risk investments of firm resources.  While sometimes costly, it may be in the firm’s best interest to acquire an existing business because of the following:
•        The acquired firm has established sales volume and customer base, thus yielding predictable returns.
•        The acquiring firm gains immediate market access.

In addition to representing attractive prices, large pharmaceutical firms have used acquisitions to supplement products in the pipeline with projects from undervalued biotechnology companies; thus, this is one way to appropriate new products.


Lower Risk Compared to Developing New Products

As discussed earlier, internal product development processes can be risky, in that entering a market and earning an acceptable return on investment requires significant resources and time.  All the same, acquisition outcomes can be estimated easily and accurately (as compared to the outcomes of an internal product development process), causing managers to view acquisitions as carrying lowering risk.


Teaching Note: Not long ago, P&G acquired premium dog and cat food manufacturer Iams Co. to support the launch of its pet products into supermarket chains and mass merchandisers such as Wal-Mart.  Having assessed the potential of Iams in the marketplace, P&G managers were confident they would achieve positive results through their strategy; thus, they may have considered entry into the premium pet-food market through acquisition to be less risky than entering the market via internal product development.


Because acquisitions recently have become such a common means of avoiding risky internal ventures, they could become a substitute for innovation, which has a serious downside (e.g., the decline of Cisco systems).


Teaching Note: Although they often enable firms to offset the risk of internal ventures and of developing new products, acquisitions are not without risks of their own. Acquisition-related risks will be discussed later in this chapter.


Increased Diversification

It should be easier for firms to develop new products and/or new ventures within their current markets because of market-related knowledge, but firms that desire to enter new markets may find that current product-market knowledge and skills are not transferable to the new target market.

Acquisitions also may have gained in popularity as a related or horizontal diversification strategy (enabling rapid moves into related markets, or to expand market power) and as an unrelated diversification strategy because of the changes in regulatory interpretation and enforcement of anti-trust laws discussed in Chapter 6.



United Technologies: A Mini-Case

Both related diversification and unrelated diversification can be implemented through acquisitions.  For example, United Technologies has used acquisitions to build a conglomerate firm by assembling a portfolio of stable and noncyclical businesses (including Otis Elevator Co. and Carrier air conditioning) since the mid-1970s in order to reduce its dependence on the volatile aerospace industry. It main businesses have been Pratt & Whitney jet engines, Sikorsky helicopters, and aerospace-parts maker Hamilton Sundstrand. It has also acquired a hydrogen-fuel-cell business. However, perceiving an opportunity in security due to problems at airports and because security has become a top concern for both governments and corporations, United Technologies acquired Chubb PLC, a British electronic-security company, for $1 billion. With its acquisition of Kidde PLC, in the same general business, in 2004 for $2.84 billion, UTC will have obtained 10 percent of the world’s market share in electronic security. All businesses UTC purchases are involved in manufacturing industrial and commercial products.  However, many involve relatively low technology (e.g., elevators, air conditioners and security systems).



Using acquisitions to diversify a firm is the quickest and often the easiest way to change its portfolio of businesses—e.g., Goodrich evolved from a tire maker to a top-tier aerospace supplier through 40+ acquisitions.

Firms must be careful when making acquisitions to diversify their product lines because horizontal and related acquisitions tend to contribute more to strategic competitiveness, and thus they are more successful than diversifying acquisitions.


Teaching Note:  Remember, related diversification seeks lower costs through economies of scope, synergy, and resource sharing, while unrelated diversification hopes to realize financial economies and better internal resource allocation among diverse businesses.


Reshaping the Firm’s Competitive Scope

To reduce intense rivalry’s negative effect on financial performance, a firm may use acquisitions as a way to restrict its dependence on a single or a few products or markets.


Teaching Note: The following are examples of auto manufacturers that have gone through acquisitions to reduce dependence of too few businesses:
•        General Motors acquired Electronic Data Systems and Hughes Aerospace to lessen its dependence on the domestic automobile market (where its market share had declined from approximately 50 percent in 1980 to less than 30 percent 10 years later) and escape intense competition with Japanese automakers. However, GM later sold these businesses to focus its efforts on its core automobile business.
•        DaimlerChrysler considered expanding into financial and computer services, aftermarket sales, and electronics and satellite systems to pursue more desirable operating margins in areas that are more attractive than are alliances or acquisitions in car manufacturing.
•        Ford management considered making the company the world’s leading consumer services business that specializes in the automotive sector by tapping all sectors in after-sales markets, including repairs, replacement parts, and product servicing.  To evaluate its success in reshaping the firm’s competitive scope through diversification, Ford would measure its performance against world-class consumer firms, regardless of industry (i.e., rather than using the traditional yardsticks of rival automakers).


Learning and Developing New Capabilities

Some acquisitions are made to gain capabilities that the firm does not possess—e.g., acquisitions used to acquire a special technological capability.  Acquiring other firms with skills and capabilities that differ from its own helps the acquiring firm to learn new knowledge and remain agile, but firms are better able to learn these capabilities if they share some similar properties with the firm’s current capabilities.

One of Cisco System’s primary goals in its early acquisitions was to gain access to capabilities that it did not currently possess through its commitment to learning.  The firm developed an intricate process to quickly integrate the acquired firms and their capabilities (knowledge) after an acquisition is completed.


Figure Note:  Figure 7.1 presents the reasons for making acquisitions and the problems encountered. A comment that problems will be discussed in ensuing sections is appropriate.


FIGURE 7.1
Reasons for Acquisitions and Problems in Achieving Success

Seven reasons for acquisitions are presented in the left-hand bubble-column while seven problems in achieving acquisition success are presented in the right hand bubble-column of Figure 7.1.

To summarize, the seven reasons that firms (and managers) implement acquisition strategies are to:
•        increase market power
•        overcome entry barriers
•        reduce the cost of new product development and increase speed to market
•        lower risk compared to developing new products
•        increase diversification
•        avoid excessive competition
•        learn and develop new capabilities

The seven reasons for poor performance of acquisitions or problems faced in attempts to achieve success are:
•        integration difficulties
•        inadequate evaluation of target
•        large or extraordinary debt
•        inability to achieve synergy
•        too much diversification
•        managers overly focused on acquisitions
•        too large

Note:  Problems encountered as firms try to successfully achieve their objectives and create value from acquisitions will be discussed in detail in the next sections of this chapter.



3        Describe seven problems that work against developing a competitive advantage using an acquisition strategy.       

PROBLEMS IN ACHIEVING ACQUISITION SUCCESS

Research suggests that perhaps 20 percent of all mergers and acquisitions are successful, approximately 60 percent produce disappointing results, and the last 20 percent are clear failures. Successful acquisitions generally involve a well-conceived strategy in selecting the target, the avoidance of paying too high a premium, and employing an effective integration process.

A number of problems accompany an acquisition strategy. Acquisition-related problems shown in Figure 7.1 and that will be discussed in this section are:
•        difficulties in integrating the two firms after the acquisition is completed
•        paying too much for the target (acquired) firm or inappropriately or inadequately evaluating the target
•        the cost of financing the acquisition, related to large or extraordinary debt
•        overestimating the potential for gains from capabilities and/or synergy
•        excessive or too much diversification
•        management being preoccupied or overly focused on acquisitions
•        the combined firm becoming too large


Integration Difficulties

Integration problems or difficulties that firms often encounter can take many forms.  Among them are:
•        melding disparate corporate cultures
•        linking different financial and control systems
•        building effective working relationships (especially when management styles differ)
•        problems related to differing status of acquired and acquiring firms’ executives

The importance of integration success should not be underestimated. Without successful integration, a firm achieves financial diversification, but little else.  Consider these points.
•        The post-acquisition integration phase may be the single most important determinant of shareholder value creation (or value destruction) in mergers and acquisitions.
•        Managers should understand the large number of activities associated with integration processes.


Teaching Note: Several years ago, Intel acquired Digital Equipment’s semiconductors division. On the day Intel began to integrate the acquired division into its operations, six thousand deliverables were to be completed by hundreds of employees working in dozens of countries.


It is important to maintain the human capital of the target firm after the acquisition to preserve the organization’s knowledge. Turnover of key personnel from the acquired firm can have a negative effect on the performance of the merged firm.


Teaching Note: Following are some example of firms and the steps they took to preserve human capital through the acquisition process.
•        When AllliedSignal acquired Honeywell, the firm set an aggressive timetable to merge their operations into a $24 billion industrial powerhouse in six months, despite the great diversification involved.  This required a team to develop and implement the integration.
•        Rapid integration is one of the guidelines that DaimlerChrysler uses for successful firm integration in a global merger or acquisition.  Managers are encouraged to deal with unpopular issues immediately and honestly so employees will be able to anticipate the effects the integration is likely to have on them.
•        Cisco Systems is quick to integrate acquisitions with its existing operations. Focusing on small companies with products and services related closely to its own, some believe that the day after Cisco acquires a firm, employees in that company feel as though they have been working for Cisco for decades.


Inadequate Evaluation of Target

Due diligence is a process through which a firm evaluates a target firm for acquisition. In an effective due-diligence process hundreds of items are examined in areas as diverse as the financing for the intended transaction, differences in cultures between the acquiring and target firm, tax consequences of the transaction, and actions that would be necessary to successfully meld the two workforces.

Due diligence is commonly performed by investment bankers, accountants, lawyers, and management consultants specializing in that activity, although firms actively pursuing acquisitions may form their own internal due-diligence team.


Teaching Note:  For the reasons below, firms often pay too much for acquired businesses:
•        Acquiring firms may not thoroughly analyze the target firm, failing to develop adequate knowledge of its true market value.  
•        Managers’ overconfidence may cloud the judgment of acquiring firm managers.
•        Shareholders (owners) of the target must be enticed to sell their stock, and this usually requires that acquiring firms pay a premium over the current stock price.
•        In some instances, two or more firms may be interested in acquiring the same target firm.  When this happens, a bidding war often ensues and extraordinarily high premiums may be required to purchase the target firm.

Teaching Note: Some acquirers over-paying for target firms include the following:
•        British retailer Marks & Spencer paid $750 million for Brooks Brothers of the United States, but the acquisition was still unsuccessful after more than ten years of integration.
•        Sony paid a 28 percent premium for CBS Records and a 60 percent premium for Columbia Pictures.
•        Bridgestone paid a 60 percent premium for Firestone, and its winning bid was 38 percent higher than a competing bid from Pirelli.
•        National City Corporation agreed to acquire First of America for a price that was 3.8 times book value and 22.9 times First’s estimated 1998 earnings—National City’s stock fell 5.9 percent.
•        First Union Corp. paid 5.3 times book value when it acquired CoreStates Financial Corp.
•        Federated paid $10 per share for Broadway Department Stores when Broadway’s stock was selling for $2 per share, a 400 percent premium in a transaction valued at $1.6 billion to acquire Broadway’s prime West Coast real estate locations.

Teaching Note: An example of effective due diligence was DaimlerChrysler’s 1999 decision not to acquire Nissan Motor Company. DaimlerChrysler wanted Nissan to expand its access to global auto markets, especially those in Southeast Asia.  But the target had $22 billion in debt, which caused concern among DaimlerChrysler executives and derailed the acquisition.


Large or Extraordinary Debt

In addition to overpaying for targets, many acquirers must finance acquisitions with relatively high-cost debt.

In the 1980s, investment bankers developed a new financing instrument for acquisitions, the junk bond.  Junk bonds represented a new financing option in which risky investments were financed with money (debt) that provided a high return to lenders (bond holders).  Junk bonds offer relatively high rates, some as high as 18 to 20 percent during the 1980s.


Teaching Note: Junk bonds are considered by many to be a new financing option, not because they are new, but because they represented the first instances in which non-investment grade (below a B rating) securities were used to raise funds by companies whose securities were normally rated as investment grade.

Teaching Note: A number of well-known and well-respected finance scholars argue in favor of firms utilizing significantly high levels of leverage because debt discourages managers from misusing funds (for example, by making bad investments) because debt (and interest) repayment eliminates the firm’s “free cash flow.”


Inability to Achieve Synergy

Acquiring firms also face the challenge of correctly identifying and valuing any synergies that are expected to be realized from the acquisition. This is a significant problem because, to justify the premium price paid for target firms, managers may overestimate both the benefits and value of synergy.

To achieve a sustained competitive advantage through an acquisition, acquirers must realize private synergies and core competencies that cannot easily be imitated by competitors.  Private synergy refers to the benefit from merging the acquiring and target firms that is due to the unique assets that are complementary between the two firms and not available to other potential bidders for that target firm.


Teaching Note: As pointed out earlier, the average return to acquiring firm shareholders is near zero, and many of these lead to negative returns for acquiring firm shareholders.


Anheuser-Busch: A Case Example

Anheuser-Busch acquired Eagle Snacks and Campbell Taggart with the stated purpose of achieving synergies.  Anheuser-Busch believed that this distribution-related synergy between snack foods, bakery products, and beer that could be leveraged while its expertise in the use of yeast in the brewing process could be applied to Campbell Taggart’s bread-making process.

However, distribution synergies were not available as beer, bread, and snack foods were ordered by different store product managers.  Frito-Lay responded with new products and improved distribution to offset the threat of Eagle Snacks.  In fact, distribution became more complex and more expensive.

In addition, competition in the beer industry increased and Anheuser-Busch management felt that Eagle and Campbell Taggart diverted their attention away from their core business, resulting in delays in new product introduction and a loss of momentum.

As a result, Anheuser-Busch sold Eagle Snacks and spun off the Campbell Taggart unit so that it could focus its efforts on expanding its presence in international beer markets where synergies are more likely to be available with its domestic beer market.

These general problems may be encountered in many acquisitions.  However, there are many other causes of the poor long-term performance of acquisitions.  In fact, some of the reasons for poor long-term performance also may lead to the problems already discussed.



Firms experience transaction costs when using acquisition strategies to create synergy. Direct costs include legal fees and charges from investment bankers. Managerial time to evaluate target firms and then to complete negotiations and the loss of key managers and employees post-acquisition are indirect costs.  


Too Much Diversification

In general, firms using related diversification strategies outperform those using unrelated diversification strategies. However, conglomerates (i.e., those pursuing unrelated diversification) can also be successful.

In the drive to diversify the firm’s product line, many firms overdiversified during the 60s, 70s, and 80s.

As detailed in Chapter 6, information processing requirements are greater for a related diversified firm (compared to its unrelated counterparts) due to its need to effectively and efficiently coordinate the linkages and interdependencies upon which value-creation through activity sharing depends.

In addition to increased information processing requirements and managerial expertise, overdiversification may result in poor performance when top-level managers emphasize financial controls over strategic controls.  


Teaching Note:  Controls will be discussed in more detail in Chapters 11 and 12.


Financial controls may be emphasized when managers feel that they do not have sufficient expertise or knowledge of the firm’s various businesses.  When this happens, top-level managers are not able to adequately evaluate the strategies and strategic actions that are taken by division or business unit managers.  As a result,
•        When they lack a rich understanding of business units’ strategies and objectives, top-level managers tend to emphasize the financial outcomes of strategic actions rather than the appropriateness of the strategy itself.
•        This forces division or business unit managers to become short-term performance-oriented.
•        The problem is more serious when manager compensation is tied to short-term financial outcomes.
•        Long-term, risky investments (such as R&D) may be reduced to boost short-term returns.
•        In the final analysis, long-term performance deteriorates.


Teaching Note:  The experiences of many firms indicate that overdiversification may lead to ineffective management, primarily because of the increased size and complexity of the firm.  As a result of ineffective management, the firm and some of its businesses may be unable to maintain their strategic competitiveness.  This results in poor performance.


As noted earlier in this chapter, acquisitions can have a number of negative effects. They may result in greater levels of diversification (in products, markets, and/or industries), absorb extensive managerial time and energy, require large amounts of debt, and create larger organizations.  As a result, acquisitions can have a negative impact on investments in research and development and thus on innovation.

Reducing the emphasis on R&D and on innovation may result in the firm losing its strategic competitiveness unless the firm operates in mature industries in which innovation is not required to maintain competitiveness.


Managers Overly Focused on Acquisitions

If firms follow active acquisition strategies, the acquisition process generally requires significant amounts of managerial time and energy.

For the acquiring firm this takes the form of:
•        searching for viable candidates
•        completing effective due diligence
•        preparing for negotiations with the target firm
•        managing the integration process post-acquisition

The desire to merge is like an addiction in many companies: Doing deals is much more fun and interesting than fixing fundamental business problems.

Due diligence and negotiating with the target often include numerous meetings between representatives of the acquirer and target, as well as meetings with investment bankers, analysts, attorneys, and in some cases, regulatory agencies.  As a result, top-level managers of acquiring firms often pay little attention to long-term, strategic matters because of time (and energy) constraints.


Too Large

Firms can reach economies of scale by growing.  But, after a certain size is achieved, size can become a disadvantage as firms reach a point where they suffer from what is called “diseconomies of scale.”  This implies that problems related to excess growth may be similar to those that accompany overdiversification.

Other actions taken to enable more effective management of increased firm size include increasing or establishing bureaucratic controls, represented by formalized supervisory and behavioral controls such as rules and policies that are designed to ensure consistency across different units’ decisions and actions.

On the surface (or in theory), bureaucratic controls may be beneficial to large organizations.  However, they may produce overly-rigid and standardized behavior among managers.  The reduced managerial (and firm) flexibility can result in reduced levels of innovation and less creative (and less timely) decision making.


4        Name and describe attributes of effective acquisitions.       

EFFECTIVE ACQUISITIONS

Research has identified attributes that appear to be associated consistently with successful acquisitions:
•        when a firm’s assets are complementary (highly related) with the acquired firm’s assets and create synergy and, in turn, unique capabilities, core competencies, and strategic competitiveness
•        when targets were selected and “groomed” through earlier working relationships (e.g., strategic alliances)
•        when the acquisition is friendly, thereby reducing animosity and turnover of key employees
•        when the acquiring firm has conducted due diligence
•        when management is focused on research and development
•        when acquiring and target firms are flexible/adaptable (e.g., from executive experience with acquisitions)
•        when integration quickly produces the desired synergy in the newly created firm, allowing the acquiring firm to keep valuable human resources in the acquired firm from leaving


Table Note: The attributes or characteristics of successful acquisitions and their results are summarized in Table 7.1.


TABLE 7.1
Attributes of Successful Acquisitions

Successful acquisitions generally are characterized by the following attributes and results:
•        target and acquirer having complimentary assets and/or resources which results in a high probability of achieving synergy and gaining competitive advantage
•        making friendly acquisitions to facilitate integration speed and effectiveness and reducing any acquisition premium
•        target selection and negotiation processes which result in the selection of targets having resources and assets that are complimentary to the acquiring firm’s core business, thus avoiding overpayment
•        maintaining financial slack to make acquisition financing less costly and easier to obtain
•        maintaining  a low to moderate debt position which lowers costs and avoids the trade-offs of high debt and lowers the risk of failure
•        possessing flexibility and skills to adapt to change to facilitate integration speed and achievement of synergy
•        continuing to invest in R&D and emphasizing innovation to maintain competitive advantage

Note: The table also lists seven “results” of successful acquisitions.



Teaching Note:  One way to teach the finer points of the M&A process is to see its parallels with marriage and courtship.  Though the source is rather dated now, Jemison & Sitkin (1986, Academy of Management Review) offered an interesting analysis based on this framework.  Their points are too extensive to comment on here, but reference to their writings is helpful.


5        Define the restructuring strategy and distinguish among its common forms.       

RESTRUCTURING

Restructuring refers to changes in the composition of a firm’s set of businesses and/or financial structure.

From the 1970s into the 2000s, divesting businesses from company portfolios and downsizing accounted for a large percentage of firms’ restructuring strategies. Restructuring is a global phenomenon.

During this period, restructuring can take several forms:
•        downsizing, primarily to reduce costs by laying off employees or eliminating operating units
•        downscoping to reduce the level of firm unrelatedness
•        leveraged buyouts to restructure the firm’s assets by taking it private

Sometimes firms use a restructuring strategy because of changes in their external and internal environments. For example, opportunities sometimes surface in the external environment that are particularly attractive to the diversified firm in light of its core competencies. In such cases, restructuring may be appropriate.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
DaimlerChrysler Is Now Daimler AG: The Failed Merger with Chrysler Corporation

In 1998, Daimler-Benz acquired Chrysler for $36 billion.  Eight years later (2007), DaimlerChrysler sold Chrysler to a consortium of private investors for $7.4 billion.  Daimler retained 20 percent of Chrysler.  Ultimately, Daimler will not get much out of its original $32 billion investment other than to unload $18 billion in pension and health care liabilities.  Many of the problems with the merger are derived from the labor and health care legacy cost differences, which have be estimated to be as high at $1,500 per vehicle on average, compared to an estimated $250 per vehicle for foreign firms such as Toyota.  The Chrysler acquisition by Daimler was not its first troublesome buy-out.  Daimler also made acquisitions in Asia by acquiring controlling interest in Japan’s Mitsubishi Motors Corp. and with Korea’s Hyundai Motors Corp. These investments also had problems, and Daimler divested the Mitsubishi assets in 2004 and likewise in the same year sold its 10 percent stake in Hyundai because of significant losses after the recession of 2000.

Daimler has not been the only auto manufacturer to stumble with horizontal acquisitions.  The above failure is reminiscent of the failed acquisition of Rover by BMW. BMW ultimately sold the Rover assets for little in return except that BMW was able to unload debt off its books like the Daimler restructuring to divest the Chrysler assets. The Rover assets were similarly acquired by private equity firms with additional investment from a Chinese firm, Nanjing Automobile, which wished to gain entry into more developed markets such as those in Europe and the United States.  

Private equity firms have been active in recent years, buying up an array of businesses across a wide variety of industries in automobiles, steel, natural resources, and even electronics. (Phillips Electronics recently sold pieces of its firm to private equity operations.)  The finance industry is able to facilitate the restructuring of these industrial assets due to the availability of debt, which is substituted for equity in publicly traded firms.  The hope in Detroit among the other auto firms is that the financial experts associated with private equity firms will help the Big Three auto firms (GM, Ford, and Chrysler) in the United States deal with their excessive cost structure associated with union pensions and health care costs, which make up the bulk of the cost differences between U.S. and foreign firms. If they are not able to restructure the cost situation, the next step will be bankruptcy, the method used by many other firms in the airline and steel industries to restructure these costs. Private equity firms were also involved with these deals, especially after they came out of bankruptcy.  One potential opportunity for Chrysler is financing auto and other purchases.  Previous to the Chrysler deal, Cerberus purchased 51 percent ownership in the GMAC assets from General Motors Corporation. GMAC is the financing line of General Motors.  Likewise in the Chrysler deal, Cerberus gains control of the Chrysler finance operation. In combination with the GMAC assets, once the financial unit activities are extracted from the operations of Chrysler, Cerberus hopes to develop a strong financing business, not only in financing automobiles but also potentially in financing opportunities such as mortgages.  Compared to the automobile operations, the financing arms are already profitable even with the problems that GMAC is having with its sub-prime home lending unit, Residential Capital Corp.  The Chrysler example illustrates the riskiness of acquisitions, the difficulty of integration, as well as what happens with failed acquisitions leading to divestiture and how private equity firms are involved in the process. Chrysler illustrates the potential for success as well as the risk of failure, and how firms deal with exit when an acquisition strategy fails.

Students can do a post-mortem examination of the DaimlerChrysler failure.  Is there a trend that has developed in automotive mergers?  Misguided notions of synergistic capabilities?  Capabilities to be successful in new markets?  And then there are the private equity groups.  Why have private equity investors been able to succeed where manufacturers have failed?  Do your students feel that automobile manufacturers would be more successful with vertical acquisitions?



Downsizing

Once thought to be an indicator of organizational decline, downsizing is now recognized as a legitimate restructuring strategy and has been one of the most common restructuring strategies adopted by U.S. firms.

Downsizing represents a reduction in the number of employees, and sometimes in the number of operating units, but may or may not represent a change in the composition of the businesses in the firm’s portfolio.

In the late 1980s, early 1990s, and early 2000s, thousands of jobs were lost in private and public organizations in the United States. One study estimates that 85 percent of Fortune 1000 firms have used downsizing as a restructuring strategy. Moreover, Fortune 500 firms terminated more than one million employees, or 4 percent of their collective workforce, in 2001 and into the first few weeks of 2002.  This trend continued in many industries. For instance, in 2007, Citigroup signaled that it cut 15,000 jobs and up to five percent of its workforce over time, in the process taking a $1 billion charge.

Firms use downsizing as a restructuring strategy for different reasons. The most frequently cited reason is that the firm expects improved profitability from cost reductions and more efficient operations.


Downscoping

Compared to downsizing, downscoping has a more positive effect on firm performance.

Downscoping refers to the divestiture, spin-off, or other means of eliminating businesses that are unrelated to the firm’s core business.  In other words, downscoping refocuses the firm on its core businesses.


While downscoping often includes downsizing, the former is targeted so that the firm does not lose key employees from core businesses (because such losses can lead to the loss of core competencies).

As indicated by the discussion of overdiversification earlier in the chapter, reducing the diversity of businesses in the portfolio enables top-level managers to manage the firm more effectively because
•        the firm is less diversified as a result of downscoping
•        top-level managers can better understand the core and related businesses

Note: Indicate to students that the requirements and characteristics of strategic leadership by a firm’s top management team are discussed more fully in Chapter 12.


Teaching Note:  There are many examples of downscoping strategies.  Two of these with which the students are likely to be familiar are the following:
•        General Motors’ successful spin-off of EDS
•        PepsiCo’s spin-off of its fast-food businesses (e.g., Taco Bell, Pizza Hut, & KFC)


U.S. firms use downscoping as a restructuring strategy more frequently than do European companies.  However, there has also been an increase in downscoping by Asian and Latin American firms as they adopt Western business practices.


Teaching Note:  Research has shown that refocusing is not usually successful unless the firm has adequate resources to have the flexibility to formulate the necessary strategies to compete effectively.


Leveraged Buyouts

A leveraged buyout (LBO) refers to a restructuring action, whereby the management of the firm and/or an external party buys all of the assets of the business, largely financed with debt, and thus takes the firm private.

Often, LBOs are used as a restructuring strategy to correct for managerial mistakes or because managers are making decisions that primarily serve their personal interests rather than those of shareholders.

In other words, a firm is purchased by a few (new) owners using a significant amount of debt (in a highly leveraged transaction) and the firm’s stock is no longer traded publicly.

In general, the new owners restructure the private firm by selling a significant number of assets (businesses) both to downscope the firm and to reduce the level of debt (and significant debt costs) used to finance the acquisition.

A primary intent of the new owners is to improve the firm’s efficiency.  This enables them to sell the firm (outright to another owner or by a public stock underwriting), thus capturing the value created through the restructuring.  It is not uncommon for those buying a firm through an LBO to restructure the firm to the point that it can be sold at a profit within a five- to eight-year period.

There are three types of leveraged buyouts: management buyouts (MBO), employee buyouts (EBO), and whole-firm buyouts where another firm takes the firm private (LBO).  Research has shown that management buyouts can also lead to greater entrepreneurial activity and growth.


6        Explain the short- and long-term outcomes of the different types of restructuring strategies.       

Restructuring Outcomes

Downsizing often does not lead to higher firm performance; in fact, research has shown that downsizing contributed to lower returns for both U.S. and Japanese firms. The stock markets in the firms’ respective nations evaluated downsizing negatively. Investors concluded that downsizing would have a negative effect on companies’ ability to achieve strategic competitiveness in the long term. Investors also seem to assume that downsizing occurs as a consequence of other problems in a company.


Teaching Note:  In free-market based societies, downsizing has generated a host of entrepreneurial opportunities for individuals to operate their own businesses.  In fact, as discussed in Chapter 13, start-up ventures in the United States are growing at three times the rate of the national economy.


Downsizing tends to result in a loss of human capital in the long term. Losing employees with many years of experience with the firm represents a major loss of knowledge. As noted in Chapter 3, knowledge is vital to competitive success in the global economy. Thus, in general, research evidence and corporate experience suggest that downsizing may be of more tactical (or short-term) value than strategic (or long-term) value.

Downscoping generally leads to more positive outcomes in both the short and the long term than does downsizing or engaging in a leveraged buyout (see Figure 7.2). Downscoping’s desirable long-term outcome of higher performance is a product of reduced debt costs and the emphasis on strategic controls derived from concentrating on the firm’s core businesses. In so doing, the refocused firm should be able to increase its ability to compete.

While whole-firm LBOs have been hailed as a significant innovation in the financial restructuring of firms, there can be negative trade-offs.
•        the resulting large debt increases the financial risk of the firm
•        the intent of the owners to increase the efficiency of the bought-out firm and then sell it within five to eight years can create a short-term and risk-averse managerial focus
•        these firms may fail to invest adequately in R&D or take other major actions designed to maintain or improve the company’s core competence.


Figure Note: Restructuring alternatives—downscoping, downsizing, and leveraged buyouts—and short- and long-term outcomes are summarized in Figure 7.2.


FIGURE 7.2
Restructuring and Outcomes

As illustrated in Figure 7.2,
•        Downsizing reduces labor costs, but the long-term results are a loss of human capital and lower performance.
•        Downscoping reduces debt costs and emphasizes strategic controls, which result in higher performance.
•        Leveraged Buyouts provide an emphasis on strategic controls but increases debt costs; the long-term outcome is an increase in performance, but also greater firm risk.  




—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        Why are acquisition strategies popular in many firms competing in the global economy?  (pp. 183-184)

Acquisition strategies are increasingly popular around the world. Because of globalization, deregulation of multiple industries in many different economies, favorable legislation, etc., the number of domestic and cross-border acquisitions is high (though the frequency has slowed recently).  As is the case for all strategies, acquisitions indicate a choice a firm has made regarding how it intends to compete.  Because each strategic choice affects a firm’s performance, the possibility of diversification merits careful analysis.  A firm may make an acquisition to increase its market power because of a competitive threat, to enter a new market because of the opportunity available in that market, or to spread the risk due to the uncertain environment.  In addition, a firm may acquire other companies as options that allow the firm to shift its core business into different markets as volatility brings undesirable changes to its primary markets.

2.        What reasons account for firms’ decisions to use acquisition strategies as one means of achieving strategic competitiveness?  (pp. 184-191)

Firms often choose to follow acquisition strategies (1) to increase market power (by becoming larger); (2) to overcome entry barriers (by acquiring a firm with a position in the target industry); (3) to reduce cost of new-product development and increase the speed to market entry; (4) to reduce the risk associated with developing new products internally; (5) to diversify both firm and managerial risk by increasing the level of diversification; (6) to reshape the firm’s competitive scope; and (7) to boost learning and the development of new capabilities.

3.        What are the seven primary problems that affect a firm’s effort to successfully use an acquisition strategy?  (pp. 191-196)

Firms following acquisition strategies face seven major problems.  (1) They may face difficulty in successfully integrating the two firms.  This is especially true when integration involves melding disparate corporate cultures, linking disparate financial and control systems, building effective working relationships when management styles differ, and when the status of acquired firm executives is uncertain.  (2) Owing to inadequate evaluation of the target firm (a process known as due diligence), acquirers may pay more for the target firm than it is worth.  (3) If the acquisition is financed with debt, as many were in the 1980s, the costs related to a significant increase in debt—interest payments and debt repayment—may squeeze the firm’s cash flow and limit managerial flexibility resulting in the firm passing up attractive long-term investment opportunities.  It is also important to note that debt also has positive effects since leverage can assist a firm in its development, allowing it to take advantage of attractive expansion opportunities.  (4) Acquiring firms also may overestimate the existence and value of synergies from combining the two firms.  In many cases, the value to be gained from synergy is overestimated because of a failure to consider the integration and coordination costs that may be incurred.  (5) Too much diversification may mean that the portfolio of businesses that the firm owns is beyond the expertise of managers, that management depends too much on financial controls (rather than more effective strategic controls), and that acquisitions may become a substitute for innovation.  (6) Managers may be overly focused on acquisitions and neglect the firm’s core businesses.  (7) The combined firm may become too large to manage efficiently and effectively, as the firm experiences diseconomies of scale or bureaucratic controls stifle decision making.

4.        What are the attributes associated with a successful acquisition strategy?  (pp. 196-198)

As identified in Table 7.1, the following attributes tend to lead to successful acquisitions:
•        Acquired firm has assets or resources that are complementary to the acquiring firm’s core business
•        Acquisition if friendly
•        Acquiring firm selects target firms and conducts negotiations carefully and deliberately
•        Acquiring firm has financial slack (cash or a favorable debt position)
•        Merged firm maintains low to moderate debt position
•        Has experience with change and is flexible and adaptable
•        Sustained and consistent emphasis on R&D and innovation

5.        What is the restructuring strategy and what are its common forms?  (pp. 198-202)

Defined formally, restructuring is a strategy through which a firm changes its set of businesses and/or financial structure.  There are three common forms of restructuring strategies.

Downsizing is a reduction in the number of a firm’s employees, and sometimes in the number of its operating units, but it may or may not change the composition of businesses in the company’s portfolio. Thus, downsizing is an intentional proactive management strategy, whereas decline is an environmental or organizational phenomenon that the firm cannot avoid and that leads to erosion of the organization’s resource base.

As compared to downsizing, the downscoping restructuring strategy has a more positive effect on firm performance.  Downscoping refers to divestiture, spin-offs, or some other means of eliminating businesses that are unrelated to a firm’s core businesses.

Commonly, downscoping is referred to as a set of actions that results in a firm strategically refocusing on its core businesses.  A firm that downscopes often also downsizes simultaneously.  However, it does not eliminate key employees from its primary businesses while doing so because such action could lead to the loss of one or more core competencies.  Instead, a firm simultaneously downscoping and downsizing becomes smaller by reducing the diversity of businesses in its portfolio.

A leveraged buyout (LBO) is a restructuring strategy whereby a party buys all of a firm’s assets in order to take it private. Once the transaction is completed, the company’s stock is no longer traded publicly.  It is common for the firm to incur significant amounts of debt to finance a leveraged buyout.  The three types of leveraged buyouts include management buyouts (MBO), employee buyouts (EBO), and a whole firm buyout (the last occurring when another company or partnership purchases an entire company instead of a part of it).

6.        What are the short- and long-term outcomes associated with the different restructuring strategies?  (pp. 202-203)

As identified in Figure 7.2, the short-term outcome from downsizing is a reduction in labor costs, but this yields two negative long-term outcomes—loss of human capital and lower performance.  Downscoping leads to reduced debt costs and an emphasis on strategic controls, which in turn produces higher firm performance as a long-term outcome.  Finally, leveraged buyouts can lead to higher performance (long-term) through an emphasis on strategic controls, but it also yields high debt costs (short-term) that produce higher risk for the firm (long-term).



—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Comparison of Diversification Strategies

The use of diversification varies both across and within industries. In some industries, most firms may follow a single- or dominant-product approach. Other industries are characterized by a mix of both single-product and heavily diversified firms. The purpose of this exercise is to learn how the use of diversification varies across firms in an industry, and the implications of such use.

Part One

Working in small teams of four to seven persons, choose an industry to research. You will then select two firms in that industry for further analysis. Many resources can aid in identifying specific firms in an industry for analysis. One option is to visit the Web site of the New York Stock Exchange (http://www.nyse.com), which has an option to screen firms by industry group. A second option is http://www.hoovers.com, which offers similar listings. Identify two public firms based in the United States. (Note that Hoovers includes some private firms, and the NYSE includes some foreign firms. Data for the exercise are often unavailable for foreign or private companies.)

Once a target firm is identified, you will need to collect business segment data for each company. Segment data break down the company’s revenues and net income by major lines of business. These data are reported in the firm’s SEC 10-K filing, and may also be reported in the annual report. Both the annual report and 10-K are usually found on the company’s Web site; both the Hoovers and NYSE listings include company homepage information. For the most recent three-year period available, calculate the following:
        Percentage growth in segment sales

        Net profit margin by segment

        Bonus item: compare profitability to industry averages (Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios publishes profit norms by major industry segment.)

Next, based on your reading of the company filings and these statistics, determine whether the firm is best classified as:
        Single product

        Dominant product

        Related diversified

        Unrelated diversified

Part Two

Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation for use in class discussion. Address the following in the presentation:
        Describe the extent and nature of diversification used at each firm.

        Can you provide a motive for the firm's diversification strategy, given the rationales for diversification put forth in the chapter?
        Which firm’s diversification strategy appears to be more effective? Try to justify your answer by explaining why you think one firm’s strategy is more effective than the other.


Exercise 2: Corporate Juggling

What are the implications for managers when their firm shifts from competing in a single product segment to multiple segments? Additionally, how is the manager’s role affected by the similarity or dissimilarity of these segments?

This exercise will be completed in class. The instructor will assign students randomly to two different types of teams: part of the class will be assigned to teams of five to seven persons, and the remainder of the class will be assigned to teams of ten to fourteen persons. Each team will assign one person to serve as a facilitator.

The instructor will give each facilitator a bag of objects. The goal is for each team to juggle as many objects as possible. The team will start with one object, which should be tossed from person to person. When the group is ready, ask the facilitator for a second object. Continue to add objects up to your group’s ability.

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: The Gap

The purpose of this exercise is to illustrate how firms balance acquisition versus internal development in the process of diversification.  Students are asked to answer the following questions:

1.        Describe Gap’s emphasis on acquisition versus internal development.
2.        What restructuring has the company undertaken?  Would you recommend additional restructuring?
3.        Between 2002 and 2006, how well have the different divisions of The Gap performed?

Horizontal Expansion Activities

Much of the Gap’s expansion has come in the form of internal development.  The company has launched new store chains which have focused on specific market segments – e.g., babyGap, GapKids, and the Gap Outlet.  All of these can be considered as brand extensions versus entirely new segments, however.  In 1994, Gap launched the Old Navy brand.  Forth & Towne, focusing on women’s fashion, was launched in 2005, and Piperlime was launched in 2006.  The latter was a Web-only shoe shop.

Gap made two substantial acquisitions in the mid-1980s: Banana Republic was purchased in 1983 and Pottery Barn in the following year. Prior to its acquisition, Pottery Barn was a closely held company that had been in operation since 1949.  

Restructuring and Performance

Pottery Barn was sold to Williams-Sonoma in 1986, only two years after the acquisition.  Additionally, the Forth & Towne division was closed in 2007, also after just two years in operation.

Regarding further restructuring, students will likely offer varying suggestions on this topic.  The Gap’s 2006 Annual Report provides the following segment sales data (in millions):


Segment        2002        2003        2004        2005        2006
Gap        5,436        5,777        5,746        5,409        5,134
Banana        1,928        2,090        2,269        2,287        2,487
Old Navy        5,804        6,436        6,747        6,856        6,829
Forth & Towne                                8        27


Additionally, the following data is useful for comparison as well:

        2002        2003        2004        2005        2006
Overall sales*        14,455        15,854        16,267        16,023        15,943
Net income*        478        1,031        1,150        1,113        778
Gross margin        34.0%        37.6        39.2        36.6        35.4
Comparable store sales increase        -3%        7%        0%        -5%        -7%
* in millions

Overall, The Gap’s sales have been relatively stagnant during the last five years.  Net income has been volatile, and gross margins have seen some variation as well.  Comparable store sales have been flat or shrinking the last few years.  Banana Republic has reported the largest growth in sales during this window, with Old Navy growing at a substantially slower pace.  Ironically, the core Gap brand has reported declining sales for the last three years.  

In summary, Gap’s problem appears to be difficulty in getting people into their stores.  In recent years, the company has focused on cost-cutting.  As a result, their styles appear out of touch with current demand.  In 2007, the company replaced their CEO, and had also engaged Goldman Sachs for advice on modifying their strategy. Consequently, any recommendations to divest any of the core brands would be premature.

If the instructor plans to do a detailed discussion of this exercise in class, the following Fortune article provides excellent background on Gap, including a brief history of the firm, and the transition from its founders to a professional manager: GAP: DECLINE OF A DENIM DYNASTY, Jennifer Reingold. Fortune. New York: Apr 30, 2007. Vol. 155, Iss. 8;  pg. 96.


Exercise 2: Cadbury Schweppes: Too Much of a Sugar Rush?

The purpose of this exercise is to help students understand the challenges associated with a merger strategy predicated on synergies. While both Cadbury and Schweppes had strong brand recognition in their respective markets, there was little in the way of overlap by combining both firms.  This example is also useful for illustrating the role of shareholder activism, as well as different mechanisms for divestiture.  Students are asked to prepare a PowerPoint presentation that addresses the following questions:

1.        What precipitated Stitzer’s announcement to separate the beverage and candy operations?
2.        What were the main factors hindering the success of the Cadbury/Schweppes merger?
3.        What are the pros and cons of divesting the beverage segment?
4.        What are the different options that Stitzer can pursue in divesting Schweppes?
For a class debrief, it is useful to ask two or three teams to make a brief presentation of their findings.  The instructions in the textbook indicate that there should be one slide per question. The brevity of these presentations means that you should be able to have two or three teams present in ten or fifteen minutes, leaving additional time for discussion.
The following Wall Street Journal articles can be helpful for leading a debrief on the assignment:
•        In breakup, CEO of Cadbury faces his biggest deal; parting of the firm’s candy and drinks businesses may put both in play.  WSJ, March 16, 2007, page A1.
•        Cadbury’s delayed sale of unit poses risks.  WSJ July 28, 2007, page A3.
•        Cadbury Schweppes PLC: U.S. Beverages division may be spun off, not sold.  WSJ, August 2, 2007.
In the March 16 announcement, CEO Stitzer noted that the company had been considering separating the candy and beverage units for some time.  Shareholders had often made such a recommendation previously, based on an expectation that the two companies were undervalued following the merger.  However, the timing suggests a different reason for the announcement: only days before, investor Nelson Peltz of Trian Fund Management had purchased a 2.98% stake in Cadbury Schweppes.  Peltz had made previous acquisitions of companies such as H.J. Heinz and Tiffany’s, and was an advocate of breaking up the candy and beverage units.
One of the factors hindering the success of the merger was the inability of the firms to realize synergies. While both segments may appear very similar on the surface, the WSJ articles indicate that each had very different production and distribution systems.  Another possible factor is that the CEO was very focused on acquisitions: Stitzer was a merger and acquisition lawyer to joining Cadbury Schweppes, and was a major advocate of the firm’s decision to acquire Dr. Pepper, 7 Up, Dentyne, Bubaloo, and Trident.
The lack of substantial synergies is one reason in favor of divesting Schweppes.  Revenues from a sale could help Cadbury either reduce its debt, or to acquire a more closely related firm.  One downside of a divestiture is that Schweppes provides the majority of the firm’s net income, despite representing a smaller proportion of sales.  Finally, the separation of the two companies increases the likelihood that Cadbury might subsequently become the target of a takeover.
In the March 16 WSJ article, Stitzer laid out three approaches for separating Schweppes:
        Direct sale, probably to private equity.  
        Breaking Cadbury and Schweppes into two independent public companies
        Selling part of Schweppes initially, with a goal of eventually selling off Cadbury’s remaining ownership stake.
In the six months following the announcement, Cadbury Schweppes reported a substantial drop in profit and narrower margins, which could make the beverage unit less attractive to private equity firms.  According to the August 2 WSJ article, a spin-off versus private equity sale could mean substantially less money for Cadbury: An estimate 6.5 billion British pounds for a spin-off, versus 7-8 billions pounds for a sale.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions       
       
1.        Evidence indicates that the shareholders of many acquiring firms gain little or nothing in value from the acquisitions. Why, then, do so many firms continue to use an acquisition strategy?
2.        Of the problems that affect the success of an acquisition, ask the students which one they believe is the most critical in the global economy. Why? What should firms do to make certain that they do not experience such a problem when they use an acquisition strategy?
3.        Have the students use the Internet to read about acquisitions that are currently underway and to choose one of these acquisitions. Based on the firms’ characteristics and experiences and the reasons cited to support the acquisition, do they feel it will result in increased strategic competitiveness for the acquiring firm? Why or why not?
4.        Have students research recent merger and acquisition activity that is taking place throughout the global economy. Are most of the transactions they found between domestic companies or are they cross-border acquisitions? What accounts for the nature of what they found?
5.        What is synergy, and how do firms create it through mergers and acquisitions? In the students’ opinion, how often do acquisitions create private synergy? What evidence can they cite to support your position?
6.        What can a top management team do to ensure that its firm does not become diversified to the point of earning negative returns from its diversification strategy?
7.        Some companies enter new markets through internally developed products, while others do so by acquiring other firms. What are the advantages and disadvantages of each approach?
8.        How do the Internet’s capabilities influence a firm’s ability to study acquisition candidates?


Ethics Questions

1.        Some evidence suggests that there is a direct and positive relationship between a firm’s size and its top-level managers’ compensation. If this is so, what inducement does that relationship provide to upper-level executives? What can be done to influence the relationship so that it serves shareholders’ interests?
2.        When a firm is in the process of restructuring itself by divesting some assets and acquiring others, managers may have incentives to restructure in ways that increase their power base and compensation package. Does this possibility explain at least part of the reason for the less-than-encouraging outcomes of acquisitions for shareholders of the acquiring firm?
3.        When shareholders increase their wealth through downsizing, does this come, to some degree, at the expense of loyal employees—those who have worked diligently to serve the firm in terms of accomplishing its vision and mission? If so, what actions would the students take to be fair to both shareholders and employees if they were charged with downsizing or “smartsizing” a firm’s employment ranks? What ethical base would they employ to make decisions regarding downsizing?
4.        Are takeovers ethical? If not, why not?
5.        Is it ethical for managers to acquire other companies just because industry competitors are doing so?


Internet Exercise
               
Many Internet sites, including the U.S. Federal Trade Commission’s official site at http://www.ftc.gov., offer information on mergers and acquisitions. With the increasing number of cross-border mergers and acquisitions, the FTC has been required to work closely with other foreign antitrust enforcers to regulate the new era of the global transaction. For example, the United States and the European Union have a bilateral agreement on antitrust enforcement.

*e-project: Trace the history of some relatively recent large mergers and acquisitions—e.g., Daimler and Chrysler, BP Amoco and Arco, and Vodafone and Mannesmann. Use their Websites and any other sources you find to obtain information on the official regulatory agencies that were involved in granting or denying permission for these mergers.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:57:54 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 8
International Strategy

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Explain traditional and emerging motives for firms to pursue international diversification.
2.        Identify the four major benefits of an international strategy.
3.        Explore the four factors that provide a basis for international business-level strategies.
4.        Describe the three international corporate-level strategies: multidomestic, global, and transnational.
5.        Discuss the environmental trends affecting international strategy, especially liability of foreignness and regionalization.
6.        Name and describe the five alternative modes for entering international markets.
7.        Explain the effects of international diversification on firm returns and innovation.
8.        Name and describe two major risks of international diversification.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   Shanghai Automotive Industry Corporation: Reaching for Global Markets
IDENTIFYING INTERNATIONAL OPPORTUNITIES: INCENTIVES TO USE AN INTERNATIONAL STRATEGY   
        Increased Market Size  
        Return on Investment  
        Economies of Scale and Learning
Strategic Focus  Does General Motors’ Survival Depend on International Markets?
        Location Advantages  
INTERNATIONAL STRATEGIES  
        International Business-Level Strategy  
        International Corporate-Level Strategy  
ENVIRONMENTAL TRENDS  
        Liability of Foreignness
        Regionalization  
CHOICE OF INTERNATIONAL ENTRY MODE  
        Exporting  
        Licensing  
        Strategic Alliances  
        Acquisitions  
        New Wholly Owned Subsidiary
Strategic Focus  Has the Largest Automaker in the World Made Mistakes with Its International Strategy?
          Dynamics of Mode of Entry  
STRATEGIC COMPETITIVE OUTCOMES  
        International Diversification and Returns  
        International Diversification and Innovation  
        Complexity of Managing Multinational Firms  
RISKS IN AN INTERNATIONAL ENVIRONMENT  
        Political Risks  
        Economic Risks  
        Limits to International Expansion: Management Problems
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES


LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: This chapter examines opportunities facing firms as they seek to develop and exploit core competencies by diversifying into global markets. In addition, it addresses different problems, complexities, and threats that might accompany use of the firm’s international strategies. Although national boundaries, cultural differences, and geographical distances all pose barriers to entry into many markets, significant opportunities draw businesses into the international arena. A business that plans to operate globally must formulate a successful strategy to take advantage of these global opportunities. Furthermore, to mold their firms into truly global companies, managers must develop global mind-sets. Especially in regard to managing human resources, traditional means of operating with little cultural diversity and without global sourcing are no longer effective.  These themes are all emphasized in the chapter.



OPENING CASE
Shanghai Automotive Industry Corporation: Reaching for Global Markets

The Shanghai Automotive Industry Corporation (SAIC) is one of China’s leading automotive companies.  The firm manufactures cars, tractors, motorcycles, trucks, buses, and automotive parts.  SAIC has had highly successful joint ventures with General Motors and Volkswagen to produce GM and VW automobiles for the growing Chinese automobile market. The majority of SAIC’s sales in the 1990s and 2000s have come from these joint ventures.  In fact, driving in any major city in China shows the popularity
of the GM (e.g., Buick) and VW autos in that country.  In addition to these joint ventures, SAIC also owns almost 51 percent of the Korean automaker, SSangyong, and the intellectual property rights to the Rover 25 and 75 models, as well as the K-series engine.  SAIC started manufacturing the Rover 75 (redesigned for the Chinese market) in 2007.

SAIC learned much from its partnerships, and with the licensed technology, it decided to launch and promote its own branded vehicles. The Chinese government is emphasizing the importance of Chinese companies to develop their own brands partly because foreign brands are controlling many of the Chinese markets. Additionally, for these firms to become successful globally competitive companies, they need their own brands. In keeping with this goal, Chinese executives have a favorite term, zizhu pinpai, meaning self-owned brand. Actually, zizhu means to be one’s own master. In 2007, SAIC began selling its own automobile brand, named the Roewe, in Chinese markets.

SAIC is currently among the top three automobile companies in China, and it has a goal of becoming among the top ten global auto competitors. To do so, it has a goal of entering and competing effectively in the U.S. auto market, which is the largest automobile market in the world.

SAIC has a very lofty goal.  The automotive market in the United States is the largest market in the world, but all major automobile companies compete there.  This undertaking will represent a major challenge to SAIC as evidenced by Hyundai’s failed attempt to make inroads in the US auto market despite major improvements in quality and lower prices than comparable cars.   

Chinese exposure to the global auto market has been minimal, and very few Chinese cars are exported to the United States.  Although the market share of U.S. automakers has been falling for the last several years, most of the gains in market share have been obtained by Japanese auto manufacturers, especially Toyota.  Chinese exports are expected to reach 500,000 autos in 2007, but most are targeted for South America, Southeast Asia, and Eastern Europe. Yet, analysts predict Chinese automakers’ success in global markets, including the United States, over time, and SAIC is likely to be one of the leaders.

This case raises two very basic questions, specifically, why does SAIC feel that it can succeed in the United States automobile market when other ex-US firms have been unsuccessful? And, will American buyers consider spending significant dollars on Chinese produced automobiles in light of a barrage of Chinese product recalls?  Would your students buy a Chinese automobile?  What major challenges face SAIC managers in expansion to the United States?  Will these hurdles rise or fall as time goes on?  These are some of the basic issues that must be address when considering international strategic decisions.  

Please note that the Strategic Focus articles in Chapter 8 specifically address SAIC’s partners/competitors referenced in this Opening Case.  You may do well to read the first Strategic Focus describing General Motors and the second that targets Toyota before discussing the above SAIC case.


Although national boundaries, cultural differences, and geographical distances all pose barriers to entry into many markets, significant opportunities draw businesses into the international arena.
•        Global firms must formulate a successful strategy to take advantage of international opportunities.
•        Managers must develop global mind-sets.
•        Operating with little cultural diversity and without global sourcing is no longer effective.
•        Global firms must develop relationships with suppliers, customers, and partners, and then learn from these.


Figure Note: Figure 8.1 outlines the relationships between opportunities, international strategy decisions, and outcomes covered in Chapter 8.


FIGURE 8.1
Opportunities and Outcomes of International Strategy

The following opportunities and outcomes of international strategy are illustrated in Figure 8.1:
•        Firms should first identify international opportunities related to increasing market size, return on investment, economies of scale and learning, and location-related advantages.
•        Once international opportunities have been identified, firms must develop international strategies based on firm resources and capabilities.
•        A mode of entry should be selected to take advantage of the firm’s core competencies.
•        A firm’s ability to realize strategic competitiveness is tempered by management’s ability to manage effectively and efficiently a complex organization with locations in multiple countries and the economic and political risks that accompany firm internationalization.
•        The strategic outcomes from the process can include better performance and more innovation.



1        Explain traditional and emerging motives for firms to pursue international diversification.       

IDENTIFYING INTERNATIONAL OPPORTUNITIES: INCENTIVES TO USE AN INTERNATIONAL STRATEGY

International strategy refers to selling products in markets outside of the firm’s domestic market to expand the market for their products.  This is explained by Vernon’s adaptation of the product life cycle concept formulated to explain internationalization.
1.        A firm introduces an innovation (new product) in its domestic market.
2.        Product demand develops in other countries and exports are provided from domestic operations.
3.        As demand increases, foreign rivals produce the product; then, firms justify investing in production abroad.
4.        As products become standardized, firms relocate production to low-cost countries.

Some firms implement an international strategy to secure critical resources, such as petroleum reserves (for the oil industry), bauxite (for the manufacture of aluminum), or rubber (for tire manufacturing).

Traditional motives persist, but other emerging motives also drive international expansion.
•        Pressure has increased for global integration of operations, driven mostly by universal product demand.
•        In some industries, technology drives globalization because the economies of scale necessary to reduce costs to the lowest level often require an investment greater than that needed to meet domestic market demand.
•        New large-scale, emerging markets, such as China and India, provide a strong internationalization incentive because of the potential demand in them.

Companies seeking to expanding operations in Europe, as elsewhere, need to understand the pressure on them to respond to local, national, or regional customs, especially where goods or services require customization because of cultural differences or effective marketing to entice customers to try a different product.
•        Firms adapt products to local tastes as they move into new national markets.
•        Local repair/service capabilities are another factor that increases desire for local country responsiveness.
•        Transportation costs of large products and their parts may preclude a firm’s suppliers from following the firm into an international market.
•        Employment contracts and labor forces differ. Host governments demand joint ownership and frequently require a high percentage of local procurement, manufacturing, and R&D.  These issues increase the need for local investment.

Accompanying these traditional and emerging reasons for international expansion, other opportunities available to firms through an international strategy include:
•        increasing the size of potential markets
•        achieving greater returns on capital and/or investment in new product/process developments
•        gaining economies of scale, scope, or learning
•        gaining location-based competitive advantage


Teaching Note: Firms expanding into international markets must recognize that many countries have characteristics that are unique and may differ significantly from the traditional European markets into which U.S. firms have expanded. Thus, firms must recognize this and:
•        be capable of managing multiple risks—e.g., financial, economic, political risks
•        be aware of increased pressure for local country or regional responsiveness, especially where cultural differences require customization of goods or services
•        weigh the potential advantages of enhancing the firm’s strategic competitiveness relative to the costs of meeting managerial challenges and product/geographic diversification requirements in international markets


Increased Market Size

Expanding internationally enables firms to increase greatly the size of the potential market for their products.  This may be of critical importance if the domestic market is too small to support scale-efficient manufacturing facilities (e.g., the pharmaceutical firms’ push into China).

The size of a particular international market affects a firm’s willingness to invest in R&D to build advantages in that market, with larger markets tending to provide higher returns and lower risk.

The strength of the science base in a country also can affect a firm’s foreign R&D investments, so most firms prefer to invest more heavily in those countries with the scientific knowledge and talent that produce more effective new products and processes from their R&D.


Return on Investment

When firms make large investments in such items as plants and equipment and/or research and development, they may need to search beyond their domestic market to be able to earn an adequate return on their investment.


Teaching Note: To illustrate, aircraft manufacturers—Boeing and Airbus Industries (a European entity)—must be able to sell in international as well as domestic markets if they are to be strategically competitive and achieve satisfactory returns on their enormous investment.


As the pace of technology development accelerates—and products become obsolete much faster—firms must be able to recoup R&D investments as quickly as possible.


Teaching Note: This may be a good place to discuss reverse engineering.  Reverse engineering is where a firm takes apart a competing product, learns the technology, and then develops a similar product that mirrors or imitates the new technology and successfully meets customer preferences. In other words, imitation and reverse engineering may shorten the time during which an innovative firm can profit from its innovation.  Because of this, innovative firms often seek international markets so that they can increase their opportunities to recoup significant capital investment and R&D expenditures.


Economies of Scale and Learning

By expanding the size and scope of their markets, firms may be able to achieve economies of scale in manufacturing (and in other operations, such as marketing, research and development, and distribution) by standardizing products across national borders and spreading fixed costs over a larger sales base.


Teaching Note: Economies of scale are critical in the global auto industry.  Honda has been a largely successful firm with substantial competencies in the manufacture of engines; however, it has sometimes struggled to compete against larger and more resource-rich auto makers (e.g., Ford and GM).  To have a chance to survive, Honda achieved economies of scale in the development and application of its engines (e.g., by providing engines for many applications [e.g., lawnmowers, weed trimmers, snowmobiles] and forming an alliance with GM to produce engines).  Thus, Honda may excel as an independent engine manufacturer.


Firms may also be able to exploit core competencies in international markets through resource and knowledge sharing between units across country borders. This sharing generates synergy, which helps the firm produce higher-quality goods or services at lower cost. In addition, working across international markets provides the firm with new learning opportunities.




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Does General Motors’ Survival Depend on International Markets?

In order for this Strategic Focus to have maximum value, students should have read and discussed the Opening Case about Shanghai Industry Corporation (SAIC).  These two cases complement each other.  

For 76 years, General Motors (GM) was the global industry sales leader, but in 2007, Toyota became the world’s largest automaker.  In addition to market share deterioration, GM has been struggling to earn positive returns in recent years. It finally returned to profitability in 2007 after experiencing several years of significant losses. Many of GM’s problems stem from its competitive capabilities in the North American market, where Toyota and other foreign auto makers have made substantial gains.  Interestingly, GM’s return to profitability is not due to success in its North American operations as it continues to lose money there.  Its recent profits have come from GM’s international operations, especially sales in the Chinese market.  China surpassed Japan to become the second largest vehicle market in the world. GM has the second highest market share in the Chinese market behind Volkswagen.

GM’s sales in China come from a 50-50 joint venture with the Shanghai Automotive Industry Corporation (SAIC) named Shanghai General Motors. In 2006, this joint venture manufactured more than 400,000 passenger automobiles.  GM predicts that Shanghai General Motors will produce 1 million passenger cars by 2010. Of course, the Chinese market for autos continues to grow and is expected to eventually become
the largest auto market in the world.  GM’s competitive advantage is clear because Toyota sold slightly
more than 275,000 cars in China during the same period.  Thus, GM has made large investments in Asia to offset Toyota’s gains elsewhere.  

Even as GM is experiencing success in Asia and is hoping for more in Latin America, it faces many challenges in the next decade. Importantly, its partner in China may become a critical competitor. The transfer to technology and managerial capabilities to SAIC through the joint venture has helped it to develop its own branded auto that will compete with the GM Buicks sold in China.  But equally critical is SAIC’s intentions to introduce its cars into the Untied States market.  As a result, GM must employ effective strategies to maintain its current competitive advantages in China and other Asian markets and it must also try to stem the tide of lost market share in other markets (e.g., the United States and Western Europe).

GM has a real dilemma with its China exposure.  This situation might best be referred to as double jeopardy.  SAIC is currently a partner in one of GM’s few bright spots, but has developed the capability to become an intense competitor in both China and the United States.  And GM has been SAIC’s mentor.  What sort of international strategy should GM implement to protect its recently developed China turf as well as protect its United States’ market from interlopers?  Ask students to identify strategic alternatives that GM should consider.  Is it reasonable to do nothing to protect its shrinking market share in the United States and rely on its current U.S. competitors to protect the U.S. market?


Location Advantages

Firms also may be able to achieve a comparative advantage and lower the basic costs of their products by locating facilities in low-cost markets for critical raw materials, cheap labor, key suppliers, energy, customers, and/or natural resources.


Teaching Note: The large and unified market of the European Union is attracting considerable investment from international companies, and European markets and firms are undergoing substantial changes to take advantage of the economies of scale, potential learning, and advantages of location.  The common currency and integration of capital markets have reduced financial risks and made available significant amounts of capital that were previously unavailable in the separate country markets. (This may be a good place to discuss the euro and its impact on global business.)


Other factors that may impact location advantages are as follows:
•        the needs of intended customers,
•        cultural influences (if there is a strong match between the cultures involved, the liability of foreignness is lower than if there is high cultural distance),
•        regulation distances which influence the ownership positions of multinational firms as well as their strategies for managing expatriate human resources.


INTERNATIONAL STRATEGIES

International strategies available to firms are business-level and corporate-level (cf. Chapters 4 and 6).
•        Business-level strategy choices are generic, extending our earlier discussion of cost leadership, differentiation, focus, and integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategies.
•        Corporate-level strategies are dependent on the complexity and scope of product and geographic diversification, and these include multidomestic, global, and transnational (hybrid) strategies.


2        Explore the four factors that provide a basis for international business-level strategies.       

International Business-Level Strategy

Each business must develop a competitive strategy focused on its own domestic market. Business-level generic strategies are discussed in Chapter 4, but international business-level strategies have some unique features.
•        In an international business-level strategy, the home country of operation is often the most important source of competitive advantage.
•        The resources and capabilities established in the home country frequently allow the firm to pursue the strategy into markets located in other countries.
•        As a firm continues its growth into multiple international locations, research indicates that the country of origin diminishes in importance as the dominant factor.


Figure Note: Porter’s Diamond of Advantage model can be used to introduce the discussion of Figure 8.2.


FIGURE 8.2
Determinants of National Advantage

As Figure 8.2 illustrates, four interrelated national or regional factors contribute to the competitive advantage of firms competing in global industries.
•        Factor conditions or the factors of production
•        Demand conditions
•        Related and supporting industries
•        Firm strategy, structure, and rivalry

Note: Each of these factors is discussed in the following section.



Perhaps the most basic factor in the model, factor conditions or factors of production, refers to the inputs necessary to compete in any industry.  These include such factors as labor, land, natural resources, capital, and infrastructure (such as highway, postal, and communications systems).

These factors can be subdivided into four categories:
•        Basic factors, such as labor and natural resources
•        Advanced factors, including digital communications systems and highly-educated work forces
•        Generalized factors (required by all industries), such as highway systems and a supply of capital
•        Specialized factors that are most valuable in specific uses (e.g., skilled personnel employed at a port who specialize in the handling of bulk chemicals)

Nations having both advanced and specialized factors are likely to be characterized by growth in new firms that are strong global competitors.

Ironically, countries often develop advanced and specialized factors because they lack critical basic resources.
•        Some Asian countries, such as South Korea, lack abundant natural resources but offer a strong work ethic, a large number of engineers, and systems of large firms to create expertise in manufacturing.
•        Germany developed a strong chemical industry, partially because Hoechst and BASF spent years creating a synthetic indigo dye to reduce their dependence on imports, unlike Britain, whose colonies provided large supplies of natural indigo.

The second factor that determines national advantage is demand conditions, which are characterized by the nature and size of buyers’ needs in the home market for the industry’s products or services. The size of the segment can create demand sufficient to justify the construction of scale-efficient facilities.

Related and supporting industries are the third factor of the national advantage model.  National firms may be able to develop competitive advantage when industries that provide either materials or components, or that support the activities of the primary industry are present.
•        Italian firms are world leaders in the shoe industry because of the related and supporting industries present in Italy (e.g., a mature leather processing industry and design and manufacture of leather-working machinery).
•        In Japan, copiers and cameras are related, as are cartoon, consumer electronics, and video game industries.

Growth in certain industries is fostered by the fourth factor—firm strategy, structure, and rivalry.  As expected, patterns of firm strategy, structure, and competitive rivalry among firms in an industry vary between nations.
•        In Italy, the national pride of the country’s designers has spawned strong industries in sports cars, fashion apparel, and furniture.
•        In the United States, competition among computer manufacturers and software producers has favored the development of these industries.

As described, the four basic factors of Porter’s Diamond of Advantage model emphasize the impact or influence of the environmental or structural attributes of a nation’s economy that may contribute to a national advantage for its firms in specific industries.

In spite of the presence of the four factors and government support, the factors leading to national advantage are likely to result in a firm achieving competitive advantage only when the firm develops and implements strategies that enable it to take advantage of country-specific factors.


3        Define the three international corporate-level strategies: multidomestic, global, and transnational.       

International Corporate-Level Strategy

The type of corporate-level strategy adopted by a firm will have an impact on the selection and implementation of its international business-level strategy.

Some corporate-level strategies provide individual country units with the flexibility to develop country-specific strategies, while others dictate all country business-level strategies from the home office and coordinate activities across units for the purposes of resource-sharing and product standardization.

International corporate-level strategy can be distinguished from international business-level strategy by the scope of operations, in terms of both product and geographic diversification.


Figure Note: The three types of international corporate-level strategies are illustrated in Figure 8.3, while relationships between structural arrangements and strategy type will be discussed further in Chapter 11.



FIGURE 8.3
International Corporate Strategies

As Figure 8.3 illustrates, a firm should choose its international corporate strategy based on the need for both local responsiveness and for global integration.

•        When the need for global integration is high and there is little need for local market responsiveness, the firm should adopt a global strategy.
•        When the need for global integration is low, but there is great need for local market responsiveness, the firm should adopt a multidomestic strategy.
•        When there is a great need for both global integration and local market responsiveness, the firm should adopt a transnational strategy.

Multidomestic Strategy

Multidomestic strategy is one where strategic and operating decisions are decentralized to the strategic business unit in each country in order to tailor products and services to the local market.  The multidomestic strategy:
•        assumes business units in different countries are independent of one another
•        contends that markets differ and can be segmented by national borders
•        focuses on competition within each country
•        suggests products and/or services can be customized to meet individual markets needs or preferences
•        assumes economies of scale are not possible because of demand for market-specific customization


Teaching Note: A few years back, Sony’s entertainment business changed its strategy from global to multidomestic when it decided to produce films and television programs for local markets around the world through production facilities and television channels in most larger Latin American and Asian countries. In 1999, Sony produced approximately 4,000 hours of foreign-language programs and about 1,700 hours of English-language programs.  Sony now has more than 24 channels operating across 62 countries, and some of these channels are highly successful.


The use of multidomestic strategies:
•        usually expands the firm’s local market share because the firm can pay attention to the needs of local buyers
•        results in more uncertainty for the corporation as a whole, because of the differences across markets and thus the different strategies employed by local country units  
•        does not allow for the achievement of economies of scale and can be more costly
•        decentralizes a firm’s strategic and operating decisions to the business units operating in each country


Global Strategy

A global strategy is one where standardized products are offered across country markets and competitive strategy is dictated by the home office.  The global strategy:
•        assumes strategic business units operating in each country are interdependent
•        attempts to achieve integration across businesses and national markets, as directed by the home office
•        emphasizes economies of scale
•        offers greater opportunities to use innovations developed at home or in one country in other markets
•        often lacks responsiveness to local market needs and preferences
•        is difficult to manage because of the need to coordinate strategies and operating decisions across borders
•        requires resource-sharing and an emphasis on coordination across national borders


Teaching Note: U.K.-based temporary energy provider, Aggreko, operates in 48 countries and employs a global strategy. The firm’s fleet of equipment is integrated globally, which allows it to shift equipment to different regions of the world to meet specific needs.  Its global strategy also allows Aggreko to design and assemble its equipment in-house to meet the needs of its customers.



Cemex: A Mini-Case

Cemex is the third largest cement company in the world behind France’s Lafarge and Switzerland’s Holcim and the largest producer of Ready-mix, a prepackaged product that contains all the ingredients needed to make localized cement products.  In 2005, Cemex acquired RMC for $4.1 billion.  RMC is a large U.K. cement producer with two-thirds of its business in Europe.  Cemex was already the number one producer in Spain through its acquisition of a Spanish company in 1992.  In 2000 Cemex acquired Southdown, a large manufacturer in the U.S.  Accordingly, Cemex has strong market power in the Americas as well as in Europe.  Because Cemex pursues a global strategy effectively, its integration of its centralization process has resulted in a quick payoff for its merger integration process.  To integrate its businesses globally, Cemex uses the Internet as one way of increasing revenue and lowering its cost structure. By using the Internet to improve logistics and manage an extensive supply network, Cemex can significantly reduce costs. Connectivity between the operations in different countries and universal standards dominate its approach.



Transnational Strategy

A transnational strategy is a corporate strategy that seeks to achieve both global efficiency and local (national market) responsiveness.
•        It is difficult to achieve because of requirements for both strong central control and coordination to achieve efficiency and local flexibility and decentralization to achieve local responsiveness.
•        A transnational strategy mandates building of a shared vision and individual commitment through an integrated network to produce a core competence that would result in strategic competitiveness (that competitors would find difficult to imitate).
•        Effective implementation of a transnational strategy often produces higher performance than does implementation of either the multidomestic or global international corporate-level strategies.


Teaching Note: Students sometimes find the transnational strategy difficult to grasp. This has prompted some to refer to this option as an “idealized form,” suggesting that this it not possible to achieve in reality. This also suggests, however, that this model represents a worthy goal for the international firm.  It is worth asking students if they believe it will ever be possible to be truly transnational and ask what would be needed to make this a reality.

Teaching Note:  Refer back to Figure 8.3 to summarize relationships between the need for global integration and local responsiveness and international corporate-level strategies.

Teaching Note: DaimlerChrysler employed a transnational strategy to design and manufacture The Crossfire, a product that was introduced in 2003 and features a sleek Chrysler design, but 40 percent of its components are from Mercedes Benz. This global integration has facilitated lower costs for the vehicle—components already engineered were adapted from elsewhere and design enhancements produced an attractive car for the U.S. market.


4        Discuss the environmental trends affecting international strategy, especially liability of foreignness and regionalization.       

ENVIRONMENTAL TRENDS

Implementing a transnational strategy is difficult; however, firms are challenged to do so because of these facts:
•        There is an increased emphasis on local requirements – e.g., customization to meet government regulations within particular countries or to fit customer tastes and preferences.
•        Most multinational firms desire coordination and sharing of resources across country markets to hold down costs.
•        Some products and industries may be more suited than others for standardization across country borders.

Liability of Foreignness

Research shows that firms may focus less on truly global strategies and more on regional adaptation. Even Internet-based strategies now require local adaptation.





Lands’ End Adjusts to the Liability of Foreignness: A Mini-Case

The globalization of businesses with local strategies is demonstrated by the online operation of Lands' End, Inc. (now owned by Sears), which uses local Internet portals to offer its products for sale. Lands’ End, formerly a direct-mail catalog business, launched its Web-based business in 1995. The firm established Websites in the U.K. and Germany in 1999, and in France, Italy, and Ireland in 2000—all of this prior to initiating a catalog business in those countries. Not only are catalogs very expensive to print and mail outside the United States, but they also must be sent to the right people, and buying mailing lists is expensive. With limited online advertising and word-of-mouth, a Website business can be built in a foreign country without a lot of initial marketing expenses. Once the online business is large enough, a catalog business can be launched with mailing targeted to customers who have used the business online.

Sam Taylor, vice president of international operations for Lands’ End, indicated that the firm has a centralized Internet team (handling development, design, etc.) at the home office, but a local presence is also needed.  So the firm hired local Internet managers, designers, marketing support, and so on, to gain insight into the nuances of local markets. He also explained that each additional Website was cheaper to implement. For example, to set up the Websites for Ireland, France, and Italy, the firm cloned the U.K. site and partnered with Berlitz for French and Italian translations.  This made the process cheaper—i.e., 12 times less than the U.K. site for France and 16 times less for Italy.  Lands’ End now gets 16 percent of its total revenues from Internet sales and ships to 185 countries, primarily from its Dodgeville, Wisconsin, corporate headquarters. This shows that smaller companies can sell their goods and services globally when facilitated by electronic infrastructure without having significant (brick-and-mortar) facilities outside of their home location.  But significant local adaptation is still needed in each country or region.




Regionalization

A firm competing in international markets must decide whether to compete in all (or many) world markets or to focus its efforts on a specific region or regions.

Competing in many markets may enable the firm to achieve economies of scale because of the size of the combined markets, but only if customer preferences in multiple markets do not differ significantly.  If customer preferences vary significantly among national markets, a firm might be better served by narrowing its focus to a specific region.  A regional focus may enable the firm to better understand cultures, legal and social norms, and other factors that may be important to achieving strategic competitiveness.


Teaching Note: At this point, it might useful to draw a parallel between competing in multiple national markets and owning businesses in multiple industries.  Firms may be better positioned by focusing on a specific region where markets are more similar, thus allowing a degree of integration and resource sharing.  In Chapter 7, a similar comment was made regarding disadvantages that often accompany overdiversification and the prescribed downscoping to refocus the firm more on related, as opposed to, unrelated diversification.


Regional strategies also are being promoted by groups of countries that have developed trade agreements to enhance the economic power of a region.  Examples include the following:
•        Membership in the European Union (EU) is limited to Western European countries, but it is being expanded to include other Western European countries as well as countries in Central and Eastern Europe.
•        The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is an integration designed to facilitate trade among the U.S., Canada, and Mexico (and it may be expanded to include some South American countries).
•        South America’s Organization of American States (OAS) is a system of country associations that developed trade agreements to promote the flow of trade across country boundaries within their respective regions.
•        CAFTA is a U.S. trade agreement with Central American nations that is designed to reduce tariffs with five countries in Central America plus the Dominican Republic in the Caribbean Sea.


Teaching Note: The movement of investment funds has not been only from the U.S. to Mexico as Mexican investors have made significant investments in the U.S., and some European firms have invested in Canada to gain access to this unified market.


Most firms enter regional markets sequentially, beginning in markets with which they are more familiar. And they introduce their largest and strongest lines of business into these markets first, followed by their other lines of business once the first lines are successful. They also usually invest in the same area as their original investment location.


5        Name and describe the five alternative modes for entering international markets.       

CHOICE OF INTERNATIONAL ENTRY MODE

Firms have a variety of alternative means of expanding internationally as indicated in Table 8.1.


Table Note: Students can refer to Table 8.1 as you discuss each of the modes of entry into international markets.




TABLE 8.1
Global Market Entry: Choice of Entry Mode

Table 8.1 presents five alternative entry modes available to firms for international expansion:
•        exporting
•        licensing
•        strategic alliances
•        acquisition
•        new, wholly owned subsidiary

The next section of this chapter discusses characteristics of each mode, including cost/control trade-offs.

Exporting

A common—but not necessarily the least costly or most profitable—form of international expansion is for firms to export products from the home country to other markets.
•        Exporters have no need to establish operations in other countries.
•        Exporters must establish channels of distribution and outlets for their goods, usually by developing contractual relationships with firms in the host country to distribute and sell products.

However, exporting also has disadvantages:
•        Exporters may have to pay high transportation costs.
•        Tariffs may be charged on products imported to the host country.
•        Exporters have less control over the marketing and distribution of their products.

Because of the potentially significant transportation costs and the usually greater similarity of geographic neighbors, firms often export mostly to countries that are closest to its facilities.

Small businesses are the most likely to use exporting.  One of the largest problems with which small businesses must deal is currency exchange rates, a challenge for which only large businesses are likely to have specialists.

Licensing

Through licensing, a firm authorizes a foreign firm to manufacture and sell its products in a foreign market.
•        The licensing firm (licensor) generally is paid a royalty payment on every unit that is produced and sold.
•        The licensee takes the risks, making investments in manufacturing and paying marketing/distribution costs.
•        Licensing is the least costly (and potentially the least risky) form of international expansion because the licenser does not have to make capital investments in the host countries.
•        Licensing is a way to expand returns based on previous innovations, even if product life cycles are short.


Teaching Note: Counterfeiting is one risk to licensing strategies. Sony and Philips codesigned the audio CD. In the past, they licensed the rights to companies to make CDs and Sony and Philips collected 5 cents for every CD sold.  However, the returns to Sony and Philips from CD sales were threatened by cheap counterfeit disks.  Sales of counterfeit disks in China alone are estimated to exceed $1 billion annually.


The costs or potential disadvantages of licensing include the following:
•        The licensing firm has little control over manufacture and distribution of its products in foreign markets.
•        Licensing offers the least revenue potential as profits must be shared between licensor and licensee.
•        The licensee can learn the firm’s technology and, upon license expiration, may create a competing product.


Strategic Alliances

Strategic alliances enable firms to:
•        share the risks and resources required to enter international markets
•        facilitate the development of new core competencies that yield strategic competitiveness

Most strategic alliances represent ventures between a foreign partner (which provides access to new products and new technology) and a host country partner (which has knowledge of competitive conditions, legal and social norms, and cultural idiosyncrasies that will enable the foreign partner to successfully manufacture or develop and market a competitive product or service in the host country market).

Strategic alliances also present potential problems and risks due to (1) selection of incompatible partners and (2) conflict between partners.

Several factors may cause a relationship to sour. Trust between the partners is critical and is affected by a number of fundamental issues:
•        the initial condition of the relationship
•        the negotiation process to arrive at an agreement
•        partner interactions
•        external events
•        the country cultures involved in the alliance or joint venture

Note: Strategic alliances will be covered in much greater depth in Chapter 9.


Teaching Note: British Telecommunications planned to create a virtual shopping mall in Spain through its joint venture with Banco Popular, a retail-focused Spanish bank.  The two firms jointly developed a Website for business-to-business transactions.  They were to use BT’s portal in Spain to develop a client base of small and medium size businesses.  BT would provide the common portal free of charge for the first year and Banco Popular would charge only a nominal commission for brokering sales.


Research suggests that alliances are more favorable when uncertainty is high and where cooperation is needed to access knowledge dispersed between partners and where strategic flexibility is important; acquisitions work best in situations with less need for flexibility and when the transaction supports economies of scale or scope.


Acquisitions

Cross-border acquisitions have also been increasing significantly.  In recent years, cross-border acquisitions have comprised more than 45 percent of all acquisitions completed worldwide.

As explained in Chapter 7, acquisitions can provide quick access to a new market.  In fact, acquisitions may provide the fastest and often the largest initial international expansion of any of the alternatives.

Beyond the disadvantages previously discussed for domestic acquisitions (Chapter 7), international acquisitions also can be quite expensive (because of debt financing) and require difficult and complex negotiations due to:
•        the same disadvantages as domestic acquisitions
•        the great expense which often requires debt financing
•        the exceedingly complex international negotiations for acquisitions—e.g., only about 20 percent of the cross-border bids made lead to a completed acquisition, compared to 40 percent for domestic acquisitions
•        different corporate cultures
•        the challenges of merging the new firm into the acquiring firm, which often are more complex than with domestic acquisitions—i.e., different corporate culture, but also different social cultures and practices


Teaching Note: Emphasize that firms often use multiple entry strategies. For example, Wal-Mart has used multiple entry strategies as it globalizes its operations, ranging from joint ventures in China and Latin America to acquisitions in Germany and the U.K.


New Wholly Owned Subsidiary

Firms that choose to establish new, wholly owned subsidiaries are said to be undertaking a greenfield venture.  This is the most costly and complex of all international market entry alternatives.

The advantages of establishing a new wholly-owned subsidiary include:
•        achieving maximum control over the venture
•        being potentially the most profitable alternative (if successful)
•        maintaining control over the technology, marketing, and distribution of its products

While the profit potential is high, establishing a new wholly-owned subsidiary is risky for two reasons:
•        This alternative carries the highest costs of all entry alternatives as a firm must build new manufacturing facilities, establish distribution networks, and learn and implement the appropriate marketing strategies.
•        The firm also may have to acquire knowledge and expertise that is relevant to the new market, often having to hire host country nationals (in many cases from competitors) and/or costly consultants.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Has the Largest Automaker in the World Made Mistakes with Its International Strategy?

In 2007, Toyota surpassed General Motors as the world’s leading automaker.  Toyota sold 2.35 million vehicles in the first quarter of 2007, 900,000 more than General Motors.  The Toyota brand has come to mean reliability at an affordable price.

While sales of Toyota vehicles have leveled off in Europe due to European Union policies designed to limit their sales, the company plans to build five more large assembly plants in North America by 2016.  That would bring Toyota’s total to 13 plants and 50,000 employees in North America.  Toyota first entered the Chinese market with exported cars built in Japan in the 1960s.

As mentioned earlier in the Opening Case, the two leaders in the Chinese auto market are VW and GM. Toyota built manufacturing facilities in China as a part of a joint venture with FAW China. Toyota began pushing the sales of a small modestly priced auto, the Vios, a similar strategy used for many emerging economy countries. Although its initial sales were positive, they weakened as Chinese customers seemed more interested in luxury cars.  However, Toyota rebounded quickly with the introduction in 2006 of the Camry, a popular auto in many international markets. Its sales reached 150,000 units in 2007. Toyota also formed other joint ventures in China such as one with Guangzhou Automotive Group to manufactures engines. Still Toyota must build its brand name in China and also has to fend off anti-Japanese sentiment leftover from Japanese government actions during World War II. For these reasons and its late start, it has a large gap in sales to overtake the market leaders.

But Toyota is not without serious problems.  For example, in North America, the number of recalls of its vehicles has tripled in recent years. And customer satisfaction has declined with the J.D. Powers ratings listing Toyota 28th out of 36 in customer experience. Analysts suggest that the reason for these outcomes is Toyota’s relentless pressure to increase sales, sometimes at the expense of customer satisfaction.

Because of these problems, Toyota has begun a new program in North America with emphasis on  improving product planning, customer service, sales and marketing, along with the car dealerships.  China’s major international initiative in the 2000s has been the Chinese market.  It may have “taken its eye off of the North American market a little. But, it cannot afford to slip in the lucrative North American market while it fights for market share in China.  It will be interesting to observe whether Toyota can regain its customer satisfaction in North America, continue to build market share there, and make gains in the Chinese market simultaneously.


Toyota is sales focused.  It recently passed GM as the world’s leading automaker.  But has it lost sight of what it requires to remain #1?  Do your students feel that Toyota has diluted its management resources to a point that something is going to “slip?”  Is it a matter of prioritization within the Toyota organization?  Does expansion of Toyota dealers’ role offer a possible solution to Toyota’s current issues?


Dynamics of Mode of Entry

The choice of a market entry strategy is determined by a number of factors.  However, initial market development strategies generally are selected to establish a firm’s products in the new market.
•        Exporting does not require foreign manufacturing expertise; it only requires an investment in distribution.
•        Licensing also can facilitate direct market entry by enabling the firm to learn the technologies required to improve its products in order to achieve success in international markets or to facilitate direct entry.
•        Strategic alliances are also popular because the firm forms a partnership with a firm that is already established in the new target market and reduces risks by sharing costs with the partner.

Firms interested in establishing a stronger presence (in most instances, in the later stages of the firm’s international diversification strategy) and in controlling technology, marketing, and distribution adopt riskier, more costly entry strategies, such as acquisitions or greenfield returns.

However, the entry strategy should be matched to the particular situation. In some cases, a firm may pursue entry strategies in sequential order—beginning with exporting and ending with greenfield ventures. The entry mode decision should be based on the following conditions:
•        the industry’s competitive conditions
•        the target country’s situation
•        government policies
•        the firm’s unique set of resources, capabilities, and core competencies


6        Explain the effects of international diversification on firm returns and innovation.       

STRATEGIC COMPETITIVE OUTCOMES

Once its international strategy and mode of entry have been selected, the firm turns its attention to implementation issues (see Chapter 11).  It is important to do this because international expansion is risky and may not result in a competitive advantage (see Figure 8.1). The probability the firm will achieve success by using an international strategy increases when that strategy is effectively implemented.


International Diversification and Returns

Recall that in Chapter 6, the discussion centered on product diversification where a firm manufactures and sells a diverse variety of products.

Based on the advantages discussed earlier, international diversification should be positively related to firm performance.  Research has shown that, as international diversification increases, firms’ returns decrease and then increase as firms learn to manage international expansion.

There are several reasons for the positive relationship between international diversification and performance.  
•        Potential advantages from economies of scale and experience
•        Location advantages
•        Increased market size
•        The potential to stabilize returns


International Diversification and Innovation

As mentioned in Chapter 1, developing new technology is critical to strategic competitiveness. In fact, Porter indicates that a nation’s competitiveness depends on the innovativeness of its industries and that firms achieve strategic competitiveness in international markets through innovation (see Figure 8.2).

As stated earlier in this chapter, one of the advantages of international expansion is having larger potential markets. Larger markets allow firms to achieve greater returns on innovation, which yields lower R&D-related risk. Thus, international diversification provides firms with incentives to innovate.

A complex relationship exits among international diversification, innovation, and performance. This leads, in fact, to the following circular relationship:
•        Some level of performance is necessary to provide the resources required to diversify internationally.
•        International diversification provides incentives (advantages) to firms to invest in R&D (innovation).
•        If done properly, R&D and the resulting innovations should improve firm performance.
•        Improved performance provides resources for continued international diversification and investments in R&D innovation.

It also is possible that international diversification may result in improved returns for product-diversified firms (referred to as unrelated diversification) by increasing the size of the potential market for each of the firm’s products.  But managing a firm that is both product and internationally diversified is very complex.

Cultural diversity may enable a firm to compete more effectively in international markets.
•        Culturally diverse top management teams often have a greater knowledge of international markets.
•        An in-depth understanding of diverse markets among top-level managers facilitates inter-firm cooperation, the use of strategically relevant, long-term criteria to evaluate managerial and business unit performance, and improved innovation and performance.


Complexity of Managing Multinational Firms

Managers of internationally diversified firms face a number of complex challenges.
•        Firms face multiple risks from being in several countries.
•        Firms can grow only so large before they become unmanageable.
•        The costs of managing large diversified firms may outweigh the benefits of diversification.
•        Global markets are highly competitive.
•        Firms must understand and effectively deal with multiple cultural environments.
•        Systems and processes must exist to manage shifts in the relative values of multiple currencies.
•        Firms must scan the environment to be prepared for potential government instability.


7        Name and describe two major risks of international diversification.       

RISKS IN AN INTERNATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Political and economic risks complicate the management of international diversification.  One reason is that these risks result in competitive conditions that may differ significantly from what was expected.

Examples of political and economic risks related to international diversification are listed in Figure 8.4.


Figure Note: Be sure to note any developments in the international risk situations noted in Figure 8.4 as well as the emergence of significant new issues.



FIGURE 8.4
Risk in the International Environment

This figure presents some specific examples of political and economic risks that multinational firms face.



Political Risks

Political risks are those related to instability in national governments and to war, civil or international.


Teaching Note:  For a useful way of identifying the political risk associated with different countries, see the map on page 105 of Small Business Management: An Entrepreneurial Emphasis, by Longenecker, Moore, Petty, and Palich (2006, SWCP).


National government instability creates multiple potential problems for internationally diversified firms.  Economic risks come up as governments react to a variety of events, reflected in uncertainty in terms of:
•        economic risks and uncertainty created by government regulation
•        existence of many, possibly conflicting, legal authorities or corruption
•        the potential nationalization of private assets


Teaching Note: A number of national governments attempt to minimize political risk (to themselves) by requiring that a significant portion of profits from investments be reinvested only in that country (to achieve economic stability, which can reduce probability of political instability).


Economic Risks

Economic risks are interdependent with political risks; however, some economic risks are specific to international diversification.  For example, differences and fluctuations in the value of the different currencies are a primary concern to internationally diversified firms.
•        For U.S. firms, the value of international assets, liabilities, and earnings are affected by the value of the dollar relative to other currencies (e.g., as the dollar value increases, the value of foreign assets decreases).
•        The value of the dollar may make U.S. firms’ exports uncompetitive in international markets because of price differentials (and, in turn make imports from other countries more attractive to U.S. customers).


8        Explain why the positive outcomes from international expansion are limited.       

Limits to International Expansion: Management Problems

As mentioned before, firms generally earn positive returns by diversifying internationally.

However, there are limits to the advantages of international diversification.
•        Greater geographic dispersion across country borders increases the costs of coordination between units and the distribution of products.
•        Trade barriers, logistical costs, cultural diversity, and other differences by country greatly complicate the implementation of an international diversification strategy.
•        Institutional and cultural factors can present strong barriers to the transfer of a firm’s competitive advantages from one country to another.
•        Marketing programs often have to be redesigned and new distribution networks established when firms expand into new countries.
•        Firms may encounter different labor costs and capital charges.
•        In general, it is difficult to effectively implement, manage, and control a firm’s international operations.


Teaching Note: The complex nature of the management challenges that face internationally diversified firms is illustrated by the following cases:
•        Robert Shapiro, CEO of Monsanto, assumed that Europe was similar to the U.S., but the firm’s genetically engineered seeds have been strongly rejected in Europe.
•        Wal-Mart made mistakes in some Latin American markets, for example, when it learned that giant parking lots do not draw huge numbers of car-less customers.  And the lots were far from the bus stops used by many Mexicans, so potential customers could not easily transport their goods home.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.                What are traditional and emerging motives that cause firms to expand internationally?  (pp. 213-217)

Traditional motives that are causing firms to expand internationally are to gain access to larger markets, to extend the product life cycle, to secure key resources, and to access low-cost factors of production (e.g., cheap labor or raw materials).

Emerging motives include the increase in pressure for global integration (driven by global communications, which lead to a global convergence of lifestyles and, in turn, universal product demand), rising obligations for cost cutting (e.g., seeking the lowest cost provider of resources or low-cost global suppliers), the realization that R&D expertise for the next new product extension may not come from the domestic market, and the emergence of large scale markets.

Figure 8.1 distills most of these motives into four “opportunities” that emerge from international expansion.  These benefits are (1) increased market size, (2) return on investment, (3) economies of scale and learning, and (4) advantages in location.

2.                What four factors provide a basis for international business-level strategies?  (pp. 217-220)

According to Michael Porter, the resources and capabilities established in a firm’s home country often enable the firm to pursue its strategy beyond the domestic market.  Porter specified a model that describes the factors contributing to the advantage of firms in a dominant global industry and associated with a specific country or regional environment.  These four factors are as follows:
•        factors of production, or the basic inputs necessary to compete in any industry, such as labor, land, capital, and infrastructure
•        demand conditions, or the nature and size of the buyers’ needs in the home market for the industry’s products or services (reflected either by segment size, which enables a firm to achieve economies of scale, or specialized demand, which enables the firm to develop a higher level of competency in producing products/services)
•        related and supporting industries, or the presence of other industries in the home market that either are related to or support the primary industry.  For example, the shoe industry in Italy benefits from a well-established industry in leather processing, people traveling to Italy to purchase leather goods, and an industry presence in leather-working machinery and design services)
•        firm strategy, structure, and rivalry are interrelated as patterns of strategy that impact (and are impacted by) industry structure, which in turn affect and are affected by competitive rivalry.

3.        What are the three international corporate-level strategies? How do they differ from each other? What factors lead to their development?  (pp. 220-222)

The three international corporate-level strategies are multidomestic, global, and transnational (see Figure 8.3).

Firms following multidomestic strategies assume that markets are different and should be segmented by national boundary.  They decentralize or delegate strategic and operating decisions to the strategic business unit in each country to enable the flexibility necessary to tailor products and services to local market preferences.  The use of multidomestic strategies usually produces expansion of local market share because of the attention paid to local demands; however, it also leads to greater uncertainty for the corporation as a whole (due to market differences and the strategies designed to fit these).  Multidomestic strategies do not allow for the achievement of economies of scale and thus can be more costly, leading firms following this strategy to decentralize strategic and operating decisions to the business units operating in each country.

Firms that follow a global strategy assume significant standardization of products across markets.  The primary focus is on efficiency through economies of scale and the leveraging of innovation across country markets.  Business-level strategy is centralized and controlled by the home office.  It requires resource sharing and coordination and cooperation between subsidiaries and across country boundaries.  Thus, a global strategy produces lower risk but may forego growth opportunities in local markets because they are less likely to identify opportunities or these require product adaptation for local market preferences.  Therefore, this strategy lacks local market responsiveness and is difficult to manage because of the need to coordinate strategies and operating decisions across country borders.

A transnational strategy seeks to achieve both global efficiency and local responsiveness.  It is difficult to realize the diverse goals of the transnational strategy because one goal requires close global coordination, while the other requires local flexibility; thus, “flexible coordination” is required to implement the transnational strategy.  Management must build a shared vision and individual commitment through an integrated network.  Effective implementation of a transnational strategy often produces higher performance than either the global or multidomestic strategy alone.

4.        What environmental trends are affecting international strategy?  (pp. 222-224)

Global strategies require integration and coordination across units (and across national boundaries) and enable the achievement of economies of scale and efficiency.  On the other hand, multidomestic strategies emphasize responsiveness to local market needs and preferences, providing the opportunity to more effectively meet customer needs and preferences.  Successfully balancing the need for local responsiveness and global efficiency implies that local responsiveness should facilitate competition based on an international differentiation strategy, while global efficiency should facilitate competition based on an international cost leadership strategy.

The threat of wars and terrorist attacks increases the risks and costs of international strategies. Furthermore, research suggests that the liability of foreignness is more difficult to overcome than once thought.

Competing in many markets may enable the firm to achieve economies of scale because of the size of the combined markets, but only if customer preferences in multiple markets do not differ significantly.  If customer preferences vary significantly among national markets, a firm might be better served to narrow its focus to a specific region.  A regional focus may enable the firm to better understand cultures, legal and social norms, and other factors that may be important to achieving strategic competitiveness.

Regional strategies also are being promoted by groups of countries that have developed trade agreements to enhance the economic power of a region.  Examples include the European Union (EU) and the Organization of American States (OAS in South America).  Another example of a regional market is the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), which is designed to facilitate free trade among the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. NAFTA may be expanded to include some South American countries and the movement of investment funds has not been only from the U.S. to Mexico as Mexican investors have made significant investments in the U.S. and some European firms have invested in Canada to gain access to this unified market.

5.        What five modes of international expansion are available, and what is the normal sequence of their use?  (pp. 224-231)

Choice of mode of entry is determined by a number of factors, and the following modes are listed in a sequence that is typical in practice.  Initial market entry will often be through export because this requires no foreign manufacturing expertise and demands investment only in distribution.  Licensing can also facilitate the product improvement necessary to enter foreign markets.  Strategic alliances have been popular because they allow partnering with an experienced player already in the targeted market.  Strategic alliances also reduce risk through the sharing of costs.  These modes therefore are best for early market development.

To secure a stronger presence, acquisitions or greenfield ventures may be required.  Both acquisitions and greenfield ventures are likely to come at later stages in the development of an international diversification strategy.  Additionally, these strategies tend to be more successful when the firm making the investment has considerable resources, particularly in the form of valuable core competencies.

Thus, there are multiple means of entering new global markets.  Firms select the entry mode that is best suited to the situation at hand.  In some instances, these options will be followed sequentially, beginning with exporting and ending with greenfield ventures.  In other cases, the firm may use several (but perhaps not all) of the different entry modes.  The decision regarding the entry mode to use is primarily a result of the industry’s competitive conditions, the country’s situation and government policies, and the firm’s unique set of resources, capabilities, and core competencies.

6.        What is the relationship between international diversification and innovation?  How does international diversification affect innovation?  What is the effect of international diversification on a firm’s returns?  (pp. 231-233)

International diversification provides the potential for firms to achieve greater returns on their innovations (through larger and/or more numerous markets) and thus lowers the often substantial risks of R&D investments.  Therefore, international diversification provides incentives for firms to innovate. In addition, international diversification may be necessary to generate the resources required to sustain a large-scale R&D operation.  The accelerating trend toward rapid technological obsolescence makes it difficult to invest in new technology and the capital-intensive operations required to take advantage of it; therefore, firms operating solely in domestic markets may find it difficult to justify such investments due to the length of time required to recoup the original investment.  Even if the time frame is extended, it may not be possible to recover the investment before the technology becomes obsolete.  Thus international diversification improves the firm’s ability to appropriate additional and necessary returns from innovation before competitors can overcome the initial competitive advantage created by the innovation.  Additionally, firms moving into international markets are exposed to new products and processes, so they can learn and integrate this knowledge in an effort to facilitate the development of more innovation.

The relationship among international diversification, innovation, and returns is complex.  Some level of performance is necessary to provide the resources to generate international diversification. International diversification provides incentives and resources to invest in research and development. Research and development, if done appropriately, should enhance the returns of the firm, thereby providing more resources for continued international diversification and investment in R&D.

7.        What are the risks of international diversification? What are the challenges of managing multinational firms?  (pp. 233-235)

Political risks are related to instability in national governments and to war, civil or international. Instability in a national government creates multiple problems.  Among these are economic risks and the uncertainty created in terms of government regulation, the presence of many (possibly conflicting) legal authorities, and potential nationalization of private assets.  For example, foreign firms that are investing in Russia may have concerns about the stability of the national government and what might happen to their investments/assets in Russia should there be a major change in government.  Different concerns exist for foreign firms investing in China where foreign investors are less worried about the potential for major changes in China’s national government than about the uncertainty of China’s regulation of foreign business investments.  

Economic risks are highly interdependent with political risks.  The primary economic risk is differences and fluctuations in the value of different currencies that can affect the value of a firm’s assets, liabilities, and earnings, as well as its price competitiveness in international markets.  

Although firms can realize many benefits by implementing an international strategy, doing so is complex and can produce greater uncertainty. For example, multiple risks are involved when a firm operates in several different countries. Firms can grow only so large and diverse before becoming unmanageable, or before the costs of managing them exceed their benefits. Other complexities include the highly competitive nature of global markets, multiple cultural environments, the security risks posed by terrorists, potentially rapid shifts in the value of different currencies, and the possible instability of some national governments.

8.        What factors limit the positive outcomes of international expansion?  (p. 235)

There are multiple reasons for the limits to the positive effects of international diversification.  For example, greater geographic dispersion across country borders increases the costs of coordination between units and the distribution of products.  Additionally, trade barriers, logistical costs, cultural diversity, and other country differences (e.g., access to raw materials, different employee skill levels) greatly complicate the implementation of international diversification.

Institutional and cultural factors often represent strong barriers to the transfer of a firm’s competitive advantages from one country to another.  Marketing programs often have to be redesigned and new distribution networks established when firms expand into new countries. In addition, they may encounter different labor costs and capital charges.  Therefore, it is difficult to effectively implement, manage, and control international operations.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES        

Exercise 1: McDonald’s: Global, Multicountry, or Transnational Strategy?

McDonald’s is one of the world’s best-known brands: the company has approximately 30,000 restaurants located in more than 100 countries, and serves 47 million customers every day.  McDonald’s opened its first international restaurant in Japan in 1971. Its Golden Arches are featured prominently in two former bastions of communism: Puskin Square in Moscow and Tiananmen Square in Beijing, China.

What strategy has McDonald’s used to achieve such visibility?  For this exercise, each group will be asked to conduct some background research on the firm and then make a brief presentation to identify the international strategy (i.e., global, multidomestic, or transnational) McDonald’s is implementing.

Individual

Use the Internet to find examples of menu variations in different countries. How much do menu items differ for a McDonald’s in the United States from other locations outside the United States?  

Groups

Review the characteristics of global, multidomestic, and transnational strategies.  Conduct additional research to assess what strategy best describes the one McDonald’s is using.  Prepare a flip chart with a single page of bullet points to explain your reasoning.

Whole Class

Each group should have five to seven minutes to explain its reasoning.  Following Q&A for each group, ask class members to vote for the respective strategy choices.


Exercise 2: Country Analysis

Black Canyon Coffee is a Bangkok-based company that operates a chain of coffee shops.  Black Canyon differentiates itself from other coffee chains (e.g., Starbucks, Caribou, Gloria Jeans) by offering a broad menu of “fusion” Asian foods as well as a range of coffee products. Although the company operates primarily in Thailand, it has retail shops in a number of neighboring countries as well.  

For this exercise, assume that you have been hired by the Black Canyon management team as consultants. Your group has been retained by management to conduct a preliminary review of several countries. The purpose of this review is to help prioritize the areas that are the most promising targets for international expansion.

Part One

Working in teams of five to seven persons, select three countries from the following list:

Malaysia        Australia
Singapore        New Zealand
Cambodia        United Arab Emirates
Japan        Taiwan
Indonesia        Philippines

Conduct research on the selected countries for the following criteria:

Economic characteristics: gross national product, wages, unemployment, inflation, and so on. Trend analysis of this data (e.g., are wages rising or falling, rate of change in wages, etc.) is preferable to single point-in-time snapshots.

Social characteristics: life expectancy, education norms, income distributions, literacy, and so on.

Risk factors: economic and political risk assessment.


The following Internet resources may be useful in your research:

        The Library of Congress has a collection of country studies.
        BBC News offers country profiles online.
        The Economist offers country profiles.
        Both the United Nations and International Monetary Fund provide statistics and research reports.
        The CIA World Factbook has profiles of different regions.
        The Global Entrepreneurship Monitor provides reports with detailed information about economic conditions and social aspects for a number of countries.
        Links can be found at http://www.countryrisk.com to a number of resources that assess both political and economic risk for individual countries.
Part Two

Based on your research, prepare a memorandum (three to four pages maximum, single-spaced) that compares and contrasts the attractiveness of the three countries selected. In your report, include a bullet point list of other topics that Black Canyon management should consider when evaluating its international expansion opportunities.


—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES        

Exercise 1: McDonald’s – Global, Multicountry, or Transnational Strategy?

The purpose of this exercise is to help students understand the differences between a global, multicountry, and transnational strategy.  Key advantages of the exercise are that McDonald’s is a familiar brand name, and that some students in a typical class may have visited a McDonald’s franchise in another country.  Additionally, the unique menu items in different locales often tempt students to mistakenly conclude that the company is pursuing a multicountry or transnational strategy.

The first part of the assignment is to have students individually search for different menu items at McDonald’s stores outside the U.S.  Some sample offerings include:

        Australia – beet root garnish
        Brazil: grilled cheese
        British Columbia – cappuccino
        China – green tea ice cream and Pork Burger
        France: Croque McDo ham & cheese
        Germany – Frankfurters and beer
        Hong Kong: Fish McDippers with Thai sweet chili sauce
        India – McVeggie and Maharaja Mac – two all lamb patties, special sauce, lettuce, cheese, pickles, onions on a sesame seed bun
        Mexico: Eggs with jalapeno peppers and refried beans
        NZ: Panini sandwich and latte
        South Africa – marshmallow shake
        Netherlands – mayonnaise topping with French fries
        Thailand – Samurai Pork burger, teriyaki style
        Uruguay – McHuevo – burger with poached egg topping
        Philippines – McSpaghetti – pasta with hot dog chunks
        Japan – Chicken Tatsuta – spicy fried chicken sandwich.

Student teams then review the characteristics of the three types of strategies, and decide which category best describes McDonalds’s.  Teams then prepare a single page flip chart with a set of bullet points, and make a short presentation to the class.  At the end of presentations, ask for a show of hands for each of the three strategy types.

Students will typically advocate multicountry and transnational options, using the different menu choices as supporting evidence.  However, the business description from a recent company 10-K filing paints a different picture:

        McDonalds restaurants serve a varied, yet-limited, value-priced menu
        Highly rationalized processes and specs to ensure product consistency across locations

It is also important to emphasize that the tailored menu items represent only a small portion of the company’s food offerings.  Additionally, store layout, processes, marketing and advertising, are all similar across regions.  In the discussion, you can emphasize how a few prominent modifications to the menu can create the appearance of greater tailoring than actually exists.

A transnational strategy would have elements of both global coordination and local responsiveness.  For students who advocate this strategy, ask the following questions:

Q: What are the coordination and control mechanisms like?
A: Many standardized rules and processes, and very little lateral communication among units in different regions.

Q: How does decision-making work?
A: Largely top-down.

Q: Are there extensive resource flows across regions?
A: Minimal.  

Overall, there is little evidence to support the argument for a transnational strategy.


Exercise 2: Country Analysis

In this exercise, students role play as consultants to Black Canyon Coffee, a Bangkok-based coffeehouse chain.  The company offers an extensive menu of Asian foods along with traditional coffee beverages.  Additional information on the company is available at their Website:  http://www.blackcanyoncoffee.com/

Students are told that the company is considering expansion to other regions.  Teams are asked to collect basic information on three countries from the following list:


Malaysia        Australia
Singapore        New Zealand
Cambodia        United Arab Emirates
Japan        Taiwan
Indonesia        Philippines

As of 2007, the company had a very limited focus outside the core Thailand market. Indonesia was their largest foreign presence with twelve locations, followed by four locations in the United Arab Emirate.  There were single stores only in Cambodia, India, Malaysia, Myanmar (formerly Burma), and Singapore.

Teams are asked to compare the three regions based on the following criteria:

        Economic characteristics

        Social characteristics

        Risk factors

The main purpose of the exercise is to acquaint students with different Internet resources for collecting information about the various countries.  Several Web-based resources are listed in the student assignment.   If your course has an online component (e.g., WebCT or Blackboard), a useful supplement to this exercise is to have teams post descriptions and links to other information resources that they discovered on their own.  Additionally, another resource for information for some of the countries is the Association for Southeast Asian Nations (http://www.aseansec.org/).


—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions       
       
1.        Given the advantages of international diversification, why do some firms choose not to expand internationally?
2.        How can a small firm diversify globally using the Internet?
3.        How do firms choose among the alternative modes for expanding internationally and moving into new markets (e.g., forming a strategic alliance versus establishing a wholly owned subsidiary)?
4.        Does international diversification affect innovation similarly in all industries? Why or why not?
5.        What is an example of political risk in expanding operations into Latin America or China?
6.        Why do some firms gain competitive advantages in international markets? Have the students explain their answers.
7.        Why is it important to understand the strategic intent of strategic alliance partners and competitors in international markets?
8.        What are the challenges associated with pursuing the transnational strategy?  Have the students explain their answers.

Ethics Questions

1.        As firms attempt to internationalize, they may be tempted to locate their facilities where product liability laws are lax in testing new products. What are some examples in which this motivation is the driving force behind international expansion?
2.        Regulation and laws regarding the sale and distribution of tobacco products are stringent in the U.S. market. Use the Internet to investigate selected U.S. tobacco firms to identify if sales are increasing in foreign markets compared to domestic markets. In what countries are sales increasing and why? What is your assessment of this practice?
3.        Some firms outsource production to foreign countries. Although the presumed rationale for such outsourcing is to reduce labor costs, examine the labor laws (for instance, the strictness of child labor laws) and laws on environmental protection in another country. What does your examination suggest from an ethical perspective?
4.        Are there markets that the U.S. government protects through subsidies and tariffs? If so, which ones and why? How will the continuing development of e-commerce potentially affect these efforts?
5.        Should the United States seek to impose trade sanctions on other countries, such as China, because of human rights violations?
6.        Latin America has been experiencing significant changes in both political orientation and economic development. Describe these changes. What strategies should foreign international businesses implement, if any, to influence government policy in these countries? Is there a chance that the political changes will reverse?

Internet Exercise
               
Convenience stores in Japan, such as the corner Seven-Eleven, and supermarkets in Britain are capitalizing on Internet commerce by offering their customers easy access, e-service, and attractive prices and selections. Located at http://www.7dream.com, Seven-Eleven allows shoppers to surf, order, and pay for merchandise with cash, the most trusted method of payment in Japan, a country with a comparatively low crime rate. Locate the website of Britain’s large supermarket chain, Tesco, at http://www.tesco.com. What types of services offered would appeal to you? What do you see as a deterrent to introducing these and other e-commerce services into supermarkets, hypermarkets, and convenience stores in the United States?

*e-project: This chapter explains the different methods of entering foreign markets. Using sources on the Internet provided by your government’s trade division, the U.S. State Department (http://www.state.gov), the U.S. Dept. of Commerce (http://www.commerce.gov), and private resources such as http://www.china-venture.com, plan the export of a new line of USA-brand baseball hats to Shanghai and Beijing, China. Assume that you plan to manufacture the hats inside China and distribute them through local stores within those two cities.

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:58:14 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 9
Cooperative Strategy

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define cooperative strategies and explain why firms use them.
2.        Define and discuss three types of strategic alliances.
3.        Name the business-level cooperative strategies and describe their use.
4.        Discuss the use of corporate-level cooperative strategies in diversified firms.
5.        Understand the importance of cross-border strategic alliances as an international cooperative strategy.
6.        Explain cooperative strategies’ risks.
7.        Describe two approaches used to manage cooperative strategies.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case    Using Cooperative Strategies at IBM
STRATEGIC ALLIANCES AS A PRIMARY TYPE OF COOPERATIVE STRATEGY
Strategic Focus   Partnering for Success at Kodak
        Three Types of Strategic Alliances
        Reasons Firms Develop Strategic Alliances  
BUSINESS-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY
        Complementary Strategic Alliances  
        Competition Response Strategy
Strategic Focus   Using Complementary Resources and Capabilities to Succeed in the Global Automobile     Industry
        Uncertainty Reducing Strategy
        Competition Reducing Strategy
        Assessment of Business-Level Cooperative Strategies  
CORPORATE-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY  
        Diversifying Strategic Alliance  
        Synergistic Strategic Alliance  
        Franchising  
        Assessment of Corporate-Level Cooperative Strategies  
INTERNATIONAL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY
NETWORK COOPERATIVE STRATEGY  
        Alliance Network Types
COMPETITIVE RISKS WITH COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES  
MANAGING COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  



LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction:  This chapter provides students with a slightly different perspective on strategic management.  It represents a shift from achieving strategic competitiveness and above-average returns through competitive strategy to achieving them through cooperative strategies—i.e., competitive advantage gained by cooperating with other firms.


OPENING CASE
Using Cooperative Strategies at IBM

IBM is a mega-organization (350,000-plus employees) that designs, manufacturers, sells, and services advanced information technologies such as computer systems, storage systems, software, and microelectronics.  The firm’s extensive lineup of products and services is grouped into three core business units—Systems and Financing, Software, and Services.  IBM has traditionally utilized three means of growth including internally generated innovation, mergers and acquisitions, and cooperative strategies.  IBM has been very successful in cooperating with other firms in leveraging its core competencies to improve its own performance.  Through cooperative strategies, IBM is able to directly work with other companies in order to deliver solutions to its growing customer-base.  But note that some of IBM’s cooperative ventures are with competitors.  This is becoming more common.  

In late 2007, IBM teamed with longtime rival Sun Microsystems. Expectations for this corporate-level cooperative strategy were high in that executives in the two companies labeled it a “comprehensive relationship” that represented a “tectonic shift in the market landscape.” Essentially, the firms intended to cooperate on server technologies so that Sun’s Solaris operating system could run on IBM’s servers and eventually on its mainframes. Gaining ground against Hewlett-Packard in the battle for leadership in the
global server market is a key objective for this cooperative arrangement.  

In other instances, IBM cooperates with companies to serve the needs of certain-sized firms. For example, IBM’s collaboration with SAP (the world’s leading provider of business software) seeks to serve the needs of mid-sized companies for world-class business applications built on reliable infrastructures.  An estimated 80 million small and mid-sized firms on a global basis can benefit from the joint services of IBM and SAP. These possibilities include working together to support the firms’ intention of expanding their cooperative relationship.

It is critical to note that IBM forms strategic alliances for different reasons. As indicated in this Opening Case, IBM has positioned itself with a competitor (Sun Microsystems) in order to offer an operating platform that is compatible with Sun software.  Both partners have adopted a cooperative strategy in order to gain ground on Hewlett-Packard.  In another example, IBM has teamed with SAP in an effort to target solutions for small and mid-sized firms.  In summary, all partners should realize new competitive advantages as a result of these cooperative relationships. How important will strategic alliances be in the future—more or less than they are today?  



1        Define cooperative strategies and explain why firms use them.       

A cooperative strategy is a strategy in which firms work together to achieve a shared objective.

Cooperative strategy is the third major alternative (internal growth and mergers and acquisitions are the other two) firms use to grow, develop value-creating competitive advantages, and create differences between them and competitors. Thus, cooperating with other firms is another strategy that is used to create value for a customer that exceeds the cost of creating that value and to create a favorable position in the marketplace relative to the five forces of competition (see Chapters 2 and 4).

A collusive strategy is a cooperative strategy through which two or more firms cooperate to raise prices above the fully competitive level.


Teaching Note: It should be noted that a more extreme form of collusion exists. Explicit collusion (which is illegal in the United States and most developed economies, except in regulated industries) exists when one firm negotiates a production output and pricing agreement with another firm in an effort to reduce competition. Used more frequently than explicit collusion, tacit collusion is considered later in the chapter in the discussion of business-level cooperative strategies.


Teaching Note: It is important to emphasize that strategic alliances can serve a number of purposes, but they are also difficult to manage.
•        Two-thirds of all alliances have serious problems in their first two years, and 70 percent fail.
•        A corporate alliance mindset (one through which both the strengths and risks of a firm’s entire set of alliance relationships are recognized and understood by all involved with alliance formation and use) increases the probability of alliance success.


STRATEGIC ALLIANCES AS A PRIMARY TYPE OF COOPERATIVE STRATEGY

A strategic alliance is a partnership between firms whereby their resources and capabilities are combined to create a competitive advantage.  

Many firms, especially large global competitors, establish multiple strategic alliances. As described in the Opening Case, IBM has formed alliances with Sun Microsystems, SAP, Lenovo, and Cisco, among others.  The goal with each cooperative relationship is different and very specific.  

In general, strategic alliance success requires cooperative behavior from all partners. Actively solving problems, being trustworthy, and consistently pursuing ways to combine partners’ resources and capabilities to create value are examples of cooperative behavior known to contribute to alliance success.


2        Define and discuss three types of strategic alliances.       
               

STRATEGIC FOCUS
Partnering for Success at Kodak

Eastman Kodak Company has a rich heritage as a worldwide supplier of photographic film products.  “Kodak” had become a generic term for film cameras and film.  But the competitive landscape has changed, thus requiring Kodak to adapt to the new environment of digital photography.  Today, Kodak focuses its competitive efforts on three primary businesses: digital photography, health imaging, and printing.  Film cameras are no longer part of Kodak’s product mix, indicating its emphasis on digital photography.  

Kodak utilizes three primary strategies (internal development, mergers and acquisitions, and cooperative strategies) for growing and enhancing its digital photography business.  It has developed cooperative relationships with well-known firms such as Sony, Canon, and Fuji.  It also has a cooperative relationship with competitors Hewlett-Packard and Xerox, actually supplying components and processes used by these competitors in their respective competitive products.  Kodak recently entered into an agreement with Sony that allows each company to have access to the other’s patent portfolio as well as sharing technological capabilities.  It’s interesting that Kodak sees Sony’s willingness to share such coveted knowledge as “validation” of the value of Kodak’s intellectual properties.  

In addition, in a rather non-traditional move, Kodak has formed a unit that is responsible for establishing cooperative relationships with universities, early-stage firms, and government labs.  Kodak sees this as a positioning effort to internally develop and leverage its innovation and technological capabilities on a worldwide basis.  Although diverse in nature, all of the relationships Kodak is establishing by using cooperative strategies are designed to facilitate growth and performance as a digitally oriented firm. Some of these relationships are with large, established firms while others are with start-up ventures. In all cases though, the focus is on digitalization as the path to Kodak’s growth and enhanced performance.

This is an interesting study in that many of Kodak’s core competencies “dried-up” with the introduction of digital photography. Kodak’s response to this technologically-induced environmental change had to be swift and well-targeted.  Its use of diverse cooperative strategies has been highly effective and timely.  Kodak has been able to lever off its reputation as the world’s leading producer of silver halide photo paper in exchange for digital photography technology in regaining competitive advantage in a high-tech market as a late-comer.  


Three Types of Strategic Alliances

Three types of strategic alliances: joint ventures, equity strategic alliances, and nonequity strategic alliances.

A joint venture is an alliance where a new, independent firm is formed from two or more partners, with each partner firm contributing some of their resources and capabilities.

Joint ventures are effective in establishing long-term relationships and in transferring tacit knowledge. Because it can’t be codified, tacit knowledge is learned through experiences such as those taking place when people from partner firms work together in a joint venture.

An equity strategic alliance is an alliance where partner firms own unequal shares of equity in a venture formed by combining some of their resources and capabilities to create a competitive advantage.   For example, Citigroup Inc. has formed a strategic alliance with Shanghai Pudong Development Bank Co. through an equity investment totaling 25 percent. This equity strategic alliance served as a launch pad for Citigroup to enter the credit-card business in China.

A nonequity strategic alliance is an alliance where two or more firms contract to share some of their resources and capabilities to create a competitive advantage.  In this type of strategic alliance,
•        firms do not establish a separate independent company and therefore don’t take equity positions.
•        These are less formal and demand fewer partner commitments.
•        These are unsuitable for complex projects requiring effective transfers of tacit knowledge between partners.

Typically taking the form of a nonequity strategic alliance, outsourcing is the purchase of a value-creating primary or support activity from another firm.

Other types of nonequity strategic alliances include licensing, distribution agreements, supply contracts, and marketing agreements (such as code-sharing agreements among airlines).

Reasons Firms Develop Strategic Alliances

Technology companies cannot possibly acquire the technology they need fast enough, so partnering becomes essential.  Some believe strategic alliances may be the most powerful trend in American business in a century.

Among other benefits, strategic alliances allow partners to create value that they couldn’t develop by acting independently and to enter markets more quickly than they could without a partner.

In large firms, alliances account for more than 20 percent of revenue and are a prime vehicle for firm growth.

In some industries (e.g., airlines), firms compete more alliance against alliance than firm against firm.

Firms form strategic alliances to reduce competition, enhance their competitive capabilities, gain access to resources, take advantage of opportunities, and build strategic flexibility. To do so means that they must select the right partners and develop trust.

Slow-Cycle Markets

Firms in slow-cycle markets often use strategic alliances to enter restricted markets or to establish franchises in new markets (especially global markets).

Slow-cycle markets are becoming rare in the twenty-first century competitive landscape for several reasons, including the privatization of industries and economies, the rapid expansion of the Internet’s capabilities in terms of the quick dissemination of information, and the speed with which advancing technologies make quickly imitating even complex products possible.  

Firms competing in slow-cycle markets should recognize the future likelihood that they’ll encounter situations in which their competitive advantages become partially sustainable (in the instance of a standard-cycle market) or unsustainable (in the case of a fast-cycle market). Cooperative strategies can be helpful to firms making the transition from relatively sheltered markets to more competitive ones.

Fast-Cycle Markets

Fast-cycle markets are entrepreneurial and dynamic, with new products or services imitated rapidly.

Cooperative strategies are used to increase the speed of product development or market entry or to improve strategic competitiveness.

Standard-Cycle Markets

In standard-cycle markets (which are often large and oriented toward economies of scale), alliances are more likely to be between partners with complementary resources and capabilities.  Companies also may cooperate in standard-cycle markets to gain market power.


3        Name the business-level cooperative strategies and describe their use.       

BUSINESS-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY

A business-level cooperative strategy is used to help the firm improve its performance in individual product markets. There are four business-level cooperative strategies (see Figure 9.1).

A firm forms a business-level cooperative strategy when it believes combining its resources and capabilities with one or more partners creates competitive advantages that it can’t create by itself and that will lead to success in a specific product market.

Figure Note: Figure 9.1 outlines options for business-level cooperative strategies.


FIGURE 9.1
Business-Level Cooperative Strategies

The four general business level cooperative strategies are:
•        Complementary strategic alliances (vertical and horizontal)
•        Competition response strategy
•        Uncertainty reducing strategy
•        Competition reducing strategy




Complementary Strategic Alliances

Complementary strategic alliances are partnerships that are designed to take advantage of market opportunities by combining partner firms’ resources and capabilities in complementary ways so that new value is created.


Vertical Complementary Strategic Alliance

A vertical complementary strategic alliance is formed between firms that agree to use their resources and capabilities in different stages of the value chain to create value.  Oftentimes, vertical complementary alliances are formed in reaction to environmental changes – i.e., they serve as a means of adaptation to the environmental changes.  

A critical issue for firms is how much technological knowledge they should share with their partner. They need the partners to have adequate knowledge to perform the task effectively and to be complimentary to their capabilities. Part of this decision depends on the trust and social capital developed between the partners.


Figure Note: Two types of complementary strategic alliances—vertical and horizontal partnership agreements—are illustrated in Figure 9.2.


FIGURE 9.2
Vertical and Horizontal Complementary Strategic Alliances

A vertical complementary strategic alliance links suppliers, manufacturers, and/or distributors and represents linkages between different segments of each partner’s value chain.

A horizontal complementary strategic alliance is an arrangement that links similar segments of competing firms’ value chains, such as linking R&D or new product development activities.



Horizontal Complementary Strategic Alliance

Horizontal complementary strategic alliances are partnerships that link similar activities of firms.  Horizontal complementary alliances are used to increase each firm’s competitive advantage and often focus on the long-term development of product and service technology

Importantly, horizontal alliances may require equal investments of resources by the partners but they rarely provide equal benefits to the partners. There are several potential reasons for the imbalance in benefits.
•        Frequently, the partners have different opportunities as a result of the alliance.
•        Partners may learn at different rates and have different capabilities to leverage the complimentary resources provided in the alliance.
•        Some firms are more effective in managing alliances and in deriving the benefits from them.
•        The partners may have different reputations in the market thus differentiating the types of actions firms can legitimately take in the marketplace.


Competition Response Strategy

Cooperative strategic alliances also may be established to enable partner firms to respond to major strategic actions initiated by competitors.  Because they can be difficult to reverse and expensive to operate, strategic alliances are primarily formed to respond to strategic rather than tactical actions.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Using Complementary Resources and Capabilities to Succeed in the Global Automobile Industry

Nissan and Renault are automobile manufacturers and each suffered from being small and dealing with the standard shortcomings associated with lack of scale and scope. Both firms had similar cost structures and neither firm was competitive.  Neither was able to generate any innovation in its product line.  In 1999, both firms entered into a strategic alliance.  This alliance was the first of its kind to involve a Japanese
and French company, each with its own corporate culture and brand identity. Horizontal in nature, the Nissan/Renault partnership is an example of an equity strategic alliance. Renault holds a 44.4 percent stake in Nissan which in turn holds 15 percent of Renault’s shares.  Nissan has realized a significant profit turn-around as a result of the alliance, as has Renault with a goal of becoming the most profitable European auto manufacturer by 2010.  The firms participate in a number of joint activities to achieve scale and scope economies, such as sharing production platforms (the partners intend to share 10 platforms by 2010) and
power-trains (engines and transmissions).  To generate scope economies, the firms combine their resources and capabilities to cooperate in several activities including sales, purchasing, and the use of common distribution channels in Europe. In a comprehensive and summarized sense, this alliance finds Nissan and Renault cooperating in terms of “global product development, financial policy, and corporate strategy.”

The Nissan-Renault study can be referenced to give students exposure to what can happen when two struggling companies combine specific efforts in order to generate economies of scope and scale.  The result is not merely surviving as both firms are now thriving in a highly competitive industry.  Students should be reminded that cooperative mergers are both reactive and proactive.  This Focus demonstrates how two mediocre auto-makers have been able to develop a win-win scenario through some very basic consolidation and sharing.   




Uncertainty Reducing Strategy

Firms also may form strategic alliances to hedge against risk and uncertainty (especially in fast-cycle markets).

Alliances are often used where uncertainty exists, such as in entering new product markets or emerging economies. For example, Dutch bank ABN AMRO signed on to a venture called ShoreCap International which will invest capital in and advise local financial institutions that do small and microbusiness lending in developing countries. Through this cooperative strategy with other financial institutions, ShoreBank (the venture’s leading sponsor) hopes to be able to reduce the risk of providing credit to smaller borrowers in disadvantaged regions. It also hopes to reduce poverty in the regions where it invests.

In other cases, firms form alliances to reduce the uncertainty associated with developing new product or technology standards.  For example, the alliance between France Telecom and Microsoft is a competition response alliance for France Telecom but it is an uncertainty reducing alliance for Microsoft. Microsoft is using the alliance to learn more about the telecom industry and business. It wants to learn how it can develop software to satisfy needs in this industry. By partnering with a firm in this industry, it is reducing its uncertainty about the market and software needs. And, the alliance is clearly designed to develop new products so the alliance reduces the uncertainty for both firms by combining their knowledge and capabilities.


Competition-Reducing Strategy

Explicit collusion exists when firms get together to negotiate production output and pricing agreements with the goal of reducing competition.  Explicit collusion strategies are illegal in the United States and most developed economies (except in regulated industries).


Teaching Note: Some firms may adopt explicit alliances to reduce competition that is perceived as potentially destructive or excessive. Examples include the following:
•        OPEC, which manages the price and output of oil companies in member countries
•        manufacturing and distribution cartels in Japan
•        industry trade organizations
•        government-industry relationships
•        direct collusion or price-fixing agreements among participants in an industry or between industry participants and government agencies


There are implicit cooperative alliances, such as tacit collusion, which exist when several firms in an industry observe others’ competitive actions and respond to reduce industry output below the potential competitive level to maintain higher-than-competitive prices.  Another form of tacit collusion is mutual forbearance, by which firms avoid competitive attacks against rivals they meet in multiple markets.  Rivals learn a great deal about each other when engaging in multimarket competition, including how to deter the effects of their rival’s competitive attacks and responses. Given what they know about each other as a competitor, firms choose not to engage in what could be destructive competitions in multiple product markets.  

Tacit collusion tends to be used as a business-level competition-reducing strategy in highly concentrated industries.

At a broad level in free-market economies, governments must determine how rivals can collaborate to increase their competitiveness without violating established regulations.


Assessment of Business-Level Cooperative Strategies

Firms use business-level strategies to develop competitive advantages that can contribute to successful positioning and performance in individual product markets. To develop a competitive advantage using an alliance, the particular set of resources and capabilities that is combined and shared in a particular manner through the alliance must be valuable, rare, imperfectly imitable, and nonsubstitutable.

Complementary business-level strategic alliances (especially vertical ones) are the most likely to create sustainable competitive advantage. Horizontal complementary alliances are sometimes difficult to maintain because they are often formed between rival firms.

Although strategic alliances designed to respond to competition and to reduce uncertainty can also create competitive advantages, these advantages tend to be more temporary than those developed through complementary (vertical and horizontal) strategic alliances. The primary reason is that complementary alliances have a stronger focus on the creation of value compared to competition-reducing and uncertainty-reducing alliances, which are far more reactive.

Of the four business-level cooperative strategies, the competition-reducing strategy has the lowest probability of creating a sustainable competitive advantage.  This suggests that companies using such competition reducing business-level strategic alliances should carefully monitor them as to the degree to which they are facilitating the firm’s efforts to develop and successfully create competitive advantages.


4        Discuss the use of corporate-level cooperative strategies in diversified firms.       

CORPORATE-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY

Corporate-level cooperative strategies are designed to facilitate product and market diversification (discussed in Chapter 6) through a means other than a merger or an acquisition.  When a firm seeks to diversify into markets in which the host nation’s government prevents mergers and acquisitions, alliances become an especially appropriate option. Corporate-level strategic alliances are also attractive compared to mergers and particularly acquisitions, because they require fewer resource commitments and permit greater flexibility in terms of efforts to diversify partners’ operations.  An alliance can be used as a way to determine if the partners might benefit from a future merger or acquisition between them.


Figure Note: Figure 9.3 shows the most common corporate-level cooperative strategies.


FIGURE 9.3
Corporate-Level Cooperative Strategies

The three corporate level strategies are:
•        Diversifying strategic alliances
•        Synergistic strategic alliances
•        Franchising



Diversifying Strategic Alliance

A diversifying strategic alliance is a corporate-level cooperative strategy in which firms share some of their resources and capabilities to diversify into new product or market areas.

Teaching Note: Note that a diversification alliance enables firms that do not want to grow by merger or acquisition to achieve growth by forming strategic alliances. Exiting a strategic alliance is less difficult and less costly as compared to divesting an acquisition that did not contribute expected levels of strategic success. In addition, some governments restrict acquisitions (especially horizontal ones) when regulators conclude that horizontal acquisitions foster explicit collusion.

Teaching Note: Firms might form a diversifying alliance to determine if a future merger would benefit both parties—e.g., the formation of technology partnerships between GM and Toyota that may lead to broader linkups between the automakers.  


Highly diverse networks of alliances can lead to poorer performance by partner firms.   However, cooperative ventures are also used to reduce diversification in firms that have overdiversified.  For example, Fujitsu, realizing that memory chips were becoming a financial burden, dumped its flash-memory business into a joint venture company controlled by Advanced Micro Devices. This alliance helped Fujitsu to refocus on its core businesses.


Synergistic Strategic Alliance

Synergistic strategic alliances allow firms to combine some of their resources and capabilities to create joint economies of scope between partner firms.  These alliances:
•        are similar to business-level horizontal complementary strategic alliances at the business level
•        create synergy across multiple functions or multiple businesses

SBC Communications and EchoStar Communications were synergistically diversified by the arrangement to offer satellite TV billing services through SBC’s system. Thus, a synergistic strategic alliance is different from a complementary business-level alliance in that it diversifies both firms into a new business, but in a synergistic way.

Teaching Note: Through technology-oriented synergistic alliances, Toyota is attempting to gain access to technologies that it has had difficulty developing on its own.  Avoiding equity alliances, the carmaker elected to link up with GM to develop electric, hybrid, and fuel cell vehicles.  The firm has also joined Volkswagen for intelligent transportation systems, recycling, and marketing.  In addition, it has a tie-up with Panasonic EV Energy for batteries.

Franchising

Franchising is a corporate-level cooperative strategy used by a franchisor to describe and control the sharing of its resources and capabilities.   In other words, a franchise refers to a contract between two legally independent companies that allows the franchisee to sell the franchisor’s product or do business under its trademarks over a given time and location.

Franchising is a popular strategy.  In fact, the companies using it account for one-third of annual U.S. retail sales while competing in over 75 industries.  Already frequently used in developed nations, franchising is expected to account for significant portions of growth in emerging economies in the twenty-first century.

The most successful franchising strategy is one in which the partners (i.e., franchisor, franchisees) work closely together. The franchisor is to develop programs to transfer knowledge and skills to the franchisees that are needed to successfully compete at the local level, and franchisees should provide feedback to the franchisor regarding how their units could become more effective and efficient.

Franchising is a particularly attractive strategy to use in fragmented industries where no firm or small set of firms has a dominant share in the industry, making it possible for a company to gain a large market share by consolidating independent companies through contractual relationships.

Assessment of Corporate-Level Cooperative Strategies

Compared to those at the business-level, corporate-level cooperative strategies are usually broader in scope and more complex, making them relatively more costly.

Firms able to develop corporate-level cooperative strategies and manage them in ways that are valuable, rare, imperfectly imitable, and nonsubstitutable (see Chapter 3) develop a competitive advantage that is added to advantages gained through the activities of individual cooperative strategies.

Teaching Note: Corporate-level strategic decisions, such as pursuing cooperative strategies and diversification, may be the result of managerial motives instead of the appropriate desire to achieve strategic competitiveness and earn above-average returns for a company.  Firms need corporate governance mechanisms to ensure managers do not use alliance strategies inappropriately.  For example, without governance, top-level managers can use alliances to:
•        increase the size of the business for the purpose of increasing his/her own compensation
•        increase his/her worth or value to—or extend his/her tenure with—the firm by being the only top-level manager who understands the intricacies of a network of alliance partners

Note: Managers may use the intricacy of alliance networks to enrich their own position in the firm since alliances can be built on an upper-level manager’s personal contacts which may be lost if that person leaves the company, thus making dismissal difficult.


5        Understand the importance of cross-border strategic alliances as an international cooperative strategy.       

INTERNATIONAL COOPERATIVE STRATEGY

A cross-border strategic alliance is an international cooperative strategy in which firms with headquarters in different nations combine some of their resources and capabilities to create a competitive advantage.

There are several reasons for the increasing use of cross-border strategic alliances:
•        Multinational corporations outperform firms operating on only a domestic basis.
•        A firm can form cross-border strategic alliances to leverage core competencies that are the foundation of its domestic success to expand into international markets.
•        Limited domestic growth opportunities also cause firms to use cross-border alliances.
•        Government economic policies can influence firms to form cross-border alliances.
•        Strategic alliances with local partners can help firms overcome certain liabilities of moving into a foreign country, such as lack of knowledge of the local culture or institutional norms.
•        Firms also use cross-border alliances to help transform themselves to better use their competitive advantages to exploit opportunities surfacing in the rapidly changing global economy.

In general, cross-border alliances are more complex and risky than domestic strategic alliances.


NETWORK COOPERATIVE STRATEGY

Rather than cooperative alliances between two or very few firms, alliances can also be expanded to include a larger number (or network) of partners as a complement to other forms of cooperative strategy.  This is a network cooperative strategy.

A network cooperative strategy is particularly effective when it is formed by geographically clustered firms, as in California’s Silicon Valley and Singapore’s Silicon Island.

Teaching Note: The strategic approach of networks will be discussed in this Chapter while the structural characteristics of network organizations will be covered in Chapter 11.


Alliance Network Types

An important advantage of a network cooperative strategy is that firms gain access to the partners of their partners.

The set of partnerships, such as strategic alliances, that result from the use of a network cooperative strategy is commonly called an alliance network.

Stable alliance networks often appear in mature industries with predictable market cycles and demand.  Through a stable alliance network, firms try to extend their competitive advantages to other settings while continuing to profit from operations in their core, relatively mature industry.

Teaching Note: An example of a U.S. firm’s stable network is Nike’s long-established relationships between the firm and its global network of suppliers and distributors.


Dynamic alliance networks often are used in industries with frequent technological innovation and short product life cycles.  Thus, dynamic alliance networks are primarily used to stimulate rapid, value-creating product innovations and subsequent successful market entries.


6        Explain cooperative strategies’ risks.       

COMPETITIVE RISKS WITH COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES

Many cooperative strategies fail. Evidence suggests that two-thirds of cooperative strategies have serious problems in their first two years and that as many as 70 percent of them eventually fail. This failure rate suggests that even when the partnership has potential synergies, alliance success can be elusive.

The risks associated with cooperative strategies are significant because the firms that are cooperating may also be competing with each other.  These risks include:
•        poor contract development that may result in one (or more) of the partners acting opportunistically and taking advantage of other venture partners
•        misrepresentation of partner firms’ competencies by misstating or exaggerating an intangible resource such as knowledge of local market conditions
•        failure of partner firms to make complementary resources available to the venture as agreed
•        the possibility that a firm may make investments that are specific to that alliance while its partner does not

Figure Note: Competitive risks of cooperative strategies, as well as risk management approaches, are summarized in Figure 9.4.



FIGURE 9.4
Managing Competitive Risks in Cooperative Strategies

As Figure 9.4 indicates,

the competitive risks of cooperative strategies are
•        inadequate contracts
•        misrepresentation of competencies
•        partners failing to use complimentary resources
•        holding alliance partners’ specific investments hostage

and can be managed by
•        detailed contracts and monitoring
•        developing trusting relationships

to ensure that the strategy creates value.



7        Describe two approaches used to manage cooperative strategies.       

MANAGING COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES

Cooperative strategies are an important option for firms competing in the global economy; however, they are complex and challenging to manage.

The two basic approaches to managing cooperative strategies are:
•        cost minimization
•        opportunity maximization

In the cost-minimization approach, the firm develops formal contracts with its partners. These contracts specify how the cooperative strategy is to be monitored and how partner behavior is controlled. The goal of this approach is to minimize the cooperative strategy’s cost and to prevent opportunistic behavior by partners.

The opportunity-maximization approach focuses on a partnership’s value-creation opportunities.  In this case, partners are prepared to take advantage of unexpected opportunities to learn from each other and to explore additional marketplace possibilities. Less formal contracts, with fewer constraints on partners’ behaviors, make it possible for partners to explore how their resources and capabilities can be shared in multiple value-creating ways.

Firms can successfully use both approaches to manage cooperative strategies. However, the costs to monitor the cooperative strategy are greater with cost minimization, in that writing detailed contracts and using extensive monitoring mechanisms is expensive, even though the approach is intended to reduce alliance costs.

As a strategic asset, trust can enable partner firms to reduce the cost of contracting and monitoring because the probability of opportunistic behavior is reduced if partners are able to trust each other. Trust also may enable the venture to take advantage of unforeseen opportunities.

Because trust enables partner firms to reduce venture-related contracting and monitoring costs and increase venture flexibility, a venture between trusted partners is more likely both to reduce costs and add/create value.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.                What is the definition of cooperative strategy and why is this strategy important to firms competing in the twenty-first century competitive landscape?  (p. 246)

A cooperative strategy is a strategy in which firms work together to achieve a shared objective. Cooperative strategy is the third major alternative (internal growth and mergers and acquisitions are the other two) firms use to grow, develop value-creating competitive advantages, and create differences between them and competitors. Thus, cooperating with other firms is another strategy that is used to create value for a customer that exceeds the cost of creating that value and to create a favorable position in the marketplace. The increasing importance of cooperative strategies as a growth engine shouldn’t be underestimated. This means that effective competition in the twenty-first century landscape results when the firm learns how to cooperate with, as well as compete against, competitors.

2.                What is a strategic alliance? What are the three types of strategic alliances firms use to develop a competitive advantage?  (pp. 247-249)

A strategic alliance is a partnership between firms whereby each firm’s resources and capabilities are combined to create a competitive advantage.

The three types of explicit cooperative strategies mentioned are (1) joint ventures, (2) equity strategic alliances, and (3) nonequity strategic alliances.  However, tacit collusion and mutual forbearance (the latter being a form of tacit collusion) are also included as implicit cooperative arrangements.

1)        A joint venture is an alliance where a new, independent firm is formed by two or more partners who share some of their resources and capabilities to develop a competitive advantage.

2)        An equity strategic alliance is an alliance where partner firms share resources and capabilities, but own unequal shares of equity in a new venture. Many foreign direct investments are completed through equity strategic alliances, such as those involving Japanese or U.S. companies operating in China.

3)        A nonequity strategic alliance is an alliance where a contract is granted to a company to supply, produce, or distribute a firm’s products or services.  No equity sharing is involved.  Other types of cooperative contractual arrangements concern marketing and information sharing.  Because they do not involve the forming of separate ventures or equity investments, nonequity strategic alliances are less formal and demand fewer commitments from partners as compared to both joint ventures and equity strategic alliances.  However, the attributes of nonequity alliances make them unsuitable for complex projects where success is to be influenced by effective transfer of tacit knowledge between partners.

3.                What are the four business-level cooperative strategies and what are the differences among them?   (pp. 252-257)

Complementary strategic alliances are partnerships that are designed to take advantage of market opportunities by combining partner firms’ assets in complementary ways so that new value is created.  These are classified as either vertical or horizontal complementary strategic alliances.

Vertical complementary strategic alliances are formed between firms that agree to use their skills and capabilities in different stages of the value chain to create value.  

Horizontal complementary strategic alliances represent partnerships that link similar activities of rival firms.  Horizontal complementary alliances often are used to increase each firm’s strategic competitiveness, focusing on the long-term development of product and service technology and distribution opportunities.

Competition response strategies are cooperative strategic alliances that are established to enable partner firms to respond to major strategic actions (but typically not tactical actions) initiated by competitors or to enable firms to more effectively compete in emerging markets.  

Uncertainty reducing strategies represent cooperative alliances that are used as strategic options to hedge against risk and uncertainty.  Thus, the rapidly changing 21st-century competitive landscape may create uncertain outcomes for firms as their rivals form and use cooperative strategies to reduce their own risks.  (For example, firms form alliances to reduce the uncertainty associated with developing new product or technology standards.)  However, in terms of competitive dynamics, one firm’s alliances can create risks and uncertainty for its competitors.  

Competition reducing strategies are cooperative strategies adopted by some firms to reduce competition that they perceive as potentially destructive or excessive.  Examples of competition reduction strategies include explicit collusion and tacit collusion (or mutual forbearance).  Alliances formed to reduce competition are likely to result in inefficiencies in both manufacturing and service industries and these often lead to below-average firm performance in international markets.

Tacit collusion exists when several firms in an industry cooperate tacitly to reduce industry output below the potential competitive level, thereby increasing prices above the competitive level.  Most strategic alliances, however, exist not to reduce industry output but to increase learning, facilitate growth, or increase returns and strategic competitiveness.  Cooperative agreements may also be explicitly collusive, but this is illegal in the United States, unless regulated by the government (for example, the telecommunications industries prior to deregulation).  Mutual forbearance is tacit recognition of interdependence, but it has the same effect as explicit collusion in that it reduces output and increases prices.

4.                What are the three corporate-level cooperative strategies? How do firms use each one to create a competitive advantage?  (pp. 258-261)

Strategic alliances used to facilitate product or market diversification are called corporate-level cooperative strategies.  Three types of strategic alliances are used at the corporate level to facilitate cooperation among diversified companies.  As shown in Figure 9.3, the corporate-level strategic alliances are called diversifying alliances, synergistic alliances, and franchising.  However, it is instructive to note that managing a large number of strategic alliances is difficult.  Therefore, if relatively few firms are able to do it well, alliance management in itself may represent a source of competitive advantage.  Nonetheless, while alliance networks may enable firms to achieve industry leadership, they also involve risks and their management is a complex and potentially costly challenge.

Diversifying strategic alliances allow a company to expand into new product or market areas without completing a merger or an acquisition. A corporate-level strategic alliance is a viable strategic option for a firm that wants to grow but chooses not to merge with or acquire another company to do so.  Such corporate-level alliances provide some of the potential synergistic benefits of a merger or acquisition, but with less risk and greater levels of flexibility.  These benefits accrue to a firm because exiting a strategic alliance is less difficult and costly as compared to divesting an acquisition that did not contribute as expected to strategic success.  

Synergistic strategic alliances allow firms to share resources and capabilities to create joint economies of scope. Similar to the horizontal complementary strategic alliance that is used at the business level, synergistic strategic alliances create synergy across multiple functions or multiple businesses controlled by partner firms.  Two firms might, for example, create joint research and manufacturing facilities that they both use to their advantage and thus attain economies of scope without a merger.

Franchising is a cooperative strategy a firm uses to spread risk and to use resources and capabilities productively, but without merging with or acquiring another company.  As a cooperative strategy, franchising is based on a contractual relationship concerning a franchise that is developed between two parties—the franchisee and the franchisor.  Thus, franchising is an alternative to diversification.  Defined formally, a franchise is a contractual arrangement between two independent companies whereby the franchisor grants the right to the franchisee to sell the franchisor’s product or do business under its trademarks over a given territory and time period.  The foundation for this cooperative strategy’s success is the ability to gain economies of scale by forming multiple units while deriving operational efficiencies from the work of individual units competing in specific local markets.  Franchising permits relatively strong centralized control and facilitates knowledge transfer without significant capital investment.  Brand name is thought to be the most effective competitive advantage for a franchise since this can signal both tangible and intangible consumer benefits.  Franchising reduces financial risk because franchisors often invest some of their own capital in the local venture, and this capital investment motivates franchisors to perform well by emphasizing quality, standards, and a brand name that are associated with the franchisee’s original business.  Because of these potential benefits, franchising may provide growth with less risk than diversification.  

5.                Why do firms use cross-border strategic alliances?  (pp. 261-262)

The first reason firms decide to use cross-border strategic alliances is that multinational corporations usually outperform firms operating in domestic-only markets.  In the context of cooperative strategies, this general evidence suggests that a firm can form cross-border strategic alliances to leverage core competencies that are the foundation of its domestic success to expand into international markets.

Second, cross-border alliances can be used when opportunities to grow through either acquisitions or alliances are limited within a firm’s home nation.

The third reason firms choose to form cross-border alliances revolves around government policies.   Some countries regard local ownership as an important national policy objective, so investment by foreign firms may be allowed only through cooperative agreements such as cross-border alliances. This is often true in newly industrialized and developing countries with emerging markets.  Cooperative arrangements can be helpful to foreign partners because the local partner can provide information about local markets, capital sources, and management skills.

The fourth primary reason cross-border alliances are used is to help a firm transform itself in light of rapidly changing environmental conditions.  

In general, cross-border alliances are complex and more risky than domestic strategic alliances. However, the fact that firms competing internationally tend to outperform domestic-only competitors suggests the importance of learning how to diversify into international markets. Compared to mergers and acquisitions, cross-border alliances may be a better way to learn this process, especially in the early stages of the firms’ geographic diversification efforts.

6.        What risks are firms likely to experience as they use cooperative strategies?  (pp. 263-265)

Because firms that are cooperating may also be competing with each other, four significant risks accompany cooperative strategies.   As summarized in Figure 9.4, the primary competitive risks associated with cooperative strategies are:
(1)        poor contract development that may result in one (or more) of the partners acting opportunistically and taking advantage of other venture partners;
(2)        misrepresentation of a partner firm’s competencies by misstating or exaggerating an intangible resource such as knowledge of local market conditions;
(3)        failure of partner firm(s) to make complementary resources available to the venture; and
(4)        being held hostage through specific investments (whose value is associated only with the venture or the local partner), especially if laws in a country do not protect investments in the case of nationalization.

7.                What are the differences between the cost-minimization approach and the opportunity-maximization approach to managing strategic alliances?  (pp. 265-266)

Two primary approaches are used to manage cooperative strategies.  In one instance, the firm develops formal contracts with its partners.  These contracts specify how the cooperative strategy is to be monitored and partner behavior controlled.  The goal is to minimize the cost of an alliance and to prevent opportunistic behavior by a partner, thus the use of the term cost-minimization.

The focus of the second managerial approach is on maximizing value-creation opportunities as the partners participate in the alliance.  In this case, partners are prepared to take advantage of unexpected opportunities to learn from each other and to explore additional marketplace possibilities.  Trust-based relationships and complementary assets must exist between partners for this approach to be used successfully.  When trust exists, there is less need to write detailed formal contracts to specify each firm’s alliance behaviors, and the cooperative relationship tends to be more stable.  Research showing that trust between partners increases the likelihood of alliance success seems to highlight the benefits of the opportunity maximization approach to managing cooperative strategies.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES        

Exercise 1: Starbucks and Dreyers

The United States is the largest producer of frozen dairy desserts in the world. Although many of these products are destined for export, a substantial quantity is consumed within the United States as well. As evidence, the U.S. Department of Agriculture reports that the average American consumes between fifteen and sixteen pounds of ice cream each year.  Additionally, Americans consume another ten pounds per year of other frozen dairy desserts, including lowfat ice cream, yogurt, and related products.

In 1996, Starbucks and Dreyers Ice Cream (a subsidiary of Nestle) launched a series of coffee-flavored ice cream products. These products, with names such as Java Chip, Italian Roast Coffee, and Caffe Almond Fudge, contained actual coffee and were sold in supermarkets.  

Group

Working in groups of five to seven persons, answer the following questions:
1.        What type of strategic alliance did Starbucks and Dreyers form?
2.        In what type of market are they competing?
3.        What is the rationale for the alliance between these two firms?
Exercise 2: The Swatchmobile

Swatch is well known for its line of stylish, affordable wristwatches. In the early 1990s, Swatch CEO Nicholas Hayek had a novel idea to diversify his company’s product offerings: a stylish, affordable automobile. His vision was to create a two-seater car with minimal storage space. Fuel-efficient, he expected these cars would be highly attractive to younger European car buyers. Drawing on the company’s watch designs, the Swatch car was intended to have removable body panels so that owners could change the car’s look on a whim.

Swatch initially partnered with Volkswagen, but the alliance never reached production.  In 1994, Swatch partnered with Mercedes-Benz. The vehicle was named SMART, which stood for “Swatch Mercedes Art.”

Using Internet resources, answer the following questions:
1.        What resources did each partner bring to the partnership?
2.        How successful has the partnership been for each company?
3.        Which company seems to be deriving the greatest benefit from the partnership and why?

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES        

Exercise 1: Starbucks and Dreyers

The purpose of this exercise is to illustrate the key aspects of cooperative strategy.  Students are asked to answer the following questions:

4.        What type of strategic alliance did Starbucks and Dreyers form?
5.        In what type of market are they competing?
6.        What is the rationale for the alliance between these two firms?
The answer to the first question is that Starbucks and Dreyers pursued a joint venture.  According to Starbucks corporate filings, the venture was a 50-50 equity split between the two partners.  Incidentally, Starbucks used the same format with Pepsi for their line of bottled frappuccino beverages.

Regarding the second question, students may argue whether this segment is best described as slow- or standard-cycle.  Key elements to consider are (a) whether imitation is shielded for a relatively long period of time, and (b) whether imitation is costly.  Other premium ice cream brands offer coffee flavors – e.g., Haagen Daz offers coffee, and Lapperts (based in California) offers a Kona flavor.  Additionally, in 2006, Caribou Coffee announced a venture with a dairy to launch their own branded line of coffee-flavored ice cream.

The answer to the third question is clearly to gain access to complementary resources.  Dreyers provides expertise and a strong market position in ice cream, while Starbucks offers a well-recognized brand for coffee.

In class discussion of this venture, students may inquire about the success of the joint venture.  The following points may be helpful in guiding the discussion:
        Coffee has traditionally been a niche flavor in the ice cream market.  However, according to the Chicago Sun Times (8/13/1997), demand for upscale brand coffee ice creams grew by 36 percent in the year following the launch of the Starbucks – Dreyers venture.  
        In 1998, Business Week rated the Starbucks – Dreyers ice cream as a ‘best new product.' Additionally, the BW article (1/12/98) noted that the Starbucks and Dreyers brand had captured 24 percent of the coffee ice cream segment.  


The following statistics on market share and consumption trends may also be useful during class discussion:


Frozen Dairy Consumption Trends
U.S. per capita food availability
Frozen dairy products
Pounds per capita per year
Year        Ice cream        Lowfat ice cream        Sherbet        Frozen yogurt        Other frozen        Total frozen dairy
2005        15.4        5.9        .89        1.3        .57        24.1
2004        15.0        7.2        1.1        1.3        .63        25.3
2003        16.4        7.5        1.2        1.4        .57        27.1
2002        16.7        6.5        1.3        1.5        .62        26.6
2001        16.3        7.3        1.2        1.5        .69        27.0
2000        16.7        7.3        1.2        2.0        .90        28.0
1999        16.7        7.5        1.3        1.9        1.2        28.6
1998        16.3        8.1        1.3        2.1        1.3        29.0
1997        16.1        7.8        1.3        2.0        1.1        28.2
1996        15.6        7.5        1.3        2.5        1.2        28.2
1995        15.5        7.4        1.3        3.4        1.4        29.0
1994        16.0        7.5        1.3        3.4        1.4        29.6
1993        16.0        6.9        1.3        3.5        1.5        29.1
1992        16.2        7.0        1.2        3.1        1.2        28.7
1991        16.3        7.4        1.1        3.5        .85        29.2
1990        15.8        7.7        1.2        2.8        .90        28.5
1989        16.1        8.4        1.3        2.0        .91        28.7
1988        17.3        8.0        1.3        NA         1.2        27.7
1987        18.4        7.4        1.2        NA         1.2        28.2
1986        18.4        7.2        1.3        NA         1.0        27.9
1985        18.1        6.9        1.3        NA         1.5        27.9
1984        18.2        7.0        1.3        NA         .76        27.2
1983        18.1        6.9        1.3        NA         .76        27.1
1982        17.6        6.6        1.3        NA         .86        26.4
1981        17.4        7.0        1.3        NA         .86        26.5
1980        17.5        7.1        1.2        NA         .55        26.4

Source:  http://www.ers.usda.gov


Ice Cream Market Share

Brand        Dollar Sales
(millions)        % change from prior year        Unit Sales
(millions)        % change from prior year
Private Label        805        -4.2        279        -3.0
Breyers        607        12.4        188        20.3
Dreyers Edys Grand        447        3.5        137        5.6
Haagen Daz        269        21.8        82        23.4
Blue Bell        249        0.7        75        -0.3
Ben & Jerry’s        193        5.3        63        8.3
Wells’ Blue Bunny        108        4.6        31        10.0
Dreyers Edys        107        37.0        29        38.4
Turkey Hill        104        7.9        37        9.0
Dreyers Edys Grand Light        96        -34.7        27        -34.5
Total Category        4012        -0.4        1250        2.1
Source: Dairy Foods, July 2006, p. 14 ‘Dairy market trends’


Exercise 2: The Swatchmobile

The Swatchmobile, or SMART car, is an interesting example of the pitfalls associated with joint ventures.  While SMART cars are widely seen on the streets of Europe, and are also popular in Japan, many students may perceive this to be a successful collaboration.  Plans to release the SMART car in the United States in 2008 may also help to foster this conclusion.  However, as discussed below, neither partner has benefited financially from this vehicle.  Students are assigned the following questions:

4.        What resources did each partner bring to the partnership?
5.        How successful has the partnership been for each company?
6.        Which company seems to be deriving the most benefit from the partnership and why?
For Mercedes Benz, the partnership offered two main opportunities:  SMART cars were targeted to younger, less affluent drivers.  Therefore, the SMART car meant the potential to reach a very different type of consumer than their current market.  Second, this venture gave Mercedes Benz the opportunity to tap into the marketing skills of Swatch.  Under the leadership of Swatch CEO Hayek, the company essentially transformed the nature of competition among Swiss watch companies.  Hayek commented:  "A car is an emotional consumer product, like a watch," he said. "I was born to sell emotional consumer products." (WSJ 2/23/94).  
For Swatch, the partnership with Mercedes Benz provided a springboard to replicate what they had done previously in the watch market: use innovative design to take leadership of a mature industry segment.
Investors in these two firms had very different reactions to the announcement of this venture: Swatch stock closed at 207.5 francs, up 6.50 francs.  In contrast, Mercedes stock closed at 818.20 marks, down 1.80 marks.
Launch of the SMART car was delayed due to reports of vehicle instability.  Hayek predicted that the SMART car would sell 100,000 units per year initially, growing eventually to one million units per year.  As of 2005, fewer than 200,000 units were being sold worldwide each year, well below the company’s breakeven point (WSJ, 4/4/05).  Swatch sold off their stake in the venture to Mercedes.  As of 2006, the SMART venture had still to make a profit (International Herald Tribune, 6/1/06).  In fact, between 2005 and 2006 alone the division reported a net loss of 1.7 billion Euros (Marketing Week, 5/11/06).  The former Mercedes chief executive has described the SMART car venture as “a disaster” (Marketing Week, 5/11/06).

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        Ask the students to visit the website for Financial Times (http://www.ft.com). Find three or four articles that discuss different firms’ uses of cooperative strategies. What types of cooperative strategies are revealed in each article? What objective is each firm pursuing as it uses a particular cooperative strategy?
2.        Ask the students to use the Internet to find two articles describing firms’ use of a cooperative strategy: one where trust is being used as a strategic asset and another where contracts and monitoring are being emphasized. What are the differences between the managerial approaches being used in the two companies? Which of the cooperative strategies has the highest probability of being successful? Why?
3.        Each student should choose a Fortune 500 firm that has a significant need to outsource a primary or support activity (such as information technology). Given the activity the firm can outsource, should the firm form a nonequity strategic alliance to outsource the focal activity?
4.        Ask the students to use the Internet to determine whether DaimlerChrysler has formed strategic alliances to build its small cars. If these alliances have been formed, what factors caused this decision to be made? If alliances have not been formed for this purpose, why not?
5.        Ask the students to use the Internet to visit the websites of Deutsche Telekom AG, Sprint, and France Telecom SA. What is the role each firm has in the Global One Alliance they have all joined?
               
       
Ethics Questions

1.        From an ethical perspective, how much information is a firm obliged to tell a potential strategic alliance partner about what it expects to learn from the cooperative arrangement?
2.        “A contract is necessary because most firms cannot be trusted to act ethically in a cooperative venture such as a strategic alliance.” Is this statement true or false? Why? Does the answer vary by country? Why?
3.        Ventures in foreign countries without strong contract law are more risky, because managers may be subjected to bribery attempts once their firms’ assets have been invested in the country. How can managers deal with these problems?
4.        Many international strategic alliances are being formed by the world’s airline companies. Do these companies face any ethical issues as they participate in multiple alliances? If so, what are the issues? Are the issues different for airline companies headquartered in the United States than for those with European home bases? If so, what are the differences, and what accounts for them?
5.        Firms with a reputation for ethical behavior in strategic alliances are likely to have more opportunities to form cooperative strategies than will companies that have not earned this reputation. What actions can firms take to earn a reputation for behaving ethically as a strategic alliance partner?


Internet Exercise
               
Many airlines have global cooperative alliances. Explore two of these major alliances on the Internet, the OneWorld Alliance, which includes American Airlines, British Airways, and a handful of other, less influential airlines (http://www.oneworldalliance.com), and the Star Alliance, which includes Lufthansa and United Airlines, among others (http://www.star-alliance.com). How do these alliances share competitive resources? Review the four competitive risks associated with using cooperative strategies. How does each alliance avoid these risks?

*e-project: Delta Airlines and its alliance partners commissioned an elite advertising firm to create an image for their airlines’ network. As part of the team, you are hired to create the Web-based portion of the new advertising campaign. How would you design this new site? What features would you include to better define the alliance’s strategic intent?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:58:34 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 10
Corporate Governance
Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK



KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define corporate governance and explain why it is used to monitor and control managers’ strategic decisions.
2.        Explain why ownership has been largely separated from managerial control in the modern corporation.
3.        Define an agency relationship and managerial opportunism and describe their strategic implications.
4.        Explain how three internal governance mechanisms—ownership concentration, the board of directors, and executive compensation—are used to monitor and control managerial decisions.
5.        Discuss the types of compensation executives receive and their effects on strategic decisions.
6.        Describe how the external corporate governance mechanism—the market for corporate control—acts as a restraint on top-level managers’ strategic decisions.
7.        Discuss the use of corporate governance in international settings, especially in Germany and Japan.
8.        Describe how corporate governance fosters ethical strategic decisions and the importance of such behaviors on the part of top-level executives.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   How Has Increasingly Intensive Corporate Governance Affected the Lives of CEOs?
SEPARATION OF OWNERSHIP AND MANAGERIAL CONTROL  
        Agency Relationships  
        Product Diversification as an Example of an Agency Problem  
        Agency Costs and Governance Mechanisms  
OWNERSHIP CONCENTRATION  
        The Growing Influence of Institutional Owners  
BOARD OF DIRECTORS  
        Enhancing the Effectiveness of the Board of Directors  
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION  
Strategic Focus   Executive Compensation Is Increasingly Becoming a Target for Media, Activist Shareholders, and Government Regulators
        The Effectiveness of Executive Compensation  
MARKET FOR CORPORATE CONTROL  
        Managerial Defense Tactics         
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE GOVERNANCE  
        Corporate Governance in Germany  
        Corporate Governance in Japan
Strategic Focus   Shareholder Activists Invade Japan’s Large Firms Traditionally Focused on “Shareholder” Capitalism  
        Global Corporate Governance  
GOVERNANCE MECHANISMS AND ETHICAL BEHAVIOR  
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES
NOTES  


LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: The purpose of this chapter is to present and discuss how shareholders (owners) can ensure that managers develop and implement strategic decisions in the best interests of the shareholders (owners) and not be primarily self-serving (working for the best interests of managers only, to the detriment of shareholders).  In the absence of effective internal governance mechanisms, the market for corporate control—an external governance mechanism—may be activated. While it is a subject most frequently associated with firms in the U.S. and the U.K., the effectiveness of governance is gaining attention throughout the world.  The chapter begins by describing the relationship that provides the foundation on which the modern corporation is built—i.e., the relationship between owners and managers.  However, the majority of this chapter is devoted to an explanation of various mechanisms owners use to govern managers and ensure maximization of shareholder value.




OPENING FOCUS
How Has Increasingly Intensive Corporate Governance Affected the Lives of CEOs?

Although corporate governance is a necessity, it is also important to make sure it's executed properly to avoid the problems and pitfalls associated with expectations of CEO behavior and performance that have evolved as a result of greater scrutiny.  In 2006, a record number of CEOs left their jobs.  This exodus is due in part to increasing scrutiny by boards, governance activists, and increased pressure from the market for corporate control as board members are pressured to challenge the views of the CEO if they appear to be headed in a direction that will not benefit all stakeholders.  

The Sarbanes-Oxley legislation (passed in 2002) caused U.S. corporate governance policies to be more intense. This scrutiny translates into a zero tolerance for any form of corruption, conflict of interest, or other forms of wrongdoing or inappropriate behavior.  But this scrutiny may have a price.  The average tenure for CEOs is now down to 18-24 months because so many new CEO are in place.  If this trend continues, Harvard Business Review reports that nearly half of the largest U.S. firms will have a new CEO in the next four years.  Because of the high turnover and shorter tenures, CEOs are focusing more and more on short-term turnaround corporate strategies and contractually looking to their inevitable departure. Ironically, the increases in governance controls have led to an increase in CEO pay and severance perks, including golden parachutes that often pay three years of annual salary if a CEO exits before his/her contract expires because the firm is taken over. If the SEC sets a limit on exit pay, CEOs will likely arrange more pay upfront to compensate for the risks they are taking, given the shorter CEO tenures in most firms.  

Author Jim Collins found that inside CEOs have been able to provide leadership that allows firms to realize longer-term profitability and above average returns, but it takes about seven years in place to affect profitability.  But the abbreviating of average CEO tenure will not accommodate this window since they are leaving their jobs before that are reaching their maximum effectiveness. Thus, corporate governance is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, it is necessary to put an end to scandals such as the Enron disaster, which led to a significant loss for all stakeholders involved, including employees. Also, CEO compensation is quite excessive relative to other managers and employees. On the other hand, governance that is overly restrictive can reduce managerial risk taking and increase governance costs excessively, as well as constrain the CEO’s decision-making authority. Ironically, it inadvertently leads to increased pay for CEOs, which many governance activists rail against. Although corporate governance is a necessity, it is also important to make sure that it is executed properly to avoid the problems noted here.

Give your students a chance to do their “thing” with this opening case.  This case can best be described as a paradox.  Is it a case of “be careful what you ask for?”  Or maybe it’s an example of “ready, fire, aim!”  Allow students to voice their opinions; allow others to rebut.  You may end up with a “food fight.”   



1        Define corporate governance and explain why it is used to monitor and control managers’ strategic decisions.       

Corporate governance is a relationship among stakeholders that is used to determine and control the direction and performance of organizations.  At its core, corporate governance is concerned with identifying ways to ensure that strategic decisions are made effectively.

Corporate governance has been emphasized in recent years because, as the Opening Case illustrates, corporate governance mechanisms increasingly affect all stakeholders and the firm's future.

Effective corporate governance is also of interest to nations.  Governments want firms operating within their countries to grow and provide employment, wealth, and satisfaction.  This raises standards of living and enhances social cohesion.

Three internal governance mechanisms examined here are (1) ownership concentration, as represented by types of shareholders and their different incentives to monitor managers, (2) the board of directors, and (3) executive compensation.  The external governance mechanism is the market for corporate control.


Teaching Note: In the chapter, corporate governance is discussed from two perspectives:
•        The primary purpose of governance mechanisms is to prevent severe problems that may occur because of the separation of ownership and control in large firms by positively influencing managerial behavior.
•        The ability of governance mechanisms to direct top mangers’ actions toward shareholder objectives is dependent on the correct combination of mechanisms being used.

2        Explain why ownership has been largely separated from managerial control in the modern corporation.       


SEPARATION OF OWNERSHIP AND MANAGERIAL CONTROL

The growth of the large, modern public corporation is based primarily on the efficient separation of ownership and managerial control.

Shareholders make investments by purchasing stock (representing ownership), which entitles them to a share of the firm’s residual income (or profits) that remain after all expenses have been paid.
•        The right to share in residual income also means that shareholders also must accept the risk that no residual profits will remain if the firm’s expenses exceed its income.
•        Shareholders can manage investment risk by investing in a diversified portfolio of firms.
•        In small firms, managers and owners are often one in the same—less separation of ownership and control.
•        As family-controlled firms grow, the owners generally do not have sufficient capital or managerial skills to grow the business and seek other sources of capital and skills to support this expansion.


Teaching Note: It is helpful to provide a story that would illustrate what the separation of ownership and managerial control is all about, and how it came to be.  For example, it is easy for students to see that Henry Ford was involved in both the ownership and the operation of Ford Motor Company in the early days.  They can see in their minds the old footage of Model T’s coming off a very crude assembly line, by today’s standards, and understand how much simpler operations were at the time.  That has all changed with the advent of the modern, complex corporation.  Today there is almost no way to bring ownership and managerial control back together again in a workable model.


3        Define an agency relationship and managerial opportunism and describe their strategic implications.       

Agency Relationships

While the efficient separation of ownership and control enables specialization both by owners and managers, it also results in some potential costs (and risks) for owners by creating an agency relationship.  

An agency relationship exists when one party (the principal) delegates decision making to another party (the agent) in return for compensation as a decision-making specialist who performs a service. This relationship can be broader than just owners and managers—e.g., consultants and clients or insured and insurer.


Figure Note: Figure 10.1 illustrates how separation of ownership from control results in an agency relationship and is very helpful in getting students to understand the issues involved.
   

FIGURE 10.1
An Agency Relationship

Note the following in the figure (Figure 10.1):
•        Shareholders (principals) hire managers (agents) as decision makers.
•        The hiring act creates an agency relationship wherein a risk-bearing specialist (principal) compensates
        a managerial decision-making specialist (agent).



The potential for conflicts of interests between owners and managers is created by the delegation of the responsibilities of decision making to managers.  Therefore, managers may take actions that are not in the best interests of owners by selecting strategic alternatives that serve managerial interests rather than shareholder or owner interests.

An agency relationship enables the possibility of managerial opportunism, the seeking of self-interest with guile (i.e., with cunning or deceit), where opportunism is represented by an attitude or inclination and a set of behaviors.

Before observing the results of decisions, it is impossible to know which agents will behave opportunistically and which ones will not because a manager’s reputation is an imperfect guide to future behavior. As a result, principals establish governance and control mechanisms because the opportunity for opportunistic behavior and conflicts of interest exists.


Product Diversification As an Example of an Agency Problem

Product diversification—discussed in Chapter 6—can be beneficial to both shareholders and managers, but it also is a potential source of agency problems.

Managers may pursue higher levels of product diversification than are desired by shareholders to capture the value of opportunities that are available to managers, but not to owners.
•        Increased diversification generally drives the growth of the firm and firm growth is positively related to managerial compensation. Thus, by diversifying to a greater extent than may be desired by shareholders, managers may enjoy the higher levels of compensation that accompany managing larger firms.
•        Increased diversification also can reduce managerial employment risk (the risk of job loss, loss of compensation, or loss of managerial reputation). Increased diversification reduces managerial employment risk because the firm (and the manager) is less affected by a reduction in demand for (or failure of) a single product line when the firm produces and sells multiple products.
•        Increased diversification also may provide managers with access to increased levels of slack resources or free cash flows, resources that are generated after investment in all internal projects that have positive net present values within the firm’s current product lines.  Managers may choose to invest excess funds in products or activities that are not related to the firm’s existing core businesses and products if they perceive attractive (positive net present value) investment opportunities.


Figure Note: Figure 10.2 illustrates the variance between the risk profiles of shareholders and managers based on the level or type of firm diversification.  It shows that owners may benefit from managers’ decisions to diversify the firm’s products, but only to the point where investment returns at the margin are no longer positive.  That is, diversification is valuable to (and preferred by) owners as long as it has a positive effect on firm value.  However, some firms may be overdiversified, despite the lack of profitability in their dominant business.  Owners also may prefer that excess funds be returned to them in the form of dividends so they can control reinvestment decisions.



FIGURE 10.2
Manager and Shareholder Risk and Diversification

Curve S represents the business or investment risk profile for shareholders (owners). It spans a diversification scope from dominant business (which would be to the left of related-constrained) to a point between related-constrained and related-linked diversification. The optimum risk level is at point A, between dominant business and related-constrained diversification.

Curve M represents the managerial employment risk profile. It spans a diversification profile from related-constrained to unrelated diversification. The optimum diversification level for managers is point B, between related-linked and unrelated businesses.



As illustrated by the S-curve (owner business risk preference) and M-curve (managerial employment risk preference), there is a conflict between owners and managers regarding the desired levels of firm diversification and risk.
•        Owners prefer that the scope be greater than a dominant business but less than related-linked diversification.
•        Owners’ optimum level of diversification is where the S curve turns up, a point between dominant business and related-constrained diversification.
•        Managers prefer a greater scope of diversification than owners.  As can be seen from the M curve in Figure 10.2, managers prefer that the firm’s diversification be between related-linked and unrelated diversification.
•        However, as the curve indicates, there is a point at which managerial employment risk increases as the firm overdiversifies (as discussed in Chapter 6).
•        The optimum level of firm diversification from a managerial risk perspective is at point B on the M curve, somewhere between related-linked and unrelated businesses.


Agency Costs and Governance Mechanisms

The potential conflict illustrated by Figure 10.2, coupled with the fact that principals do not know which managers might act opportunistically, demonstrates why principals establish governance mechanisms.

For firm diversification to approach the shareholder optimum (point A on curve S in Figure 10.2), managerial autonomy must be controlled by the firm’s board of directors or by other governance mechanisms that encourage managers to make strategic decisions that are in the best interests of shareholders.

Agency costs are the sum of incentive, monitoring, and enforcement costs as well as any residual losses incurred by principals because it is not possible for principals to guarantee 100 percent compliance through monitoring arrangements.

Research suggests that more intensive application of governance mechanisms may produce significant changes in strategies.  Corporate America needs more intense governance in order for continued investment in the stock market to facilitate growth.  However, others argue that the indirect costs are even more telling in regard to the impact on strategy formulation and implementation.   That is, because of more intense governance, firms may make decisions that are much less risky and thus decrease potential shareholder wealth significantly due to the implementation of SOX.


4        Explain how three internal governance mechanisms—ownership concentration, the board of directors, and executive compensation—are used to monitor and control managerial decisions.       

OWNERSHIP CONCENTRATION

Ownership concentration is defined both by the number of large-block owners and by the total percentage of the firm’s shares that they own.

Large-block shareholders are investors who typically own at least five percent (5 percent) of the firm’s shares.

Diffuse ownership (a large number of shareholders with small holdings and few/no large-block shareholders)
•        produces weak monitoring of managerial decisions
•        makes it difficult for owners to coordinate their actions effectively
•        may result in levels of diversification that are beyond the optimum level desired by shareholders (especially when this condition is combined with weak monitoring)


The Growing Influence of Institutional Owners

In recent years, large block ownership by individuals has declined, but they have been replaced by significant positions held by institutional owners.

Institutional owners are large block shareholder positions controlled by financial institutions, such as stock mutual funds and pension funds.

The importance of institutional owners is indicated by the fact that these shareholders now controls over 50 percent of the stock in large U.S. corporations and approximately 56 percent of the stock of the 1,000 largest U.S. corporations.  These ownership percentages suggest that as investors, institutional owners have both the size and the incentive to discipline ineffective top-level managers and can significantly influence a firm’s choice of strategies and overall strategic decisions. Initially, these shareholder activists and institutional investors concentrated on the performance and accountability of CEOs and contributed to the ouster of a number of them. They are now targeting what they believe are ineffective boards of directors.

The rising tide of shareholder pressure also is evidenced by actions taken by CalPERS.
•        CalPERS provides retirement and health coverage to over 1.3 million current and retired public employees.
•        CalPERS is generally thought to act aggressively to promote decisions and actions that it believes will enhance shareholder value in companies in which it invests.
•        Institutions’ activism may not have a direct effect on firm performance, but its influence may be indirect through its effects on important strategic decisions.


Teaching Note: The students should know about a few of the more common anti-takeover provisions.  For example, a golden parachute is a type of managerial protection that pays a guaranteed salary for a specified period of time in the event of a takeover and the loss of one’s job.  A golden goodbye provides automatic payments to top executives if their contracts are not renewed, regardless of the reason for nonrenewal. In the case of acquisitions, managers may receive this compensation even if they voluntarily decide to quit.  Still other defense strategies are described in greater detail in Table 10.2.


BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Even though institutional ownership has increased, the majority of firms still “enjoy” the benefits or advantages of diffuse ownership (i.e., limited monitoring of managers by individual shareholders).  Furthermore, large financial institution shareholders—such as banks—are effectively prevented from having direct ownership of firms and are prohibited from placing a representative on the boards of directors.  These conditions highlight the importance of boards of directors to corporate governance.


Teaching Note: Legally, the board of directors has broad powers, including:
•        directing the affairs of the organization
•        punishing (disciplining) and rewarding (compensating) managers
•        protecting the rights and interests of shareholders (owners)


Boards are experiencing increasing pressure from shareholders, lawmakers, and regulators to become more forceful in their oversight role and thereby forestall inappropriate actions by top executives.

The board of directors is a group of elected individuals whose primary responsibility is to act in the owners’ interests by formally monitoring and controlling the corporation’s top-level executives.  If the board of directors is appropriately structured and operates effectively, it can protect owners from managerial opportunism.


Table Note: Table 10.1 provides characteristics of three classifications of members of the board of directors: insiders, related outsiders, and outsiders. These will be useful for students as you discuss board effectiveness.


TABLE 10.1
Classifications of Board of Director Members

Insiders are represented by the firm’s CEO and other top-level managers.

Related outsiders are individuals who are not involved in the firm’s day-to-day operations, but may have a relationship with the company.  Examples might include the firm’s legal counsel, a large customer or supplier, or a close relative of one of the firm’s top-level managers.

Outsiders are individuals who are independent of the firm.  They are neither involved in the firm’s day-to-day operations, nor do they have other relationships with the firm.  An example of an outsider might be the president of a university or a community volunteer.



Because the primary role of the board of directors is to monitor and ratify major managerial actions to protect the interests of owners, there is a call by advocates of board reform that outsiders should represent a significant majority of a board’s membership.


Teaching Note: Outside directors (and boards) are perceived as ineffective because:
•        insiders dominate the board by limiting the flow of information to outside directors.
•        outside directors are nominated for board membership by insiders (primarily by the CEO) and thus are indebted to insiders.


The drawbacks of outside boards:
•        Because outside directors do not have day-to-day contact with the ongoing operations of the firm, they must obtain detailed, in-depth information about the quality of management decisions.  Generally this information is obtained through frequent interactions, often developed over time, with inside directors (generally, at board meetings).
•        In the absence of rich information, boards may be forced to emphasize financial rather than strategic controls. Potentially, this means that outsider-dominated boards—because they lack sufficient information—will evaluate managers, not on the basis of the appropriateness of their actions (which the board ratified) but based on the financial outcomes of those actions.


Enhancing the Effectiveness of the Board of Directors

Because of the board’s importance, the performance of individual board members as well as that of entire boards is being evaluated more formally and intensely.

Many boards have voluntarily initiated changes, including:
•        increasing the diversity of board members’ backgrounds
•        strengthening internal management and accounting control systems
•        establishing and consistently using formal processes to evaluate the board’s performance
•        the creation of a “lead director” role that has strong powers with regard to the board agenda and oversight of nonmanagement board member activities
•        changes in the director compensation, especially reducing or eliminating stock options as part of the package


Teaching Note: The following comments can be used to expand the class discussion of whether a more active board is a more effective board.  The findings from research regarding the effectiveness of board involvement in the strategic decision-making process are mixed, indicating the following:
•        Board involvement in the strategic decision-making process may improve firm performance because it provides the firm’s managers with access to outside opinions, and outside directors should be more objective and interested in protecting owner interests.
•        Boards are more likely to be involved in strategic decisions when the firm is smaller and less diversified, since information regarding strategic actions is more readily available and both the scope and size of the firm are manageable.
•        Boards are less active in large, diversified firms.
•        The board’s access to sufficiently rich information on appropriateness of strategic actions in large diversified firms is limited.
•        Board may be limited to evaluating financial outcomes (instead of action appropriateness).


Teaching Note: McKinsey & Co. research found that institutional shareholders were willing to pay an 11 percent premium for the shares of companies when outsiders constitute a majority of the board, own significant amounts of stock, are not personally tied to top management, and when management is subjected to formal evaluation.


Research shows that boards working collaboratively with management:
•        make higher quality strategic decisions
•        make decisions faster
•        become more involved in the strategic decision-making process

Because of the increased pressure from owners and the potential conflict among board members, procedures are necessary to help boards function effectively in facilitating the strategic decision-making process.

Increasingly, outside directors are being required to own significant equity stakes as a prerequisite to holding a board seat. In fact, some research suggests that firms perform better if outside directors have such a stake.

One activist concludes that boards need three foundational characteristics to be effective: director stock ownership, executive meetings to discuss important strategic issues, and a serious nominating committee that truly controls the nomination process to strongly influence the selection of new members.


5        Discuss the types of compensation executives receive and their effects on strategic decisions.       

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

As illustrated in the Opening Case and Strategic Focus, the compensation of top-level managers generates great interest and strongly held opinions.  One reason for this widespread interest can be traced to a natural curiosity about extremes and excesses.  But furthermore, CEO pay is an indirect but tangible way to assess governance processes in large corporations.

Executive compensation is a governance mechanism that seeks to align managers’ and owners’ interests through salary, bonus, and long-term incentive compensation such as stock options.

Sometimes the use of a long-term incentive plan prevents major stockholders (e.g., institutional investors) from pressing for changes in the composition of the board of directors, because they assume that long-term incentives ensure that top executives will act in shareholders’ best interests. Alternatively, stockholders largely assume that top-executive pay and the performance of a firm are more closely aligned when firms have boards that are dominated by outside members.

Using executive compensation as a governance mechanism is more challenging in international firms. Evidence suggests that the interests of owners of multinational corporations may be served best when the firm’s foreign subsidiary compensation plans are customized to local conditions.  Though unique compensation plans require additional monitoring and increase the firm’s agency costs, it is important to adjust pay levels to match those of the region of the world (e.g., higher in the U.S. and lower in Asia).

Teaching Note:  When DaimlerBenz acquired Chrysler, it highlighted the fact that top executives at Chrysler made much more than the executives at DaimlerBenz—but higher-paid Chrysler executives report to lower-paid Daimler bosses.  This example is one that students seem to be able to grasp.

Developing and implementing an effective incentive compensation program is quite challenging because:
•        Strategic decisions made by top managers are complex and non-routine.  Due to difficulties in judging decision quality, compensation is often linked to more measurable outcomes such as financial performance.
•        Decisions made by top-level managers are likely to affect firm performance over an extended period of time.  As a result, it is difficult to assess the effect of current decisions using current period performance.
•        Many variables (or outside factors) intervene between management behavior and firm performance (e.g., uncontrollable shifts in the environment).

Although incentive compensation plans may increase the value of a firm in line with shareholder expectations, such plans are subject to managerial manipulation.

Although long-term performance-based incentives may reduce temptations to under-invest in the short run, they increase executive exposure to risks associated with uncontrollable events—e.g., market shifts, industry decline.




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Executive Compensation Is Increasingly Becoming a Target for Media, Activist Shareholders, and Government Regulators

Amid growing outrage over excessive executive compensation, a number of outside entities, including the media, shareholder activists, and government regulators, are seeking to reduce the increases in CEO executive compensation pay packages.  The reason for this outrage can be illustrated by the compensation package for former Home Depot CEO Robert Nardelli. Home Depot awarded Mr. Nardelli $245 million over his five-year stint.  Shareholders felt betrayed that Home Depot’s stock prices dropped 12 percent during Nardelli’s tenure while, during the same period, Home Depot’s most important competitor, Lowes, increased 173 percent.

Nardelli negotiated his compensation package relative to what his compensation would have been had he stayed with his previous employer (General Electric).  As such, he was awarded $25 million in vested shares on his start date. Additionally, he received a new car every three years (similar price to a Mercedes-Benz S series), the opportunity to use the company jet for personal trips, as well as a $10 million loan at an annual interest of 5.8 percent that would be forgiven over five years.  The board of directors that approved the hiring of Nardelli was pleased that it could attract and hire such a high-profile candidate.

Were there other factors that played into the board’s decision to approve such a “pricey” package?  A New York Times article suggested that the six-member compensation board was composed of other CEOs, one of whom had an even higher salary than Nardelli.  Others were suggested to have had associations with Nardelli, directly or indirectly, through his previous employer GE. As such, it would be hard for his associates to lower Nardelli’s pay, especially when one board member was making more than he was.

Increased information disclosure as well as the number of scandals associated with backdating options have made board executive compensation committees (and boards in general) a focus of activist investors and increased government scrutiny. Certainly Home Depot was a target for much of this scrutiny, which forced the board to oust Nardelli from his position when he refused to accept a lower pay package.

The new Home Depot CEO, Frank Blake, has a pay package that is significantly less than his predecessor (around one-third of Nardelli’s annual compensation). Interestingly, Blake rejected the retailer’s first offer because it included too much pay. He refused compensation in the form of restricted stock that retains value even if the share price declines. In other words, he wanted to make sure that his pay package was in line with the desires of Home Depot shareholders.  At least in the case of Home Depot, it appears that increased scrutiny, activist shareholder monitoring, and executive pay disclosure rules had a significant effect in bringing CEO pay in line.

Who really “owns” this problem?  How much is too much?  Why are shareholders not reacting by replacing the board members who approve executive compensation packages deemed excessive?  Students should be made aware that directors are being held accountable for their actions through an increasing frequency of civil law-suits.  Many companies are furnishing mal-practice” insurance to directors in order to obtain their services on their boards.




The Effectiveness of Executive Compensation

The compensation received by top-level managers, especially by CEOs, is often a subject of controversy.

Large CEO compensation packages result mostly from the inclusion of stock options and stock in the total pay packages.  This is intended to entice executives to keep the stock price high, thus aligning manager and owner interests.

Research has shown that managers owning more than one percent of the firm’s stock are less likely to be forced out of their jobs, even when the firm is performing poorly

Furthermore, a review of the research suggests that over time, firm size has accounted for more than 50 percent of the variance in total CEO pay, while firm performance has accounted for less than 5 percent of the variance.


Teaching Note: One way that boards have found to compensate executives is through giving them loans with favorable, or no, interest for the purpose of buying company stock. If done correctly, this can be a governance tool, since it aligns executives’ priorities with those of the shareholders because the executives hold stock, not just options on the stock.  They gain or lose money along with the shareholders.


It is important to consider that annual bonuses may provide incentives to pursue short-run objectives at the expense of the firm’s long-term interests.

While some stock option–based compensation plans are well designed with option strike prices substantially higher than current stock prices, too many have been designed simply to give executives more wealth that will not immediately show up on the balance sheet. Research of stock option repricing where the strike price value of the option has been lowered from its original position suggests that action is taken more frequently in high-risk situations. However, it also happens when firm performance was poor to restore the incentive effect for the option.  Often, organizational politics play a role in this.

Repricing stock options does not appear to be a function of management entrenchment or ineffective governance. These firms often have had sudden and negative changes to their growth and profitability. They also frequently lose their top managers.  

Interestingly, institutional investors prefer compensation schemes that link pay with performance, including the use of stock options.  Again, this evidence shows that no internal governance mechanism is perfect.

Option awards became a means of providing large compensation packages, and the options awarded did not relate to the firm’s performance, particularly when boards showed a propensity to reprice options at a lower strike price when stock prices fell precipitously. Option awards are becoming increasingly controversial.


Teaching Note: Board directors also receive compensation. Some recent figures follow:
•        Median base compensation for directors in telecommunications was almost $90,000.
•        Directors at Microsystem Inc. received average compensation of about $410,000 a year, while directors at Compaq earned over $360,000 and directors at Pfizer received almost $260,000.
•        On average, directors at the largest 200 firms received about $134,000.
•        Similar to executives in the firm, there is a move by large institutional investors such as CalPERS to pay directors at least partially in stock (some estimating that some 50 percent of director pay will be in company stock).

6        Describe how the external corporate governance mechanism—the market for corporate control—acts as a restraint on top-level managers’ strategic decisions.       

MARKET FOR CORPORATE CONTROL

The market for corporate control generally comes into use as an external governance mechanism only after internal governance mechanisms have failed.



A Brief History of the Market for Corporate Control

The market for corporate control has been active for some time.  The 1980s were known as a time of merger mania, with around 55,000 acquisitions valued at approximately $1.3 trillion.  However, there were many more acquisitions in the 1990s, and the value of mergers and acquisitions in that decade was more than $10 trillion. The major reduction in the stock market resulted in a significant drop in acquisition activity in the first part of the twenty-first century.  However, the number of merger and acquisitions began to increase in 2003, and the market for corporate control has become increasingly international with over 40 percent of the merger and acquisition activity involving two firms from different countries.

While some acquisition attempts are intended to obtain resources important to the acquiring firm, most of the hostile takeover attempts are due to the target firm’s poor performance. Therefore, target firm managers and members of the boards of directors are highly sensitive about hostile takeover bids. It often means that they have not done an effective job in managing the company because of the performance level inviting the bid. If they accept the offer, they are likely to lose their jobs; the acquiring firm will insert its own management. If they reject the offer and fend off the takeover attempt, they must improve the performance of the firm or risk losing their jobs as well.



The market for corporate control is composed of individuals and firms who buy ownership positions in (or take over) potentially undervalued firms.  They do this in order to form a new division in an established diversified firm, merge two previously separate firms, and usually replace the target firm’s management team to revamp the strategy that caused low firm performance.

The market for corporate control governance mechanism should be triggered by a firm’s poor performance relative to industry competitors. A firm’s poor performance, often demonstrated by the firm’s earning below-average returns, is an indicator that internal governance mechanisms have failed; that is, their use did not result in managerial decisions that maximized shareholder value.


Managerial Defense Tactics

Because of the threat of dismissal, managers have devised a number of defensive tactics designed to both ward off takeovers and buffer or protect managers from external governance mechanisms.  These tactics include:
•        managerial pay interventions, such as golden parachutes
•        asset restructuring, such as divesting a business unit or division
•        financial restructuring—e.g., stock repurchases, paying out a firm’s free cash flows as a dividend
•        changing the state of incorporation
•        making targeted shareholder repurchases (known as greenmail)



TABLE 10.2
Hostile Takeover Defense Strategies

This table presents a number of defense strategies and identifies them according to category (preventive, reactive), popularity (high, medium, low, very low), effectiveness (high, medium, low, very low), and stockholder wealth effects (positive, negative, inconclusive).  The defense strategies mentioned are poison pill, corporate charter amendment, golden parachute, litigation, greenmail, standstill agreement, and capital structure change.



Most institutional investors oppose the use of defense tactics.  For example, TIAA-CREF and CalPERS have taken actions to have several firms’ poison pills eliminated.

The market for corporate control also can be plagued by inefficiency. In the 1980s, roughly 50 percent of all takeovers targeted firms that were high performers.  As a result,
•        acquisition prices were excessive
•        expensive defensive strategies were often implemented to protect the firm

Despite its inefficiency, the threat of acquisition by corporate raiders can serve as an effective constraint on the managerial growth motive and result in strategies that are in the best interests of the firm’s owners.


Teaching Note:  As mentioned throughout the chapter, internal and external governance mechanisms, while they may restrain managerial actions, are imperfect means of controlling managerial opportunism.  This means that some combination of both internal and external mechanisms is necessary.


7        Discuss the use of corporate governance in international settings, in particular in Germany and Japan.       

INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Our discussion of internal and external governance mechanisms—and their effectiveness in controlling managerial behavior—has been centered on the U.S. and the U.K.  But this does not necessarily apply to the systems of corporate governance used elsewhere in the world – e.g., German and Japanese firms.  

While the stability that has been associated with the German and Japanese systems has been perceived as a strength, it is possible, given the dynamic and uncertain nature of the new competitive landscape, that stability may be a potential source of weakness.


Corporate Governance in Germany

The owner-manager relationship in Germany differs from that described for the U.S.  For example:
•        In many private German firms, the owner and manager are the same person.
•        In publicly traded firms there often is a dominant shareholder.

Banks historically have occupied a central position in German governance structure.
•        Banks became major shareholders when companies that they financed either sought new capital in the stock market or defaulted on loans.
•        Banks generally hold less than 10 percent of a firm’s stock.
•        Bank ownership of a single firm’s stock is limited to 15 percent of the bank’s capital.
•        Three large banks—Deutsche, Dresdner, and Commerzbank—hold majority positions in large German firms through their own holdings and proxy votes for shareholders who retain shares with the banks.
•        German firms with more than 2,000 employees must have a two-tiered board structure, with supervision of management being separated from other board duties and all of the functions of direction and management being placed in the hands of the Vorstand or management board.
•        Appointment to the management board is the responsibility of the Aufsichtsrat or supervisory board.

Despite the ability of major owners and banks to monitor and control the managers of large German firms, maximizing shareholder value has not been an historical focus.  However, this is changing.


Teaching Note:  A shift is taking place in German firms’ historic lack of focus on maximizing shareholder value. For example, SGL Carbon AG lost more than $71 million in the early 1990s and was later restructured to turn the corporation around. In particular the firm’s governance structure was changed, transparent accounting practices were adopted, and the firm set a goal of enhancing shareholder value.  The firm’s performance has since improved, and many attribute this to the new governance structure.


Corporate Governance in Japan

Corporate governance in Japan is affected by the concepts of obligation, family, and consensus.

In Japan, obligation goes beyond principles but is more a product of specific causes, events, and relationships.   It can mean returning a service for one that has been rendered.

The concept of family goes beyond the American concept to include the firm—individuals see themselves as members of a company family.  And the family concept is extended to include members of the firm’s keiretsu, a group of firms that are tied together by cross-shareholdings, interrelationships, and interdependencies.

Consensus represents one of the most important influences on governance structure in Japan.  This requires that managers—among others—expend significant amounts of energy to win the hearts and minds of people rather than proceed by the edicts of top-level managers.

As in Germany, banks also play an important role in financing and monitoring large public firms in Japan.
•        The bank owning the largest share of stocks and the largest amount of debt—the main bank—has the closest relationship with the company’s top executives.
•        Banks occupy an important position in the governance system, both financing and monitoring firms.
•        The main bank—the bank holding the largest share of a firm’s debt—provides financial advice and assumes primary responsibility for monitoring the firm’s management.
•        Japanese banks can hold up to five percent of a firm’s stock.
•        Groups of banks can hold up to 40 percent of a firm’s stock.
•        In many cases, bank relations are an integral part of the Japanese firm’s keiretsu (an industrial group of firms that interact with the same bank).


Teaching Note: Keiretsus are both diversified and vertically integrated to the extent that they generally include one or more firms in almost all important industrial sectors.


As in Germany, Japan’s corporate governance structure is changing.  For example, the role of banks in the monitoring and control of managerial behavior and firm outcomes has become less significant.




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Shareholder Activists Invade Japan’s Large Firms Traditionally Focused on “Stakeholder” Capitalism

Japan has traditionally applied relationship-capitalism, which is based on the premise that firms help each other when they are weak and facilitate and encourage each other as they become strong.  This system has been a very effective method of protection in order to keep Japanese firms Japanese.  This relationship-capitalism created a system for protection against “outside” owners by having a close-knit group of insiders who manage the firm as well as a larger set of interlocking shareholders who are mutually bonded by owning each other’s stock.  In the 1980s, these cross-shareholdings accounted for 50 percent of the equity in Japanese firms.  Recently, relationship-capitalism accounts for only 20 percent of total equity.  

Foreign ownership of Japanese firms has increased from approximately 4.7 percent in 1990 to 28 percent in 2007.  A parallel trend is the increase in activist foreign shareholders making proposals in governing the firms differently.   Japanese managers are facing an increasing level of activism, especially by foreign shareholders. Interestingly, in Japan, shareholders can vote directly on dividends and executive pay. Thus, on the surface it would appear that Japanese stock market policies are more shareholder-friendly than those in the United States or the United Kingdom. Furthermore, shareholders can vote to dismiss the entire board without cause. However, Japanese investors do not take up this power readily and most often defer to executive proposals.  Since 28 percent of Japanese shares are now held by foreign institutional investors, these practices have begun to change.  Shareholder activity is becoming more common.  In June 2007, firms holding their shareholders’ meetings faced 30 shareholder resolutions which were twice as many as there were one year earlier.  Japanese managers who are determined to maintain a tightly-knit business culture feel threatened.  Some of the issues raised by shareholders included the accumulation of heavy cash reserves that could be used to pay dividends that are inline with those paid by U.S. and U.K. firms and reorganizations that would result in employee layoffs.  

Japanese managers have fought back through use of the Japanese media to paint non-Japanese shareholders as short-sighted financial criminals.  In fact, the long-term health of Japanese firms might be improved given that Japanese firms hold cash and securities equivalent to 16 percent of GDP, whereas American firms’ long-term average of cash and securities is about 5 percent. Although these slack resources in Japan may facilitate a longer-term view, from the eyes of the Japanese firms have recently begun experiencing
activist shareholders who seek to increase returns through improved dividend policy.


Were not the symptoms of change anticipated in this case?  This is a clash of cultures.  Japanese business culture has valued relationships and consensus which calls for the expenditure of significant amounts of energy to win the hearts and minds of people whenever possible, as opposed to top executives issuing edicts.  Consensus is highly valued, even when it results in a slow and cumbersome decision-making process.  Do students feel that “compromise” is a realistic strategy in addressing this apparent conundrum?



   
Global Corporate Governance

As discussed in this section, the changes in governance that are taking place in Germany and Japan are representative of the twenty-first century competitive landscape, where customer demands are becoming more similar and shareholder value is becoming a more significant focus of managerial agents.  This will result in more uniform governance structures.


Teaching Note: Examples of differences and changes in international governance follow:
•        In France, anger has been growing over the lack of information on top executive compensation. A recent report recommended that the positions of CEO and chairman of the board be held by two different individuals.  It also recommended reducing the tenure of board members and to disclose their pay.
•        In South Korea, principles of corporate governance are being adopted to provide proper board and management incentives to pursue the interests of both the company and the shareholders and to facilitate effective monitoring.
•        Changes in corporate governance are occurring even in transitional economies, such as China and Russia, though implemented more gradually.  The use of stock-based compensation plans has influenced foreign companies to invest (particularly in China).


8        Describe how corporate governance can foster ethical strategic decisions and the importance of such behaviors on the part of top-level executives.       

GOVERNANCE MECHANISMS AND ETHICAL BEHAVIOR

Governance mechanisms discussed in this chapter are focused on ensuring that managers work effectively toward meeting their obligation to maximize shareholder wealth. However, shareholders are only one group of the firm’s stakeholders (as discussed in Chapter 1).

Over the long-term, the demands of other key stakeholders—such as employees, customers, suppliers, and the community—also must be satisfied in order to maximize shareholder wealth.

For that reason, and others, governance mechanisms must be carefully designed and implemented so that managers’ attention is not focused on maximizing short-term returns and to ensure that they consider the interests of all stakeholders.

Teaching Note:  John Smales (outside director of the board at GM) has commented that the most fundamental obligation of management is to perpetuate the organization, taking priority even over stockholder interests.  His comments may provide a good opportunity to engage students in a discussion about the purpose of the firm and its obligations to all stakeholders.


—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.                What is corporate governance?  What factors account for the considerable amount of attention corporate governance receives from several parties, including shareholder activists, business press writers, and academic scholars?  Why is governance necessary to control managers’ decisions?  (pp. 276-278)

Corporate governance is a relationship among stakeholders that is used to determine and control the direction and performance of organizations.  

Corporate governance receives a great deal of attention because governance mechanisms sometimes fail to adequately monitor and control top-level managers’ strategic decisions.  If the behavior of top-level mangers is not monitored and controlled effectively, this could mean that the firm will not be strategically competitive.

Effective corporate governance is also of interest to nations.  A country prospers as its firms grow and provide employment, wealth, and satisfaction—thus improving standards of living.  These aspirations are met when firms are competitive internationally in a sustained way.  Corporate governance reflects the standards of the company, which collectively reflect societal standards.   Thus, in many corporations, shareholders attempt to hold top-level managers more accountable for their decisions and the results they generate. As with individual firms and their boards, nations that govern their corporations effectively may gain a competitive advantage over rival countries.

As owners delegate strategy development and decision making to managers, conflicts of interest emerge—managers may select strategic alternatives that serve their own best interests, not those of the owners.  Governance mechanisms help owners (shareholders) to ensure that managers make strategic decision that are in the best interests of the former.  If internal governance mechanisms are ineffective, the market for corporate control (an external governance mechanism) may be activated.

2.                What does it mean to say that ownership is separated from managerial control in the modern corporation?  Why does this separation exist?  (p. 278)

Historically, U.S. firms were managed by the founders/owners and their descendants.  In these cases, corporate ownership and control resided in the same person(s).  As firms grew larger, ownership and control were separated in most large corporations so that control of the firm shifted to professional managers while ownership was dispersed among unorganized stockholders who were removed from day-to-day management.  These changes created the modern public corporation, which is based on the efficient separation of ownership and managerial control.  Supporting the separation is a basic legal premise suggesting that the primary objective of a firm’s activities is to increase the corporation’s profit and thereby the financial gains of the owners (or shareholders).  However, this right also requires that they accept the financial risk of the firm and its operation.

As shareholders diversify their investments over a number of corporations, their risk declines (the poor performance or failure of any one firm in which they invest has less overall effect).  Shareholders thus specialize in managing their investment risk while managers focus on decision making.  Without management specialization in decision making and owner specialization in risk bearing, a firm probably would be limited by the abilities of its owners to manage and make effective strategic decisions.  Therefore, in concept, the separation and specialization of ownership (risk bearing) and managerial control (decision making) should produce the highest returns.

3.                What is an agency relationship?  What is managerial opportunism?  What assumptions do owners of modern corporations make about managers as agents?   (pp. 279-282)

Despite its advantages, the separation of ownership and control may result in some potential costs (and risks) for owners by creating an agency relationship.  An agency relationship exists when one or more persons (the principal or principals) hires another person or persons (the agent or agents) as a decision-making specialist to perform a service.  In other words, the agency relationship exists when one party delegates decision making to another party in return for compensation.  

The owner-agent relationship enables the possibility of managerial opportunism, the seeking of self-interest with guile (i.e., cunning or deceit) where opportunism is represented by an inclination toward self-seeking behaviors.  However, before observing the results of decisions, it is impossible to know which agents will behave opportunistically and which ones will not.  A manager’s reputation is an imperfect guide to future behavior and opportunistic behavior cannot be observed until after it has occurred.

4.                How is each of the three internal governance mechanisms—ownership concentration, boards of directors, and executive compensation—used to align the interests of managerial agents with those of the firm’s owners?  (pp. 283-290)

Ownership concentration is an effective governance mechanism because owners of large blocks of stock (representing a higher percentage of ownership) have a greater financial interest in monitoring managerial decisions than do small shareholders (characterized as diffuse ownership).  Increasingly, institutional investors such as stock mutual funds and public-pension funds hold large blocks of stock, and these shareholders aggressively monitor and take action against managers who receive excessive compensation and perks but achieve only poor firm performance.

Monitoring and controlling managerial decisions are supposed to be accomplished through the firm’s board of directors, members of which are elected by shareholders to oversee managers and ensure that the firm is operated in the best interests of owners.  Members can be classified into three categories—insiders (the CEO and other top-level managers), related outsiders (member who are not involved in day-to-day operations but have some relationship with the firm), and outsiders (members who are independent from the firm and its operations).

Executive compensation can be used to help align the interests of managers and owners by tying managerial pay to firm performance through salaries, bonuses, and long-term incentives based on stock options.  However, given the complexity and long-term nature of strategic decisions, it may be difficult to perfectly align compensation with firm performance.  First, the strategic decisions made by top-level managers are typically complex and nonroutine, so direct supervision of executives is inappropriate for judging the quality of their decisions.  Thus, compensation of top-level managers is usually determined by the firm’s financial performance.  Second, the impact of an executive’s decisions is not immediate, making it difficult to assess the effect of decisions on the corporation’s performance.  Third, a number of variables (unpredictable economic, social, or legal changes) intervene between top-level managerial behavior and firm performance, making it difficult to discern the effects of strategic decisions.

5.                What trends exist regarding executive compensation?  What is the effect of the increased use of long-term incentives on executives’ strategic decisions?  (pp. 287-290)

In recent times, many stakeholders, including shareholders, have been angered by what they consider the excessive compensation received by some top-level managers, especially CEOs.  The primary reason for such large compensation packages is the inclusion of stock options and stock in the total pay packages.  The primary reasons for compensating executives with stock is that it provides incentives to keep the stock price high, thus aligning manager and owner interests.  However, there may be some unintended consequences.  Research has shown that managers who own more than one percent of the firm’s stock are less likely to be forced out of their jobs, even when the firm is performing poorly.

Increasingly, long-term incentive plans are becoming a critical part of compensation packages in U.S. firms. The use of longer-term pay helps firms cope with or avoid potential agency problems. Because of this, the stock market generally reacts positively to the introduction of a long-range incentive plan for top executives.

While some stock option-based compensation plans are well designed with option strike prices substantially higher than current stock prices, too many have been designed simply to give executives more wealth that will not immediately show up on the balance sheet. Research of stock option repricing where the strike price value of the option has been changed to be lower than it was originally set suggests that step is taken more frequently in high-risk situations. However, it also happens when firm performance was poor to restore the incentive effect for the option. But evidence also suggests that organizational politics are often involved. Additionally, research has found that repricing stock options does not appear to be a function of management entrenchment or ineffective governance; these firms often have had sudden and negative changes to their growth and profitability. They also frequently lose their top managers. Interestingly, institutional investors prefer compensation schemes that link pay with performance, including the use of stock options. Again, this evidence shows that no internal governance mechanism is perfect.

While stock options became highly popular as a means of compensating top executives and linking pay to performance, they also have become controversial of late. It seems that option awards became a means of providing large compensation packages and the options awarded did not relate to the firm’s performance, particularly when boards showed a propensity to reprice options at a lower strike price when stock prices fell precipitously. Because of the large number of options granted in recent years and the increasingly common practice of repricing them, some have called for expensing the options by the firm at the time they are awarded. This action could be quite costly to many firms’ stated profits. Thus, some firms have begun to move away from granting stock options.

6.                What is the market for corporate control?  What conditions generally cause this external governance mechanism to become active?  How does the mechanism constrain top executives’ decisions and actions?  (pp. 290-292)

The market for corporate control is an external governance mechanism that becomes active when a firm’s internal controls fail.  The market for corporate control is composed of individuals and firms that buy ownership positions in (or take over) potentially undervalued corporations so they can form new divisions in established diversified companies or merge two previously separate firms.  Because they are assumed to be the party responsible for formulating and implementing the strategy that led to poor performance, the top management team of the acquired company is usually replaced.  Thus, the market for corporate control disciplines managers that are ineffective or act opportunistically.  A firm’s poor performance is an indication that internal governance mechanisms have failed (that is, their use did not result in managerial decisions that maximized shareholder value), opening the door to the involvement of the market for corporate control.  Indeed, hostile takeovers are the major activity in the market for corporate control.

7.                What is the nature of corporate governance in Germany and Japan?  (pp. 294-295)

In many private German firms, owner and manager may be the same individual and thus no agency problem will exist.  Even in publicly traded corporations, there is often a dominant shareholder, so the problem is minimized.  Thus, ownership concentration is an important means of corporate governance in Germany, just as it is in the U.S.

Historically, banks have been at the center of the German corporate governance structure, which is the case in many continental European countries such as Italy and France.  As lenders, banks become major shareholders when companies they had financed earlier seek funding on the stock market or default on loans.  Although stakes are usually under 10 percent, there is no legal limit on how much of a firm’s stock banks can hold (except that a single ownership position cannot exceed 15 percent of the bank’s capital).  Shareholders can tell the banks how to vote their ownership position, but they generally elect not to do so.  Banks monitor and control managers both as lenders and as shareholders by electing representatives to supervisory boards.

German firms with more than 2,000 employees are required to have a two-tier board structure.  Through this structure, the supervision of management is separated from other duties normally assigned to a board of directors, especially the nomination of new board members.  Thus, Germany’s two-tiered system places the responsibility to monitor and control managerial (or supervisory) decisions and actions in the hands of a separate group.  While all the functions of direction and management are the responsibility of the management board, appointment to this body is the responsibility of the supervisory tier.  Employees, union members, and shareholders appoint members to the latter.

Historically, German executives have not been dedicated to the maximization of shareholder value.  However, corporate governance in Germany is changing.  Due at least partially to the increasing globalization of business, many governance systems are beginning to gravitate toward the U.S. system.

Attitudes toward corporate governance in Japan are affected by the concepts of obligation, family, and consensus.  As part of a corporate family, individuals are members of a unit that envelops their lives—even the keiretsu is a family, and certainly more than an economic concept.  Consensus, an important influence in Japanese corporate governance, calls for the expenditure of significant amounts of energy to win the hearts and minds of people whenever possible, as opposed to depending on edicts from top executives.  Consensus is highly valued, even when it results in a slow and cumbersome decision-making process.

As in Germany, banks play an important role in financing and monitoring large public firms in Japan. The bank owning the largest share of stocks and the largest amount of debt (the main bank) has the closest relationship with the company’s top executives.  The main bank provides financial advice to the firm and also closely monitors managers.  Thus, Japan has a bank-based financial and corporate governance structure compared to the United States’ market-based financial and governance structure.

Aside from lending money (debt), a Japanese bank can hold up to five percent of a firm’s total stock; a group of related financial institutions can hold up to 40 percent. In many cases, main-bank relationships are part of a horizontal keiretsu (a group of firms tied together by cross-shareholdings).  A keiretsu firm usually owns less than 2 percent of any other member firm; however, each company typically has a stake of that size in every firm in the keiretsu. As a result, somewhere between 30 percent and 90 percent of a typical firm is owned by other members of the keiretsu. Thus, a keiretsu is a system of relationship investments.

As is the case in Germany, Japan’s corporate governance structure is changing.  For example, because of their continuing development as economic organizations, the role of banks in the monitoring and control of managerial behavior and firm outcomes is less significant than it has been.  The Asian economic crisis in the later part of the 1990s substantially harmed Japanese firms, making transparent the governance problems in the system.

8.                How can corporate governance foster ethical strategic decisions and behaviors on the part of managers as agents?  (pp. 298-299)

In the United States, the focus of governance mechanisms is on the control of managerial decisions to ensure that shareholders’ interests will be served, but product market stakeholders (e.g., customers, suppliers, and host communities) and organizational stakeholders (e.g., managerial and nonmanagerial employees) are important as well. Therefore, at least the minimal interests or needs of all stakeholders must be satisfied by outcomes from the firm’s actions. Otherwise, dissatisfied stakeholders will decide to withdraw their support to one firm and provide it to another (e.g., customers will purchase products from a supplier offering an acceptable substitute).


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: International Governance Codes

As described in the chapter, passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002 has drawn attention to the importance of corporate governance. Similar legislation is pending in other nations as well. However, interest in improved governance predated SOX by a decade in the form of governance codes or guidelines. These codes established sets of “best practices” for both board composition and processes. The first such code was developed by the Cadbury Committee for the London Stock Exchange in 1992. The Australian Stock Exchange developed its guidelines in the Hilmer Report, released in 1993. The Toronto Stock Exchange developed its guidelines the following year in the Dey Report. Today, most major stock exchanges have governance codes.

Working in small groups, find the governance codes of two stock exchanges. Prepare a short (two to three pages, single-spaced) bullet point comparison of the similarities and differences between the two codes. Be sure to include the following topics in your analysis:
        How are the guidelines structured? Do they consist of rules (i.e., required) or recommendations (i.e., suggestions)? What mechanism is included to monitor or enforce the guidelines?
        What board roles are addressed in the guidelines? For example, some codes may place most or all of their emphasis on functions derived from the importance of the agency relationship illustrated in Figure 10.1, such as monitoring, oversight, and reporting. Codes might also mention the board’s role in supporting strategy, or their contribution to firm performance and shareholder wealth.
        What aspects of board composition and structure are covered in the guidelines? For instance, items included in different codes include the balance of insiders and outsiders, committees, whether the CEO also serves as board chair, director education and/or evaluation, compensation of officers and directors, and ownership by board members.
Exercise 2: Governance and Personal Investments

Governance mechanisms are considered to be effective if they meet the needs of all stakeholders, including shareholders. As an investor, how much weight, if at all, do you place on a firm’s corporate governance? If you currently own any stocks, select a firm that you have invested in. If you do not own any stocks, select a publicly traded company that you consider an attractive potential investment. Working individually, complete the following research on your target firm:
        Find a copy of the company’s most recent proxy statement. Proxy statements are mailed to shareholders prior to each year’s annual meeting and contain detailed information about the company’s governance and presents issues on which a shareholder vote might be held. Proxy statements are typically available from a firm’s Web site (look for an “Investors” submenu). You can also access proxy statements and other government filings such as the 10-K from the SEC’s EDGAR database (http://www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml).

        Conduct a search for news articles that address the governance of your target company. Using different keywords (e.g., governance, directors, or board of directors) in combination with the company name may be helpful.

Some of the topics that you should examine include:
        Compensation plans (for both the CEO and board members)
        Board composition (e.g., board size, insiders and outsiders)
        Committees
        Stock ownership by officers and directors
        Whether the CEO holds both CEO and board chairperson positions
        Is there a lead director who is not an officer of the company?
        Board seats held by blockholders or institutional investors

        Activities by activist shareholders regarding corporate governance issues of concern

Prepare a one page, single-spaced memo summarizing the results of your findings. Your memo should include the following topics:
        Summarize what you consider to be the key aspects of the firm’s governance mechanisms.
        Based on your review of the firm’s governance, did you change your opinion of the firm’s desirability as an investment? Why or why not?

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: International Governance Codes

The goals of this exercise are two-fold: first, the exercise helps to illustrate the stock exchanges use codes of best practice as an alternative to regulation (e.g., SOX).  If the exercise is discussed in class, it can be helpful to ask students their opinions of the relative merits of self-policing via exchange requirements versus government intervention.  A second goal of the exercise is to highlight the global aspect of corporate governance.

The European Corporate Governance Institute maintains a list of governance codes for a number of countries, including nations outside the EU.  Their database includes historical listings, so that both the most recent and older codes are often available for a given region.  For example, the Australia section includes both the current Australian Stock Exchange (ASX) guidelines, as well as the Bosch Report from 1995.  If the instructor is looking for a more advanced project on this topic, students could be required to compare the evolution of governance codes over time for a particular region.  The ECGI website is:

http://www.ecgi.org

Additionally, the Corporate Governance Network is a useful resource for other materials relating to governance issues:

http://www.corpgov.net

The following practitioner articles may also be helpful for framing a discussion of ‘good governance’ guidelines:

Finkelstein, S., & Mooney, A.C. 2003.  Not the usual suspects: How to use board process to make boards better. The Academy of Management Executive. May 2003. Vol. 17, Iss. 2; p. 101

Norburn, D., Boyd, B.K., Fox, M., & Muth, M. 2000. International corporate governance reform.  European Business Journal. Vol. 12, Issue 3, p. 116-133.


Exercise 2: Governance and Personal Investments

For this exercise, students are asked to evaluate the governance of a firm they currently invest in, or a firm they might consider investing in.  The main purpose of the exercise is to help make a connection between different governance elements (e.g., board composition, equity holdings by directors, executive compensation) and a firm’s financial performance.  Students are asked to prepare a single page memo that answers the following questions:

        Summarize what you consider to be the key aspects of the firm’s governance mechanisms.
        Based on your review of the firm’s governance, did you change your opinion of the firm’s desirability as an investment?  Why, or why not?
A secondary goal of the exercise is to familiarize students with proxy statements as a resource for analyzing corporate governance. A related benefit is the use of the Securities and Exchange Commission EDGAR database (http://www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml).

Because this exercise is completed individually, it can be helpful to spend some time in class debriefing the assignment.  An easy way to do this is to restate the question “Based on your review of the firm’s governance, did you change your opinion of the firm’s desirability as an investment?”  Ask for a show of hands for those that did change their opinion, and those that did not.  Starting with the former group, ask:

        What prompted the change in opinion?

        Were there both positive and negative opinion changes?

        How strong was the change – relatively minor, moderate, or substantial?

Next, follow up with the “no change” group, and ask several students for the basis for their assessment.

Finally, ask students how much weight they will play on corporate governance when considering future investments.


—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions       
       
1.        The roles and responsibilities of top executives and members of a corporation’s board of directors are different. Traditionally, executives have been responsible for determining the firm’s strategic direction and implementing strategies to achieve it, whereas the board of directors has been responsible for monitoring and controlling managerial decisions and actions. Some argue that boards should become more involved with the formulation of a firm’s strategies. How would the board’s increased involvement in the selection of strategies affect a firm’s strategic competitiveness? What evidence can the students offer to support their position?
2.        Ask the students if they believe that large U.S. firms have been overgoverned by some corporate governance mechanisms and undergoverned by others; provide an example of each.
3.        How can corporate governance mechanisms create conditions that allow top executives to develop a competitive advantage and focus on long-term performance? Have the students use the Internet to search the business press and give an example of a firm in which this occurred.
4.        Some believe that the market for corporate control is not an effective governance mechanism. What factors might account for the ineffectiveness of this method of monitoring and controlling managerial decisions?
5.        Present the following comment to the class: “As a top executive, the only agency relationship I am concerned about is the one between myself and the firm’s owners. I think that it would be a waste of my time and energy to worry about any other agency relationships.” What are these other agency relationships? How would the students respond to this person? Do they accept or reject this view? Have them support their position.


Ethics Questions

1.        As explained in this chapter, using corporate governance mechanisms should establish order between parties whose interests may be in conflict. Do owners of a firm have any ethical responsibilities to managers in a firm that uses governance mechanisms to establish order? If so, what are those responsibilities?
2.        Is it ethical for a firm’s owner to assume that agents (managers hired to make decisions in the owner’s best interests) are averse to risk? Why or why not?
3.        What are the responsibilities of the board of directors to stakeholders other than shareholders?
4.        What ethical issues surround executive compensation? How can we determine whether top executives are paid too much?
5.        Is it ethical for firms involved in the market for corporate control to target companies performing at levels exceeding the industry average? Why or why not?
6.        What ethical issues, if any, do top executives face when asking their firm to provide them with a golden parachute?
7.        How can governance mechanisms be designed to ensure against managerial opportunism, ineffectiveness, and unethical behaviors?


Internet Exercise               
The use of the Internet for buying and selling stocks has opened up markets to an unprecedented number of people. With the click of a mouse, one can buy shares of the hottest stocks. Not always so, though, warns the chairman of the SEC. Orders are not necessarily processed at the moment they are sent, and by the time the stock is purchased, the price may have risen ten-fold. Read more about investing through the Internet and the SEC’s efforts to combat growing Internet-based investment fraud at http://www.sec.gov.

*e-project: Visit two on-line trading venues: the more traditional Merrill Lynch at www.merrill-lynch.com and the newer E*Trade at www.etrade.com. How well do these companies communicate the risks of a volatile market to their customers? Looking at the SEC’s recommendations, how does each company rate?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:59:09 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 11
Organizational Structure and Controls

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define organizational structure and controls and discuss the difference between strategic and financial controls.
2.        Describe the relationship between strategy and structure.
3.        Discuss the functional structures used to implement business-level strategies.
4.        Explain the use of three versions of the multidivisional (M-form) structure to implement different diversification strategies.
5.        Discuss the organizational structures used to implement three international strategies.
6.        Define strategic networks and discuss how strategic center firms implement such networks at the business, corporate and international levels.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case  Are Strategy and Structural Changes in the Cards for GE?
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND CONTROLS  
        Organizational Structure  
Strategic Focus Increased Job Autonomy: A Structural Approach to Increased Performance and Job Satisfaction?
Organizational Controls
RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN STRATEGY AND STRUCTURE
EVOLUTIONARY PATTERNS OF STRATEGY AND ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE       
        Simple Structure
        Functional Structure
        Multidivisional Structure  
        Matches between Business-Level Strategies and the Functional Structure
        Matches between Corporate-Level Strategies and the Multidivisional Structure
        Matches between International Strategies and Worldwide Structures
Strategic Focus  Using the Worldwide Geographic Area Structure at Xerox Corporation
        Matches between Cooperative Strategies and Network Structures
IMPLEMENTING BUSINESS-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES
IMPLEMENTING CORPORATE-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES
IMPLEMENTING INTERNATIONAL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES
SUMMARY
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES
NOTES  


LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: As students will recall, the discussion in the previous chapter (Chapter 10) described how governance mechanisms are used to align the interests of a firm’s top-level managers with those of the firm’s owners.  It also described how those mechanisms influence the firm’s ability to execute strategies that have been implemented successfully as the firm strives to achieve a competitive advantage in the new competitive landscape.  The same could be said of organizational structure, the focus of the current chapter.


OPENING CASE
Are Strategy and Structural Changes in the Cards for GE?

For more than a century, GE has occupied a spot on the Dow Jones Industrial Index. This is the result of GE’s stellar performance during its 100-plus year history.  For 2006, GE reported earnings of $20.7 billion on revenue of $163 billion, which validates that GE is performing extremely well.  One of the most effective avenues to profitable growth has been GE’s emphasis on innovation.  In 2006, research and development spending totaled nearly $6 billion.  But analysts and investors have pointed out that all is not well with GE.  In response to these concerns, there may be some changes in corporate-level strategy and structure in the offing at GE.

When Jeffrey Immelt took over as CEO at GE following the legendary Jack Welch, he initiated changes that resulted in the reduction of operating units from eleven down to six.  Those six include Commercial Finance, Healthcare, Industrial, Infrastructure, Money, and NBC Universal.  In announcing his decision, Immelt said that “these changes will accelerate GE’s growth in key industries” while simultaneously helping the firm become more focused on emerging technologies with significant commercial potential. Even with this reorganization, GE continued using the related-linked diversification strategy at the corporate level; the SBU form of the multidivisional structure remained the structure in place to facilitate use of the related-linked strategy.

In mid-2007, a prominent analyst called for GE to sell one or more of its six businesses. Specifically, his argument called for GE to sell noncore businesses such as NBC Universal and Money (formerly called Consumer Finance) to “raise billions (and) make this colossus a heck of a lot easier for one man to manage.” The thought is that these two businesses have relatively little in common with the other four, and having them in GE’s portfolio of businesses is a diversion from developing additional synergies (primarily in the form of economies of scope) across the four with greater similarities. Immelt and Welch both reacted less than positively to this suggestion, with Welch saying that following this advice “would be a tragedy of enormous proportions.”  If these two businesses were sold, GE’s corporate-level strategy would change from related linked to related constrained.  If this change in strategy were to occur, the firm’s structure would also need to be changed from the SBU form of the multidivisional structure to the cooperative form of the multidivisional structure. From the perspective of strategic management, the important outcome is that a change to organizational structure accompany a decision to change a firm’s strategy.  The reason for making such a change is that a mismatch between strategy and structure negatively affects performance.

GE’s management has a deeply entrenched, highly respected profitability record. While analysts’ arguments regarding diversion and dilution of management’s attention away from core operations might have some validity, GE has done a yeoman’s job historically of managing what could be referred to as a full-plate. With annual R and D expenditures of $5.7 billion, it seems very apparent that innovation is not taking a backseat at the feeding trough.  Is this a case of analysts taking themselves too seriously?  Both Immelt and Welch have successfully managed the GE stable. They’ve been there; done that.




1        Define organizational structure and controls and discuss the difference between strategic and financial controls.       

The match or degree of fit between strategy and structure influences the firm’s attempts to earn above-average returns. Thus, the ability to select an appropriate strategy and match it with the appropriate structure is an important characteristic of effective strategic leadership.

The focus of this chapter is on the structure- and control-related issues of strategy implementation, including:
•        the pattern of growth and changes in organizational structure experienced by strategically competitive firms
•        the organizational structures and controls that are used to implement separate business-level, corporate-level, international, and cooperative strategies
•        a series of figures to highlight the structures firms match with different strategies


ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND CONTROLS

When the firm’s strategy isn’t matched with the most appropriate structure and controls, performance declines.

Teaching Note: Selecting the organizational structure and controls that result in effective implementation of chosen strategies is a fundamental challenge for managers, especially top-level managers.  The reasons for this are:
•        Firms must be flexible, innovative, and creative in the global economy if they are to exploit their core competencies in the pursuit of marketplace opportunities.
•        Firms must also maintain a certain degree of stability in their structures so that day-to-day tasks can be completed efficiently.

Organizational Structure

Organizational structure specifies the firm’s formal reporting relationships, procedures, controls, and authority and decision-making processes.

Developing an organizational structure that effectively supports the firm’s strategy is difficult, especially because of the uncertainty (or unpredictable variation) in cause-effect relationships in the global economy’s rapidly changing, dynamic competitive environments. Structure facilitates effective implementation of a firm’s strategies when elements of that structure (e.g., reporting relationships, procedures, and so forth) are properly aligned with one another. Thus, organizational structure is a critical component of effective strategy implementation processes.

Structure specifies the work to be done and how to do it (given the firm’s strategy or strategies) by specifying the processes that are to be used to complete organizational tasks.

Effective structures provide the stability the firm needs to rely on its current competitive advantages to successfully implement today’s strategies while providing the flexibility required to develop competitive advantages that will be needed to use future strategies; thus, an effective organizational structure allows the firm to exploit current competitive advantages while developing new ones.

Modifications to the firm’s current strategy or selection of a new strategy call for changes to organizational structure. This is not uncommon since organizational inertia often inhibits structural changes, even if performance declines.  Because of inertial tendencies, structural change is often induced by the actions of stakeholders who are no longer willing to tolerate the firm’s inadequate performance.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Increased Job Autonomy:  A Structural Approach to Increased Performance and Job Satisfaction?

Best Buy, well-known consumer electronics retailer with over 100,000 employees in 800 stores, has taken a
step toward improving employee performance, job satisfaction, and its overall performance.  In 2002, Best
Buy introduced an in-house developed program called ROWE (Results-Only Work Environment) to 4000
headquarters’ employees on a trail-basis.  Results generated because of this program have been very
impressive:  “Productivity has increased an average of 35 percent within six to nine months in Best
Buy units implementing ROWE.  Voluntary turnover has dropped between 52 and 90 percent in three Best
Buy locations being studied.”  Results also indicate that employees take more ownership of their work and
express much more satisfaction with what they do as well as how they complete the tasks associated with
their jobs.

The basic premise of ROWE is the redesign of how work activities are performed.  Essentially, employees
have the freedom and responsibility to decide when and where they will work. Those supervising
employees empowered in this manner believe that they are managing outcomes rather than directly
managing the people expected to reach the desired outcomes. A designer of the program describes one of
ROWE’s objectives in this manner: “We want people to stop thinking of work as someplace you go to, five
days a week from 8 to 5, and start thinking of work as something you do.”

The primary focus of Best Buy’s ROWE program is changing a deeply embedded mindset of
employees at all levels within the organization.  It demonstrates how confident Best Buy is in its
restructuring in order to accommodate employees’ values and work ethics.  Best But is not reluctant to do things differently on behalf of its employees, and the measurable results
indicate that ROWE has been and will continue to be a win-win process.




Organizational Controls

Organizational controls guide the use of strategy, indicate how to compare actual results with expected results, and suggest corrective actions to take when the difference between actual and expected results is unacceptable.

Properly designed organizational controls—strategic and financial—provide insights into behaviors that enhance firm performance.

Strategic controls are largely subjective criteria intended to verify that the firm is using strategies that are appropriate given the conditions in the external environment and the company’s competitive advantages. Thus, strategic controls are concerned with examining the fit between what the firm might do (external environment) and what it can do (its competitive advantages).

Effective strategic controls help the firm understand what it takes to be successful. Strategic controls demand rich communication between managers using them and those implementing the firm’s strategy. These frequent exchanges are both formal and informal in nature.

Strategic controls help evaluate how well a firm is focusing on what it takes to implement its strategies.
•        For a business-level strategy, the concern is to study primary and support activities (see Tables 3.6 and 3.7) to verify that those that are critical to successful execution of the chosen strategy are being properly emphasized and executed.  
•        With related corporate-level strategies, strategic controls are used to verify that intended levels of sharing of relevant strategic factors—such as knowledge, markets, technologies, and so forth—are taking place. When evaluating related diversification strategies, executives must have a deep understanding of each unit’s business-level strategy. Extensive diversification often requires that financial controls be emphasized.


Teaching Note: The use of strategic controls, which are behavioral in nature, requires high levels of cognitive diversity among the firm’s top-level managers. Cognitive diversity is a term that captures differences among top-level executives regarding their beliefs about cause-and-effect relationships and outcome-related preferences.


Financial controls are largely objective criteria used to measure the firm’s performance against previously established quantitative standards, and these include accounting-based (e.g., return on investment, return on assets) and market-based (e.g., Economic Value Added) measures.

Both strategic and financial controls are important aspects of each organizational structure; thus, any structure’s effectiveness is determined by using a combination of strategic and financial controls.


2        Describe the relationship between strategy and structure.       

RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN STRATEGY AND STRUCTURE
Strategy and structure have a reciprocal relationship, highlighting the interconnectedness between strategy formulation (Chapters 4-9) and strategy implementation (Chapters 10-13).

In general, structure follows the selection of the firm’s strategy. However, once in place, structure has the potential to influence current strategic actions as well as choices about future strategies.

Regardless of the strength of the relationships between strategy and structure, those choosing the firm’s strategy and structure should be committed to matching each strategy with a structure that provides the stability needed to use current competitive advantages as well as the flexibility required to develop future advantages.


Teaching Note: Using the four criteria of sustainability, the firm’s strategy/structure match is an advantage when that match is valuable, rare, imperfectly imitable, and nonsubstitutable.



Charles Schwab & Co. and Strategy/Structure Fit: A Mini-Case

A premier discount broker, Schwab is challenged by declines in its online trading volume and its overall financial performance. At least partly as a result of uncertainty created by the events of 9/11, Schwab’s average daily trades in 2001’s third quarter fell 26 percent compared to the same period a year earlier. In turn, revenue declines were instrumental in the 50.6 percent fall in year-to-year (2000-2001) net income.

Following analysis of these data as well as current and possible future conditions in the global financial industry, Schwab concluded that its expansive Web site and discount trades could no longer be the foundation for the firm’s strategy in what were rapidly changing financial markets. Supporting this conclusion was feedback indicating that an increasing number of investors want a relationship, offered in the form of financial advice, in addition to low trading costs when making their investment choices. This is not surprising, in that recent evidence suggests that customers for firm services of all types want to receive them through relationships rather than through encounters. Resulting from Schwab’s evaluation of its current situation and future possibilities was a decision to change its cost leadership strategy as a discount broker to be more like an integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy as Schwab tried to offer relatively low cost financial advice while simultaneously becoming a full service brokerage.

Schwab decision makers recognized that the firm’s structure had to change to support the new strategy. Historically, the firm’s structure called for Schwab brokers to take orders rather than sell them. In this low-cost structure, brokers worked as intermediaries between customers who had decided what they wanted to buy and the sellers of those products. As planned, the structure needed to support brokers’ efforts to find customers and sell advice and a broad array of products to them. Work in the previous structure was largely centralized, dictated by rules and procedures. To support an advice driven strategy, Schwab’s structure needed to be decentralized, with decision responsibility given to individual brokers.

Schwab attempted to match structure with the new strategy. If that match is found to be valuable, rare, imperfectly imitable and nonsubstitutable, the firm will have a competitive advantage based on its integration between strategy and structure.



EVOLUTIONARY PATTERNS OF STRATEGY AND ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

Chandler found that firms tended to grow in somewhat predictable patterns: volume  geography  integration (vertical, horizontal)  product/business diversification.


Figure Note:  Figure 11.1 graphically illustrates the evolution of structure as the organization grows.  This evolution will be explained in subsequent sections of this chapter.  At this point, students should begin to be aware of the necessity of fit.  Just as a firm’s strategy must fit with its resources, capabilities, and core competencies, so its strategy must fit with its structure if it hopes to achieve strategic competitiveness.



FIGURE 11.1
Strategy and Structure Growth Pattern

As indicated by Figure 11.1, firm structure evolves from simple to functional to multidivisional.  

This evolution is caused by sales growth and/or coordination and control problems that prevent the firm from efficiently implementing its formulated strategy.

Thus, as implementation efforts falter due to growth or other problems, the firm may need to change its organizational structure to achieve an appropriate fit between strategy and structure.



Simple Structure

A simple structure is an organizational form in which the owner-manager makes all major decisions directly and monitors all activities, and the firm’s staff is merely an extension of the manager’s supervision authority.

The simple structure is characterized by:
•        little specialization of tasks
•        few rules
•        little formalization
•        unsophisticated information systems
•        direct involvement of owner-manager in all phases of day-to-day operations
•        frequent and informal communications between the owner-manager and employees


Teaching Note: In the U.K., some analysts believe that the simple organizational structure may result in competitive advantages for some small firms relative to their larger counterparts.  These competitive advantages include a broad openness to innovation, greater structural flexibility, and an ability to respond more rapidly to environmental changes.


If they are successful, small firms grow larger; and as a result, the firm outgrows the simple structure.
•        There is a significant increase in the amount of competitively relevant information that requires analysis.
•        More extensive and complicated information-processing requirements place significant pressures on owner-managers (often due to a lack of organizational skills or experience). At this evolutionary point, firms tend to move from the simple structure to a functional organizational structure.


Functional Structure

The functional structure consists of a chief executive officer and limited corporate staff with functional line managers in dominant functions—e.g., production, accounting, marketing, R&D, engineering, human resources.

This structure allows for functional specialization, facilitating active knowledge sharing within each functional area.  Knowledge sharing usually supports career paths and professional development of functional specialists.

However, compared to the simple structure, there also are some potential problems.  For example, differences in functional specialization and orientation may impede communication and coordination.


Teaching Note: Functional specialists often may develop a myopic or narrow perspective, losing sight of the firm’s strategic vision and mission.  When this happens, the problem can be overcome by implementing the multidivisional structure.


The functional structure supports implementation of business-level strategies and corporate-level strategies with low levels of diversification (e.g., dominant business).


Multidivisional Structure

Because of limits to an individual chief executive officer’s ability to process complex strategic information, problems related to isolation of functional area managers, and increasing diversification, the structure of the firm must change again.  In these instances, the multidivisional or M-form structure is most appropriate.

The multidivisional (M-form) structure is composed of operating divisions where each division represents a separate business to which the top corporate officer delegates responsibility for day-to-day operations and business unit strategy to division managers.  

As initially designed, the M-form was thought to have three major benefits.
1.        It allows corporate officers to accurately monitor business unit performance, simplifying control problems.
2.        It facilitated comparisons between divisions, which improved the resource allocation process.
3.        It stimulated managers of poorly performing divisions to look for ways of improving performance.


Teaching Note: An expanded discussion of M-form may be helpful at this point. Some facts related to use of the multidivisional structure at DuPont and GM follow.
•        The multidivisional or M-form structure was developed in the 1920s, in response to coordination and control problems in large firms such as DuPont and GM.
•        Functional departments often had difficulty dealing with distinct product lines and markets, especially in coordinating conflicting priorities among the products.
•        Costs were not allocated to individual products, so it was not possible to assess an individual product’s profit contribution.
•        Loss of control meant optimal allocation of firm resources between products was difficult.
•        Top managers got over-involved in short-run matters (e.g., coordination, communications, conflict resolution) and neglected long-term strategic issues.

The new, innovative structure adopted at General Motors called for
•        creating separate divisions, each representing a distinct business
•        each division would house its functional hierarchy
•        division managers were given responsibility for managing day-to-day operations
•        a small corporate office would determine the long-term strategic direction of the firm and exercise overall financial control over the semi-autonomous divisions

This would enable the firm to
•        accurately monitor performance of each business, simplifying control problems
•        facilitate comparisons between divisions, improving the allocation of resources
•        stimulate managers of poorly performing divisions to seek ways to improve


3        Discuss the functional structures used to implement business-level strategies.       



Matches between Business-Level Strategies and the Functional Structure

Different forms of the functional organizational structure are used to support implementation of the cost leadership, differentiation, and integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategies. The differences in these forms are accounted for primarily by different uses of three important structural characteristics or dimensions—specialization (the type and number of jobs required to complete work), centralization (the degree to which decision-making authority is retained at higher managerial levels), and formalization (the degree to which formal rules and procedures govern work).


Using the Functional Structure to Implement the Cost Leadership Strategy

Firms using the cost leadership strategy want to sell large quantities of standardized products to an industry’s or a segment’s typical customer. The cost leadership form of the functional structure usually features:
•        simple reporting relationships
•        few layers in the decision-making and authority structure
•        a centralized corporate staff
•        a strong focus on process improvements through the manufacturing function rather than the development of new products through an emphasis on product R&D


Teaching Note: Because of firm restructuring during the late 1980s and early 1990s—and the reduction in the number of management layers—firms now have flatter structures.  “Higher” in the organizational structure has thus become a relative term.


Cost leadership strategies emphasize:
•        centralization of decision-making to maintain cost reduction
•        jobs that are specialized to increase efficiency
•        formalization of rules and procedures to converge on the most efficient approaches


Figure Note: Figure 11.2 summarizes the functional structural characteristics required for successful implementation of the cost leadership strategy.


FIGURE 11.2
Functional Structure for Implementation of a Cost Leadership Strategy

Key points include the following:
•        Dotted lines from the centralized staff to each function represent tight controls and centralized coordination.
•        The focus is on the operations (production) function.
•        Emphasis is placed on process engineering not on new product research and development.
•        Relatively large central staff coordinates functions.
•        Job roles are highly structured.
•        The overall structure is mechanical.
•        The structure may be either relatively tall or flat (depending the on the extent of firm restructuring).



Teaching Note: Southwest Airlines has successfully implemented the cost leadership strategy by encouraging the emergence of a low-cost culture (1) by using specialized work tasks and (2) by striving continuously to reduce costs below those of competitors.


Using the Functional Structure to Implement the Differentiation Strategy

Firms offering products that are considered unique by customers usually are following a differentiation strategy.

A differentiation strategy requires
•        the firm to sell nonstandardized products to customers with unique needs
•        relatively complex and flexible reporting relationships
•        frequent use of cross-functional product development teams
•        a strong focus on marketing and product R&D rather than manufacturing and process R&D
•        continuous product innovation, requiring people be able to interpret and take action based on ambiguous, incomplete, and uncertain information
•        a strong focus on the external environment to identify new opportunities
•        rapid responses to collected information suggesting a need for decentralization
•        creativity and the continuous pursuit of new sources of differentiation and new products requiring a lack of specialization (i.e., workers have a relatively large number of tasks in their job descriptions)
•        low formalization, decentralization, and low specialization of work tasks allowing people to interact frequently to further differentiate products while developing ideas for new products


Figure Note: Figure 11.3 summarizes the discussion of the relationships between the differentiation strategy and the functional structure.


FIGURE 11.3
Functional Structure for Implementing a Differentiation Strategy

A first glance, Figure 11.3 appears to be very similar to Figure 11.2 (Functional Structure for Implementation of a Cost Leadership Strategy).  However, there are several subtle but important differences.
•        The centralized corporate staff (between the president and the individual functions) has been replaced by the central staffs of R&D and marketing, which work closely together.
•        Dotted lines between the centralized staff and individual functions have been removed, indicating a decentralization of decision making.
•        Formalization is limited to enable emergence of new product ideas and enhanced ability to change.
•        Job roles are less structured.
•        The structure is organic.



Using the Functional Structure to Implement the Integrated Cost Leadership/Differentiation Strategy

As discussed in Chapter 4, some firms may attempt to implement simultaneously both the cost leadership and differentiation strategies by providing value through
•        low cost relative to a differentiated firm’s products
•        differentiated features relative to features offered by cost leadership firms’ products

The integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy is used frequently in the global economy, though it is difficult to implement. This difficulty is due largely to the fact that different primary and support activities (see Chapter 3) must be emphasized.
•        Low-cost strategies emphasize production and manufacturing process engineering and few product changes.
•        Differentiation strategies require an emphasis on marketing and new product R&D.


Teaching Note: Toyota Motor Corporation has become a world leader in the auto industry primarily through its ability to implement cost leadership and differentiation at the same time.  The key to Toyota’s success has been the differentiated design and manufacturing process that the company has implemented through its integrated product design process.


4        Explain the use of three versions of the multidivisional (M-form) structure to implement different diversification strategies.       

Matches between Corporate-Level Strategies and the Multidivisional Structure

The firm’s level of diversification is a function of decisions about the number and type of businesses in which it will compete, as well as how it will manage the businesses (see Chapter 6). Geared to managing individual organizational functions, increasing diversification eventually creates information processing, coordination, and control problems that the functional structure can’t handle.  This requires a shift from a functional structure to a complex multidivisional structure.

The demands created by different levels of diversification require that each strategy be implemented through a unique organizational structure.


Teaching Note:  From 1950 to the late 1980s, among Fortune 500 firms, diversification and implementation of the multidivisional structure increased dramatically.
•        The percentage of diversified firms increased from 30% to approximately 75%.
•        The multidivisional structure increased from less than 20% to approximately 90%.


Figure Note: Figure 11.4 should be used to indicate to students that there are three variations (or versions) of the multidivisional structure.


FIGURE 11.4
Three Variations of the Multidivisional Structure

The three variations of the multidivisional structure that will be discussed from the perspective of how each is best suited to specific diversification strategies are the:
•        Cooperative form
•        Strategic Business Unit (SBU) form
•        Competitive form



Teaching Note: It is important to reiterate that the functional structure is not as well suited to managing and controlling multiple businesses as is the multidivisional structure or M-form.


Using the Cooperative Form of the Multidivisional Structure to Implement the Related Constrained Strategy

The cooperative form structure uses horizontal integration to bring about interdivisional cooperation. The divisions in the firm using the related-constrained diversification strategy commonly are formed around products, markets, or both.


Figure Note: Figure 11.5 summarizes the structural characteristics of the Cooperative M-form that create and encourage cooperation.



FIGURE 11.5
Cooperative Form of the Multidivisional Structure for Implementing a Related-Constrained Strategy

The first variant of the M-form structure—the Cooperative M-form—is characterized by an increased emphasis on integration devices and horizontal human resource practices.

The large box at the top of Figure 11.5 illustrates what is referred to as the central, corporate, or headquarters office.  It includes the firm’s top-level executives and all staff specialty functions.

All divisions are controlled by the central office and integrated by one of the integrating mechanisms (such as division managers meeting face-to-face, integrating teams, or task forces).

Integrating mechanisms are indicated by the dotted line connecting the divisions which create:
•        tight linkages between divisions
•        corporate office emphasizing centralized planning, human resources, and marketing to facilitate cooperation
•        centralized R&D to coordinate new product introductions and/or process engineering improvements
•        a subjective reward system emphasizing corporate and division performance
•        a cooperative, sharing culture



All of the related-constrained firm’s divisions share one or more corporate strengths. Production competencies, marketing competencies, or channel dominance are examples of strengths that the firm’s divisions might share.
•        Production expertise is one of the strengths of Sony’s divisions, but they have had difficulties in coordinating across divisions to create joint products in online music.
•        Outback Steakhouse, Inc. has sought to diversify across eight different chains using a cooperative M-form structure, to centralize a number of critical functions across the businesses for activities sharing, and to share its expertise in running franchise operations across contracting, advertising, training and more.

The sharing of divisional competencies facilitates the corporation’s efforts to develop economies of scope (which are cost savings resulting from the sharing of competencies developed in one division with another division) that are linked with successful use of the related-constrained strategy. Interdivisional sharing of competencies depends on cooperation, suggesting the use of the cooperative form of the multidivisional structure.  Increasingly, it is important that the links resulting from effective use of integration mechanisms support the cooperative sharing of both intangible resources (e.g., knowledge) as well as tangible resources (e.g., facilities and equipment).

The following are different characteristics of structure that are used as integrating mechanisms by the cooperative structure to facilitate interdivisional cooperation:
•        Centralization—control at the corporate level allows the linking of activities among divisions.
•        Frequent, direct contact between division managers—encourages and supports cooperation and the sharing of competencies or resources that can be used to create new advantages.  These mechanisms include liaison roles, temporary teams/task forces, formal integration departments, and a matrix organization configuration.
•        Coordination among divisions sometimes results in an unequal flow of positive outcomes to divisional managers. In other words, when managerial rewards are based at least in part on the performance of individual divisions, the manager of the division that is able to benefit the most by the sharing of corporate competencies might be viewed as receiving relative gains at others’ expense. Strategic controls are important in these instances, as divisional managers’ performance can be evaluated at least partly on the basis of how well they have facilitated interdivisional cooperative efforts. Furthermore, using reward systems that emphasize overall company performance, besides outcomes achieved by individual divisions, helps overcome problems associated with the cooperative form.


Using the Strategic Business Unit Form of the Multidivisional Structure to Implement the Related Linked Strategy

The strategic business unit (SBU) structure is most appropriate for the related-linked (mixed related and unrelated) strategy.

A strategic business unit (SBU) structure consists of at least three levels, with a corporate headquarters at the top, SBU groups at the second level, and divisions grouped by relatedness within each SBU at the third level.

This means that,
•        within each SBU, divisions are related to each other
•        SBU groups are unrelated to each other
•        within each SBU, divisions producing similar products and/or using similar technologies can be organized to achieve synergy
•        individual SBUs are treated as profit centers and controlled by corporate headquarters
•        corporate headquarters can concentrate on strategic planning rather than operational control


Teaching Note: Many of GE’s SBUs attempt to form competencies in services and technology as a source of competitive advantage. Recently technology was identified as an advantage for the GE Medical Systems SBU as that unit’s divisions share technological competencies to produce an array of sophisticated equipment, including computed tomography (CT) scanners, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) systems, nuclear medicine cameras, and ultrasound systems. Once a competence is developed in one Medical Systems division, it is quickly transferred to the other divisions in that SBU so the competence can help to increase the unit’s overall performance.


Figure Note: Figure 11.6 summarizes structural characteristics of the SBU multidivisional structure and leads to a discussion of this structural form’s potential pitfalls or disadvantages.


FIGURE 11.6
SBU Form of the Multidivisional Structure for         Implementing a Related Linked Strategy

While the SBU M-form appears similar to the Cooperative M-form (that was presented as Figure 11.5), there are several differences.
•        The SBU M-form includes an addition layer – the strategic business unit or SBU – between the corporate headquarters and product divisions.
•        There may be integration and coordination between divisions in a specific SBU.
•        There is independence among and between SBUs.
•        Headquarters manages approval of strategic planning of SBUs for the president.
•        Individual SBUs may have budgets and staffs for within-SBU integrating mechanisms.
•        Corporate headquarters staff serve as consultants to SBUs and divisions on product strategy (rather than having direct input).



Using the Competitive Form of the Multidivisional Structure to Implement the Unrelated Diversification Strategy

Recalling the discussion in Chapter 6, firms following an unrelated diversification strategy can create value by:
•        efficient internal capital allocations
•        restructuring, buying, and selling businesses

Unrelated diversified firms should adopt the third variant of the multidivisional structure, the competitive form of the multidivisional structure, where controls emphasize competition between separate (usually unrelated) divisions for corporate capital allocations.


Figure Note: Figure 11.7 summarizes structural characteristics of the Competitive M-form.


FIGURE 11.7
Competitive Form of the Multidivisional Structure for Implementation of an Unrelated Strategy

The Competitive M-form differs from both the Cooperative and SBU M-forms (see Figures 11.5 and 11.6) by:
•        establishing a smaller headquarters office, generally containing three functions:
        1.        legal affairs, which increases in importance when a firm acquires or divests units
        2.        auditing, which monitors divisional performance to ensure performance data are accurately reported
        3.        finance, which manages the firm’s cash flow and allocates capital
•        allowing independent divisions so financial performance can be monitored separately for each
•        setting up divisions that retain strategic control, but give up cash flow control
•        allowing competition between divisions for capital allocations



The efficient internal capital market that is the foundation for use of the unrelated diversification strategy requires organizational arrangements that emphasize divisional competition rather than cooperation, and three benefits are expected from this internal competition:
1.        Internal competition creates flexibility, allowing resources to be allocated to the division that is working with the most promising technology to fuel the entire firm’s success.
2.        Internal competition challenges the status quo and inertia, because division heads know that future resource allocations are a product of excellent current performance as well as superior positioning of their division in terms of future performance.
3.        Internal competition motivates effort.


Teaching Note: Newell Rubbermaid Company (a supplier of hardware items to discount retailers) has used the competitive M-form to implement an unrelated diversification strategy.  Features of the firm that match this structural selection include the following:
•        The basic strategy of the firm was to market a multi-product offering of brand-name consumer products to mass retailers.
•        The firm emphasized excellent customer service.
•        Newell Rubbermaid was committed to growth by acquisition.
•        Product lines added over time to the firm’s divisions share no common characteristics.
•        Newell Rubbermaid sold an array of products, including household products, hardware, and home and office furnishings.
•        The firm’s competitive advantage was created at the corporate level.
•        Using a small corporate headquarters staff, the firm developed a sophisticated electronic, logistical system that was given to each division.
•        Although not related to each other, each of Newell Rubbermaid’s divisions created value from the lower cost and improved customer relations provided by the system.


Table Note: Table 11.1 compares the structural attributes of the three variants of the multidivisional structure from the perspectives of centralization, integrating mechanisms, divisional performance appraisal criteria, and bases of incentive compensation.


TABLE 11.1
Characteristics of the Structures Necessary to Implement the Related Constrained, Related Linked, and Unrelated Strategies

Table 11.1 provides a handy reference that can be used to compare the structural attributes of the Cooperative, SBU, and Competitive M-form structures based on the
•        degree that operations are centralized or decentralized
•        extent to which each form uses integrating mechanisms
•        emphasis on subjective or objective criteria for appraising divisional performance
•        linkages to corporate, SBU, and/or divisional performance as bases for divisional incentive compensation



5        Discuss the organizational structures used to implement three international strategies.       

Matches between International Strategies and Worldwide Structures

Forming proper matches between international strategies and organizational structures intended to support their use facilitates the firm’s efforts to effectively coordinate and control its global operations.

Importantly, recent research findings confirm the validity of the strategy/structure matches discussed.


Using the Worldwide Geographic Area Structure to Implement the Multidomestic Strategy

Although centralization of decision-making authority has been recognized as a means of achieving coordination (and control) in organizations, some strategies require that local business units (or divisions) have the flexibility that will enable them to adapt to local market preferences.  This may mean that a decentralized structure will be needed to provide this flexibility.

The multidomestic strategy is a strategy in which strategic and operating decisions are decentralized to business units in each country to facilitate tailoring of products to each country.


The structure used to implement the multidomestic strategy is the worldwide geographic area structure, an organizational form in which national interests dominate and that facilitates managers’ efforts to satisfy local or cultural differences.


Figure Note: Characteristics of the worldwide geographic area structure (presented in Figure 11.8) illustrate the decentralized nature of the structure.


FIGURE 11.8
Worldwide Geographic Area Structure for         Implementing a Multidomestic Strategy

The worldwide geographic area structure is characterized by:
•        an emphasis on differentiation or adaptation to local market preferences or cultural requirements
•        individual national market operations as decentralized and independent
•        corporate headquarters coordinating movement of financial resources
•        organization representing a decentralized federation



The multidomestic strategy requires a decentralized structure.
•        National or country-specific preferences require local adaptation for success.
•        Little coordination is required because of local market differences.
•        There is no need for integrating mechanisms among divisions.
•        The level of formalization is low.
•        Coordination mechanisms are informal in nature.

However, firms adopting multidomestic strategies and the worldwide geographic area structure must give up the ability to achieve global efficiency.


Using the Worldwide Product Divisional Structure to Implement the Global Strategy

In contrast with the multidomestic strategy, a global strategy is characterized by
•        a corporate home office that dictates competitive strategy
•        a firm that offers standardized products across country markets
•        the development and exploitation of economies of scope and scale on a global level
•        decisions to outsource some primary or support activities

The appropriate structure for implementation of a global strategy is the worldwide product divisional structure, which is characterized by centralized decision-making authority at the worldwide division headquarters and the establishment of effective coordination and joint problem-solving among disparate divisional subunits.


Figure Note: Characteristics of the worldwide product divisional structure are presented in Figure 11.9.  They illustrate the centralized nature of the structure.


FIGURE 11.9
Worldwide Product Divisional Structure for         Implementing a Global Strategy

The worldwide product divisional structure is characterized by:
•        an emphasis on inter-division coordination devices to facilitate global economies of scale and scope
•        information flows that are coordinated by the shaded global headquarters office
•        corporate headquarters allocates financial resources in a cooperative way
•        organization represents a centralized federation



Multiple integrating mechanisms—which result in effective coordination through mutual adjustment via personal interaction—include,
•        encouraging direct, face-to-face contact between managers
•        assigning liaison roles between departments
•        forming temporary task forces or teams


Using the Combination Structure to Implement the Transnational Strategy

The last international strategy (the transnational strategy) combines multidomestic and global strategies by
•        seeking national or country-specific advantages by emphasizing adaptation to local differences
•        attempting simultaneously to achieve global economies of scale and scope

The combination structure is an organizational form with characteristics and structural mechanisms that result in an emphasis on both geographic and product structures.

The transnational strategy is often implemented through two possible combination structures: a global matrix structure or a hybrid global design.
•        The global matrix design brings together both local market and product expertise into teams who develop and respond to the global marketplace worldwide.  
•        In the hybrid structure some divisions are oriented towards products while others are oriented toward market areas.



FIGURE 11.10
Using the Hybrid Form of the Combination Structure for Implementing a Transnational Strategy

In this design, some divisions are oriented toward products while others are oriented toward market areas.  Thus, in some products, where the geographic area is more important, the division managers are area-oriented.  In other divisions, where worldwide product coordination and efficiencies are more important, the division manager is more product-oriented.  



As alluded to previously, specific attributes of the transnational structure are difficult to identify because of the conflicting requirements that firms organize to provide the firm simultaneously with the
•        flexibility required for adapting to local market preferences
•        coordination and control necessary to pursue global economies of scale and scope

Firms implementing transnational strategies must encourage employees to understand the effects of cultural diversity on the firm’s operations and adopt a combination structure that is simultaneously
•        centralized and decentralized
•        integrated and nonintegrated
•        formalized and nonformalized


Teaching Note: Many features of the transnational strategy are tricky to sort out.  Emphasize that point here with the chapter’s discussion of the combination structure.




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Using the Worldwide Geographic Area Structure at Xerox Corporation

As an organization, Xerox Corporation, emphasizes product innovation to best serve customers’ needs and process innovations to simultaneously improve quality and reduce its production costs. Allocating more than 6 percent of total revenues to research and development (R&D), Xerox’s Innovation Group collaborates with personnel across the firm’s business units to facilitate development of product and process innovations.

Xerox has concentrated its efforts in three primary markets: (1) high-end production and commercial print environment, (2) networked offices from small to large and (3) value-added services.  Xerox is applying a multidomestic strategy in all three markets in order to leverage off its service capabilities in selling solutions to customers in different geographic regions.  Even though the need for documentation is generic worldwide, specific needs vary due to business culture and the sophistication of the local business environment.  Because of these idiosyncrasies, Xerox uses the worldwide geographic area structure to support its multidomestic strategy.  Supporting these units’ efforts to serve the unique needs of customers in different regions are groups such as Innovation, Corporate Strategy/Alliances, and Human Resources/Ethics. Xerox relies on the match between its international strategy and structure as a key driver of profitable growth.

Xerox’s strategic approach to its global effort can best be described as “hybrid.”  It is regionally customized based on business cultures and sophistication levels and yet allows the economies generated through support “sameness.”   



6        Define strategic networks and discuss how strategic center firms implement such networks at the business, corporate and international levels.       

Matches between Cooperative Strategies and Network Structures

As discussed in Chapter 9, firms often may develop multiple strategic alliances to implement cooperative strategies.

A strategic network is a grouping of organizations that has been formed to create value by participating in an array of cooperative arrangements.  It is often a loose federation of partners who participate in the network’s operations on a flexible basis.  A strategic center firm is the one around which the network’s cooperative relationships revolve.


Figure Note: Figure 11.11 illustrates the structure of the strategic network.


FIGURE 11.11
A Strategic Network

The strategic center firm sits in the middle of the strategic network so that it can coordinate the activities of network members firms.  

Note: Four critical aspects of functions performed by the strategic center firm—strategic outsourcing, capability development, technology management, and managing learning processes—are discussed next.



As coordinator or manager of activities carried out by partners in the strategic network, the strategic center firm—and other network partners—should note four critical aspects of the strategic center firm’s functions:
1.        Strategic Outsourcing
2.        Development of Competencies
3.        Technology Management
4.        Race to Learn (or Managing Learning Processes)

Strategic Outsourcing is one of the strategic center firm’s key functions.  In addition to outsourcing more than other members of the strategic network, the center firm also encourages member firms to go beyond contracting to solve problems and to initiate competitive actions that the network can pursue.

The Competence-related role of the center firm is to build or develop the core competencies of other network member firms and encourage them to share these with other network partners.

Technology aspects of the center firm’s role include managing the development and sharing of technology-based ideas among network partners.

Emphasizing the Race to Learn implies that the strategic center firm must encourage positive rivalry among partner firms that will strengthen each partner’s (as well as the network’s) value chain.  The effectiveness of the center firm is related to how well it learns to manage learning processes among network partners.


IMPLEMENTING BUSINESS-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES

Recall from Chapter 9 that complementary assets at the business level can be vertical or horizontal.  Vertical complementary strategic alliances are more common than are horizontal alliances and generally are focused on buyer-supplier relationships.

With Toyota’s strategic network of vertical alliances in Japan, Toyota, as the strategic center firm:
•        encourages subcontractors to modernize their facilities
•        supplies them with any necessary technical and financial assistance
•        reduces transactions costs by entering into long-term contracts which allow supplying partners to increase long-term productivity (as opposed to entering into a series of short-term contracts based on unit pricing)
•        provides engineers in upstream companies (suppliers) with better communication with contractees
•        allows suppliers and center firms to become more interdependent and less independent
•        is able to achieve a competitive advantage because of the imperfect imitability of the structure and the proprietary actions that it uses to manage its strategic network

Horizontal complementary strategic alliances are much more difficult to manage than are vertical complementary strategic alliances because, in a horizontal alliance, it is difficult to select a strategic center firm when several network members have been aggressive competitors.  An example is the instability of alliances between large airlines (see chapter).


IMPLEMENTING CORPORATE-LEVEL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES       

It is less difficult to select a strategic center firm in corporate-level cooperative strategic alliances structured as centralized franchise networks than in those that are decentralized sets of diversified strategic alliances.

McDonald’s has established a centralized strategic network in which its corporate office acts as the strategic center for its network of franchisees.   
•        The headquarters office uses strategic controls and financial controls to verify that the franchisees’ operations create the greatest value for the entire network.
•        A strategic control issue is the location of franchisee units—McDonald’s believes that its greatest expansion opportunities are outside the United States.
•        Financial controls are framed around requirements an interested party must satisfy to become a McDonald’s franchisee, as well as performance standards that are to be met when operating a unit.


IMPLEMENTING INTERNATIONAL COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES

Competing across national borders increases the complexity of the task of managing strategic networks that have been formed through international cooperative strategies and stifles the selection of a strategic center firm because great differences may exist among the regulatory environments of partners’ home countries.

In response to this complexity:
•        distributed strategic networks are formed
•        multiple regional strategic centers are established

Figure Note: Configuration of a distributed strategic network is illustrated in Figure 11.12.


FIGURE 11.12
A Distributed Strategic Network

While the distributed strategic network has a primary or main strategic center firm, it also is characterized by multiple strategic center firms that are distributed throughout the world.

For example, firms such as Ericsson and Electrolux establish multiple strategic centers, which enables them to better manage multiple cooperative relationships with partnering firms that may cross national or regional boundaries or to manage specific global product markets more effectively.

The distributed strategic network form of organization enables the international cooperative network to ensure that region-, country- or product-specific market requirements are managed by the appropriate distributed strategic center firm.





—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        What is organizational structure and what are organizational controls? What are the differences between strategic controls and financial controls?  (pp. 307-309)

Organizational structure specifies the firm’s formal reporting relationships, procedures, controls, and authority and decision-making processes. Influencing managerial work, structure essentially details the work to be done and how that work is to be accomplished. Organizational controls guide the use of strategy, indicate how to compare actual and expected results, and suggest actions to take to improve performance when it falls below expectations. When properly matched with the strategy for which they were intended, structure and controls can be a competitive advantage.
Strategic controls (largely subjective criteria) and financial controls (largely objective criteria) are the two types of organizational controls used to successfully implement a firm’s chosen strategy. Both types of controls are critical, although their degree of emphasis varies based on individual matches between strategy and structure.
Strategic controls are concerned with examining the fit between what the firm might do (as suggested by opportunities in its external environment) and what it can do (as indicated by its competitive advantages). Effective strategic controls help the firm understand what it takes to be successful. Strategic controls demand rich communication between managers responsible for using them to judge the firm’s performance and those with primary responsibility for implementing the firm’s strategies. These frequent exchanges are both formal and informal in nature.
Strategic controls are also used to evaluate the degree to which the firm focuses on the requirements to implement its strategies. For a business-level strategy, for example, the strategic controls are used to study primary and support activities to verify that those critical to successful execution of the business-level strategy are being properly emphasized and executed. With related corporate-level strategies, strategic controls are used to verify the sharing of appropriate strategic factors such as knowledge, markets, and technologies across businesses. To effectively use strategic controls when evaluating related diversification strategies, executives must have a deep understanding of the involved businesses.
Partly because strategic controls are difficult to use with extensive diversification, financial controls are emphasized to evaluate the performance of the firm following the unrelated diversification strategy. The unrelated diversification strategy’s focus on financial outcomes requires the use of standardized financial controls to compare performances between units and managers.  When using financial controls, firms evaluate their current performance against previous outcomes as well as their performance compared to competitors and industry averages.

2.        What does it mean to say that strategy and structure have a reciprocal relationship?  (pp. 311.312)

Strategic competitiveness can be attained only when the firm’s selected structure is congruent with its formulated strategy.  As such, a strategy’s potential to create value is reached only when the firm configures itself in ways that allow the strategy to be implemented effectively. Thus, as firms evolve and change their strategies, new structural arrangements are required.  Additionally, existing structures influence the future selection of strategies. Therefore, the two key strategic actions of strategy formulation and strategy implementation continuously interact to influence managerial choices about strategy and structure.

Regardless of the strength of the reciprocal relationships between strategy and structure, those choosing the firm’s strategy and structure should be committed to matching each strategy with a structure that provides the stability needed to use current competitive advantages as well as the flexibility required to develop future advantages. This means, for example, that when changing strategies, the firm should simultaneously consider the structure that will be needed to support use of the new strategy.

Research suggests that most firms experience a certain pattern of relationships between strategy and structure. Chandler found that firms tended to grow in somewhat predictable patterns—i.e., in the following order: (1) volume, (2) geography, (3) integration [vertical, horizontal], and (4) product diversification (see Figure 11.1).  Chandler interpreted his findings to indicate that the firm’s growth patterns determine its structural form.

As shown in Figure 11.1, sales growth creates coordination and control problems that the existing organizational structure can’t efficiently handle. Organizational growth creates the opportunity for the firm to change its strategy to try to become even more successful. However, the existing structure’s formal reporting relationships, procedures, controls, and authority and decision making processes lack the sophistication required to support use of the new strategy.  A new structure is needed to help decision makers access the knowledge and understanding required to effectively integrate and coordinate actions to implement the new strategy.

3.        What are the characteristics of the functional structures that are used to implement the cost leadership, differentiation, integrated cost leadership/differentiation, and focused business-level strategies?  (pp. 313-315)

A functional structure is used to implement the cost leadership, differentiation, and integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategies.  The functional structure consists of a chief executive officer and limited corporate staff with line managers in dominant functions such as production, accounting, marketing, R&D, engineering, and human resources.  This structure allows for functional specialization, thereby facilitating knowledge sharing and idea development.  Because the differences in orientation among organizational functions can impede communication and coordination, the central task of the CEO is to integrate the decisions and actions of individual business functions for the benefit of the entire corporation.  This organizational form also facilitates career paths and professional development in specialized functional areas.

The structural characteristics of specialization, centralization, and formalization play important roles in the successful implementation of the cost leadership strategy.  Specialization refers to the type and numbers of job specialties that are required to perform the firm’s work.  For the cost leadership strategy, managers divide the firm’s work into homogeneous subgroups.  The basis for these subgroups is usually functional areas, products being produced, or clients served.  By dividing and grouping work tasks into specialties, firms reduce their costs through the efficiencies achieved by employees specializing in a particular and often narrow set of activities.

Firms using the differentiation strategy produce products that customers perceive as being different in ways that create value for them. With this strategy, the firm wants to sell nonstandardized products to customers with unique needs. Relatively complex and flexible reporting relationships, frequent use of cross-functional product development teams, and a strong focus on marketing and product R&D rather than manufacturing and process R&D (as with the cost leadership form of the functional structure) characterize the differentiation form of the functional structure (see Figure 11.3). This structure contributes to the emergence of a development-oriented culture—a culture in which employees try to find ways to further differentiate current products and to develop new, highly differentiated products.

Continuous product innovation demands that people throughout the firm be able to interpret and take action based on information that is often ambiguous, incomplete, and uncertain. With a strong focus on the external environment to identify new opportunities, employees often gather this information from people outside the firm, such as customers and suppliers. Commonly, rapid responses to the possibilities indicated by the collected information are necessary, suggesting the need for decision-making responsibility and authority to be decentralized. To support creativity and the continuous pursuit of new sources of differentiation and new products, jobs in this structure are not highly specialized. This lack of specialization means that workers have a relatively large number of tasks in their job descriptions. Few formal rules and procedures are also characteristics of this structure. Low formalization, decentralization of decision-making authority and responsibility, and low specialization of work tasks combine to create a structure in which people interact frequently to exchange ideas about how to further differentiate current products while developing ideas for new products that can be differentiated to create value for customers.

Firms using the integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy want to sell products that create value because of their relatively low cost and reasonable sources of differentiation. The cost of these products is low “relative” to the cost leader’s prices while their differentiation is “reasonable” compared to the clearly unique features of the differentiator’s products.

The integrated cost leadership/differentiation strategy is used frequently in the global economy, although it is difficult to successfully implement. This difficulty is due largely to the fact that different primary and support activities must be emphasized when using the cost leadership and differentiation strategies. To achieve the low-cost position, emphasis is placed on production and process engineering, with infrequent product changes. To achieve a differentiated position, marketing and new-product R&D are emphasized while production and process engineering are not. Thus, use of the integrated strategy results when the firm successfully combines activities intended to reduce costs with activities intended to create additional differentiation features. As a result, the integrated form of the functional structure must have decision-making patterns that are partially centralized and partially decentralized. Additionally, jobs are semi-specialized, and rules and procedures call for some formal and some informal job behavior.

The focus strategy is best implemented by means of the simple structure.  The simple structure is most appropriate for firms that follow a single business strategy and offer a line of products in a single geographic market and for firms implementing focused cost leadership or focused differentiation strategies.  A simple structure is an organizational form in which the owner-manager makes all major decisions directly and monitors all activities, while the firm’s staff merely serves as an extension of the manager’s supervisory authority.  It is characterized by little specialization of tasks, few rules, little formalization, unsophisticated information systems, and direct involvement of the owner-manager in all phases of day-to-day operations.

At some point, however, the increased sales revenues resulting from success will necessitate changing from a simple to a functional structure.  The challenge for managers is to recognize when a structural change is required to coordinate and control effectively the firm’s increasingly complex operations.

4.        What are the differences among the three versions of the multidivisional (M-form) organizational structures that are used to implement the related-constrained, related-linked, and unrelated corporate-level diversification strategies?  (pp. 315-323)

The three variants of the multidivisional or M-form structure that should be used to implement corporate-level strategies are the cooperative form, SBU form, and competitive form.

The related-constrained strategy is best implemented using the cooperative form of the multidivisional structure.  This bears out in practice because the cooperative form is an organizational structure that uses many integration devices and horizontal human resource practices to foster cooperation and integration among the firm’s divisions.  The cooperative form (see Figure 11.5) emphasizes horizontal links and relationships more than the two other variations of the multidivisional structure.  Cooperation among divisions that are formed around either products offered or markets served is necessary to realize economies of scope and to facilitate the transferring of skills.  Increasingly, it is important for these links to allow and support the sharing of a range of strategic assets, including employees’ “know-how” as well as tangible assets such as facilities and methods of operations.

Firms implementing a related-linked strategy usually employ the SBU (or strategic business unit) form of the multidivisional structure.  The SBU form consists of at least three levels, with the top level being corporate headquarters; the next level, SBU groups; and the final level, divisions grouped by relatedness (either product or geographic market) within each SBU (see Figure 11.6).  The firm’s business portfolio is organized into those related to one another within a SBU group and those unrelated in other SBU groups.  Thus, divisions within groups are related, but groups are largely unrelated to each other.  Within the SBU structure, divisions with similar products or technologies are organized to achieve synergy.  Each SBU is a profit center that is controlled by the firm’s home office.  An important benefit of this structural form is that individual decision makers, within their strategic business unit, look to SBU executives rather than headquarters personnel for strategic guidance.

Firms implementing the unrelated strategy seek to create value through efficient internal capital allocations or by restructuring, buying, and selling businesses.  The competitive form of the multidivisional structure is used to implement the unrelated diversification strategy.  The competitive form (see Figure 11.7) is an organizational structure in which the controls used emphasize competition between separate (usually unrelated) divisions for corporate capital.  To realize benefits from efficient resource allocations, divisions must have separate, identifiable profit performance and must be held accountable for such performance.  The internal capital market requires organizational arrangements that emphasize competition rather than cooperation between divisions.  To emphasize competitiveness among divisions, the home office maintains an arms-length relationship and does not intervene in divisional affairs except to audit operations and discipline managers of poorly performing divisions.

5.        What organizational structures are used to implement the multidomestic, global, and transnational international strategies?  (pp. 324-328)

The multidomestic strategy is one in which strategic and operating decisions are decentralized to business units in each country to facilitate tailoring of products to local markets.  However, it is sometimes difficult for firms to know how local their products should or can become. Firms implementing the multidomestic strategy often attempt to isolate themselves from global competitive forces by establishing protected market positions or by competing in industry segments that are most affected by differences among local countries.  The worldwide geographic area structure (see Figure 11.8) is used to implement the multidomestic strategy.  This structural form emphasizes national interests and facilitates managers’ efforts to satisfy local or cultural differences.  Because the multidomestic strategy requires little coordination between different country markets, there is no need for integrating mechanisms among divisions in the worldwide geographic area structure.  As such, formalization is low and coordination among units in a firm’s worldwide geographic area structure is often informal.

Given its emphasis on international scale and scope economies, the global strategy is a strategy in which standardized products are offered across country markets and where competitive strategy is dictated by the firm’s home office.  The worldwide product divisional structure (see Figure 11.9) is used to implement the global strategy.  This structure represents an organizational form in which decision-making authority is centralized in the worldwide division headquarters to coordinate and integrate decisions and actions among disparate divisional business units.  This form is the “structure of choice” for rapidly growing firms seeking to manage their diversified product lines effectively.  Integrating mechanisms also create effective coordination through mutual adjustments in personal interactions.  Such integrating mechanisms include direct contact between managers, liaison roles between departments, temporary task forces or permanent teams, and integrating roles.  As managers participate in cross-country transfers, they are socialized in the philosophy of managing an integrated strategy through a worldwide product divisional structure.  A shared vision of the firm’s strategy and structure is developed through standardized policies and procedures (formalization) that facilitate implementation of this organizational form.

The transnational strategy is an international strategy through which a firm seeks to provide the local responsiveness of the multidomestic strategy while achieving the global efficiency of the global strategy.  The combination structure has characteristics and structural mechanisms that result in an emphasis on both geographic and product structures.  Thus, this structure has the multidomestic strategy’s geographic area focus and the global strategy’s product focus.  The structure used to implement the transnational strategy must be simultaneously centralized and decentralized, integrated and nonintegrated, and formalized and nonformalized.  These seemingly opposing structural characteristics must be managed by a structure that is capable of encouraging all employees to understand the effects of cultural diversity on a firm’s operations.  Accordingly, a strong educational component is needed to change the whole culture of the organization.  If the cultural change is effective, the combination structure should allow the firm to learn how to gain competitive benefits in local economies by adapting capabilities and core competencies that often have been developed and nurtured in less culturally diverse competitive environments.

6.        What is a strategic network?  What is a strategic center firm?  (pp. 329-330)

A strategic network is a group of firms that has been formed to create value by participating in multiple cooperative arrangements, such as strategic alliances. An effective strategic network facilitates the discovery of opportunities beyond those identified by individual network participants. A strategic network can be a source of competitive advantage for its members when its operations create value that is difficult for competitors to duplicate and that network members can’t create by themselves. Strategic networks are used to implement business-level, corporate-level, and international cooperative strategies.
       
Commonly, a strategic network is a loose federation of partners who participate in the network’s operations on a flexible basis. At the core or center of the strategic network, the strategic center firm is the one around which the network’s cooperative relationships revolve.

Because of its central position, the strategic center firm is the foundation for the strategic network’s structure. Concerned with various aspects of organizational structure, such as formal reporting relationships and procedures, the strategic center firm manages what are often complex, cooperative interactions among network partners. The strategic center firm is engaged in four primary tasks as it manages the strategic network and controls its operations:

Strategic Outsourcing is one of the strategic center firm’s key functions.  In addition to outsourcing more than do other members of the strategic network, the center firm also encourages member firms to go beyond contracting to solve problems and to initiate competitive courses action that the network can pursue.

The Competence-related role of the center firm is to build or develop the core competencies of other network member firms and encourage them to share capabilities and competencies with other network partners.

Technology aspects of the center firm’s role include managing the development and sharing of technology-based ideas among network partners.

Emphasizing the Race to Learn implies that the strategic center firm must encourage positive rivalry among partner firms that will strengthen each partners’ as well as the network’s value chain.  The effectiveness of the center firm is related to how well it learns how to manage learning processes among network partners.

Taken together, the effective management of all aspects of the network by the strategic center firm is critical to the network’s ability to successfully implement business-level, corporate-level and international cooperative strategies.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: The Merits of ROWE (Results-Only Work Environment)

For this exercise, you and your classmates will debate the merits of Best Buy’s ROWE initiative. To complete this exercise, your instructor will divide the class into five groups of roughly equal size. The groups will have these responsibilities:
Team 1 will present arguments why ROWE is desirable and should be implemented in other organizations.
Team 2 will present a counterargument why ROWE is undesirable, and hence should not be implemented in other organizations.
Team 3 will cross-examine Team 1.
Team 4 will cross-examine Team 2.
Team 5 will decide which of the two arguments is most convincing.

Exercise 2: Burger Buddy and Ma Maison

Assume that it is a few months before your college graduation. You and some classmates have decided to become entrepreneurs. The group has agreed on the restaurant industry, but your discussions thus far have gone back and forth between two different dining concepts: Burger Buddy and Ma Maison. Details about these two concepts follow.
Burger Buddy would operate near campus in order to serve the student market. Burger Buddy will be a 1950s-themed hamburger joint, emphasizing large portions and affordable prices.
Ma Maison is the alternate concept. One of your partners has attended cooking school and has proposed the idea of a small, upscale French restaurant. The menu would have no set items, but would vary on a daily basis instead. Ma Maison would position itself as a boutique restaurant providing superb customer service and unique offerings.
Working in small groups, answer the following questions:
1.        What is the underlying strategy for each restaurant concept?
2.        How would the organizational structure of the two restaurant concepts differ?
3.        How would the nature of work vary between the two restaurants?
4.        If the business concept is successful, how might you expect the organizational structure and nature of work at each restaurant to change in the next five to seven years?

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: The merits of ROWE

This exercise uses a debate format to discuss the Best Buy ROWE (Results-Only Work Environment) initiative that is described in the Strategic Focus section of the chapter.  On the surface, many students may look at elements of the program – no fixed work hours, optional attendance at work meetings, etc – as nirvana.  The goal of the debate is to highlight the strategy – structure connection by debating how applicable ROWE might be to other settings.  Students should be divided into five teams, with the following responsibilities:
Team 1: Will present arguments why ROWE (Results-Only Work Environment) is desirable, and should be implemented in other organizations.
Team 2: Will present a counter-argument why ROWE is undesirable, and hence should not be implemented in other organizations.
Team 3: Will cross-examine Team 1.
Team 4: Will cross-examine Team 2.
Team 5: Will decide which side of the argument is most convincing.
Teams should be given 20 to 30 minutes to prepare.  The instructor should indicate that outside research is not allowed.  Concurrently, students should be encouraged to draw on ideas presented in both their strategy course and prior courses as well.

A recommended format for the debate is:

Team 1 makes a 5 to 7 minute presentation
Team 2 makes a 5 to 7 minute presentation
Team 3 does a 5 minute cross-examination of Team 1
Team 4 does a 5 minute cross-examination of Team 2
Team 1 gives a 2 minute summation
Team 2 gives a 2 minute summation
Judges deliberate, then make a brief presentation explaining their rationale for which side had a more compelling case.
Once the debate has ended, the instructor can ask the following questions to help ensure the main points have been brought out:
1.        How well did the debate tap the notion that a given structure should be matched to a given strategy?
2.        Since strategy and structure are linked, what do you think of Best Buy’s initiative to sell the ROWE model to other firms?
3.        What types of firms (and industries) might ROWE be the most appropriate for? The least?
4.        Who in class believes they would personally be more effective in a ROWE setting?  Less effective?  Why?
5.        How might ROWE be received in cultures outside the US?
Additionally, the instructor may wish to visit the ROWE website, at: http://www.culturerx.com/.

Exercise 2: Burger Buddy and Ma Maison

The purpose of this exercise is to use a familiar industry – restaurants – to illustrate how organizational structure and job design differ for firms which are pursuing different strategies.  Student teams are asked to consider two different restaurant concepts.
Burger Buddy is the first concept.  The idea for this restaurant is to operate near campus, serving the student market.  Burger Buddy will be a 1950s-themed hamburger joint, emphasizing large portions and affordable prices.  
Ma Maison is the alternate concept.  One of your partners has attended cooking school, and has proposed the idea of a small, upscale French restaurant.  The menu would have no set items, but would vary on a daily basis instead.  Ma Maison will position itself as a boutique restaurant providing superb customer service and unique offerings.  
Working in small groups, students are asked to answer the following questions:
5.        What is the underlying strategy for each restaurant concept?
6.        How would the organizational structure of the two restaurant concepts differ?
7.        How would the nature of work vary between the two restaurants?
8.        If the business concept is successful, how might you expect items 2 and 3 to change in the next 5 to 7 years?
Regarding the first question, Burger Buddy is clearly following a low-cost strategy.  Ma Maison, however, is pursuing differentiation.  Additionally, given the narrow focus in the concept statement, Ma Maison would be positioning itself as a niche differentiator, versus a broader market.
Organizational structure would be very different for the two concepts.  Some students might propose that both restaurants would follow a simple structure: as noted in the book, this is a common approach for small businesses, including restaurants.  When students respond with a simple structure, acknowledge that this is a commonly used format, but challenge whether a simple structure is optimal for firm performance.  
Ask students if they have worked in a fast food restaurant and what the organizational structure was like.  Themes that will emerge include a formal hierarchy of management, established procedures, clear rules for decision making, and so on.  In contrast, the boutique restaurant would likely have a flatter hierarchy, decentralized decision making, and more flexible procedures.
The nature of work for firms pursuing low cost versus differentiation will differ substantially.  One way to frame this distinction is to compare what it means to be a cook at Burger Buddy versus Ma Maison: at Burger Buddy, the skill sets are easily learned, and quickly replaced if an employee leaves.  At the upscale restaurant, however, a chef will play a key role in the success of the business.  Employees will typically be paid less in the low cost setting, have higher turnover, and require less knowledge or training.  Incentive pay may be used at Ma Maison, but not at Burger Buddy. The two work settings will also differ in task complexity, task significance, and levels of autonomy.
The last question addresses the stability of organizational structure and the nature of work over time.  Because the Ma Maison concept is framed around a niche, the restaurant would operate at a steady state over time.  Burger Buddy, however, is a scalable business concept.  As such, it has the potential to grow into multiple locations.  One question to ask students is what would it take for a multi-location version of Burger Buddy to be considered an M-form structure.  As an example, the firm could organize a headquarters which is responsible for advertising, expansion, and oversight of strategy.  Managers of individual branches would have operational autonomy, and profit/loss accountability.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.

Application Discussion Questions       
       
1.        Why do firms experience evolutionary cycles in which there is a fit between strategy and structure, punctuated with periods in which strategy and structure are reshaped? Have the students provide examples of global firms that have experienced this pattern.
2.        Ask the students to select an organization (for example, an employer, a social club, or a nonprofit agency) of which they currently are members. What is this organization’s structure? Is the organization using the structure that is appropriate, given its strategy? If not, what structure should it use?
3.        Have the students use the Internet to find a firm that uses the multidivisional structure. Which form of the multidivisional structure is the firm using? What is there about the firm that makes it appropriate for it to use the M-form?
4.        Through reading of the business press, students should identify a firm implementing the global strategy and one implementing the multidomestic strategy. What organizational structure is being used in each firm? Are these structures allowing each firm’s strategy to be implemented successfully? Why or why not?
5.        Students should define strategic and financial controls for a businessperson in the local community. Ask the businessperson to describe the use of each type of control in his or her business. In which type of control does the businessperson have the greatest confidence? Why?


Ethics Questions

1.        When a firm changes from the functional structure to the multidivisional structure, what responsibilities does it have to current employees?
2.        Are there ethical issues associated with the use of strategic controls? With the use of financial controls? If so, what are they?
3.        Are there ethical issues involved in implementing the cooperative and competitive M-form structures? If so, what are they? As a top-level manager, how would you deal with them?
4.        Global and multidomestic strategies call for different competitive approaches. What ethical concerns might surface when firms attempt to market standardized products globally? When they develop different products or approaches for each local market?
5.        What ethical issues are associated with the view that the “redesign of organizations throughout a society—indeed, globally—entails losses as well as gains”?


Internet Exercise               

Many retail industries, such as music sales, are ideal for Web-based organizational and selling structures. Visit the sites of some of the most popular venues: CD Universe (http://www.cduniverse.com), CD Quest (http://www.cdquest.com), and Amazon.com (http://www.amazon.com). Can you define the type of organizational structure each company uses? What attempts are being made by each to diversify and expand into other businesses?

*e-project: Suppose you want to launch your own CD sales company on the Internet that will have an immense global reach to the large Spanish-speaking market around the world. Suppose further that you have hired a Web design firm to construct a site for you. Based on your research of top sites, how will you describe your Web design and business-level strategy for this project? What organizational structure is appropriate to implement the business-level strategy selected?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:59:28 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 12
Strategic Leadership

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define strategic leadership and describe top-level managers’ importance.
2.        Define top management teams and explain their effects on firm performance.
3.        Describe the managerial succession process using internal and external managerial labor markets.
4.        Discuss the value of strategic leadership in determining the firm’s strategic direction.
5.        Describe the importance of strategic leaders in managing the firm’s resources.
6.        Define organizational culture and explain what must be done to sustain an effective culture.
7.        Explain what strategic leaders can do to establish and emphasize ethical practices.
8.        Discuss the importance and use of organizational controls.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case  How Long Can I Have the Job?  The Short Lives of CEOs and Top-Level Strategic Leaders
STRATEGIC LEADERSHIP AND STYLE
Strategic Focus  Doug Conant: Providing Effective Leadership at Campbell Soup Company THE ROLE OF TOP-LEVEL MANAGERS   
        Top Management Teams  
MANAGERIAL SUCCESSION  
KEY STRATEGIC LEADERSHIP ACTIONS
          Determining Strategic Direction
                Effectively Managing the Firm’s Resource Portfolio  
                Sustaining an Effective Organizational Culture  
                   Emphasizing Ethical Practices  
                Establishing Balanced Organizational Controls
Strategic Focus  What’s Next?  Strategic Leadership in the Future  
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  




LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction: This chapter deals with the importance of strategic leadership, its effects on organizational outcomes, and the great challenges faced by strategic leaders.  This indicates that effective strategic leaders must be able to use the strategic management process (illustrated in Figure 1-1) effectively by
•        guiding the firm in ways that result in the formation of its vision and mission
•        facilitating the development of appropriate strategic actions
•        providing guidance that results in strategic competitiveness and above-average returns



OPENING CASE
How Long Can I Have the Job?  The Short Lives of CEOs and Top-Level Strategic Leaders

The shelf lives of CEOs are declining.  As you read in the Opening Case in Chapter 10, the tenure of CEOs of high-visibility organizations is decreasing.  Some analysts feel that closer scrutiny by boards of directors is one of the driving forces.  Others feel that the high-level of job-related stress is to blame, and then there are extraordinary performance expectations.  All of these pundits are right.  The two examples of external placement used in this Opening Case might be construed as a vote of confidence for internal succession, but reality will not support that internal succession results are any longer lasting than have been external placements.      

Instructors should note how in many instances Opening Cases and Strategic Foci in this text relate to one another.  You may suggest to your students to review earlier Opening Cases and Strategic Foci.  Both Chapters 10 and 11 deal directly and/or indirectly with CEO succession.  Is CEO succession a timely topic because of the job-tenacity of CEOs or the changing roles of boards of directors?   



Figure Note: The role of strategic leadership in the strategic management process is illustrated in Figure 12.1.


FIGURE 12.1
Strategic Leadership and the Strategic Management Process

As illustrated in Figure 12.1, effective strategic leadership
•        shapes the formation of the firm’s vision and mission

which influences the
•        development of successful strategic actions
•        formulation of strategies
•        implementation of strategies

which lead to
•        strategic competitiveness
•        above-average returns





Teaching Note: Xerox presents an interesting story in strategic leadership. It is true that Xerox has committed a number of strategic blunders over the years, and yet it has enjoyed significant success in digital copy technologies. However, because of significant weakness in its many businesses, the company almost foundered after years of weak sales, high costs, and low employee morale.  When Anne Mulcahy was promoted to President of the company in 2000, she took steps to try to turn the situation around—e.g., by divesting businesses, such as financial services, selling copiers and printers, and trying to strengthen the firm’s services and solutions business.


1        Define strategic leadership and describe top-level managers’ importance.       

STRATEGIC LEADERSHIP AND STYLE

Strategic leadership entails the ability to anticipate, envision, maintain flexibility, and empower others to create strategic change as necessary.  In other words, strategic leadership represents a complex form of leadership in organizations. A manager with strategic leadership skills exhibits the ability to guide the firm through the competitive landscape by
•        managing an entire enterprise
•        influencing the behavior, thoughts, and feelings of co-workers
•        managing through others
•        successfully processing or making sense of complex, ambiguous information by successfully dealing with change and uncertainty

The strategic leader has several responsibilities, including the following:
•        establishing a context for efficiency
•        managing human capital (perhaps the most critical of the strategic leader’s skills)
•        effectively managing the firm’s operations
•        sustaining high performance over time
•        being willing to make candid, courageous, yet pragmatic, decisions
•        soliciting feedback from peers, superiors, and employees about their difficult decisions and vision
•        developing strong partners internally and externally to facilitate execution of their vision

Strategic leaders are those at the top of the organization (in particular, the CEO), but other commonly recognized strategic leaders include members of the board of directors, the top management team, and division general managers.

The style used to provide leadership often affects the productivity of those being led. The most effective leadership style used by strategic leaders is a transformational leadership style, which encourages followers to exceed expectations, and place the organization above self interests. The strategic leadership skills of an organization’s managers represent resources that can affect the firm’s performance.  These resources must be developed for the firm’s future benefit.



STRATEGIC FOCUS
Doug Conant: Providing Effective Strategic Leadership at Campbell Soup Company

Cultivating diverse employees, celebrating their successes and empowering them are keys to the recent success of Campbell Soup Company.  Much of the success that Campbell has experienced in the last six years under Doug Conant’s leadership as president and CEO can be traced to recognizing and utilizing the values generated with a diverse workforce.  This credo has been paramount for the successful turn-around orchestrated by Conant of a beleaguered soup company into one of the food industry’s best performers.

Many of the actions Conant is taking, as well as how he takes those actions, are consistent with the attributes of transformational leadership.  He readily gives credit to others for the firm’s achievements and continuously deflects praise about his role in Campbell’s turnaround.  He’s anxious to celebrate what’s right about employees’ work and attitudes rather than what’s wrong.   Framing inspiring vision and mission statements were among the first actions he took as CEO. He believes strongly in workforce diversity, saying “Our goal as a company is to cultivate a diverse employee population that brings new and richer perspectives to their jobs and enables us to better understand, anticipate and respond to the changed marketplace.”

Mr. Conant is the epitome of a transformational leader.  He admits that he doesn’t have all the answers and that the key to “new and richer perspectives” of Campbell Soup lie within in its diverse employee base.  Several principles guide Conant’s work as a strategic leader. Using a personal touch to interact with people, working with individuals to jointly determine performance expectations and creating opportunities for every person to succeed are some of the direction-providing principles Conant follows as a strategic leader.




THE ROLE OF TOP-LEVEL MANAGERS

Top-level managers represent an important resource for organizations as they attempt to formulate and implement strategies effectively because of top-level mangers’ roles in designing the organization and the performance outcomes that result from using that design.  Thus, it is important for organizations to have a top management team with superior managerial skills.

Three factors can be viewed as determining a strategic leader’s decision discretion:
•        External environmental sources
•        Organizational characteristics
•        Managerial characteristics


Figure Note: Figure 12.2 shows three factors that affect/determine managerial discretion.


FIGURE 12.2
Factors Affecting Managerial Discretion

Managerial discretion is a function of three factors: external environment, organizational characteristics, and an individual manager’s characteristics.

External Environment (especially the competitive environment)
•        industry structure
•        rate of market growth
•        number and type of competitors
•        nature and degree of political/legal constraints
•        degree to which products are differentiated

Organizational Characteristics
•        size
•        age
•        organizational culture
•        availability of resources
•        patterns of interaction among employees

Managers’ (Individual) Characteristics:
•        manager’s tolerance for ambiguity
•        commitment to the firm and its desired strategic outcomes
•        interpersonal skills
•        level of aspiration
•        degree of self-confidence



Other critical roles played by top-level managers include:
•        implementing an appropriate organizational structure
•        implementing the organization’s reward systems
•        shaping the organization’s culture
•        influencing organizational activities and performance


Teaching Note: Remind students that, for top-level managers to make a difference—or enhance a firm’s ability to achieve a competitive advantage—they generally must possess superior knowledge and skills. While all organizations have strategic leaders, the top management team’s portfolio of skills must be rare, valuable, difficult for other top management teams to imitate, and not be readily substitutable if they are to result in a competitive advantage for the firm (as suggested in Chapter 1).


2        Define top management teams and explain their effects on firm performance.       

Top Management Teams

The complexity of the challenges faced by the firm and the need for substantial amounts of information and knowledge require teams of executives to provide the strategic leadership of most firms. Use of a team to make strategic decisions also helps to avoid managerial hubris.

A firm’s top management team is composed of key managers that are primarily responsible for formulating and implementing the firm’s strategy.  In the case of large organizations, members of the top management team usually can be identified as those individuals with the title of vice president or above and/or individuals who serve on its board of directors.


Teaching Note:  Strategic actions taken by a firm’s top management team will have an impact—positive or negative—on firm performance.  Research indicates that there seems to be a link between the configuration or mix of expertise and skills of members of a firm’s top management team and firm performance.


Top Management Team, Firm Performance, and Strategic Change

The job of top-level executives is complex and requires a broad knowledge of the firm’s operations, as well as the three key parts of the firm’s external environment—the general, industry, and competitor environments (see Chapter 2). Thus, firms try to form a top management team that has the appropriate knowledge and expertise to operate the internal organization, yet also can deal with all the firm’s stakeholders as well as its competitors.

Research into the relationship or link between top management team composition and firm performance generally indicates that team heterogeneity is important. A heterogeneous top management team is composed of individuals with different functional backgrounds, experiences, and education.

The more heterogeneous a top management team is, with varied expertise and knowledge, the more capacity it has to provide effective strategic leadership in formulating strategy. Members of a heterogeneous top management team benefit from discussing the different perspectives advanced by team members, and these discussions can increase the quality of the top management team’s decisions.

The net benefit of the actions of heterogeneous teams tends to be positive in terms of market share and above-average returns. Research suggests that the path of causality goes something like this:  heterogeneity among top management team members  increased debate  better strategic decisions  increased firm performance.

It is also important that the top management team members function cohesively. In general, more heterogeneous and larger top management teams find it more difficult to implement strategies effectively.

Research indicates a positive relationship between higher levels of a top management team’s heterogeneity, firm innovation, and strategic change.  Thus, a team with diverse backgrounds and expertise is more likely to:
•        change strategies when it is necessary to do so
•        identify internal and external environmental changes that require the firm to change strategic direction
•        “think outside of the box” and thus be more creative in making decisions


The CEO and Top Management Team Power

While the composition of a firm’s top management team is important, a team that is too powerful may negatively affect firm performance. As noted in Chapter 10, the involvement of outsiders as members of a firm’s board of directors also has an impact on firm performance. In fact, involvement of outside directors in shaping the firm’s strategic direction normally results in higher firm performance (than when they are not involved).


Teaching Note: Inside directors (part of management) can affect CEO power because they
•        report to the CEO
•        have a greater understanding of firm operations (information they control)
•        can control the flow of information to outside directors


However, in some cases, a firm’s CEO and members of the top management team may “overpower” the firm’s board of directors.  This can happen when
•        the CEO appoints members of the board (insiders or sympathetic outsiders)
•        the CEO also holds the title of Chairman of the Board (sometimes called “CEO duality”)

It varies across industries, but duality occurs most commonly in the largest of firms. Increased shareholder activism, however, has brought CEO duality under scrutiny and attack in both U.S. and European firms. Historically, an independent board leadership structure—in which the same person did not hold the positions of CEO and chair—was believed to enhance a board’s ability to monitor top-level managers’ decisions and actions, particularly in terms of the firm’s financial performance.

Teaching Note:  It should be noted that a recent investigation of the relationship between CEO duality and firm performance found that the stock market was indifferent to changes in duality status.  Such changes have a negligible effect of financial performance, and there is weak evidence that duality has an effect on long-term performance.

Top management team members with longer team and organization tenure have an increased ability to influence the board of directors.  However, long tenure restricts an executive’s knowledge base, which then limits the number of alternatives evaluated when strategic decisions are being made.  The net impact is that these individuals may be able to forestall or avoid board involvement in strategic decisions.

Because an unhealthy relationship between the board of directors and the top management team can potentially have a negative effect on an organization’s strategic competitiveness:
•        boards are challenged to develop an effective relationship with the firm’s top management team
•        relative degrees of power between the board and the top management team should be examined with respect to the individual firm’s situation (including firm resources and environmental volatility)

Teaching Note: One solution to this dysfunction is to get members of the firm’s management team to have a significant ownership interest in the firm.  While this may provide the team with additional power, a significant level of ownership also should encourage team members to act more in the interests of shareholders, because they also are shareholders.


3        Describe the managerial succession process using internal and external managerial labor markets.       

MANAGERIAL SUCCESSION

Because of the impact that members of a firm’s top management team—especially the CEO—can have on the organization’s performance, the selection of new top managers requires effective screening systems.

Organizations can select their strategic leaders from one of two labor markets.
•        Internal managerial labor markets represent future promotion or transfer opportunities for managerial positions within the firm.
•        External managerial labor markets represent the collection of managerial career opportunities outside of a manager’s current firm.

Because of insiders’ experience within the firm and the industry in which it completes, the benefits of using the internal managerial labor market include:
•        familiarity with the organization’s products, markets, technologies, and standard operating procedures
•        less turnover among existing personnel with valuable firm-specific knowledge
•        a desire for continuity and commitment to the firm’s vision, mission, and strategic actions

Because of the perceived value of selecting an insider to succeed a CEO (or other top management team member), selection of an outsider is unusual.  But there are instances which call for selecting an outsider.
•        Executives with overly long tenure with the firm may become stale, which reduces the number of innovative approaches developed to help the firm cope with changing conditions that the firm faces.
•        Insiders may have less of an ability to innovate or create innovation-stimulating conditions, which can be a detriment to the firm’s long-term success in the twenty-first century competitive landscape.
•        Outsiders generally have broader, less limited perspectives, which may mean that innovation and strategic change are encouraged.


Teaching Note:  Outsiders are limited in firm-specific knowledge and/or industry experience.

Figure Note:  Figure 12.3 is helpful to discuss the relationships between the sources of a successor-CEO, top management team membership, and firm strategy.


FIGURE 12.3
Effects of CEO Succession and Top Management Team Composition on Strategy

Figure 12.3 illustrates relationships between the source of the successor, top management team heterogeneity/homogeneity (or team makeup), and firm strategy.

•        Internal CEO Succession: A homogeneous top management team generally results in a stable strategy.  A heterogeneous top management team generally results in a stable strategy with continued innovation.

•        External CEO Succession: A homogeneous top management team often results in changes in both top management team membership and strategy.  If the top management team is heterogeneous, strategic change is likely.


Teaching Note: Ask students to compare characteristics of successor CEOs in turnaround situations with key managerial resources presented earlier in this chapter.  Key differences that should be recognized are that, in a turnaround situation, industry-specific knowledge is less important than the ability to radically change the organization, and perhaps its strategy.

To have an adequate number of top managers, firms must take advantage of a highly qualified labor pool, including one source of managers that has often been overlooked: women. Firms are beginning to utilize women’s potential managerial talents with substantial success.  A few firms have gained value by using the significant talents of women leaders. But many more have not done so, which represents an opportunity cost to them.


KEY STRATEGIC LEADERSHIP ACTIONS

Figure Note: The characteristics of successor CEOs also can be related to the six critical actions required for the effective exercise of strategic leadership (highlighted in Figure 12.4).


FIGURE 12.4
Exercise of Effective Strategic Leadership

Figure 12.4 highlights the six most critical actions that strategic leaders must perform.

•        Determining strategic direction
•        Establishing balanced controls
•        Exploiting and maintaining the firm’s resource portfolio
•        Sustaining an effective corporate culture
•        Emphasizing ethical practices

Figure 12.4 sets the stage for the balance of Chapter 12.




4        Discuss the value of strategic leadership in determining the firm’s strategic direction.       

Determining Strategic Direction

Determining the strategic direction of the firm refers to developing a long-term vision.  This means that a firm’s managers must think beyond the current period to develop a “future” direction for the firm (normally 5 to 10 years forward).

The ideal long-term vision has two parts—core ideology and envisioned future.  Core ideology motivates employees through the company’s heritage, but the envisioned future encourages employees to go beyond their expectations and requires significant change and progress.  The envisioned future serves as a guide to the firm’s strategy implementation, including motivation, leadership, employee empowerment, and organizational design.

A charismatic CEO may foster stakeholder commitment to a new vision and strategic direction.

It is important that strategic leaders also recognize that, while gaining employee commitment to a new vision and strategic direction is important, factors such as the following must not be overlooked:
•        The firm’s strengths must be considered when making strategic changes for a new strategic direction.
•        The firm’s short-term needs must be balanced with long-term growth and survival.
•        The firm can maintain long-term survivability by effectively managing its portfolio of resources.


5        Describe the importance of strategic leaders in managing the firm’s resources.       

Effectively Managing the Firm’s Resource Portfolio

Probably the most important task for strategic leaders is effectively managing the firm’s portfolio of resources.

Firms may have multiple resources that can be categorized into the following categories:
•        financial capital
•        human capital
•        social capital
•        organizational capital

Strategic leaders manage the firm’s portfolio of resources by
•        organizing them into capabilities
•        structuring the firm to use the capabilities
•        developing and implementing a strategy to leverage those resources to achieve a competitive advantage


Exploiting and Maintaining Core Competencies

As a reminder, core competencies are those capabilities of the firm around which a competitive advantage may be built (as defined and discussed in Chapters 1 and 3).

Core competencies relate to an organization’s functional skills, such as manufacturing, finance, marketing, and research and development.  The key is that core competencies must enable the firm to produce and deliver products and services to customers in ways that create value for them.

Teaching Note: Before core competencies can serve as building blocks for a firm’s competitive advantage, they must be distinctive. Remind students that the following conditions must be satisfied for core competencies to be classified as distinctive:
•        unique to the firm
•        valuable
•        difficult for competitors to imitate
•        nonsubstitutable

This means that core competencies must be emphasized as the firm implements strategy.  To ensure that core competencies that are identified as distinctive (and potential sources of competitive advantage) remain distinctive for longer periods of time, firms must recognize the importance of developing their human capital.


Developing Human Capital and Social Capital

Human capital refers to the knowledge and skills of the firm’s workforce.  This means that employees must be viewed as capital resources and as deserving of investment.  


Teaching Note: An important point to bring out in this section is that people and people-related competencies—the workforce and its capabilities (a firm’s human capital)—historically have contributed more to firm (and economic) success than investment in capital equipment.

Teaching Note: One significant problem firms face is inadequate human capital to run an organization effectively. As a remedy, many firms hire temporary employees, while others are trying to improve their recruiting and selection techniques.  However, solving the problem requires more than “temp hiring” since this limits management’s ability to build effective commitment to organizational goals. Hiring star players is also insufficient. It requires building effective commitment to organizational goals as well.


Effective training and development programs are important because these efforts
•        recognize that knowledge has become more integral to gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage
•        help build knowledge and skills
•        inculcate core values
•        establish a systematic view of the organization
•        promote the firm’s vision
•        develop organizational cohesion
•        contribute to the development of core competencies
•        improve strategic managers’ capabilities in the skills that are critical to effective strategic leadership (e.g., determining the firm’s strategic direction, exploiting and maintaining core competencies, and developing an organizational culture that supports ethical practices)

When human capital investments are successful, a workforce is capable of learning continuously.  Learning continuously and leveraging the firm’s expanding knowledge base is linked with strategic success.  It is also important to promoting innovation, which is the foundation of competitive advantage.

Layoffs can result in a significant loss of the knowledge possessed by a firm’s human capital. Research has shown that moderate-sized layoffs may improve firm performance, but large layoffs produce stronger performance downturns in firms because of the loss of human capital.

Although it is also common for restructuring firms to reduce their spending on training and development programs, restructuring may actually be an important time to increase investments in these programs. Restructuring firms have less slack and cannot absorb as many errors; moreover, the employees who remain after layoffs may find themselves in positions without all of the skill or knowledge they need to perform the required tasks effectively.

Viewing employees as a resource to be maximized rather than a cost to be minimized facilitates the successful implementation of a firm’s strategies. The implementation of such strategies also is more effective when strategic leaders approach layoffs in a manner that employees believe is fair and equitable.

Social capital involves relationships inside and outside the firm that help the firm accomplish tasks and create value for customers and shareholders. Social capital is a critical asset for a firm. Inside the firm, employees and units must cooperate to get the work done. In multinational organizations, units often must cooperate across country boundaries on activities such as R&D to produce outcomes needed by the firm (e.g., new products).


6        Define organizational culture and explain what must be done to sustain an effective culture.       

Sustaining an Effective Organizational Culture

Organizational culture represents a set of complex ideologies, symbols, and core values that is shared throughout an organization and that influences the way that it conducts business.

Because it influences how the firm conducts its business and helps regulate and control employee behavior, organizational culture can be a source of competitive advantage.

Entrepreneurial Mind Set

An organization’s culture will either encourage or discourage (and, in some cases, even penalize) employee efforts to tap into entrepreneurial opportunities.

Teaching Note: IBM produced a handbook designed to infuse an entrepreneurial spirit into its culture. The handbook, Changing the World, is filled with tips designed to break mental barriers and to help employees be more creative in their jobs.  Gerald Haman took a different approach.  He developed a process, called the Thinkubator, to help firms build a stronger entrepreneurial orientation and boost creativity in their employees.  According to Haman, the Thinkubator helps people rediscover their gifts for creativity.

One way that the pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities might be promoted is to invest in opportunities as real options.  That is, invest in an opportunity to provide the potential of exercising the option of taking advantage of the opportunity at some point in the future.  Firms might enter strategic alliances for this reason. For example, they might do so to have the option of acquiring the partner later or of building a stronger relationship (e.g., developing a joint new venture).

Corporate culture characteristics and managerial actions that encourage an entrepreneurial mindset include:
•        Autonomy – enabling employees to be self-directed in the pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities
•        Innovation – encouraging the pursuit of new ideas, experimentation, and creative processes that will find new ways to add value
•        Risk-taking – promoting the willingness of both employees and the organization to accept risk in the pursuit of new market opportunities
•        Proactiveness – being a market leader rather than a market follower by anticipating the market’s future needs and being the first to satisfy them
•        Competitive aggressiveness – taking actions that enable the firm to consistently and significantly outperform the competition


Changing the Organizational Culture and Restructuring

As noted in the text, incremental changes to the organization’s culture typically are used to improve the effectiveness of strategy implementation.

A dramatic shift in strategy from the firm’s historical pattern of strategy often means that major changes in the organization’s culture are required, and perhaps even the selection of a new CEO or top management team.


Teaching Note:  No matter why an organization’s culture must change, the shaping and reinforcing of the new culture requires:
•        effective communication and problem solving
•        selecting people with the values that managers wish to be infused throughout the organization
•        developing an effective performance appraisal process which establishes goals and measures individual performance toward achieving goals that fit with the new core values
•        implementing reward systems that encourage behaviors that reflect the new core values


Teaching Note:  It is helpful to show students that effective strategic leadership will be reinforced by an appropriate corporate culture.  This can be done using video interviews of a CEO that also profile the firm (e.g., any of the many reports on Herb Kelleher and Southwest Airlines, when he was CEO there, will work well for this assignment).  As they watch the video, have the students write down in separate columns on a piece of paper the clues they find of two things: leadership approaches taken and corporate culture employed.  Upon debriefing, they will quickly see that these are mutually reinforcing in successful companies.


For cultural changes to be effective, they must be supported fully and actively by the CEO and other members of the top management team.  And if large-scale change is needed, support and involvement of mid-level managers is required as they generally are adept at energizing people and aligning their interests and actions.

If the required cultural change is major or critical, new top management team members may need to be brought in from outside of the firm to act as a catalyst for the change.


Teaching Note: Transforming the organization and its culture is challenging.  For example, top executives at Sara Lee decided in 1997 to change the firm from a capital-intensive manufacturer to a less asset-intensive brand manager, requiring it to sell its manufacturing facilities, find excellent suppliers to replace product manufacturing, and change the firm’s culture to focus on management of its brand.  However, by 2000 it had become an unwieldy conglomerate, unable to capture synergies across product lines.  Local managers were suspicious of managers in other product units/profit centers and thus would not cooperate with them to gain economies.  The decentralized culture that evolved prevents centralization, and the firm has not developed brand management as a core competence.

Another example comes from the airline industry. Continental Airlines has successfully changed its culture, building a system of teamwork that has yielded increased returns.  CEO Gordon Bethune described the firm’s teamwork culture not as composed of cross-functional teams, but rather as the interdependent parts of a clock.  Multiple functions have value when they all work together cooperatively, and employees are rewarded for cooperating as a team.  A company’s reputation is linked to its culture and its strategy.


7        Explain what strategic leaders can do to establish and emphasize ethical practices.       

Emphasizing Ethical Practices

The effectiveness of strategy implementation processes increases when they are based on ethical practices. Ethical companies encourage and enable people at all organizational levels to exercise ethical judgment, but unethical practices become like a contagious disease if they evolve in an organization.

To properly influence employee judgment and behavior, ethical practices must shape the firm’s decision-making process and be an integral part of an organization’s culture.  Research has found that a value-based culture is the most effective means of ensuring that employees comply with the firm’s ethical standards.  

In the absence of ethical requirements, managerial opportunism allows managers to make decisions that are in their own best interests, but not in the best interests of the firm or its stakeholders (as discussed in Chapter 10).  


Teaching Note: Recent research reports that a number of top-level executives and business students appear to be willing to commit either illegal or unethical actions. For example:
•        47 percent of upper-level executives, 41 percent of controllers, and 76 percent of graduate-level business students were willing to misrepresent their firms’ financial statements.
•        87 percent of managers made one or more fraudulent decisions out of seven total decision situations.
•        The probability of a fraudulent decision was greater when the individual valued a comfortable life and/or pleasure and placed less value on self-respect.
•        When cheating was observed, there was a reluctance to report it.


Recent ethical lapses at high-profile corporations suggest firms need to employ ethical strategic leaders—ones who include ethical practices as part of their long-term vision for the firm, who desire to do the right thing, and for whom honesty, trust, and integrity are important.  Strategic leaders who display these qualities inspire employees to develop/support an organizational culture in which ethical practices are the expected norm.

Firms must employ ethical strategic leaders who will infuse ethical values into the organization’s culture by
1.        establishing/communicating the firm’s ethical code of conduct to describe the firm’s ethical standards
2.        continuously revising and updating the code of conduct based on stakeholder input
3.        disseminating the code of conduct to stakeholders, informing them of the firm’s ethical standards/practices.
4.        developing/implementing methods and procedures that can be used to achieve the firm’s ethical standards
5.        creating and implementing explicit reward systems that recognize individuals that use the appropriate channels to report wrongdoing
6.        creating a work environment that treats all people with dignity

The effectiveness of these actions increases when they are taken simultaneously, which makes them mutually supportive.  When managers/employees do not engage in these actions, perhaps because an ethical culture is lacking, problems are likely to occur.  Formal organizational controls may be needed to prevent more problems.


8        Discuss the importance and use of organizational controls.       

Establishing Balanced Organizational Controls

Organizational controls—introduced in Chapter 11—are necessary to help ensure that firms meet desired outcomes: strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.  

Controls are the formal, information-based routines and procedures used by managers to maintain or alter patterns in organizational activities to help strategic leaders.  These can be used to do the following:
•        build credibility
•        demonstrate the value of the firm’s strategies to stakeholders
•        promote and support organizational change
•        provide the parameters within which strategies are implemented and corrective actions taken when implementation-related adjustments are needed

Teaching Note: Strategic controls represent those control systems that focus on the content of actions rather than on outcomes.  This is in contrast to financial controls that focus on short-term financial outcomes (or results) rather than on the appropriateness of strategic actions that have been taken.

Strategic controls are important because they can encourage managers to make decisions that include moderate and acceptable levels of risk with a focus on the long-term impact of their decisions.

The use of financial controls alone often results in managers making risk-averse decisions, taking only the short-term financial impact into account.


The Balanced Scorecard

The underlying premise of the balanced scorecard is that firms disadvantage their future performance possibilities when financial controls are emphasized at the expense of strategic controls.  Financial controls provide feedback about outcomes achieved from past actions, but do not communicate the drivers of the firm’s future performance, which can promote organizational behavior that has a net effect of sacrificing the firm’s long-term value creating potential for short-term performance gains.

An appropriate balance of strategic controls and financial controls, rather than an overemphasis on one or the other, allows firms to effectively monitor their performance.

The following four perspectives are integrated to form the balanced scorecard framework:
1.        Financial – concerned with growth, profitability, and risk from shareholders’ perspective
2.        Customer – concerned with the value customers perceive to be created by the firm’s products
3.        Internal business processes – concerned with the priorities for various business processes that create customer and shareholder satisfaction
4.        Learning and growth – concerned with creating a climate that supports change, innovation, and growth



STRATEGIC FOCUS
What’s Next?  Strategic Leadership in the Future

The expectations for a firm’s key strategic leaders are that strategic leaders must design a process their firm will use as the foundation for earning above-average returns and consistently outperforming rivals. The simplicity of this statement belies its complexity, whether discussing strategic management today or strategic management for tomorrow.

Even though predictions of the future of strategic leadership are risky, several realities and expectations seem likely.  First, it is likely that tomorrow’s strategic leaders will feel even more stress than do their counterparts today. One reason is that those for whom a firm’s key strategic leaders work have significant expectations of strategic leaders. Strategic leadership’s demands create stress that leaders must acknowledge, and with which they must learn how to cope if they are to successfully discharge their responsibilities.  Another reasonably safe prediction is that all stakeholders will continue to expect the firm’s board of directors to better represent their interests. Even today, board members are on the “hot seat” to improve their performance as agents for each stakeholder group. In turn, the expectation of better board performance will find board members holding strategic leaders more accountable for achieving positive outcomes in the areas of strategy formulation and execution, effective handling of crises, particularly financial ones, ability to meaningfully link top-level managerial pay to performance, and in representing the company’s best interests at all times.  Tomorrow’s board members and a firm’s strategic leaders will undoubtedly be held accountable for their actions and the outcomes they achieve or fail to achieve.

So how do upstart high-potential wannabes enhance their ability to be an effective strategic leader in tomorrow’s organizations?  First, strategic leaders should be continuously curious so that they will have the foundation for seeking to learn everything they can from every person with whom they have contact.  Future strategic leaders should rely on their curiosity to spot patterns that suggest future conditions.  Additionally, tomorrow’s strategic leaders should place even greater emphasis on the “simple rules” of effective strategic leadership than is the case today. These simple, yet vital rules are the following:  Leaders make work about others, not about themselves. Once a person becomes a strategic leader, everything that person does is about “them” (the stakeholders, but especially employees) while nothing is about the leader.  Leaders learn everything possible about their company from both strategic and tactical perspectives.  Leaders hold individuals accountable for their outcomes. However, leaders must make themselves the most accountable for overall performance.  Leaders shoulder all responsibility for all parts of their job; they always take the blame for mistakes and distribute the credit for successes to others.

This is when students need to be reminded that “leadership” is something that can be difficult to define but can be recognized when they see it.  Strong corporate leaders surround themselves with people who are smarter than themselves. In addition, support people are encouraged to do their “thing” in a work “with” me; not work “for” me environment.  The CEO position is not one to which everyone should aspire.




Generally speaking, strategic controls tend to be emphasized when the firm assesses its performance relative to the learning and growth perspective, while financial controls are emphasized when assessing performance in terms of the financial perspective. Study of the customer and internal business processes perspectives often is completed through relatively equal emphasis on strategic and financial controls.


Teaching Note: Firms use different criteria to measure their standing relative to the scorecard’s four perspectives. The important point is for the firm to select the number of criteria that will allow it to have both a strategic understanding and a financial understanding of its performance without becoming immersed in too many details.



FIGURE 12.5
Strategic Controls and Financial Controls in a Balanced Scorecard Framework

Figure 12.5 presents some samples of the criteria included when using the balanced scorecard approach.



Teaching Note: In diversified firms, successful strategic leaders also balance strategic controls and financial controls to make appropriate investments for future viability (through strategic controls), while maintaining an appropriate level of financial stability in the present (through financial control).  In fact, most corporate restructuring is designed to refocus the firm on its core businesses, thereby allowing top executives to reestablish strategic control of their separate business units. Thus, both types of controls are important.


The effective use of strategic controls by top executives is often integrated with appropriate autonomy for the various subunits so they can gain a competitive advantage in their respective markets.  Strategic control can be used to promote sharing of both tangible and intangible resources among the firm’s interdependent businesses. The autonomy provided allows the flexibility needed to take advantage of specific marketplace opportunities. As a result, strategic leadership promotes the simultaneous use of strategic controls and autonomy.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        What is strategic leadership?  In what ways are top executives considered important resources for an organization?  (pp. 340-344)

Strategic leadership is a complex form of leadership in organizations.  It means that the leader must have the ability to manage through others.  Being a strategic leader requires the ability to anticipate, envision, maintain flexibility, and empower others to create strategic change as necessary.

Top executives are important to effective strategy formulation and implementation.  A key reason for this is that the strategic decisions made by top managers influence the firm’s design and performance outcomes.  Thus, having a top management team with superior managerial skills is a critical element of organizational success.

In addition to determining new strategic initiatives, top-level managers also develop the appropriate organizational structure and reward systems of a firm.  Furthermore, top executives have a major effect on a firm’s culture.  Research suggests that managers’ values are critical in shaping a firm’s cultural values—i.e., top executives have an important effect on organizational activities and performance.  The significance of this effect should not be underestimated.

2.        What is a top-management team, and how does it affect a firm’s performance and its abilities to innovate and make appropriate strategic changes?  (pp. 344-347)

The top management team includes the key managers responsible for formulating and implementing the organization’s strategies.  Typically, the top management team includes the officers of the corporation as defined by the title of vice president and above and/or by service as a member of the board of directors.  The quality of the strategic decisions made by a top management team affects the firm’s ability to innovate and engage in effective strategic change.  

Given the challenges, it is imperative that firms try to form a top management team with the appropriate knowledge and expertise to operate the internal organization, yet also deal with external stakeholders.  This normally requires a heterogeneous top management team, one composed of individuals with different functional backgrounds, experiences, and education. The more heterogeneous the team, the more capacity it has to provide effective strategic leadership for the formulation of strategy.  Members of a heterogeneous top management team benefit from discussing varied perspectives, which increases the quality of decisions.  This is especially true when a synthesis emerges from the conversations generated from diverse ideas, which is generally superior to individual perspectives.  The net benefit of these actions is market share gains and above-average returns.  In sum, heterogeneity among top management team members promotes effective debate, which leads to better strategic decisions and, in turn, higher firm performance.  

Heterogeneous top management teams are also positively associated with innovation and strategic change.  Heterogeneity may force the team or some of its members to “think outside of the box” and thus be more creative in their thinking and decisions.  Therefore, firms that need to change their strategies are more likely to do so if they have top management teams with diverse backgrounds and expertise.  A top management team with various areas of expertise is more likely to identify environmental changes (opportunities and threats) or changes within the firms (strengths and weaknesses) that require a different strategic direction.

3.        How do the internal and external managerial labor markets affect the managerial succession process?  (pp. 347-349)

There are two types of managerial labor markets (internal and external) from which organizations select managers and strategic leaders. An internal managerial labor market consists of the opportunities for managerial positions within a firm, whereas an external managerial labor market is the collection of career opportunities for managers in organizations outside of the one for which they currently work.

Several benefits accrue to firms using the internal labor market to select a new CEO.  Because they have experience with the firm and the industry environment, insiders are familiar with company products, markets, technologies, and standard operating procedures.  Additionally, internal hiring produces less turnover among existing personnel, many of whom possess valuable firm-specific knowledge.  Therefore, if the firm is performing well, internal succession is more likely to lead to knowledge retention and sustained high performance.  Employees usually prefer using the internal managerial labor market to select top management team members and the CEO.  The selection of insiders to fill top-level management positions reflects a desire for continuity and a continuing commitment to the firm’s current vision, mission, and chosen strategies.

In contrast, valid reasons exist for a firm to select an outsider as its new CEO.  For example, research suggests that long tenure with a firm seems to reduce the number of innovative ideas top executives are able to develop to cope with conditions facing their firm.  Given the importance of innovation for firm success in the 21st-century competitive landscape, an inability to innovate and/or to create conditions that stimulate innovation is a liability for a strategic leader.  In contrast to insiders, CEOs selected from outside the firm may have broader, less limited perspectives and usually encourage innovation and strategic change.

4.        How does strategic leadership affect the determination of the firm’s strategic direction? (pp. 350-351)

Determining the strategic direction of a firm refers to the development of a firm’s long-term vision, normally looking at least 5 to 10 years into the future.  While the core ideology motivates employees through the company’s heritage, the envisioned future encourages employees to stretch beyond their expectations and requires significant change and progress.  The envisioned future serves as a guide to many aspects of a firm’s strategy implementation process, including motivation, leadership, employee empowerment, and organizational design.  

Nonetheless, it is important not to lose sight of the strengths of the organization in making changes required by a new strategic direction. The goal is to balance the firm’s short-term need to adjust to a new vision while maintaining its long-term survivability by managing its portfolio of resources effectively.  

5.        How do strategic leaders effectively manage their firm’s resource portfolio such that its core competencies are exploited, and the human capital and social capital are leveraged to achieve a competitive advantage?  (pp. 351-354)

Strategic leaders manage the firm’s portfolio of resources by organizing them into capabilities, structuring the firm to use the capabilities, and developing and implementing a strategy to leverage those resources to achieve a competitive advantage. In particular, strategic leaders must exploit and maintain the firm’s core competencies and develop and retain the firm’s human and social capital.

Typically, core competencies relate to an organization’s functional skills, such as manufacturing, finance, marketing, and research and development. Firms develop and exploit core competencies in many different functional areas. Strategic leaders must verify that the firm’s competencies are emphasized in strategy implementation efforts. In many large firms, and certainly in related diversified ones, core competencies are effectively exploited when they are developed and applied across different organizational units. Firms must continuously develop or even change their core competencies to stay ahead of the competition. Additionally, firms must guard against the competence becoming a liability such that the firm is unwilling to change.
       
Human capital refers to the knowledge and skills of a firm’s entire workforce. Investments in human capital are productive; in fact, people are perhaps the only truly sustainable source of competitive advantage. Human capital’s increasing importance suggests a significant role for the firm’s human resource management activities.

Effective training and development programs increase the probability that a manager will be a successful strategic leader. These programs have grown progressively important to the success of firms as knowledge has become more integral to gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage. Additionally, such programs build knowledge and skills, inculcate a common set of core values, and offer a systematic view of the organization, thus promoting the firm’s strategic vision and organizational cohesion. The programs also contribute to the development of core competencies. Furthermore, they help strategic leaders improve skills that are critical to completing other tasks associated with effective strategic leadership.  Thus, building human capital is vital to the effective execution of strategic leadership.

Strategic leaders must acquire the skills necessary to help develop human capital in their areas of responsibility. When human capital investments are successful, the result is a workforce capable of learning continuously, which minimizes the risk of making errors. Strategic leaders tend to learn more from their failures than their successes because they sometimes make the wrong attributions for the successes. Learning and building knowledge is important for creating innovation in firms, and innovation leads to competitive advantage.

Social capital involves human relationships that help the firm accomplish tasks and create value for customers and shareholders. Social capital is a critical asset for a firm. Inside the firm, employees and units must cooperate to get the work done. In multinational organizations, units often must cooperate across country boundaries on activities such as R&D to produce outcomes needed by the firm (e.g., new products).  External social capital has become critical to firm success in the last several years. Few firms, if any, have all of the resources they need to compete in global (or domestic) markets. Thus, they establish alliances with other firms that have complementary resources in order to gain access to them. These relationships must be effectively managed to ensure that the partner trusts the firm and is willing to share the desired resources.

6.        What is organizational culture?  What must strategic leaders do to develop and sustain an effective organizational culture?  (pp. 354-355)

An organizational culture consists of a complex set of ideologies, symbols, and core values that is shared throughout the firm and influences the way it conducts business.  Evidence suggests that a firm can develop core competencies both in terms of the capabilities it possesses and the way the capabilities are used to produce desired outcomes.  In other words, because it influences how the firm conducts its business and helps regulate and control employee behavior, organizational culture can be a source of competitive advantage.  Thus, shaping the context within which the firm formulates and implements its strategies—that is, shaping the organizational culture—is a central task of strategic leaders.

Organizational culture often encourages (or discourages) the pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities, especially in large firms.  Successful outcomes derived through employees’ pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities are a major source of growth and innovation for firms.  Five dimensions characterize a firm’s entrepreneurial mindset—autonomy, innovativeness, risk taking, proactiveness, and competitive aggressiveness.

Changing organizational culture is more difficult than maintaining it, but effective strategic leaders recognize when change is needed.  Incremental changes to the firm’s culture typically are used to implement strategies.  However, more significant and sometimes even radical changes to organizational culture are designed to support the selection of strategies that differ from the ones the firm has implemented historically.  Regardless of the reasons for change, shaping and reinforcing a new culture requires effective communication and problem solving, along with the selection of the right people (those who have the values desired for the organization), effective performance appraisals (establishing goals and measuring individual performance toward goals that fit with the new core values), and appropriate reward systems (rewarding the desired behaviors that reflect the new core values).

Evidence suggests that cultural changes succeed only when the firm’s CEO, other key top management team members, and middle-level managers actively support them.  One catalyst for change in organizational culture, particularly for critical changes, is the selection of new top management team members from outside the corporation.

7.        As a strategic leader, what actions could you take to establish and emphasize ethical practices in your firm?  (pp. 355-356)

Strategic leaders are challenged to take actions that increase the probability that an ethical culture will exist in their organization.  One means of doing this that is gaining favor in companies is to institute a formal program to manage ethics in the organization.  While these formal ethics programs operate much like control systems, they help inculcate values throughout the organization as well.  Therefore, when these efforts are successful, the practices associated with an ethical culture become institutionalized in the firm; that is, they become the set of behavioral commitments and actions accepted by most of the firm’s employees and other stakeholders with whom employees interact.  Other actions that strategic leaders can take to develop an ethical organizational culture include:
(1)        establishing and communicating specific goals to describe the firm’s ethical standards (e.g., developing and disseminating a code of conduct),
(2)        continuously revising and updating the code of conduct, based on inputs from people throughout the firm and from other stakeholders (e.g., customers and suppliers),
(3)        disseminating the code of conduct to all stakeholders to inform them of the firm’s ethical standards and practices,
(4)        developing and implementing methods and procedures to use in achieving the firm’s ethical standards (e.g., use of internal auditing practices that are consistent with the standards),
(5)        creating and using explicit reward systems that recognize acts of courage (e.g., rewarding those who use proper channels and procedures to report observed wrongdoings), and
(6)        creating a work environment in which all people are treated with dignity.  
These actions increase in effectiveness when they are taken simultaneously, making them mutually supportive.

8.        What are organizational controls?  Why are strategic controls and financial controls important parts of the strategic management process?  (pp. 356-358)

Organizational controls have long been viewed as an important part of strategy implementation processes.  Controls are necessary to help ensure that firms achieve their desired outcomes of strategic competitiveness and above-average returns.  Defined as the formal, information-based procedures that are used by managers to maintain or alter the patterns of activities within the organization, controls help strategic leaders build credibility, demonstrate the value of strategies to the firm’s stakeholders, and promote and support strategic change.  Most critically, controls provide the parameters within which strategies are to be implemented as well as corrective actions to be taken when implementation-related adjustments become necessary.

Financial controls focus on short-term financial outcomes.  In contrast, strategic controls focus on the content of strategic actions, rather than their outcomes.  Some strategic actions can be correct, but poor financial outcomes may still result from external conditions such as economic problems, unexpected domestic or foreign government actions, or natural disasters.  Therefore, an emphasis on financial control often produces more short-term and risk-averse managerial decisions because financial outcomes may be due to events beyond managers’ direct control.  Alternatively, strategic controls encourage lower-level managers to make decisions that incorporate moderate and acceptable levels of risk because outcomes are shared between the business-level executives making strategic proposals and the corporate-level executives evaluating them.

Successful strategic leaders balance strategic controls and financial controls with the intent of achieving more positive long-term returns.  In fact, most corporate restructuring is designed to refocus the firm on its core businesses, thereby allowing top executives to reestablish strategic control of their separate business units.  Thus, both types of controls are important.  The balanced scorecard approach underscores this essential notion.


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Executive succession

For this exercise, you will identify and analyze a case of CEO succession. Working in small groups, find a publicly held firm that has changed CEOs. The turnover event must have happened at least twelve months ago, but no more than twenty-four months ago.  Use a combination of company documents and news articles to answer the following questions:
1.        Why did the CEO leave?  Common reasons for CEO turnover include death or illness, retirement, accepting a new position, change in ownership or control, or termination. In cases of termination, there is often no official statement as to why the CEO departed.  Consequently, you may have to rely on news articles that speculate why a CEO was fired, or forced to resign.
2.        Did the replacement CEO come from inside the organization, or outside?
3.        What are the similarities and differences between the new CEO and the CEO she or he replaced?  Possible comparison items could include functional experience, industry experience, etc. If your library has a subscription to Hoovers Online, you can find information on top managers through this resource.
4.        At the time of the succession event, how did the firm’s financial performance compare to industry norms?  Has the firm’s standing relative to the industry changed since the new CEO took over?
5.        Has the firm made major strategic changes since the succession event?  For example, has the firm made major acquisitions or divestitures since the succession event?  Launched or closed down product lines?  
Create a PowerPoint presentation that presents answers to each of the above questions.  Your presentation should be brief, consisting of no more than five to seven slides.

Exercise 2: Balanced Scorecard and the Baldridge Quality Award

The chapter described the role of the business scorecard in facilitating effective strategic leadership practices.  For this exercise, you will be asked to compare and contrast the balanced scorecard against the Baldridge Quality Award Criteria. The Baldridge Award was created in 1988 to recognize firms that were leaders in global competitiveness through product and process quality initiatives. The award is named in honor of Malcolm Baldridge, who served as U.S. Secretary of Commerce during the 1980s. Information about the Baldridge Award can be found at http://www.quality.nist.gov/.
Working in small groups, prepare a brief write-up (two to three pages maximum) that answers the following questions:
1.        What are the similarities and differences in the goals of balanced scorecard and Baldridge Award frameworks?
2.        What are the similarities and differences in the evaluation metrics used in these frameworks?
3.        From your analysis, are these competing or complementary frameworks?  Or, does one have no relevance to the other? What recommendation would you make to a firm that was considering implementing both frameworks concurrently?
—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Executive succession

The goal of this exercise is to illustrate trends and issues related to executive succession.  Student teams are asked to identify a case of CEO succession that has happened at least twelve months ago, and no more than twenty four months ago.  Tip: you can use ABI/Inform or the Wall Street Journal databases using the search terms “executive succession,”, “CEO succession”, or “CEO turnover” to find specific succession events.  Presently, the Yahoo News search does not allow setting time periods, so students will only be able to find recent succession events.  Additionally, one can search Google using the News Archive, then selecting the appropriate date range.
A good way to debrief this assignment is class is to create a table that integrates the findings of all of the teams.  Start by dividing the companies into two groups: above- and below-industry performance at the time of the succession event.  Make a note of how many companies fit into each group.  Then, fill in the table elements below:

        Above norm        Below norm
        # of cases               
Source of successor        Insider               
        Outsider               
Reasons for CEO turnover        Death or illness               
        New job               
        Retirement               
        Change in control               
        Possible termination               
        Unknown               
How similar are the new and old CEOs?        Very similar               
        Somewhat similar               
        Very different               
Extent of strategic change since turnover        Minimal               
        Moderate               
        Extensive               
Performance since turnover        Improved               
        Unchanged               
        Worsened               


Exercise 2: Balanced Scorecard and the Baldridge Quality Award

The purpose of this exercise is to compare how the Balanced Scorecard model discussed in the text relates to the Malcolm Baldridge Quality Award.  Students are asked to research both frameworks, and prepare a written assignment that answers the following questions:
4.        What similarities and differences are there in the goals of balanced scorecard and Baldridge Award frameworks?
5.        What are the similarities and differences in the evaluation metrics used in these frameworks?
6.        From your analysis, are these competing or complementary frameworks?  Or, does one have no relevance to the other?  What recommendation would you make to a firm that was considering implementing both frameworks concurrently?
The main site for the Baldridge Award is:
http://www.quality.nist.gov/
Additionally, the workbook for 2007 Baldridge business criteria may also be helpful:
http://www.quality.nist.gov/PDF_ ... profit_Criteria.pdf
There are strong overlaps between both frameworks.  To facilitate a classroom discussion on this topic, it may be helpful to draw a diagram of the Baldridge framework on the board:



Here is a side-by-side comparison of the key areas for the two frameworks, and sub-items for each area:
Balanced Scorecard        Baldridge Quality Award (2007)
Financial
        Growth
        Profit
        Risk        Leadership
        Senior leadership
        Governance/social responsibility
Customer
        Perceived value        Strategic Planning
        Strategy development
        Strategy execution
Internal business processes
        Tools to enhance satisfaction        Customer and Market Focus
        Customer/market knowledge
        Customer relationships/satisfaction
Learning and Growth
        Change Management
        Innovation        Measurement, Analysis & Knowledge
        Measurement, analysis &
        improvement of firm performance
        Knowledge management
        Workforce
        Workforce engagement
        Workforce environment
        Process Management
        Work systems design
        Work process management and
        improvement
        Results
        Product and Service outcomes
        Customer-focused outcomes
        Financial and market Outcomes
        Workforce-focused outcomes
        Process effectiveness outcomes
        Leadership outcomes


Finally, the following article may be useful for additional detail, or as a follow-up reading:
Bell, Robert R., & Elkins, Susan A. 2004. A balanced scorecard for leaders: implications of the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award criteria. SAM Advanced Management Journal.  January 1.

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.
       
Application Discussion Questions               

1.        Have the students choose a CEO of a prominent firm that they believe exemplifies the positive aspects of strategic leadership. What actions does this CEO take that demonstrate effective strategic leadership? What are the effects of those actions on the firm’s performance?
2.        Now have the students select a CEO of a prominent firm that they believe does not exemplify the positive aspects of strategic leadership. What actions did this CEO take that are inconsistent with effective strategic leadership? How have those ineffective actions affected the firm’s performance?
3.        What are managerial resources? What is the relationship between managerial resources and a firm’s strategic competitiveness?
4.        Have the students examine some articles in the popular press and select an organization that recently went through a significant strategic change. They should collect as much information as they can about the organization’s top management team. Is there a relationship between the top management team’s characteristics and the type of change the organization experienced? If so, what are the nature and outcome of that relationship?
5.        Ask the students to read some articles in the popular press and identify two new CEOs, one from the internal managerial labor market and one from the external labor market. Why do they think these individuals were chosen? What do they bring to the job, and what strategy do the students think they will implement in their respective organizations?
6.        Based on this chapter and accounts in the popular press, each student should select a CEO who has exhibited vision. Has this CEO’s vision been realized? If so, what have its effects been? If the vision has not been realized, why not?
7.        The students should identify a firm in which they believe strategic leaders have emphasized and developed human capital. What are the effects of this emphasis and development on the firm’s performance?
8.        Have the students select an organization that has a unique organizational culture. What characteristics of that culture make it unique? Has the culture had a significant effect on the organization’s performance? If so, what is that effect?
9.        Why is the strategic control exercised by a firm’s strategic leaders important for long-term competitiveness? How do strategic controls differ from financial controls?

Ethics Questions

1.        As discussed in this chapter, effective strategic leadership occasionally requires managers to make difficult decisions. Is it ethical for managers to make these types of decisions without obtaining feedback from employees about the effects of those decisions? Be prepared to justify your response.
2.        As an employee with less than one year of experience in a firm, what actions would you pursue if you encountered unethical practices by a strategic leader?
3.        Are firms ethically obligated to promote employees from within, rather than relying on the external labor market to select strategic leaders? What reasoning supports your position?
4.        What ethical issues, if any, are involved with a firm’s ability to develop and exploit a core competence in the manufacture of goods that may be harmful to consumers (e.g., cigarettes)?
5.        As a strategic leader, would you feel ethically responsible for developing your firm’s human capital? Why or why not? Do you believe that your position is consistent with the majority or minority of today’s strategic leaders?
6.        Select an organization, social group, or volunteer agency of which you are a member that you believe has an ethical culture. What factors caused this culture to be ethical? Are there any events that would cause the culture to become less ethical? If so, what are they?

Internet Exercise       
       
Women in the United States are advancing to top positions in some of America’s leading firms. Today, more than 10 percent of Fortune 500 companies have women in 25 percent of their corporate officer teams, an increase from 5 percent in 1995.  The advancement of women in this area sounds promising. Go to the Working Woman Website at http://www.workingwoman.com to see which companies were rated as leaders in hiring women executives. What practices in these companies promote the selection of women for managerial roles?

*e-project: Amazon.com has revolutionized the Internet shopping industry, a fact that can, in large part, be accredited to Jeff Bezos, America’s number-one CEO of an Internet-based company. Learn about Bezos’s background through the Amazon home page and other Web resources. What was his initial strategy in creating Amazon? Was he able to implement the strategy effectively? What successes spurred him to expand and diversify his Web-based business?

该用户从未签到

 楼主| 发表于 2012-12-4 01:59:47 | 显示全部楼层
Chapter 13 Strategic Entrepreneurship

Strategic Management: Competitiveness and Globalization
Concepts and Cases
8th Edition
Michael A. Hitt
R. Duane Ireland
中国经济管理大学
WWW.EAUC.HK


KNOWLEDGE OBJECTIVES

1.        Define strategic entrepreneurship and corporate entrepreneurship.
2.        Define entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial opportunities and explain their importance.
3.        Define invention, innovation, and imitation and describe the relationship among them.
4.        Describe entrepreneurs and the entrepreneurial mind-set.
5.        Explain international entrepreneurship and its importance.
6.        Describe how firms internally develop innovations.
7.        Explain how firms use cooperative strategies to innovate.
8.        Describe how firms use acquisitions as a means of innovation.
9.        Explain how strategic entrepreneurship helps firms create value.


CHAPTER OUTLINE

Opening Case   Googling Innovation
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES
INNOVATION
ENTREPRENEURS
INTERNATIONAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP  
INTERNAL INNOVATION
Strategic Focus   The Razr’s Edge: R&D and Innovation at Motorola  
        Incremental and Radical Innovation
        Autonomous Strategic Behavior
        Induced Strategic Behavior
IMPLEMENTING INTERNAL INNOVATIONS
        Cross-Functional Product Development Teams
        Facilitating Integration and Innovation
        Creating Value from Internal Innovation
INNOVATION THROUGH COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES
Strategic Focus    Does Whole Foods Really Obtain Innovation in Unnatural Ways?
INNOVATION THROUGH ACQUISITIONS
CREATING VALUE THROUGH STRATEGIC ENTREPRENEURSHIP
SUMMARY  
REVIEW QUESTIONS  
EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES  
NOTES  



LECTURE NOTES

Chapter Introduction:  This chapter helps to identify ways in which entrepreneurial insights and activities can be harnessed in large firms.  The principles identified here may certainly help students see how this can be accomplished.  In many ways, students are very motivated by the topic, since it highlights the ways in which an attractive mind-set (entrepreneurship) can be applied to what some students see as the less exciting corporate world.



OPENING CASE
Googling Innovation

“Google it!”  Regardless of which search engine is used to “surf the Web,” Internet users commonly “google it.”  Google has become a generic.  Globally, over 380 million people use Google in 35 different languages to find what they want on the Internet.  In addition to its search capabilities, Google expanded its repertoire to include Web portal services such as Webmail, blogging, photo sharing, and instant messaging. It also provides a number of other tools such as interactive maps, discussion groups, comparison shopping, and an image library.

Google is best known as an innovation company because it continually develops and introduces new services to the market.  Google has established a corporate culture that promotes creativity and innovation.   For example, all employees are allowed 20 percent of their time to work on projects of their choosing.  Also, Google has a flat organization structure and few managers.  Even project teams have no permanent leader. Team members rotate as the project leader. Google is a relaxed and fun place to work, with free snacks and meals, as well as video games available for break times. The attractiveness of its culture is shown by the fact that Google has almost no turnover.

And Google also found a way to harness all of the ideas created by its employees and motivational workplace. First, Google established an internal Web page for tracking new ideas. Each “idea creator” set up a special Web page for her/his new idea. This information is posted on the intranet, which allows others in the company to test the idea. Second, Google established a vice president of search products and user experience.  This vice president is an internal gatekeeper and recommends if and when a particular product is ready for release to the market.  The role is also used to span the boundary between the technical (“geeks”) and the markets (marketing and sales).  

Some believe that the best services offered outside of search have come through acquisitions and strategic alliances. Regardless, Google uses innovation as a way to beat its competition even in international markets such as China. The market leader in China is Baidu.com. But Google developed a research center in Beijing to develop new products for the Chinese market, and introduced a Chinese-language brand name to compete effectively in this market.

Google has put innovation at the very top of its priority list and has built an organization in which innovation truly lives and breaths.  Equate the 20 percent time allowance for working on employee ideas to days per week. That’s the equivalent of one day per week that employees are allowed and encourages to “make a difference.”  But do your students see a down-side to lack of structure?  Might this environment foster a “cat herding” image?  This opening case is packed with dialogue kindling that students will embrace with gusto.




1        Define strategic entrepreneurship and corporate entrepreneurship.       

Entrepreneurship is the economic engine driving many nations’ economies in the global competitive landscape. Entrepreneurship and innovation have become important for young and old, large and small organizations in all types of industries.


Teaching Note:  Research conducted by the Center for Entrepreneurial Leadership at the Kauffman Foundation has shown that in recent years almost 100 percent of the new jobs in the U. S. have been created by entrepreneurial firms of less than two years of age.


Strategic entrepreneurship is taking entrepreneurial actions using a strategic perspective. More specifically, it involves engaging in simultaneous opportunity seeking and competitive advantage seeking behaviors to design and implement entrepreneurial strategies to create wealth.

The focus in the chapter is on innovation and entrepreneurship within established organizations. This phenomenon is called corporate entrepreneurship, which is the use or application of entrepreneurship within an established firm.

Because of today’s uncertain environment (i.e., a complex global marketplace), firms cannot easily predict the future. As a result, they must develop strategic flexibility to have a range of strategic alternatives that they can implement as needed.  Creating tomorrow’s business requires a constant search for emerging opportunities.


2        Define entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial opportunities and explain their importance.       

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES

Entrepreneurship is the process by which individuals or groups identify and pursue entrepreneurial opportunities without being immediately constrained by the resources they currently control.


Teaching Note:  According to Schumpeter, entrepreneurship is a process of “creative destruction”, through which existing products or methods of production are destroyed and replaced with new ones.  Thus, entrepreneurship is concerned with discovering and exploiting profitable opportunities.


Entrepreneurial opportunities represent conditions in which new products or services can satisfy a need in the market. The essence of entrepreneurship is to identify and exploit these opportunities.

After identifying opportunities, entrepreneurs take actions to exploit them and establish a competitive advantage. To do that, actions must be valuable, rare, costly to imitate, and nonsubstitutable.


3        Define invention, innovation, and imitation and describe the relationship among them.       

INNOVATION

Peter Drucker argues that innovation is a function of entrepreneurship, as well as the means that an entrepreneur uses to create wealth-producing resources or enhance the potential of existing resources for creating wealth.

Entrepreneurship and innovation are important for large and small firms (and start-ups) as they compete in the new competitive landscape.  These are central to creativity, economic growth, productivity, and job creation.


Teaching Note: Innovation has long been recognized as vital to competitive success. For example, Henry Ford, founder of Ford Motor Company, observed that, “The competitor to be feared is one who never bothers about you at all, but goes on making his own business better all the time.  Businesses that grow by development and improvement do not die. But when a business ceases to be creative, when it believes it has reached perfection and needs to do nothing but produce—no improvement, no development—it is done.”


Innovation has an impact on firm outcomes.
•        Innovation is a key source of competitive success for firms competing in turbulent, competitive markets.
•        Innovation is intended to enhance a firm’s strategic competitiveness and financial performance.
•        Research shows that firms in global industries that invest more in innovation also achieve greater returns.

Schumpeter suggested that firms generally engage in three types of innovative activity:
•        invention, the act of creating or developing a new product (good or service) or process idea
•        innovation, the process of creating a commercializable product from invention
•        imitation, the adoption of innovation by similar firms, which often leads to standardization of the product or process and lower prices—all of this while maintaining many of the same features

In the United States in particular, innovation is the most critical of the three types of innovative activity. Many companies are able to create ideas that lead to inventions, but commercializing those inventions through innovation has, at times, proved difficult. This difficulty is suggested by the fact that approximately 80 percent of R&D occurs in large firms, but these same firms produce fewer than 50 percent of the patents.


4        Describe entrepreneurs and the entrepreneurial mind-set.       

ENTREPRENEURS

Entrepreneurs are individuals, acting independently or as part of an organization, who create a new venture or develop an innovation and take on the risks involved in introducing it to the marketplace.

Entrepreneurs tend to demonstrate several characteristics, including those of being optimistic,  highly motivated, willing to take responsibility for their projects, and courageous.  In addition, entrepreneurs tend to be passionate and emotional about the value and importance of their innovation-based ideas.

Evidence suggests that successful entrepreneurs have an entrepreneurial mind-set. The person with an entrepreneurial mind-set values uncertainty in the marketplace and seeks to continuously identify opportunities with the potential to lead to important innovations. Because it has the potential to lead to continuous innovation, individuals’ entrepreneurial mind-sets can be a source of competitive advantage for a firm.

Top-level managers should try to establish an entrepreneurial culture that inspires individuals and groups to engage in corporate entrepreneurship.  For example, Steve Jobs of Apple Computer believes one of his key responsibilities is to help Apple become more entrepreneurial and more like a start-up.

In most cases, knowledge must be transferred to others in the organization (even in smaller ventures) to enhance the entrepreneurial competence of the firm. The transfer is likely to be more difficult in larger firms. Research has shown, however, that units within firms are more innovative if they have access to new knowledge.

Managers will need to develop the capabilities of their human capital to build on their current knowledge base while incrementally expanding that knowledge.

Developing innovations and achieving success in the marketplace require effective human capital. In particular, a firm must have strong human capital throughout its workforce if employees are to develop an entrepreneurial mind-set.


5        Explain international entrepreneurship and its importance.       

INTERNATIONAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Entrepreneurship is a top priority in many countries of the world (e.g., Finland, German, Israel, Ireland).  

A recent study of 42 countries found that the percentage of adults involved in entrepreneurial activity ranged from a high of over 40 percent in Peru to a low of slightly over 3 percent in Belgium. The U.S. had a rate of about 10 percent. Importantly, this study also found a strong positive relationship between the rate of entrepreneurial activity and economic development in the country.

Research indicates that there is a direct relationship between entrepreneurship and collectivism: when collectivism is emphasized, entrepreneurship declines.  However, extremely high levels of individualism also can have a negative impact on entrepreneurship.  Thus, it is important to balance individualism and collectivism (or the spirit of cooperation and group ownership of innovation).

With increasing globalization, a growing number of new ventures are “born global” (i.e., started as an international concern). New ventures that enter international markets to increase their technological knowledge thereby enhance their performance.

The probability of entering international markets increases when the firm has top executives with international experience.  Furthermore, the firm has a higher likelihood of successfully competing in international markets when its top executives have international experience.

Because of the learning and economies of scale and scope afforded by operating in international markets, both young and established internationally diversified firms often are stronger competitors in their domestic market as well. Additionally, as research has shown, internationally diversified firms are generally more innovative.


6        Describe how firms internally develop innovations.       

INTERNAL INNOVATION

Most innovation is developed through Research and Development (R&D).  In fact, R&D may be the most critical factor in gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage in some industries (e.g., pharmaceuticals).



STRATEGIC FOCUS
The Razr’s Edge: R&D and Innovation at Motorola

As we look at the litany of innovation kudos and credits that Motorola has received from impartial and  independent juries, we are somewhat in awe that an organization as big as Motorola (Fortune 100) can build such a consistent track-record through ongoing entrepreneurial strategies.  Some of its more recently received honors included:

2004 National Medal of Technology
2006 IEEE-Standards Association Corporate Award
2006 CES Mark of Excellence Award (for the best home wireless product)
2006 Best of ITS Award for Research and Innovation
2006 Nano 50th Award for Nano Emissive Display Technology

The National Medal of Technology is presented by the White House, and is the highest U.S. honor for technological innovation. This medal was awarded “for over 75 years of technological achievement and leadership in the development of innovation electronic solutions, which have enabled portable and mobile communications to become the standard across society.”

Recently, Motorola is best known for its Razr wireless cell phone introduced in 2005. The Razr is an ultra-slim phone with a highly attractive design, and in only three years after its introduction, Motorola was able to increase its market share in this market from 13 percent in 2003 to 22 percent in 2006.  Motorola’s entrepreneurial leverage is bolstered through the use of cooperative strategies (primarily outsourcing).  In addition to its own in-house R&D, the company makes use of the best technology minds globally with research units in North, Central, and South America, Europe, and Asia. These research units are operating on the cutting edge of technology and may have some radical new products on the horizon (e.g., a special writing keypad).

But even as a technology leader, Motorola recently hit a speed-bump.  Motorola’s market share declined and it was ousted as the number two handset manufacturer by Samsung. It posted a loss in the first quarter of 2007. The reason for this drop in the market was a move to gain market share by cutting costs and prices rather than continuing to introduce new products to the market.  As a result, the company was caught with a weak product portfolio at a time when competitors were introducing a host of new products.

This is an opportunity to engage your students in a dialogue as to the strategic options available to entrepreneurial firms.  Is “elasticity” within the lexicon of entrepreneurial firms that focus on introducing innovation into the market?  Is it possible to “buy” market share when competing with innovative firms?  Might there be more to this case than the authors addressed in the Strategic Focus?




Effective R&D often leads to firms’ filing for patents to protect their innovative work. Increasingly, successful R&D results from integrating the skills available in the global workforce.  In the years to come, the ability to have a competitive advantage based on innovation may accrue to firms that are able to meld the talent of human capital from countries across the world.


Incremental and Radical Innovation

Most innovations are incremental. That is, they build on existing knowledge bases and provide small improvements in the current product lines. Alternatively, radical innovations usually provide significant technological breakthroughs and create new knowledge.  Radical innovations are rare because of the difficulty and risk involved in developing them.

Internal corporate venturing represents the set of activities used to create inventions and innovations within a single organization.  The internal corporate venturing process is illustrated in Figure 13.1.


Figure Note: Figure 13.1 should be used as a reference point by students during your discussion of the process.


FIGURE 13.1
Model of Internal Corporate Venturing

This model illustrates the two approaches to internal corporate venturing:

•        Autonomous strategic behavior is a bottom-up process which enables product champions to pursue new product ideas and sponsor them through a political process until they achieve commercial success.

•        Induced strategic behavior is a top-down process where product and process ideas are developed within the context of a firm’s existing strategy, structure, and strategic vision.

Whichever process is followed takes place within and is affected by the structural and strategic context of the organization.  Each of these topics will be discussed in more detail in the sections that follow.



Autonomous Strategic Behavior

Autonomous strategic behavior is a bottom-up process in which new product champions pursue new product ideas—often through a political process—where they develop and coordinate the commercialization of a new good or service until it reaches marketplace success.

A product champion is a member of an organization who has an entrepreneurial vision (or mental image) of a new good or service and seeks to create support for its commercialization.  Product champions play a critical role in advancing innovations within the firm.  

Autonomous strategic behavior is based on a firm’s knowledge and resources that are the sources of a firm’s innovation, so a firm’s capabilities and competencies are the basis for new products and processes.

GE depends on autonomous strategic behavior on a regular basis to produce innovations. Essentially, the search for services with market potential can start in any of GE’s businesses.  For example, an operating unit may look for appropriate technology to improve the unit’s function.  After it masters that technology, it then shapes it into a service it can sell to others.


Teaching Note:  The following is another useful example on the topic. Using state-of-the-art technology and relying in part on autonomous strategic behaviors among some of the firm’s personnel, Callaway Golf Co. is known for reinventing industries.  Callaway invented the oversize club segment of the golf club industry when it introduced its “Big Bertha” club, but the firm has also been seeking to reinvent the golf ball segment of the golfing industry.


To be effective, an autonomous process for developing new products requires that new knowledge be continuously diffused throughout the firm. In particular, the diffusion of tacit knowledge is important for development of more effective new products.

Induced Strategic Behavior

The second approach to creating internal corporate venturing is induced strategic behavior, a top-down process where the current strategy and structure foster product innovations that are associated closely with the firm’s current strategy and structure. In other words, strategy is filtered through the firm’s existing structural hierarchy, a process that leads to internal innovations that are highly consistent with the firm’s current strategies.


IMPLEMENTING INTERNAL INNOVATIONS

Having processes and structures in place through which a firm can successfully implement the outcomes of internal corporate ventures and commercialize innovations is critical. Indeed, the successful introduction of innovations into the marketplace reflects implementation effectiveness.

Effective integration of the various functions involved in innovation processes is required to implement the innovations resulting from internal corporate ventures. Increasingly, product development teams are being used to integrate activities associated with different organizational functions.


Cross-Functional Product Development Teams

Cross-functional teams facilitate efforts to integrate activities associated with different organizational functions (e.g., design, manufacturing, and marketing). In addition, new product development processes can be completed more quickly and the products more easily commercialized when cross-functional teams work effectively.

Horizontal organization refers to changes in organizational processes where managing across functional units becomes more critical than managing up and down functional hierarchies.


Teaching Note: Cross-functional teams group product development stages into parallel or overlapping processes, which allows the firm to tailor its product development efforts to its unique core competencies and to the needs of the market.  


Some of the core horizontal processes that are critical to innovation efforts are formal; they may be defined and documented as procedures and practices. More commonly, however, these processes are informal—that is, these routines or ways of working evolve over time. Often invisible, informal processes are critical to successful product innovations and are supported properly through horizontal organizational structures more so than through vertical organizational structures.

There are two primary barriers that may prevent the use of cross-functional teams as a means of integrating organizational functions: (1) independent frames of reference of team members and (2) organizational politics.

Research suggests that functional departments vary along four dimensions: time orientation, interpersonal orientation, goal orientation, and formality of structure. Thus, individuals from different functional departments have different orientations on these dimensions and will view product development activities in different ways.

Political activity may center on allocating resources to different functions. Interunit conflict may result from aggressive competition for resources among those representing different organizational functions.


Facilitating Integration and Innovation

Shared values and effective leadership are important to achieving cross-functional integration and implementing innovation. Highly effective shared values are framed around the firm’s vision and mission, and they become the glue that promotes integration between functional units. Thus, the firm’s culture promotes unity and internal innovation.

Strategic leadership is also highly important for achieving cross-functional integration and promoting innovation. Leaders set goals and allocate resources. The goals include integrated development and commercialization of new goods and services. Effective strategic leaders also ensure a high-quality communication system to facilitate cross-functional integration.


Creating Value from Innovation

The model in Figure 13.2 shows how value can be created for the firm from internal processes designed to develop and commercialize new goods and services. An entrepreneurial mind-set must be developed so that managers and employees will seek to identify and exploit opportunities for new goods and services and new markets. Cross-functional teams are important to promote integrated new product design ideas and commitment to their implementation thereafter. Effective leadership and shared values promote integration and vision for innovation and commitment to it. The end result for the firm is the creation of value for the customers and shareholders through development and commercialization of new products.


Figure Note: Figure 13.2 illustrates relationships discussed in the chapter that enable the firm to appropriate value from innovation: barriers to integration, integration facilitating methods, and the advantages of cross-functional integration. It can either be referred to in summary form or used to summarize the preceding discussion.  


FIGURE 13.2
Creating Value through Internal Innovation Processes

The model in this figure shows how firms can create value from the internal processes they use to develop and commercialize new goods and services.
•        An entrepreneurial mind-set is necessary so that managers and employees will consistently try to identify entrepreneurial opportunities the firm can pursue by developing new goods and services and new markets.
•        Cross-functional teams promote integrated new product ideas and commitment to their implementation.
•        Effective leadership and shared values promote integration and vision for innovation and commitment to it.
•        The end result for the firm is the creation of value for the customers and shareholders by developing and commercializing new products.



As the model in Figure 13.2 suggests, internal corporate ventures must be effectively managed to facilitate cross-functional integration so a firm will be able to gain maximum value from its product design and commercialization efforts.


7        Explain how firms use cooperative strategies to innovate.       


INNOVATION THROUGH COOPERATIVE STRATEGIES

Virtually all firms lack the breadth and depth of resources (e.g., human capital and social capital) in their R&D activities to develop internally a sufficient number of innovations. Firms frequently use cooperative strategies to develop innovations and to quicken the pace at which some of their own innovations are distributed.  In other instances, they use cooperative strategies to align what they believe are complementary assets with the potential to lead to future innovations.


Teaching Note: An alternative to internal innovation is to tap the resources available in other organizations for the following reasons:
•        Knowledge is increasing rapidly, making it difficult for firms to remain up-to-date.
•        This vast knowledge base is also becoming increasingly specialized.
•        Firms may not possess the knowledge needed to commercialize goods and services.
•        Some countries may have access to resources and capabilities that enable firms located there to create specialized products.




STRATEGIC FOCUS
Does Whole Foods Really Obtain Innovation in Unnatural Ways?

In 1980, Whole Foods entered business as a small organic food retailer in Austin, Texas.  Twenty-six years later, it was operating over 300 stores and had sales of $5.6 billion.  It is the world’s largest natural food retailer.

Whole Foods stands alone at the top of its industry.  It markets more than 1500 items, of which two-thirds are perishable.  Ideas for many new products and concepts introduced by Whole Foods were generated internally.  An example of an internally generated concept is the development of a new stand-alone store selling environmentally friendly goods ranging from clothes to housewares.

Not all of its new product introductions come from internal ideas.  Whole Foods has been through a series of outright acquisitions such as Allegro Coffee and cooperative alliances with upper-end Lord and Taylor Department Stores to anchor a redevelopment project in Stanford, Connecticut.  The cooperative aspect is that each party will have unique cross-selling opportunities.  In addition to these examples, Whole Foods has acquired a plethora of other retail operations and producers.  Undoubtedly, these businesses provide not only growth, new customers and outlets, but also add new products to the Whole Foods portfolio. Whole Foods used acquisitions as a means to enter international markets, buying a small natural food chain in the United Kingdom. It then opened its first large new retail outlet in London in 2007.

Regardless of the use of alliances and acquisitions, Whole Foods continues to be innovative.  It opened a restaurant in its Chicago store and it became so popular for dinner among customers that it has now opened restaurants in other store locations.  The restaurants promote the organic foods sold in the stores.  Interestingly, Whole Foods is listed among the best companies to work.

Students should appreciate the successful “blending” of an internally generated innovative strategy coupled with a cooperative strategy to build a business from scratch to being the world’s leading organic food retailer in the world in just over 25 years.  Does “green” present opportunities to already existing businesses or just to “tree-huggers?”      




The rapidly changing technologies of the twenty-first century competitive landscape, globalization, and the need to innovate at world-class levels are primary influences on firms’ decisions to innovate by cooperating with other companies.  Indeed, some believe that because of these conditions, firms are becoming increasingly dependent on cooperative strategies as a path to successful competition in the global economy.  

Both entrepreneurial ventures and established firms use cooperative strategies (e.g., strategic alliances and joint ventures) to innovate. Entrepreneurial ventures, for example, may seek investment capital as well as established firms’ distribution capabilities to successfully introduce one of its innovative products to the market.  Alternatively, more established companies may need new technological knowledge and can gain access to it by forming a cooperative strategy with entrepreneurial ventures.  

Because of the importance of alliances, particularly in the development of new technology and in commercializing innovations, firms are beginning to build networks of alliances (a form of social capital) to help them obtain the knowledge and other resources necessary to develop innovations.  Some firms now even allow external firms to participate in their internal new product development processes.

Alliances formed for the purpose of innovation are not without risks. One important risk is that a partner will appropriate a firm’s technology or knowledge and use it to enhance its own competitive abilities. To prevent or at least minimize this risk, firms, particularly new ventures, need to select their partners carefully.


8        Describe how firms use acquisitions as a means of innovation.       

INNOVATION THROUGH ACQUISITIONS

Firms sometimes acquire companies to gain access to their innovations and to their innovative capabilities. One reason companies do this is that the capital markets value growth; acquisitions provide a means to rapidly extend one or more product lines and increase the firm’s revenues.

A key risk of acquisitions is that a firm may substitute an ability to buy innovations for an ability to produce innovations internally. In support of this contention, research shows that firms engaging in acquisitions introduce fewer new products into the market.


9        Explain how strategic entrepreneurship helps firms create value.       

CREATING VALUE THROUGH STRATEGIC ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Newer entrepreneurial firms often are more effective than larger firms in identifying opportunities.  These firms tend to be more innovative as well because of their flexibility and willingness to take risks. Alternatively, larger and well-established firms often have more resources and capabilities to exploit opportunities that are identified.  In general, entrepreneurial ventures need to improve their advantage-seeking behaviors while larger firms need to improve their opportunity-seeking skills.


Teaching Note: It is interesting—certainly worthwhile—to note that individual entrepreneurs and small firms are responsible for a significant amount of innovation as measured by the ratio of R&D input to R&D output. To wit:
•        80 percent of R&D activity is concentrated in large firms (10,000+ employees).
•        Large firms account for less than 50 percent of technological activity (measured by patenting).


To be entrepreneurial, firms must develop an entrepreneurial mind-set among their managers and employees. Managers must emphasize the management of their resources, particularly human capital and social capital.  The importance of knowledge to identify and exploit opportunities as well as to gain and sustain a competitive advantage suggests that firms must have strong human capital. Social capital is critical for access to complementary resources from partners in order to compete effectively in domestic and international markets.

By entering global markets that are new to them, firms can learn new technologies and management practices and diffuse this knowledge throughout the entire enterprise. Furthermore, the knowledge firms gain can contribute to their innovations. Research has shown that firms operating in international markets tend to be more innovative.  

By developing resources (human and social capital), taking advantage of opportunities in domestic and international markets, and using the resources and knowledge gained in these markets to be innovative, firms achieve competitive advantages.  In so doing, they create value for their customers and shareholders.

Research shows that because of its economic importance and individual motives, entrepreneurial activity is increasing across the globe. Furthermore, more women are becoming entrepreneurs because of the economic opportunity entrepreneurship provides and the individual independence it affords.  In the United States, for example, women are the nation’s fastest growing group of entrepreneurs.


Teaching Note: Large firms can take several measures to act small and increase their innovative capacity.  These include the following:
•        Greater levels of individual autonomy can be created through the restructuring of a firm into smaller and more manageable units (see Chapter 7).
•        The additional amounts of creativity and innovation that tend to be witnessed among those granted more autonomy stimulates autonomous strategic behavior when a firm pursues innovation through internal corporate ventures.
•        A firm can reengineer its operations to develop more efficient work-related processes and to form channels through which customers’ interests can be expressed with greater clarity and intensity.
•        Cross-functional teams provide opportunities for workers to think & act creatively.
•        When handled effectively, downsizing can create arrangements through which a firm is able to focus efforts more on key tasks—e.g., those required for innovation.
•        Allocating significant levels of resources to R&D can stimulate innovation.
•        Cooperative arrangements can help to spawn innovations in the firm.



—        ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS       

1.        What is strategic entrepreneurship? What is corporate entrepreneurship?  (pp. 368-369)

Strategic entrepreneurship is taking entrepreneurial actions using a strategic perspective. When engaging in strategic entrepreneurship, the firm focuses on finding opportunities in its external environment that it can try to exploit through innovations. Identifying opportunities to exploit through innovation is the entrepreneurship part of strategic entrepreneurship, while determining the best way to manage the firm’s innovation efforts is the strategic part. Thus, strategic entrepreneurship involves firms integrating their actions to find opportunities and to successfully innovate as a primary means of pursuing them.  In the twenty-first century competitive landscape, firm survival and success increasingly is a function of a firm’s ability to continuously find new opportunities and quickly produce innovations to pursue them.

The focus in Chapter 13 is on innovation and entrepreneurship within established organizations. This phenomenon is called corporate entrepreneurship, which is the use or application of entrepreneurship within an established firm.  An important part of the entrepreneurship discipline, corporate entrepreneurship is widely thought to be linked to the survival and success of established corporations.  Indeed, established firms use entrepreneurship to strengthen their performance and to enhance growth opportunities.  Of course, innovation and entrepreneurship play a critical role in the degree of success achieved by start-up entrepreneurial ventures as well.

2.        What is entrepreneurship and what are entrepreneurial opportunities? Why are these important for firms competing in the twenty-first century competitive landscape?  (pp. 369-370)

Entrepreneurship is the process by which individuals or groups identify and pursue entrepreneurial opportunities without being immediately constrained by the resources they currently control.  Entrepreneurial opportunities are conditions in which new goods or services can satisfy a need in the market. These opportunities exist because of competitive imperfections in markets and among the factors of production used to produce them and when information about these imperfections is distributed asymmetrically across individuals.  Entrepreneurial opportunities come in a host of forms (e.g., the chance to develop and sell a new product and the chance to sell an existing product in a new market).  Firms should be receptive to pursuing entrepreneurial opportunities whenever and wherever they may surface.

The competitive landscape of the twenty-first century presents firms with substantial change, a global marketplace, and significant complexity and uncertainty. Because of this uncertain environment, firms cannot easily predict the future and must therefore develop strategic flexibility to have a range of strategic alternatives that they can implement as needed. They can do this by acquiring resources and building the capabilities that allow them to take necessary actions to adapt to or proact in a dynamic environment.  In this environment, entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial managers design and implement actions that capture more of existing markets from less aggressive and innovative competitors while creating new markets.  In effect, they are trying to create tomorrow’s businesses.

3.        What are invention, innovation, and imitation?  How are these concepts related?  (pp. 370-371)

Peter Drucker argued that “innovation is the specific function of entrepreneurship, whether in an existing business, a public service institution, or a new venture started by a lone individual.”  Moreover, Drucker suggested that innovation is “the means by which the entrepreneur either creates new wealth-producing resources or endows existing resources with enhanced potential for creating wealth.”  Thus, entrepreneurship and the innovation resulting from it are important for large and small firms, as well as for start-up ventures, as they compete.  In fact, firms failing to innovate will stagnate.  Indeed, the realities of competition in the twenty-first  century competitive landscape suggest that “No company can maintain a long-term leadership position in a category unless it is in a continuous process of developing innovative new products desired by customers.”  This means that innovation should be an intrinsic part of virtually all of a firm’s activities.

Innovation is a key outcome firms seek through entrepreneurship and is often the source of competitive success, especially in turbulent, highly competitive environments.  For example, research shows that firms competing in global industries that invest more in innovation also achieve the highest returns.  In fact, investors often react positively to the introduction of a new product, thereby increasing the price of a firm’s stock. Innovation, then, is an essential feature of high-performance firms.  Furthermore, “innovation may be required to maintain or achieve competitive parity, much less a competitive advantage in many global markets.”  The most innovative firms understand that financial slack should be available at all times to support the pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities.  

In his classic work, Schumpeter argued that firms engage in three types of innovative activity.  Invention is the act of creating or developing a new product or process. Innovation is the process of creating a commercial product from an invention. Innovation begins after an invention is chosen for development.  Thus, an invention brings something new into being, while an innovation brings something new into use. Accordingly, technical criteria are used to determine the success of an invention, whereas commercial criteria are used to determine the success of an innovation.  Finally, imitation is the adoption of an innovation by similar firms. Imitation usually leads to product or process standardization, and many times products based on imitation are offered at lower prices, but without as many features. Entrepreneurship is critical to innovative activity in that it acts as the linchpin between invention and innovation.

4.        What is an entrepreneur and what is an entrepreneurial mind-set? (p. 371)

Entrepreneurs are individuals, acting independently or as part of an organization, who see an entrepreneurial opportunity and then take risks to develop an innovation to pursue it. Often, entrepreneurs are the individuals who receive credit for making things happen!  Entrepreneurs are found throughout an organization—from top-level managers to those working to produce a firm’s goods or services. Entrepreneurs tend to demonstrate several characteristics, including those of being optimistic, highly motivated, willing to take responsibility for their projects, and courageous.  In addition, entrepreneurs tend to be passionate and emotional about the value and importance of their innovation-based ideas.  

Evidence suggests that successful entrepreneurs have an entrepreneurial mind-set. The person with an entrepreneurial mind-set values uncertainty in the marketplace and seeks to continuously identify opportunities with the potential to lead to important innovations.  Because it has the potential to lead to continuous innovations, individuals’ entrepreneurial mind-sets can be a source of competitive advantage for a firm.

Entrepreneurial mind-sets are fostered and supported when knowledge is readily available throughout a firm. Indeed, research has shown that units within firms are more innovative when they have access to new knowledge.  Transferring knowledge, however, can be difficult, often because the receiving party must have adequate absorptive capacity (or the ability) to learn the knowledge.  This requires that new knowledge be linked to existing knowledge. Thus, managers need to develop the capabilities of their human capital to build on their current knowledge base while incrementally expanding that knowledge to facilitate the development of entrepreneurial mind-sets.

5.        What is international entrepreneurship? Why is it important? (pp. 372-373)  

International entrepreneurship is “the process of creatively discovering and exploiting opportunities that lie outside a firm’s domestic markets in the pursuit of competitive advantage.”  As the practices suggested by this definition show, entrepreneurship is a global phenomenon.  

A key reason for this is that, in general, internationalization leads to improved firm performance.  Nonetheless, decision makers should recognize that the decision to internationalize exposes their firms to various risks, including those of unstable foreign currencies, problems with market efficiencies, insufficient infrastructures to support businesses, and limitations on market size, among others.  Thus, the decision to engage in international entrepreneurship should be a product of careful analysis.

Because of its positive benefits, entrepreneurship is at the top of public policy agendas in many of the world’s countries, including Finland, Germany, Ireland, and Israel, as well as others. Placing entrepreneurship on these agendas may be appropriate in that some argue that regulation hindering innovation and entrepreneurship is the root cause of Europe’s productivity problems.  In Ireland, for example, the government is “…particularly focused on encouraging new innovative enterprises that have growth potential and are export oriented.”  Some believe that entrepreneurship is flourishing in New Zealand, a trend having a positive effect on the productivity of the nation’s economy.

6.        How do firms develop innovations internally?  (pp. 373-376)

Increasingly, successful R&D results from integrating the skills available in the global workforce. Firms seeking internal innovations through their R&D must understand that “Talent and ideas are flourishing everywhere—from Bangalore to Shanghai to Kiev—and no company, regardless of geography, can hesitate to go wherever those ideas are.”  In the years to come, the ability to have a competitive advantage based on innovation may accrue to firms able to meld the talent of human capital from countries across the world.
       
In the twenty-first century competitive landscape, R&D may be the most critical factor in gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage in some industries, such as pharmaceuticals. Larger, established firms, certainly those competing globally, often try to use their R&D labs to create competence-destroying new technologies and products.  Being able to innovate in this manner can create a competitive advantage for a firm in many industries.  Although critical to long-term corporate success, the outcomes of R&D investments are uncertain and often cannot be achieved in the short term, meaning that patience is required as firms evaluate the outcomes that result from their R&D efforts.

7.        How do firms use cooperative strategies to innovate and to have access to innovative abilities?  (pp. 379-380)

It is difficult for a firm to possess all the knowledge required to compete successfully in its product areas over the long term.  Complicating this matter is the fact that the knowledge base confronting today’s organizations is not only vast, but also increasingly more specialized.  Therefore, the knowledge needed to commercialize inventions is frequently embedded within different corporations.

Strategic alliances are partnerships between firms whereby resources, capabilities, and core competencies are combined to pursue common interests and goals—namely, to gain either competitive parity or competitive advantage relative to rivals.  Used with increasing frequency, one important reason firms form alliances is to produce or manage innovations (including sharing knowledge and skill sets between partners).  Forming alliances for this purpose can yield value creation.

Because of the importance of alliances, particularly in the development of new technology and in commercializing innovations, firms are beginning to build networks of alliances that represent a form of social capital to them. This social capital (in the form of relationships with other firms) helps them to obtain the knowledge and other resources necessary to develop innovations. Knowledge from these alliances helps firms develop new capabilities. Some firms now even allow other companies to participate in their internal new product development processes.

On the other hand, alliances formed to innovate are not without risks.  One important risk is that a partner will appropriate a firm’s technology or knowledge and use it to enhance its own competitive abilities.  To discourage this outcome, a firm needs to select its partners carefully.  (The ideal partner is one with complementary skills as well as compatible strategic goals.)

8.        How does a firm acquire other companies to increase the number of innovations it produces and improve its capability to produce innovations?  (p. 382)

Firms complete strategic acquisitions in an effort to continuously strengthen their ability to innovate.  By integrating the capabilities of acquisitions with those it already owns, firms can continue producing and managing innovations in ways that create value for customers.  Firms often seek innovation through more than one of the three approaches available to produce and manage innovations (i.e., internal corporate ventures, alliances, and acquisitions).  Thus, firms can use alliances and acquisitions to appropriate what it hopes will be full value from its innovation activities.

As with internal corporate venturing and strategic alliances, acquisitions are not a risk-free approach to producing and managing innovations.  A key risk of acquisitions is that a firm may substitute an ability to buy innovations for an ability to produce innovations internally.  Research suggests that this substitution may not be in the firm’s best interests.  For example, firms gaining access to innovations through acquisitions risk reductions in both R&D inputs (investments in R&D) and R&D outputs (e.g., number of patents).  Additional research shows that firms engaging in acquisitions introduce fewer new products to market. These relationships indicate that firms substitute acquisitions for internal corporate venturing processes.  This substitution may take place because firms lose strategic control and emphasize financial control of original (and especially acquired) business units.  Reduced innovation may not always be the result, but managers in acquiring firms should be aware of this potential outcome.

9.        How does strategic entrepreneurship help firms to create value as they compete in the twenty-first  century competitive landscape?  (pp. 382-383)

Newer entrepreneurial firms often are more effective than larger firms in identifying opportunities. Some believe that these firms tend to be more innovative as well because of their flexibility and willingness to take risks. Alternatively, larger and well-established firms often have more resources and capabilities to exploit opportunities that are identified. So, younger, entrepreneurial firms are generally opportunity seeking and more established firms are often advantage seeking. However, to compete effectively in the landscape of the twenty-first century, firms must identify and exploit opportunities, but do so while achieving and sustaining a competitive advantage. Thus, newer entrepreneurial firms must learn how to gain a competitive advantage and older more established firms must relearn how to identify entrepreneurial opportunities. The concept of strategic entrepreneurship suggests that firms can be simultaneously entrepreneurial and strategic, regardless of their size and age.

Many entrepreneurial opportunities remain in international markets. Thus, firms should seek to enter and compete globally. Firms can learn new technologies and management practices from international markets and diffuse this knowledge throughout the firm. Furthermore, the knowledge learned can contribute to a firm’s innovations. Research has shown that firms operating in international markets tend to be more innovative. Small and large firms are now regularly moving into international markets. Both types of firms must also be innovative to compete effectively. Thus, with resources (human and social capital), taking advantage of opportunities in domestic and international markets and using the resources and knowledge gained in these markets to be innovative, firms achieve competitive advantages. In so doing they create value for their customers and shareholders.

Firms that practice strategic entrepreneurship contribute to a country’s economic development. In fact, some countries such as Ireland have made dramatic economic progress by changing the institutional rules for businesses operating in the country. This could be construed as a form of institutional entrepreneurship. Likewise, firms that seek to establish their technology as a standard, also representing institutional entrepreneurship, are engaging in strategic entrepreneurship because creating a standard produces a sustainable competitive advantage for the firm.

Research shows that because of its economic importance and individual motives, entrepreneurial activity is increasing across the globe. Furthermore, many women are becoming entrepreneurs because of the economic opportunity it provides and the individual independence it affords. In future years, entrepreneurial activity may increase the wealth of less affluent countries and continue to contribute to the economic development of more affluent countries. Regardless, the companies that practice strategic entrepreneurship are likely to be the winners in the twenty-first century.   


—        EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Do You Want to Be an Entrepreneur?

Would you make a good entrepreneur? In this exercise, we will explore how individual attributes and characteristics contribute to entrepreneurial success. If you believe that you have the traits of a successful entrepreneur, would you be more effective working within a large firm or starting your own business? Complete the first stage of the exercise individually, then meet in small groups to discuss your answers.

Individual
Brainstorm a list of personal attributes or characteristics that could help (or hinder) a person’s success as an entrepreneur.

Next, evaluate the importance of each item on your list.

Finally, compare your prioritized list against your personal characteristics. Do you think that you are a good candidate to be an entrepreneur? Why or why not?

Group
First, compare each person’s list of attributes and characteristics. Combine similar items and create a composite list.

Second, as a group, evaluate the importance of each item on the list. It is not important to rank order the characteristics. Rather, sort them into categories “very important,” “somewhat important,” and “minimally important.”

Then, discuss within your group which team member seems to be the best suited to be an entrepreneur. Create a brief profile of how to describe that person if he or she were applying for a job at an innovative company such as Google, Intel, or Motorola.

Whole Class
The instructor will ask for student volunteers to present their interview profiles.


Exercise 2: Global Differences in Entrepreneurial Activity

As described in the chapter, entrepreneurship is a global phenomenon. However, innovativeness varies from country to country, as does the infrastructure to support new business development. These differences have substantial implications for both persons wishing to start new businesses, as well as for companies seeking local partners in different regions.

This exercise will acquaint you with the Global Entrepreneurship Monitor (GEM), an annual series of studies that evaluate entrepreneurial activity in different regions of the world. GEM is a collaborative initiative between the London Business School and Babson College. Working with experts in multiple countries, they produce a series of annual reviews of entrepreneurial activity, both at the country level and in a summary global report. Publications from the GEM Consortium are available online at http://www.gemconsortium.org. GEM started in 1999 with reports on ten countries. By 2001, the scope had broadened to twenty-nine countries. The 2007 reports include forty-three countries.

Working in teams, complete either Assignment A or Assignment B.

Assignment A
Compare entrepreneurial activities across countries.
1.        Pick two countries that are located in the same region of the world (i.e., the Americas, Europe, Asia-Pacific, or the Middle East).
2.        Review the most recent GEM country reports for your two selections.
3.        Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation that identifies the similarities and differences between the two countries. Include the levels of entrepreneurial activity, infrastructure, and challenges/problems facing both nations.
Assignment B
Compare entrepreneurial activities over time.
1.        Select one country that was included in both the 2001 and the most recent GEM surveys.
2.        Review the GEM reports for that country for both years
3.        Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation that identifies the similarities and differences within the country over time. Include the levels of entrepreneurial activity, infrastructure, and challenges/problems. Overall, is the climate for entrepreneurship improving or worsening?

—        INSTRUCTOR'S NOTES FOR EXPERIENTIAL EXERCISES       

Exercise 1: Do you want to be an entrepreneur?

The purpose of this exercise is three-fold.  First, the exercise forces students to think more deeply about the concept of an ‘entrepreneurial mind-set’ that is discussed in the chapter.  Second, students self-assess how their own characteristics might be useful in an entrepreneurial organization.  Finally, a separate benefit of this exercise is that it requires students to prepare a short presentation for a hypothetical job interview.

Working individually, students are asked to make an inventory of personal attributes to characteristics that are important for entrepreneurial success.  Next, they are asked to compare the relative importance of these attributes, and assess themselves against the list.  

Working in small teams, students are asked to compare their individual lists.  Similar or duplicate items should be consolidated, and a new master list created.  When discussing the exercise in class, it may be useful to ask (a) how similar the lists were from person to person, and (b) did the group review significantly improve the list or not. Students then take the composite list and assess which attributes are the most important, and which are considered the least important.  

There are many different inventories of personal characteristics that are considered relevant to entrepreneurial success.  A paper by Lumpkin and Dess (Academy of Management Review, 1996, 21: 135-172) identified the following five dimensions:

        Autonomy
        Innovativeness
        Risk taking
        Proactiveness
        Competitive aggressiveness

Separately, van Eeden, Louw and Venter (Management Dynamics, 2005, 14(3): 26-43) created this list of characteristics, based on a review of prior studies:

        Goal setting and perseverance
        Human relations ability
        Communication ability
        Competing against self-imposed standards
        Dealing with failure
        Self-confidence
        Belief in self-determination
        Risk taking
        Taking initiative and seeking personal responsibility
        Drive and energy level
        Tolerance for ambiguity and uncertainty
        Thinking ability
        Use of outside resource persons
        Knowledge seeking
        Number sense
        Money sense
        Business knowledge
When discussing this step in the exercise in class, the instructor should ask a couple of teams to post their lists on the board, and the relative importance of each item.  Subsequently, ask the remainder of the class if there are any important omissions, or for different opinions on the importance of the different traits.  The goal of the discussion is not to build an exhaustive, prioritized list.  Rather, the list helps to serve as the basis for discussion of different perspectives.
Next, each team was asked to pick one member who would be applying for a job in an innovative company – Google, Starbucks, and Motorola were listed as examples of such companies in the textbook.  Each team was instructed to create a profile of how their team member would describe themselves during a job interview with one of these firms.  Ask for a couple of student volunteers to give their mock job pitch.  After each presentation, ask the class:
        What did the student do well?
        How could the presentation be changed to make the student more desirable as an employee?

Exercise 2: Global differences in entrepreneurial activity

This assignment requires students to compare entrepreneurial trends, either across countries or within one country over time.   The goals of this exercise are to familiarize students with the Global Entrepreneurship Monitor (www.gemconsortium.org), which is a helpful resource for doing country analysis.  Additionally, the exercise illustrates how innovation and entrepreneurship vary across nations, and over time.  

This assignment differs from others in that teams are given a choice in the specifics of their analysis: they can either do a comparison of two countries, or study trends in a single nation over time.  The instructor may wish to let student teams make this decision themselves, or, alternately, assign half of the teams to each option.  Student assignments for each option are as follows:

Assignment A: Comparison of entrepreneurial activities across countries.

4.        Pick two countries that are located in the same region of the world – i.e., the Americas, Europe, Asia-Pacific, or the Middle East.  
5.        Review the most recent GEM country reports for your two selections.
6.        Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation that identifies the similarities and differences between the two countries.  Include the levels of entrepreneurial activity, infrastructure, and challenges/problems facing both nations.
Assignment B: Comparison of entrepreneurial activities over time.

4.        Select one country that was included in both the 2001 and the most recent GEM surveys.  There were 29 countries included in the 2001 survey.
5.        Review the GEM country reports for both years
6.        Prepare a brief PowerPoint presentation that identifies the similarities and differences within the country over time.  Include the levels of entrepreneurial activity, infrastructure, and challenges/problems.  Overall, is the climate for entrepreneurship improving or worsening?
Teams that select assignment B may have very different perceptions of the stability of entrepreneurial activities, depending on the country they selected.  Some nations, for example, can show a marked change (either improvement or lost ground) in entrepreneurial activity over a five year window.  In contrast, other nations will report very similar profiles across the two time periods.

Prior to debriefing the assignment, it is important for the instructor to review the GEM global report, as well as a sample single country report.  These documents are available from the GEM website.

There are multiple avenues for providing feedback on these assignments.  As with other exercises, the instructor may ask a subset of teams to make presentations based on their PowerPoint files.  An alternate approach is more labor-intensive vis-à-vis the instructor, but has the added benefit of (a) ensuring that students review the work of other teams, and (b) each team receives additional feedback on their PowerPoint report.  Take the following steps if using this approach:

1.        Assign each student as a peer reviewer to another team, with a comparable number of peer reviewers per team.
2.        Post each team’s PowerPoint file on the class Webpage (e.g., Blackboard or WebCT).
3.        Peer reviewers are to evaluate the work of another team.  Based on this review, students should write up a one-page single-spaced memo that includes:
a.        Interesting or unusual findings of the report
b.        Strengths: what the report did well
c.        Weaknesses: how the report could be improved.
To get the greatest utility from these peer reviews, structure them so that items (a) and (b) are each worth 25 percent, and item (c) is worth percent. When giving the assignment, indicate that item (c) will be evaluated based on the provision of specific suggestions for improving the quality of the report.  

—        ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES       

The following questions and exercises can be presented for in-class discussion or assigned as homework.       

Application Discussion Questions
               
1.        During the 1980s and 1990s, the number of acquisitions grew, as did the amount of money available as venture capital. Is there a relationship between the wave of acquisitions and the increase in available venture capital?
2.        Is the term “corporate entrepreneurship” an oxymoron? In other words, can corporations—especially large ones—be innovative?
3.        Ask the students for an example of a product champion supporting an innovation in a corporation. What were the results of the champion’s efforts?
4.        The economies of countries such as Russia and China have historically been operated through centralized bureaucracies. What can be done to infuse such economies with a commitment to corporate entrepreneurship and the innovation resulting from it?
5.        Have the students use the Internet to find an example of two corporate innovations—one brought about through autonomous strategic behavior and one developed through induced strategic behavior. Which innovation seems to hold the most promise for commercial success and why?
6.        Are strategic alliances a way to enhance a firm’s technological capacity, or are they used more commonly to maintain pace with technological developments in a company’s industry? In other words, are strategic alliances a tool of firms that have a technological advantage, or are they a tool of technologically disadvantaged companies?



Ethics Questions

1.        Is it ethical for a company to purchase another firm to gain ownership of its product innovations and innovative capabilities? Why or why not?
2.        Do firms encounter ethical issues when they use internal corporate-venturing processes to produce and manage innovation? If so, what are these issues?
3.        Firms that are partners in a strategic alliance may legitimately seek to gain knowledge from each other. At what point does it become unethical for a firm to gain additional and competitively relevant knowledge from its partner? Is this point different when a firm partners with a domestic firm as opposed to a foreign firm? If so, why?
4.        Small firms often have innovative products. When is it appropriate for a large firm to buy a small firm for its product innovations and new product ideas?


Internet Exercise       
       
The Web has made it both possible and necessary for many traditional businesses to market and sell their goods and services on-line. Consumer goods and services such as banking, clothing, vacations, and grocery items can be ordered through the Internet. Creating new, safe, and reliable methods to access, pay for, and deliver goods and services via the Web has added to the list of innovations and management strategies that corporate entrepreneurs need to explore to be successful. To find out more about entrepreneurship and innovation, explore the following websites:
•        Babson College’s Arthur M. Blank Center for Entrepreneurship at http://www.babson.edu/eship
•        EGOPHER, a site produced by St. Louis University at http://eweb.slu.edu/
•        The Kauffman Foundation’s EntreWorld at http://www.eventuring.org

*e-project: America’s most successful pizza delivery chains, including Domino’s, Pizza Hut, and other regional businesses, have long since relied on phone orders for delivery. How can the Internet’s capabilities be integrated into their business? Weighing the pros and cons of ordering pizza on-line, make a list of ten management concerns and techniques to consider to successfully promote, develop, and run an on-line business in this lucrative market.
您需要登录后才可以回帖 登录 | 注册

本版积分规则

快速回复 返回列表 联系我们

社区首页|美华管理传播网|中国经济管理大学|美华管理人才学校|MBA工商管理专业教学资源库|美华管理咨询|北京管理培训|天津管理培训|上海管理培训|深圳管理培训|浙江管理培训|广东管理培训|新疆管理培训|内蒙古管理培训|青海管理培训|广西管理培训|西藏管理培训|吉林管理培训|沈阳管理培训|辽宁管理培训|河北管理培训|山东管理培训|安徽管理培训|福建管理培训|海南管理培训|贵州管理培训|四川管理培训|湖北管理培训|河南管理培训|安徽管理培训|江西管理培训|深圳管理培训|广州管理培训|珠海管理培训|香港管理培训|免费公益MBA培训|美华管理咨询|中国管理传播网|全国管理培训认证网|MBA职业经理培训|中国管理人才库|经理圈|Archiver|手机版|美华管理人才学校|学校新浪微博V|管理考证|MBA公益课堂|律师声明:知识产权保护声明| |网站地图

黑公网安备 23018302010102号

QQ

GMT+8, 2024-11-22 06:32 , Processed in 0.087262 second(s), 24 queries , Gzip On. ICP备13013142号

Powered by Discuz! Templates yeei! © 2001-2010 Comsenz Inc.

快速回复 返回顶部 返回列表